IBM® Sterling Gentran Gz OS66_Gentran_Basic_User_Guide OS66 Basic User Guide

User Manual: GzOS66_Gentran_Basic_User_Guide user guide pdf - FTP File Search (14/20)

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1118

DownloadIBM® Sterling Gentran Gz OS66_Gentran_Basic_User_Guide OS66 Basic User Guide
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS

User Guide
Release 6.6

2204-650-USER01-0002

This edition applies to the 6.6 Version of IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® and to all
subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page
N-1.
Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS®
© Copyright IBM Corp. 1988, 2011. All Rights Reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP
Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
.

Chapter

Table of Contents
Partner Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM005......... 2-10
Partner Directory....................................................................
EDIM010......... 2-13
Partner Selection Menu............................................................ EDIM007......... 2-17
Header Information Screen...................................................... EDIM026......... 2-22
Interchange Directory Screen................................................... EDIM027......... 2-27
Control Information Screen 1.................................................... EDIM015......... 2-31
Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options............................... EDIM016......... 2-37
Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options............................... EDIM018......... 2-43
Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options....................EDIM017......... 2-48
Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options..............................EDIM012 ........ 2-52
Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options..............................EDIM019......... 2-57
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 1 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM021......... 2-62
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 2 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM022......... 2-67
Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options.............................. EDIM013......... 2-71
Control Information Screen 2—STX Options.............................. EDIM014......... 2-76
Group Directory........................................................................... EDIM020......... 2-81
Group Information Screen
EDIM030......... 2-86
Group Information Screen—BAT Options
EDIM031......... 2-93
Group Information Screen—UNG Options
EDIM032......... 2-98
Group Information Screen—GS Options ................................... EDIM033....... 2-103
Transaction Directory..............................................................
EDIM025....... 2-108
Transaction Information Screen................................................ EDIM040....... 2-113
Transaction Information Screen—ST Options ........................... EDIM043....... 2-120
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 1 ....................................................................................
EDIM042....... 2-124
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 2.....................................................................................
EDIM046....... 2-128
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 3.....................................................................................
EDIM047....... 2-132
Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options........................ EDIM041....... 2-136
Name and Address Screen........................................................ EDIM035....... 2-140
Name and Address Part 2 Screen............................................... EDIM036....... 2-144
User Defined Screen ................................................................ EDIM045....... 2-148
Data Separation Screen............................................................. EDIM050....... 2-152
Error Rejection Screen................................................................ EDIM055....... 2-158
Copy All Records Screen.......................................................... EDIM060....... 2-162
Partner Cross Reference Menu.................................................. EDIM009....... 2-166
Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen............................. EDIM008....... 2-168
Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen............................ EDIM006....... 2-172

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

-i

Trading Partner Relationship Menu............................................. EDIM009....... 2-175
Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen.......................... EDIM023....... 2-177
Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen.......................... EDIM024....... 2-182
Standards Maintenance Menu.................................................... EDIM100........... 3-8
Version Directory..................................................................... EDIM111......... 3-11
Version Screen............................................................................ EDIM110......... 3-14
Version/Transaction Directory................................................... EDIM113......... 3-17
Transaction Directory....................................................... EDIM121/EDIM122 3-21
Transaction Screen..................................................................
EDIM120......... 3-27
Segments Screen........................................................................... EDIM130......... 3-33
Segment Element Screen........................................................... EDIM140......... 3-38
Segment Element.......................................................................... EDIM141......... 3-44
Segment Element Activity Screen................................................ EDIM150......... 3-49
Data Element Definition Screen....................................................EDIM160......... 3-54
Standard Code Menu................................................................. EDIM170......... 3-58
Standard Code Directory........................................................... EDIM171......... 3-60
Standard Code Maintenance Screen............................................ EDIM172......... 3-63
Code Maintenance List Options Screen....................................... EDIM173......... 3-66
Transaction in Use Screen......................................................... EDIM180......... 3-68
Standard Association Screen...................................................... EDIM105......... 3-72
Databank Maintenance Menu.................................................... EDIM250......... 4-24
Interchange Directory Screen................................................... EDIM254......... 4-27
Group Directory......................................................................
EDIM255......... 4-31
Group Directory – Date........................................................... EDIM25A ........ 4-36
Interchange Status Screen............................................................. EDIM251 ........ 4-41
Group Status Screen................................................................
EDIM252......... 4-48
Transaction Status Screen........................................................ EDIM253......... 4-55
Document Directory................................................................
EDIM262......... 4-62
Document Status Screen.......................................................... EDIM263......... 4-66
Change Audit Directory............................................................ EDIM268......... 4-72
Change Audit Status Screen...................................................... EDIM269......... 4-76
Online Log Display Screen...........................................................EDIMOLD ....... 4-81
Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen............................... EDIM240......... 4-86
Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen.................................... EDIM241......... 4-91
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM271......... 4-96
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................ EDIM271....... 4-101
Interchange Display Screen.......................................................... EDIM256....... 4-105
Group Display Screen............................................................... EDIM257....... 4-110
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound...............................EDIM258....... 4-115
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................. EDIM258....... 4-120
Transaction Display Screen...........................................................EDIM259....... 4-125
Segment Display Screen............................................................ EDIM260....... 4-129
Data Element Display Screen...................................................... EDIM261....... 4-133
Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound.................................EDIM265....... 4-137
Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound....................................EDIM265 ...... 4-142
Document Display Screen............................................................ EDIM264....... 4-147
Record Display Screen.............................................................. EDIM266....... 4-151
Field Display Screen.................................................................. EDIM267....... 4-154
Change Audit Status Detail Screen.............................................. EDIM270....... 4-157
Administrative Main Menu........................................................... EDIM210........... 5-7

- ii

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

Security Maintenance Menu..........................................................EDIM200......... 5-10
User ID Directory..................................................................... EDIM203......... 5-12
User ID Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM201......... 5-15
User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products.........................EDIM202......... 5-23
Message Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM211......... 5-25
Message Directory...................................................................... EDIM212......... 5-27
Message Maintenance Screen....................................................... EDIM213......... 5-30
Error Rejection Maintenance Screen........................................... EDIM214......... 5-35
Configuration Directory............................................................ EDIM230......... 5-38
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-40
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-43
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-47
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-50
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-53
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-55
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-58
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-61
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-64
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-66
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-69
Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-72
Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen....................................... EDIM220/EDIM22A 5-74
Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen....................................... EDIM221/EDIM22B 5-78
Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen............................................... EDIM222......... 5-83
Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen....................................... EDIM223/EDIM22D 5-86
Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen....................................... EDIM224/EDIM22E 5-90
Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen....................................... EDIM225/EDIM22F 5-95
Partner Migration Menu............................................................. EDIY100 ......... 5-99
User Selection Screen................................................................ EDIY200 ....... 5-102
User Maintenance Screen............................................................ EDIY500 ....... 5-104
Partner Selection Screen............................................................ EDIY300 ....... 5-107
Relationship Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIY400 ....... 5-110
Data Translation Table Directory Screen..................................... EDIY600 ....... 5-113
Data Table Migration Selection Screen........................................ EDIY610 ....... 5-116
Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen................................... EDIY620 ....... 5-118
Upload Process Maintenance...................................................... EDIM235....... 5-121
Separator Main Menu................................................................ EDIM934....... 5-124
Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen.......................... EDIM935....... 5-126
Priority Options Directory Screen............................................... EDIM936....... 5-133
Priority Options Maintenance Screen.......................................... EDIM937....... 5-136
Change Audit Main Menu.......................................................... EDIM209....... 5-141
Partner Change Audit Directory.................................................. EDIM070....... 5-144
Partner Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM071....... 5-147
Partner Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM072....... 5-152
XREF Change Audit Directory................................................... EDIM074....... 5-156
XREF Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM075....... 5-158
XREF Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM076....... 5-161
PARTREL Change Audit Directory............................................. EDIM077....... 5-163
PARTREL Change Audit Status.................................................. EDIM078....... 5-165
PARTREL Change Audit Detail................................................... EDIM079....... 5-168

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

- iii

Standards Change Audit Directory................................................EDIM181 ...... 5-171
Standards Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM182....... 5-173
Standards Change Audit Detail..................................................... EDIM183....... 5-177
Application Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM560....... 5-180
Application Change Audit Status................................................. EDIM561....... 5-183
Application Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM562....... 5-186
Transaction Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM520....... 5-189
Transaction Change Audit Status................................................ EDIM521....... 5-192
Transaction Change Audit Detail................................................. EDIM522....... 5-195
Code Table Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM587....... 5-198
Code Table Change Audit Status................................................. EDIM588....... 5-201
Code Table Change Audit Detail.................................................. EDIM589....... 5-204
Security Change Audit Directory................................................ EDIM204....... 5-207
Security Change Audit Status....................................................... EDIM205....... 5-209
Security Change Audit Detail
EDIM206....... 5-212
Error Message Change Audit Directory........................................EDIM215....... 5-214
Error Message Change Audit Status............................................. EDIM216....... 5-216
Error Message Change Audit Detail............................................ EDIM217....... 5-219
Configuration Change Audit Directory........................................ EDIM232....... 5-222
Configuration Change Audit Status............................................. EDIM233....... 5-224
Configuration Change Audit Detail.............................................. EDIM234....... 5-227
Global Parameter Change Audit Directory................................... EDIM226....... 5-229
Global Parameter Change Audit Status........................................ EDIM227....... 5-231
Global Parameter Change Audit Detail.........................................EDIM228....... 5-234
Separator Change Audit Directory............................................... EDIM938....... 5-236
Separator Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM939....... 5-239
Separator Change Audit Detail.................................................... EDIM940....... 5-243
Message Center Job Summary................................................... EDIM245....... 5-246
Message Center Job Detail........................................................... EDIM246....... 5-250
Message Center Report Display.................................................. EDIM247....... 5-253
Mapping Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM599......... 6-14
Application Definition Menu........................................................ EDIM550......... 6-16
Application Directory....................................................................EDIM551......... 6-19
Application Data ID Screen......................................................... EDIM552......... 6-23
Copy Application Definition Screen............................................. EDIM557......... 6-28
Application Records Screen......................................................... EDIM553......... 6-31
Application Fields Screen............................................................ EDIM554......... 6-37
Application Partner Reference Screen.......................................... EDIM555......... 6-43
Application Envelope Definition Screen.......................................EDIM558......... 6-47
Transaction Mapping Menu.......................................................... EDIM500......... 6-52
Transaction Mapping Directory.................................................. EDIM512......... 6-55
Transaction Maintenance Screen................................................. EDIM503......... 6-58
Copy Transaction Screen............................................................. EDIM501......... 6-63
Copy Segments From Standard Screen....................................... EDIM502......... 6-66
Segments Screen......................................................................... EDIM504......... 6-70
Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................................EDIM514......... 6-76
Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................................. EDIM511......... 6-83
Extended Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................EDIM513......... 6-89
Extended Element Mapping Outbound Screen..............................EDIM508 ...... 6-100
Build Repeating Data Elements Screen.........................................EDIM517 ...... 6-110

- iv

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

Element Information Screen....................................................... EDIM515.......
Select Codes Screen................................................................. EDIM509.......
Select Application Data Screen.....................................................EDIM510.......
Copy Segments From Transaction Screen.................................... EDIM505.......
Subfield Screen............................................................................. EDIM507.......
Code and Data Translation Menu................................................. EDIM580.......
Table Directory............................................................................. EDIM586.......
Define Translation Table Screen...................................................EDIM581.......
Copy Code or Data Screen......................................................... EDIM582.......
Code Translation Screen................................................................EDIM583 ......
Data Translation By Partner Screen.............................................. EDIM584.......
Data Validation Screen............................................................... EDIM585.......

Chapter 1

6-115
6-119
6-122
6-125
6-129
6-134
6-136
6-139
6-144
6-148
6-152
6-157

Getting Started
Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic ........................................................................ 1-3
How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic ........................................................... 1-4
What is EDI? ............................................................................................................ 1-5
EDI Terms ................................................................................................................ 1-6
System Overview...................................................................................................... 1-7
Databank Maintenance ........................................................................................... 1-12
Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic .......................................................... 1-13
Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics ...................................... 1-15
Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options.................................................................... 1-18
Using Action Codes................................................................................................ 1-24
Getting Help .......................................................................................................... 1-25
Function Keys......................................................................................................... 1-27
Common Keyboard Conventions ........................................................................... 1-28
Basic File Maintenance Procedures........................................................................ 1-29
Jump Codes ............................................................................................................ 1-30

Chapter 2

The Partner Subsystem
Overview .................................................................................................................. 2-1
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 2-3
Partner Maintenance Menu.......................................................... EDIM005......... 2-10
Partner Directory........................................................................ EDIM010......... 2-13
Partner Selection Menu........................................ .................... EDIM007......... 2-17
Header Information Screen........................................................... EDIM026......... 2-22
Interchange Directory Screen....................................................... EDIM027......... 2-27
Control Information Screen 1........................................................EDIM015......... 2-31
Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options................................EDIM016......... 2-37
Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options................................EDIM018......... 2-43
Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options....................EDIM017......... 2-48
Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options............................. EDIM012......... 2-52
Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options............................. EDIM019......... 2-57
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 1 / Syntax Version 4.......................................................... EDIM021......... 2-62
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 2 / Syntax Version 4............................................................. EDIM022......... 2-67
Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options.............................. EDIM013......... 2-71

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

-v

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options.............................. EDIM014......... 2-76
Group Directory....................................................................... EDIM020......... 2-81
Group Information Screen......................................................... EDIM030......... 2-86
Group Information Screen—BAT Options .................................. EDIM031......... 2-93
Group Information Screen—UNG Options ................................. EDIM032......... 2-98
Group Information Screen—GS Options..................................... EDIM033....... 2-103
Transaction Directory................................................................ EDIM025....... 2-108
Transaction Information Screen................................................... EDIM043....... 2-120
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 1............................................................................................ EDIM042....... 2-124
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 2........................................................................................... EDIM046....... 2-128
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 3..............................................................................................EDIM047 ...... 2-132
Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options .........................EDIM041 ...... 2-136
Name and Address Screen.............................................................EDIM035....... 2-140
Name and Address Part 2 Screen.................................................. EDIM036....... 2-144
User Defined Screen ................................................................ EDIM045....... 2-148
Data Separation Screen............................................................. EDIM050....... 2-152
Error Rejection Screen.............................................................. EDIM055....... 2-158
Copy All Records Screen........................................................... EDIM060....... 2-162
Partner Cross Reference Menu......................................................EDIM009....... 2-166
Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen.............................. EDIM008....... 2-168
Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen.............................EDIM006....... 2-172
Trading Partner Relationship Menu.............................................. EDIM009....... 2-175
Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen...........................EDIM023 ...... 2-177
Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen...........................EDIM024 ...... 2-182

Chapter 3

The Standards Subsystem
Overview .................................................................................................................. 3-1
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 3-2
Standards Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM100........... 3-8
Version Directory...................................................................... EDIM111......... 3-11
Version Screen.............................................................................. EDIM110......... 3-14
Version/Transaction Directory......................................................EDIM113......... 3-17
Transaction Directory....................................................... EDIM121/EDIM122 3-21
Transaction Screen........................................................................ EDIM120......... 3-27
Segments Screen........................................................................... EDIM140......... 3-38
Segment Element.......................................................................... EDIM141......... 3-44
Segment Element Activity Screen.................................................EDIM150......... 3-49
Data Element Definition Screen................................................... EDIM160......... 3-54
Standard Code Menu.....................................................................EDIM170......... 3-58
Standard Code Directory............................................................ EDIM171......... 3-60
Standard Code Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM172......... 3-63
Code Maintenance List Options Screen........................................ EDIM173......... 3-66
Transaction in Use Screen.......................................................... EDIM180......... 3-68
Standard Association Screen...................................................... EDIM105......... 3-72

- vi

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter 4

The Databank Subsystem
Overview .................................................................................................................. 4-1
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 4-3
Databank Screens and Functions............................................................................ 4-10
How to Use the Maintenance Functions................................................................. 4-14
Databank Maintenance Menu..................................................... EDIM250......... 4-24
Interchange Directory Screen...................................................... EDIM254......... 4-27
Group Directory....................................................................... EDIM255......... 4-31
Group Directory – Date............................................................... EDIM25A ........ 4-36
Interchange Status Screen............................................................. EDIM251 ........ 4-41
Group Status Screen...................................................................... EDIM252......... 4-48
Transaction Status Screen......................................................... EDIM253......... 4-55
Document Directory.................................................................. EDIM262......... 4-62
Document Status Screen.............................................................. EDIM263......... 4-66
Change Audit Directory............................................................. EDIM268......... 4-72
Change Audit Status Screen...................................................... EDIM269......... 4-76
Online Log Display Screen....................................................... EDIMOLD ....... 4-81
Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen.............................. EDIM240......... 4-86
Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen.................................... EDIM241......... 4-91
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM271......... 4-96
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................ EDIM271....... 4-101
Interchange Display Screen...................................................... EDIM256....... 4-105
Group Display Screen.............................................................. EDIM257....... 4-110
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound.............................. EDIM258....... 4-115
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound ............................... EDIM258....... 4-120
Transaction Display Screen....................................................... EDIM259....... 4-125
Segment Display Screen........................................................... EDIM260....... 4-129
Data Element Display Screen...................................................... EDIM261....... 4-133
Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound.................................EDIM265....... 4-137
Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound................................... EDIM265....... 4-142
Document Display Screen........................................................... EDIM264....... 4-147
Record Display Screen................................................................ EDIM266....... 4-151
Field Display Screen.................................................................. EDIM267....... 4-154
Change Audit Status Detail Screen.............................................. EDIM270....... 4-157

Chapter 5

The Administration Subsystem
Overview .................................................................................................................. 5-1
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 5-4
Administrative Main Menu.......................................................... EDIM210........... 5-7
Security Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM200......... 5-10
User ID Directory..........................................................................EDIM203......... 5-12
User ID Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM201......... 5-15
User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products.........................EDIM202......... 5-23
Message Maintenance Menu....................................................... EDIM211......... 5-25
Message Directory..................................................................... EDIM212......... 5-27
Message Maintenance Screen...................................................... EDIM213......... 5-30
Error Rejection Maintenance Screen.............................................EDIM214......... 5-35
Configuration Directory............................................................... EDIM230......... 5-38
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-40

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

- vii

Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-43
Configuration Maintenance Screen............................................. EDIM231......... 5-47
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-50
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-53
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-55
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-58
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-61
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-64
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-66
Configuration Maintenance Screen...............................................EDIM231......... 5-69
Configuration Maintenance Screen.............................................. EDIM231......... 5-72
Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen....................................... EDIM220/EDIM22A 5-74
Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen ....................................... EDIM221/EDIM22B 5-78
Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen................................................ EDIM222......... 5-83
Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen........................................ EDIM223/EDIM22D 5-86
Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen.................... ................... EDIM224/EDIM22E 5-90
Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen.........................................EDIM225/EDIM22F 5-95
Partner Migration Menu............................................................ EDIY100 ......... 5-99
User Selection Screen............................................................... EDIY200 ....... 5-102
User Maintenance Screen.......................................................... EDIY500 ....... 5-104
Partner Selection Screen............................................................ EDIY300 ....... 5-107
Relationship Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIY400 ....... 5-110
Data Translation Table Directory Screen..................................... EDIY600 ....... 5-113
Data Table Migration Selection Screen........................................ EDIY610 ....... 5-116
Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen................................... EDIY620 ....... 5-118
Upload Process Maintenance...................................................... EDIM235....... 5-121
Separator Main Menu................................................................ EDIM934....... 5-124
Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen.......................... EDIM935....... 5-126
Priority Options Directory Screen............................................... EDIM936....... 5-133
Priority Options Maintenance Screen........................................... EDIM937....... 5-136
Change Audit Main Menu........................................................... EDIM209....... 5-141
Partner Change Audit Directory....................................................EDIM070....... 5-144
Partner Change Audit Status....................................................... EDIM071....... 5-147
Partner Change Audit Detail....................................................... EDIM072....... 5-152
XREF Change Audit Directory..................................................... EDIM074....... 5-156
XREF Change Audit Status........................................................ EDIM075....... 5-158
XREF Change Audit Detail......................................................... EDIM076....... 5-161
PARTREL Change Audit Directory............................................. EDIM077....... 5-163
PARTREL Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM078....... 5-165
PARTREL Change Audit Detail................................................... EDIM079....... 5-168
Standards Change Audit Directory............................................... EDIM181....... 5-171
Standards Change Audit Status..................................................... EDIM182....... 5-173
Standards Change Audit Detail.................................................... EDIM183....... 5-177
Application Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM560....... 5-180
Application Change Audit Status..................................................EDIM561....... 5-183
Application Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM562....... 5-186
Transaction Change Audit Directory............................................ EDIM520....... 5-189
Transaction Change Audit Status..................................................EDIM521....... 5-192
Transaction Change Audit Detail..................................................EDIM522....... 5-195
Code Table Change Audit Directory.............................................EDIM587....... 5-198

- viii

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

Code Table Change Audit Status................................................ EDIM588.......
Code Table Change Audit Detail................................................. EDIM589.......
Security Change Audit Directory................................................ EDIM204.......
Security Change Audit Status..................................................... EDIM205.......
Security Change Audit Detail....................................................... EDIM206.......
Error Message Change Audit Directory........................................EDIM215.......
Error Message Change Audit Status..............................................EDIM216 ......
Error Message Change Audit Detail..............................................EDIM217 ......
Configuration Change Audit Directory.........................................EDIM232.......
Configuration Change Audit Status.............................................. EDIM233.......
Configuration Change Audit Detail.............................................. EDIM234.......
Global Parameter Change Audit Directory................................... EDIM226.......
Global Parameter Change Audit Status.........................................EDIM227.......
Global Parameter Change Audit Detail.........................................EDIM228.......
Separator Change Audit Directory.............................................. EDIM938.......
Separator Change Audit Status................................................... EDIM939.......
Separator Change Audit Detail..................................................... EDIM940.......
Message Center Job Summary.................................................... EDIM245.......
Message Center Job Detail........................................................... EDIM246.......
Message Center Report Display.................................................. EDIM247.......

Chapter 6

5-201
5-204
5-207
5-209
5-212
5-214
5-216
5-219
5-222
5-224
5-227
5-229
5-231
5-234
5-236
5-239
5-243
5-246
5-250
5-253

The Mapping Subsystem
Overview .................................................................................................................. 6-1
Before You Begin..................................................................................................... 6-2
Mapping Maintenance Menu...................................................... EDIM599......... 6-14
Application Definition Menu....................................................... EDIM550......... 6-16
Application Directory....................................................................EDIM551......... 6-19
Application Data ID Screen.......................................................... EDIM552......... 6-23
Copy Application Definition Screen............................................. EDIM557......... 6-28
Application Records Screen.......................................................... EDIM553......... 6-31
Application Fields Screen............................................................. EDIM554......... 6-37
Application Partner Reference Screen.......................................... EDIM555......... 6-43
Application Envelope Definition Screen.......................................EDIM558......... 6-47
Transaction Mapping Menu......................................................... EDIM500......... 6-52
Transaction Mapping Directory.................................................. EDIM512......... 6-55
Transaction Maintenance Screen................................................ EDIM503......... 6-58
Copy Transaction Screen.............................................................. EDIM501......... 6-63
Copy Segments From Standard Screen........................................ EDIM502......... 6-66
Segments Screen....................................................................... EDIM504......... 6-70
Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................................EDIM514......... 6-76
Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................................. EDIM511......... 6-83
Extended Element Mapping Inbound Screen................................EDIM513......... 6-89
Extended Element Mapping Outbound Screen............................. EDIM508....... 6-100
Build Repeating Data Elements Screen........................................ EDIM517....... 6-110
Element Information Screen...................................................... EDIM515....... 6-115
Select Codes Screen................................................................. EDIM509....... 6-119
Select Application Data Screen.................................................... EDIM510....... 6-122
Copy Segments From Transaction Screen.................................... EDIM505....... 6-125
Subfield Screen......................................................................... EDIM507....... 6-129

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

- ix

Code and Data Translation Menu..................................................EDIM580.......
Table Directory......................................................................... EDIM586.......
Define Translation Table Screen................................................. EDIM581.......
Copy Code or Data Screen............................................................ EDIM582.......
Code Translation Screen............................................................ EDIM583.......
Data Translation By Partner Screen.............................................. EDIM584.......
Data Validation Screen..................................................................EDIM585.......

Chapter 7

6-134
6-136
6-139
6-144
6-148
6-152
6-157

System Features: Tips and Techniques
Overview .................................................................................................................. 7-1
Associated Data – ASC X12 102 Transactions........................................................ 7-4
Associated Data – EDIFACT Packages ................................................................. 7-11
Batch Separator ...................................................................................................... 7-25
Binary Data – X12 ................................................................................................. 7-36
Change Audit in Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................ 7-44
Configuring JCL Submission and User Security.................................................... 7-85
Inbound Application Constant Records.................................................................. 7-90
Interchange Version................................................................................................ 7-94
Multiple Envelope IDs ......................................................................................... 7-100
Repeating Data Elements ..................................................................................... 7-107
Element Mapping Inbound screen example: ........................................................ 7-115
Standards Updates ................................................................................................ 7-116
Underscore Substitution Characters ..................................................................... 7-137
Unload/Upload Facility ........................................................................................ 7-159
Using the User Security Facility........................................................................... 7-171

Appendix A Jump Codes
Jump Codes By Subsystem ..................................................................................... A-1
Jump Codes By Screen Name ............................................................................... A-10

Notices
Trademarks .............................................................................................................. N-3

Glossary
Definition of Terms ................................................................................................. G-1
Reserved Word Constants ..................................................................................... G-11
Application Data Types......................................................................................... G-17
EDI Data Types ..................................................................................................... G-20

Index

-x

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for zOS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter

1

Getting Started

This chapter introduces IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 and provides
descriptions of the system features and benefits, system architecture, and operation. This chapter
contains the following topics:

Topic

Page

Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................................... 1-3
How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic .................................................................... 1-4
What is EDI?......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Manual Data Exchange.............................................................................................. 1-5
Electronic Data Interchange ...................................................................................... 1-6
EDI Terms ............................................................................................................................. 1-6
System Overview................................................................................................................... 1-7
Inbound Processing ................................................................................................... 1-8
Outbound Processing............................................................................................... 1-10
Databank Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 1-12
Why Use Databanking?........................................................................................... 1-12
Functions of Databanking........................................................................................ 1-12
Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic ................................................................... 1-13
Where Sterling Gentran:Basic Fits Into Your Computer Environment................... 1-13
Files Used by Sterling Gentran:Basic...................................................................... 1-14
Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics ............................................... 1-15
Logging on to Sterling Gentran:Basic ..................................................................... 1-15
Changing Your Password ........................................................................................ 1-17
Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options ............................................................................. 1-18
Sterling Gentran:Basic Menus................................................................................. 1-21
Sterling Gentran:Basic Screens ............................................................................... 1-21
Screen Component Descriptions ............................................................................. 1-22
Using Action Codes............................................................................................................. 1-24
Getting Help ........................................................................................................................ 1-25
Accessing Online Field-Level Help ........................................................................ 1-25
Accessing Online Screen-Level Help...................................................................... 1-26
Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 1-27

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1-1

Getting Started
Common Keyboard Conventions ...................................................................................... 1-28
Basic File Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................. 1-29
Add .......................................................................................................................... 1-29
Update...................................................................................................................... 1-29
Delete....................................................................................................................... 1-29
Jump Codes ......................................................................................................................... 1-30
How to Jump Between Screens ............................................................................... 1-30
Types of Jump Codes............................................................................................... 1-31
User-defined Jump Code Table ............................................................................... 1-32
Jump Code Guidelines............................................................................................. 1-32

1-2

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic

Getting Started

Overview of Sterling Gentran:Basic
IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 provides the flexibility, efficiency, and
thoroughness required to meet the most demanding EDI requirements.
Sterling Gentran:Basic facilitates EDI in several ways, including:
•

Translates data between your application and the standard format required (such
as, ASC X12, UCS, WINS, EDIA (TDCC), EDIFACT, and ANA
TRADACOMS).

•

Compliance checks data by table-driven syntax-checking programs.

•

Allows you to set a multitude of options based on your trading partner.

•

Delivers an easily-managed system.

•

Provides control for audit trails, security, and error reporting.

•

Provides a powerful tool for mapping via the Mapping Maintenance subsystem.

Specifically, Sterling Gentran:Basic offers the following features:
All EDI Transactions Handled — Tables that define all EDI transactions, segments, and
elements. These include ASC X12 transactions as well as the Air, Ocean, Motor, and Rail
standards of EDIA (TDCC), UCS, WINS, TRADACOMS, and EDIFACT.
Multiple Standards Versions — For meeting the requirements of trading partners, enables the use
of multiple standards versions.
Standards Translated to Readily-used Formats — Transactions received by your computer in
ASC X12 or other standard formats are variable-length, variable-position logical segments.
Sterling Gentran:Basic produces fixed-length output that is easy to use.
Partner-specific Decisions — A large number of decisions may vary by partner. For example, the
transactions and functional groups sent may be controlled by partner.
Databanking Functions — Sterling Gentran:Basic provides auditing capabilities on all incoming
and outgoing transactions, groups, and interchanges.
Suspended Data is Easily Reprocessed — Data that cannot be initially interpreted is put into a
Suspense file for later user action.
Envelope Segment Generation — Specify the partner envelope information one time. Use this
information to subsequently generate envelopes. Sterling Gentran:Basic automatically generates
the appropriate interchange, functional group, and transaction envelope segments.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1-3

Getting Started

How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic

How to Learn About Sterling Gentran:Basic
This chapter provides instruction to assist you in the operation of the online portion of Sterling
Gentran:Basic. Use the Sterling Gentran:Basic Reference Library, provided with your purchase of
Sterling Gentran:Basic, to perform the following tasks:
•

Create and maintain trading partner records

•

Perform databanking of translations

•

Map application data to standard formats for inbound and outbound data

•

View and maintain standards formats

•

Maintain Sterling Gentran:Basic system security

•

View and maintain system configuration, error messages, and global parameters

This guide, the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide, provides
reference information related to the online portion of the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, which is
organized as follows:
•

This chapter provides a high-level overview of the Sterling Gentran:Basic system.
You will learn about the flow of documents in and out of the system, how they are
translated, and how they are managed.

•

This chapter also provides detailed information about the operation of the online
system in general: the basics of how to use the Sterling Gentran:Basic online
system.

•

The following chapters in this guide correspond to each online subsystem of
Sterling Gentran:Basic and introduce you to the specific tasks you can perform
with each particular feature. A complete description of all Sterling Gentran:Basic
screens, including the screen fields, are detailed in the appropriate chapters.

•

Finally, the appendix of this guide contains an updated reference listing of jump
codes. You will learn more about jump codes later in this chapter.

In addition to the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide, the Sterling
Gentran:Basic documentation set contains the following guides:

1-4

•

IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide
Use the Installation Guide to help you install the Sterling Gentran:Basic system.

•

IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide
Use this guide as a reference of system messages you might encounter while using
the Sterling Gentran:Basic system.

•

IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference
Guide
Use this guide to obtain specific technical and program operational information
about inbound and outbound processing, programs, files, and more.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

What is EDI?

Getting Started

What is EDI?
EDI is electronic data interchange. Simply, EDI is a method for communicating data at high rates
of speed – from computer to computer. The following descriptions explain the basic requirements
to accomplish communication.
•

Standards
Standards are extremely detailed formats for communicating specific types of
information. Standards are created and agreed upon by various industries and
countries. Standards are not a language. They are a specification for how data is to
be arranged. By using public standards, individual companies can use any
computer system and application and still communicate without confusion.

•

Translation
Translation is the process of taking data that is prepared by your application
programs and placing the data into a public standard, or the reverse process. You
set up translations between application file formats and public standards by a
process called mapping. Sterling Gentran:Basic is the software program that
translates the data to and from standards.

•

Trading Partners
Trading partners are the parties with whom you agree to exchange data, such as
your vendors or suppliers.

To explain how EDI works, we first describe how data is exchanged manually. Then, we describe
how the same data can be electronically exchanged.

Manual Data Exchange
The following example shows how data might be manually exchanged. Notice how many steps it
can take to complete the exchange for purchasing only one pocket protector.
1.

The buyer begins preparing a purchase order (P.O.) form for the pocket protector.

2.

The buyer researches to determine how the manufacturer requires submission of P.O.s for
pocket protectors.

3.

After gathering the data, the buyer translates the order to meet the manufacturer's
requirements.

4.

The buyer incorporates the translated data into the P.O. Then, the buyer mails the P.O.
form to the manufacturer.

5.

After progressing through a mail-sorting process, the P.O. is delivered to the manufacturer.

6.

The manufacturer routes the P.O. for the pocket protector to the proper department(s) for
processing (such as billing, picking, and shipping).

The entire process repeats in reverse when the manufacturer responds with an invoice. With all
conditions being ideal and no errors occurring, the entire exchange can take up to eight business
days. If there are any problems, corrections, or incorrect translations, the process may stretch into
weeks.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1-5

Getting Started

EDI Terms

Electronic Data Interchange
The following example shows how data might be electronically exchanged. Most of the steps
necessary to purchase one pocket protector automatically occur; thus, reducing processing time
and data-entry errors.
1.

2.

The buyer enters the order for one pocket protector into a computer terminal and an
in-house purchasing system. After initiating the order, the following tasks occur behindthe-scenes:
a.

The in-house application passes the P.O. to Sterling Gentran:Basic.

b.

Sterling Gentran:Basic maps the in-house application format to the appropriate
public standards format.

c.

The standard is verified and transmission envelopes are generated.

d.

An audit trail is created for tracking the document and acknowledgments.

e.

Sterling Gentran:Basic passes the standardized document to the buyer’s
communications system and the document is transmitted to the manufacturer.

The manufacturer receives the document and transmits an acknowledgment of its receipt,
and then processes it.

Even in a reverse situation when the manufacturer sends the buyer an invoice and the buyer
responds with an acknowledgment, a reduction in processing time occurs. In addition, a number of
verifications, confirmations, and detailed records result for both the buyer and the manufacturer.

EDI Terms
The following list provides definitions for basic EDI terms used frequently throughout this guide.

1-6

Application

An in-house program that processes data. Your application file format
is the way your business prefers to view and process data.

Document

One complete piece of data. For example, one purchase order.

Transaction Set

When you translate from your application file format to a public
standard, you are translating your document to a transaction set.

Envelope

An electronic transmission header and trailer that can surround one or
more transaction sets and/or types. For example, one envelope could
contain three purchase orders, four invoices, and six
acknowledgments.

Segment

A single line of a transaction set; for example, the Bill To segment.

Data Element

The individual parts of a segment; for example, Bill To City or Bill To
Postal Code).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

System Overview

Getting Started

System Overview
Sterling Gentran:Basic is a data translation and management system. It allows you to easily
communicate with your trading partners (those with whom you do business) through electronic
data interchange — EDI. To accomplish this action, you need to provide, through
communications, all your documents in a public standard, and likewise be prepared to interpret
documents sent to you in a defined public standard.
This process might be relatively simple if you deal with only one standard and one trading partner.
However, each industry has specific requirements that must be met, and every trading partner has
different requirements for doing business. These requirements mean that you must be able to
communicate in the appropriate standard, as well as the appropriate version of the standards, for
each trading partner. The task is further complicated by the need to acknowledge the receipt of
documents and monitor data for errors.
The normal operation of Sterling Gentran:Basic can be divided into two types of processing:
inbound processing and outbound processing.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1-7

Getting Started

System Overview

Inbound Processing
When your trading partner sends you EDI documents, they are in the format of a public standard.
When your computer system receives an EDI document, Sterling Gentran:Basic goes to work.
Figure 1.1, on the next page, illustrates a high-level view of inbound processing.
EDI Input
File

Inbound
Editor

Intermediate
File

Data Split

Inbound
Mapper

Application
File

User Application

Figure 1.1 Inbound Translation Processing

1-8

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

System Overview

Getting Started

The following steps outline inbound processing from the receipt of transaction sets from a trading
partner to your application file format:
1.

Your trading partner sends you documents in a public standard that you have mutually
agreed upon. You will probably receive these files via telecommunications.

2.

The documents are stored in an EDI input file.

3.

The EDI input file is passed to the inbound Editor. The Editor also uses the following files:
File

Contents of File

Table File

Public standards

Error Message File

Sterling Gentran:Basic error messages

Databanking File

Records of inbound and outbound
activity

Global Parameters File

Overall system operating rules

Partner Profile

Partner-specific operating rules

If the documents are wrapped, they are unwrapped at this point. Unwrapping means each
new segment is aligned to the start of a new record.
The inbound Editor uses the partner profile information for this trading partner to know
what to do (e.g., data separation and error rejection) and how to respond to the inbound
documents (e.g., acknowledgments generated). The Editor checks the EDI data to ensure
that it complies with the standard. If it doesn’t, the Editor creates an error report, and
possibly marks the data, or part of it, for rejection.
4.

The edited data is passed to an Intermediate file. The Databanking file is updated to record
receipt of documents and acknowledgements of previous documents that you transmitted.

5.

The Intermediate file is passed to the Inbound Split program. This program separates the
inbound data according to your criteria and rejects data that does not comply with
standards (as previously marked by the inbound Editor).

6.

The separated data is translated to your application file format, using the maps you have
created in the online Mapping subsystem.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1-9

Getting Started

System Overview

Outbound Processing
Outbound processing prepares your application output data for transmission to your trading
partners. Like inbound processing, outbound processing translates your application data to the
chosen standard and checks all data to ensure compliance with the selected public standard.
Figure 1.2 illustrates a high-level view of outbound processing.

User Application
Application
File

Outbound
Mapper

EDI Intermediate
File

Envelope
Generator
(Optional)

Outbound
Editor

Data
Split

Figure 1.2 Outbound Translation Processing

1 - 10

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

System Overview

Getting Started

These steps outline outbound processing from your application file format to transaction sets for
your trading partner.
1.

The system takes the data from your application output file. Using the maps you created,
Sterling Gentran:Basic translates this data to a public standard.

2.

The system generates the control envelopes necessary for transmitting the data.

3.

The Intermediate file is passed to the outbound Editor. The Editor also uses the following
files:
File

Contents of File

Table File

Public standards

Error Message File

Sterling Gentran:Basic error messages

Databanking File

Records of inbound and outbound
activity

Global Parameters File

Overall system operating rules

Partner Profile

Partner-specific operating rules

Along with this intermediate file, functional acknowledgments created by the inbound
Editor are input for compliance checking and audit updating. The outbound Editor uses
the partner profile information for this trading partner as instructions (such as, standards,
data separation, or error rejection). The Editor ensures that the document complies to the
standard. If it does not comply, the Editor creates an error report and may mark the data for
rejection.
4.

The Databanking file is updated to record transmission of functional acknowledgments
and outbound documents.
After the outbound data has been translated to standard format, it must continue on toward
transmission to the trading partner.

5.

The standard format file is passed to the Outbound Split program. This program divides
the outbound data according to your criteria and rejects data that does not comply with
standards (as previously marked by the outbound Editor).

6.

The separated data is now ready for transmission to your trading partner.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 11

Getting Started

Databank Maintenance

Databank Maintenance
Databank Maintenance provides the online ability to directly control and view application data and
EDI data processed by Sterling Gentran:Basic. Change Audit functions provide complete details of
all online changes made by users to databank data. The Online Log display is also available within
the Databank subsystem for viewing system status and exceptions.

Why Use Databanking?
Benefits derived from using databanking include:
•

Improved data control

•

Reduced number of re-transmissions

•

Improved response to trading partners requirements

Functions of Databanking
Databanking functions fall into four general categories:
•

EDI data-related control and inquiry functions

•

Application document-related control and inquiry functions

•

Change Audit-related inquiry functions

•

Online Log display from which you can monitor system status and exceptions

The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank facility takes advantage of the proven functions already in
the Sterling Gentran:Basic family of products, while adding functionality that provides flexible
control of documents as they pass through the system. The Databank Facility option, if
implemented, is an integral part of your Sterling Gentran:Basic system.
Note: Using the Databank facility is optional.

1 - 12

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic

Getting Started

Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic
As you are getting ready to install Sterling Gentran:Basic, put together a project team that
understands all the components of the system and how it works in your operation. You will install
Sterling Gentran:Basic and ensure that it is running according to design. We can provide
consultants to train your staff in the use of the parameters to manage the activities of the system.
See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for specific
details on arranging the Sterling Gentran:Basic libraries.
Your responsibilities for installing Sterling Gentran:Basic include the following tasks:
•

Initial loading and testing of the system

•

Daily operation/running of the system, including job control language (JCL)

•

Understanding and setting up a few system parameters

•

Getting data to and from other EDI partners (This action is usually accomplished
with data communications.)

•

Creating and maintaining the maps that translate data from your application file
format to the public standards used in communicating with your trading partners,
and the reverse

•

Defining where the system files reside in your environment

Where Sterling Gentran:Basic Fits Into Your Computer Environment
Sterling Gentran:Basic is designed to be the user interface between your application systems and
your EDI trading partners. The system takes the application files you have defined and translates
them to standard formats, validates them, and prepares them for transmission. The system expects
incoming data from your trading partner to be in a specified public standard that it verifies and
translates to your application file format.
To complete this process, Sterling Gentran:Basic expects incoming data files to have been created
from another source and deposited on your computer. The typical method used to perform this task
is data communication, such as standard RJE (remote job entry), using any acceptable data
communication protocol. However, RJE is not a requirement. Tape transfer of data between
machines (or any other mechanism) for depositing the incoming data on your computer is
acceptable. Sterling Gentran:Basic is not sensitive to the way data is deposited on your computer.
Getting the data to the computer is the responsibility of you and your EDI partners.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 13

Getting Started

Getting Started with Sterling Gentran:Basic

Files Used by Sterling Gentran:Basic
As with any computer system, there are certain types of files required for system operation.
Sterling Gentran:Basic supplies the programs and job control/command language to run the
programs in the suggested processing order. You may tailor the job control/command language to
fit your company’s standards of operation.
These files are included:
File

Description

Partner Profile

Contains detailed information about your trading partner.

Databanking File
(optional)

Provides tracking of Sterling Gentran:Basic processing actions
by storing directory data for outbound application, outbound
EDI, inbound EDI, and/or inbound application processes.

Tables File

Contains all the standards for data translation.

Mapping File

Contains definitions of your application file formats, the
transaction tables, and the transaction maps necessary to
translate your data to and from public standards.

Security File

Contains Sterling Gentran:Basic system security information
in which all User IDs and passwords are encrypted.

Configuration
File

Contains system level information that applies to all functions
of processing.

Sterling Gentran:Basic also supplies an Error Message file that stores a list of possible error
messages. IBM® Sterling Gentran® enables you to customize these error messages to make them
more specific to the needs of your environment.
Caution:

Changes to the actual error message numbers
could result in generating misleading
information as data passes through the Editors.

Global parameters enable you to direct the operation of the system when you want to take
advantage of the available Sterling Gentran features. To run the default mode for all variable
features, no global parameters are necessary. You can modify the global parameters online or
through the job control/command language.
The other files Sterling Gentran uses are either the EDI input file it expects or the EDI output files
it creates.

1 - 14

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics

Getting Started

Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics
This section defines the basics of operating the Sterling Gentran:Basic online system. The design
of the online system allows easy access and maintenance of the required information for smooth
communication using EDI. Although there are several system features that have specific
commands and uses, the majority of the system can be operated using a few basic commands.

Logging on to Sterling Gentran:Basic
Sterling Gentran:Basic uses a security system that limits access through the use of User IDs and
passwords. Sterling Gentran:Basic security controls who can use the online system and what
features they may access.
See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for specific information about security.
1.

See your system administrator to receive a Logon ID and password to start the online
Sterling Gentran:Basic system. You also need information on how to access CICS.
The Sterling Gentran:Basic User ID is an identifier, most likely your initials or name. This
ID enables the system to recognize you, determines which features you have access to, and
tracks file changes. The password is a word, including letters and numbers, that prevents
others from logging on to the system using your ID (only you and the system administrator
should know your password). If someone else uses your User ID and password, any
changes that a user makes in a Sterling Gentran:Basic file are attributed to you.
The system administrator informs you about how to use your company’s specific terminal
hardware and operating system. The administrator also shows you how to start Sterling
Gentran:Basic. Typically, you start Sterling Gentran:Basic from a menu, but you can also
start Sterling Gentran:Basic by entering a specific command.

2.

Sign on to CICS.

3.

Start Sterling Gentran:Basic as instructed by your system administrator.
The Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen is displayed with the proprietary trade/secret
notice.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 15

Getting Started

Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics

EDIM000

06/01/2011
12:00:00
IBM® Sterling Gentran® for z/OS®

System Image: EDI
Databank Config: FFFF
Sterling Gentran:Control
6.6.00
Sterling Gentran:Plus
6.6.00
Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-Trck 6.6.00

User ID:

Program Image: EDI
Sterling Gentran:Realtime
Sterling Gentran:Basic
Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint-Excp
Sterling Gentran:Structure

6.6.00
6.6.00
6.6.00
6.6.00

Password:
New Password:

Licensed Materials - Property of IBM
© Copyright IBM Corp. (1988, 2011) All Rights Reserved
IBM and the IBM logo are Trademarks of International Business Machines

Enter

PF3=Exit

The information on the Logon screen indicates the Sterling Gentran:Basic system
configuration and the product versions that have been installed.
The following three fields are standard for all users:
•

SYSTEM IMAGE: SIM
Where SIM is the user-defined system image associated with the Sterling
Gentran:Basic system. The system image is determined by the CICS Transaction
ID entered to access Sterling Gentran:Basic.

•

PROGRAM IMAGE: PIM
Where PIM is the user-defined program image associated with the Sterling
Gentran:Basic system. The program image is retrieved from Record Type 0 of the
Configuration file (EDICFG).
See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for more information about
online configuration.

•

DBK CONFIG: cccc
Each c in the field represents one of the four Databank types. Databank valid
values include F for Full, D for Directory, and N for No Databank. The order of
representation is:
•
•
•
•

1 - 16

Outbound Application Databank
Outbound EDI Databank
Inbound EDI Databank
Inbound Application Databank

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Sterling Gentran:Basic Online System Operation Basics

Getting Started

For example, if the value in this field is DDFN, your Sterling Gentran:Basic
Databanking system has been configured as the following:
•
•
•
•

Outbound Application Databank= Directory
Outbound EDI Databank
= Directory
Inbound EDI Databank
= Full
Inbound Application Databank = None

Dbk Config is retrieved from Record Type 2 of the Configuration file (EDICFG).
4.

Type your assigned ID in the User ID field and press Tab to move the insertion point to
the Password field.
Note: If you do not remember your password, see your system
administrator.

5.

Type your password. Notice that the password that you are typing does not appear on the
screen. Press Enter to display the Sterling Gentran Main Menu.
Note: We recommend that you keep your password stored in a
secure location to ensure that unauthorized users do not
access the system.

Changing Your Password
For security purposes, you should change your password periodically.
Perform the following steps to change your password.
1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen, type your existing User ID and password.
Then, press Tab instead of Enter to move the insertion point to the New Password field.
Note: The minimum length for the new password is based on
your installation configuration.

2.

Because characters do not appear on the screen as you are typing, cautiously type a new
password and press Enter. The screen displays a confirmation message:
TO UPDATE PASSWORD PRESS ENTER OR F12 TO CANCEL

3.

Press Enter to update the system with your new password.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 17

Getting Started

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options
The Sterling Gentran Main Menu (shown below) provides direct access to the primary functions of
the Sterling Gentran:Basic product. Your ability to access a menu option depends on whether your
logon ID has been granted access. If you are not authorized to use a feature, its corresponding
menu option appears dimmed, and (N/A) displays to the right of the option.
EDIM001 0.0_______
EDI/EDI

GENTRAN MAIN MENU

XXX
XXXXXXXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
__

Enter PF1=Help

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Partner Maintenance Menu
Standards Maintenance Menu
Databank Maintenance Menu
Administrative Maintenance
Mapping Maintenance Menu

6.
7.
8.
9.

Sterling
Sterling
Sterling
Sterling

Gentran:Plus Main Menu
Gentran:Control Main Menu
Gentran:Realtime Main Menu
Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu

(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

1 - 18

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

Getting Started

The following list contains short descriptions of the options available from the Sterling Gentran
Main Menu.
Option

Description

Partner Maintenance Menu

Enables you to easily enter or change information about
each of your trading partners.

Standards Maintenance Menu

Enables you to view and maintain EDI Standards files.

Databank Maintenance Menu

Enables you to directly control and view application data
and EDI data that is processed by Sterling
Gentran:Basic.

Administrative Maintenance Menu

Enables you to directly control and view security,
configuration, message handling, and global (system)
settings.

Mapping Maintenance Menu

Enables you to translate your internal application
formats for EDI standard formats for the documents you
want to send (outbound mapping) and to translate the
EDI standard format to application formats for
documents that you receive (inbound mapping).

Sterling Gentran:Plus

Manages your communications data through automated
inbound and outbound communications processes.

Sterling Gentran:Control

Enables you to integrate your applications and
communications with Sterling Gentran:Basic functions
in an event-driven EDI system.

Sterling Gentran:Realtime

Enables you to manage processing online in a real-time
environment.

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint

Enables you to monitor, control, and manage your EDI
environment.

Note: IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS®, IBM®
Sterling Gentran:Control® for z/OS®, IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Realtime® for z/OS®, and IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/OS® are optional add-on
products to Sterling Gentran:Basic.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 19

Partner
Maintenance

1 - 20
Security
Maintenance

Standards
Maintenance

Databank
Maintenance

Message
Maintenance

Administrative
Administrative
Maintenance
Maintenance

Mapping
Maintenance

Configuration
Maintenance

Sterling
Gentran:Viewpoint

Partner Conversion
(optional)

Global Parameter
Maintenance

Sterling
Gentran:Realtime

Sterling
Gentran:Control

Sterling
Gentran:Plus

Sterling Gentran
Main Menu

Upload Process
Maintenance

Getting Started
Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

The Sterling Gentran:Basic high-level navigation, as shown in Figure 1.3, is outlined on the
Sterling Gentran Main Menu.

Figure 1.3 Sterling Gentran:Basic High-Level Navigation

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

Getting Started

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menus
After you have logged on to the system, the Sterling Gentran Main Menu is displayed.
EDIM001 0.0_______
EDI/EDI

GENTRAN MAIN MENU

XXX
XXXXXXXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
__

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Partner Maintenance Menu
Standards Maintenance Menu
Databank Maintenance Menu
Administrative Maintenance
Mapping Maintenance Menu

6.
7.
8.
9.

Sterling
Sterling
Sterling
Sterling

Enter PF1=Help

Gentran:Plus Main Menu
Gentran:Control Main Menu
Gentran:Realtime Main Menu
Gentran:Viewpoint Main Menu

(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)
(N/A)

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

All Sterling Gentran:Basic menus have the same characteristics and operate in the same manner.
The menu displays a list of numbered options. The option can be either another menu or a screen
that enables you to perform a system task.
To select an option, type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to choose and
press Enter.

Sterling Gentran:Basic Screens
All Sterling Gentran:Basic screens include the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Screen name
Jump code
Screen title
User initials
Date and time
Screen fields
Message line
Function key(s)
Online help

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 21

Getting Started

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

Some screens, called multi-record screens, also contain an action bar and an Action Code field
(abbreviated to “the A field”). The following screen is an example of a multi-record screen; thus, it
contains the action bar and the A field.
Screen Name

Jump Code
Action Bar

Screen Title
Screen Fields

Date and Time

User Initials
Add Delete Update Select
EDIM553 5.1.3_____

APPLICATION RECORDS

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Application Data ID..: __________
Send or Receive..: _
Description..........:
Start Rec Type.......: __________
Area....: _
Seq: ___
A Seq
Rec
Area Lp
Max
Rec Mn Wr Description
HL
User
No
Type
ID
Use
Len Cd Fl
Level Exit
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______
_ ___ __________ _ ____ _____ _____ _ _ __________________________ __ _______

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Action Code
Field

PF3=Exit PF4=Data Id

Function Key

PF5=Fields

Message Line

Screen Component Descriptions
Screen Name
This is the technical name for the screen. Each screen begins with the prefix EDIM, followed by a
three-digit identifier.
Jump Code
The jump code is located in the upper left corner of each screen, to the right of the screen name.
The jump code is displayed automatically for each new menu or screen that is displayed. You can
press Home to move the insertion point to the Jump Code field, type the jump code of another
screen you want to display, and then press Enter to jump to that screen.
See “Jump Codes” later in this chapter for further information on how to use jump codes.
Screen Title
This is the textual identifier of the screen, centered at the top of each screen.

1 - 22

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Sterling Gentran:Basic Menu Options

Getting Started

User Initials
This displays the user’s initials.
Date and Time
This shows the date and time the screen is displayed.
Screen Fields
These fields contain data specific to each screen. Some fields require you to enter information;
others are display-only. Screen fields are located between the screen title and the message line.
Message Line
This line displays Sterling Gentran messages. These messages inform you that an error has
occurred, verify that a function was performed, or supply you with additional information. The
message line is located above the function keys.
Function Keys
Function keys include both standard commands that are common throughout the Sterling Gentran
system, as well as commands that are specific to the current screen. The function key line varies
from screen to screen; only the function keys that are valid for the current screen are displayed.
You will see only function keys for commands that you are allowed to perform. This is maintained
under the Security Maintenance Menu. Each valid program function key and the function it
executes are displayed at the bottom of each screen.
Where function keys are located on your keyboard depends on your keyboard model. In addition,
some keyboards do not have dedicated function keys, and instead require you to press a
combination of keys to perform a function key function.
See your system administrator for information about your hardware configuration and function
key usage.
Action Bar
The action bar is the top line of multi-record screens, such as directory screens. The action bar
displays available actions that you can perform for the current screen. Single-record screens
typically use PF keys to perform desired functions.
Action Code Field
The Action Code field (abbreviated to the A field) is the left-most column of each line item on
multi-record screens. An action code is the first letter of any action listed in the action bar.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 23

Getting Started

Using Action Codes

Using Action Codes
Use the following procedure to perform an action:
1.

In the A field next to the item for which you want to perform an action, type the first letter
of an action specified on the Action Bar. For example, type S for Select.

2.

Press Enter or the appropriate PF key.

You can perform more than one action at a time for file maintenance tasks, such as adding,
updating, and deleting. To perform more than one action, type an action code in the A fields of
each item for which you want to perform an action and press Enter. The system performs the
actions that you have designated for the selected items, starting at the top of the screen and
proceeding downward. File maintenance actions are recognized and performed before other
actions.
See the topic “Basic File Maintenance Procedures” for more information about file maintenance
tasks.
Actions codes, such as Select and Copy are single item actions. This means that you can perform
the action for only one item at a time.
Common Action Codes
Action

Code

Description

Add

A

Adds a new record.

Update

U

Updates an existing record.

Delete

D

Deletes the selected record.

Select

S

Displays the selected record.

Copy

C

Copies the selected record.

Note: Action Code options can vary from screen to screen.

1 - 24

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Getting Help

Getting Started

Getting Help
Sterling Gentran:Basic provides the ability to obtain specific information about whatever part of
the program you are using at any particular moment. Sterling Gentran uses context-sensitive Help
from within the program.
The online help system is designed to allow you to access either specific information about a field
or general information about the entire screen.
This section defines how to use the online help feature in Sterling Gentran:Basic.

Accessing Online Field-Level Help
To access online help for a field, move the insertion point anywhere in the field. Press the
PF1=Help key and a pop-up help window appears on top of the current screen so the field is still
visible.
When further information is available about a field, More displays in the lower right corner of the
pop-up box. Press PF7=Bkwd or PF8=Fwd to scroll through the entire definition. When you have
reached the top or the bottom of the help information, Top or Bottom displays respectively in the
lower right corner of the pop-up box. To exit the pop-up box, press the PF12=Cancel key.
Field-Level Help
Select
EDIM010 1.1_______

PARTNER DIRECTORY

Starting Partner Id: ___________________________________

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Definition Location

U
A Partner
Qual
Name
A
_
!!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1
*** NAME NOT ON FILE ***
N
_
!!!GENTRAN-RU1 !!!GENTRAN-RP1
*** NAME NOT ON FILE ***
N
_
ABLANK
ACRAIG
*** NAME NOT ON FILE ***
N
..............................................................................
: STARTING PARTNER ID:
:
:
:
: A 35-POSITION ALPHANUMERIC FIELD USED TO SPECIFY A PARTNER ID FROM WHICH
:
: VIEWING BEGINS. ENTER THE DESIRED PARTNER ID. YOU MAY KEY A PARTIAL
:
: PARTNER ID INTO THIS FIELD AND THE SYSTEM DISPLAYS UP TO 13 PARTNER IDS
:
: STARTING WITH THE CLOSEST PARTNER ID MATCH.
:
:
:
: NOTE:
THIS DIRECTORY LISTS PARTNER IDS ONLY AS THEY ARE DISPLAYED :
:
More... :
:
:
: F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel
:
:............................................................................:

Function Keys in Help

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 25

Getting Started

Getting Help

Accessing Online Screen-Level Help
To display online Help for the entire screen, move the insertion point anywhere outside a field and
press PF1=Help. The Help provides an overview that describes the purpose of the screen.
Screen-Level Help
Select
EDIM010 1.1_______

PARTNER DIRECTORY

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Starti ................................................................
:
Help
:
:
:
A
Pa : THE PARTNER DIRECTORY SCREEN DISPLAYS A LISTING OF ALL
:
_
!! : PARTNER IDS CURRENTLY ON FILE. THIS LISTING INCLUDES ONLY
:
_
!! : THE PARTNER ID'S THAT EXIST ON YOUR PARTNER CONTROL RECORDS. :
_
AB :
:
_
AB : YOU CAN ONLY VIEW A LISTING OF THOSE TRADING PARTNERS THAT
:
_
AC : HAVE THE SAME SECURITY DIVISION AS DEFINED FOR YOUR LOGON OR :
_
AP : THOSE DEFINED WITH DIVISION CODE OF SPACES. LOGON IDS
:
_
AP : DEFINED WITH A DIVISION OF '000' MAY VIEW ALL TRADING
:
_
AP : PARTNER RECORDS.
:
_
BE :
:
_
DA :
Bottom :
_
DA :
:
_
DA : F7=Bkwd F8=Fwd F12=Cancel
:
_
DA :..............................................................:
INVALID FUNCTION KEY PRESSED
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Maint
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Function Keys in Help

1 - 26

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Function Keys

Getting Started

Function Keys
The Sterling Gentran:Basic system has a number of standard function keys. The standard function
key commands always use the same function key number and are displayed in the same relative
screen position. However, not all standard function keys necessarily are displayed on all the
screens; rather, only the function keys that are required for a particular screen are displayed on that
screen.
Standard function keys are defined below and are not defined in the subsequent subsystem
chapters for each screen definition. Only function keys that are unique to a particular screen are
defined for that screen.
Function
Key

Function

Description

PF1

Help

Displays field-level and/or screen-level help text.

PF3

Exit

Exits to the next higher level (the previous menu). No
actions are performed, even if there is a value in the A
field.

PF7

Bwd

Scrolls backward to data that occurred earlier in the
current screen or record (for multi-line screens only).

PF8

Fwd

Scrolls forward to data that occurred later in the
current screen or record (for multi-line screens only).

PF9

Add

Adds the item selected.

PF10

Updt

Updates the item selected.

PF11

Del

Deletes the item selected. The Sterling Gentran:Basic
system prompts you to confirm the deletion by
pressing PF11 again.

PF12

Cancel

Cancels the current function when the Sterling
Gentran:Basic system prompts you for a confirmation
(such as Delete).

PF14

Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the
message line to indicate when the information on this
screen was created or last changed.

PF15

Logoff

Logs off the Sterling Gentran:Basic system and
displays the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen.
Logoff is available only on menus.

See the “Function Key Descriptions” topics in the appropriate chapters of this guide for
descriptions of the function keys that apply to each particular screen or menu.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 27

Getting Started

Common Keyboard Conventions

Common Keyboard Conventions
Keyboard conventions that are common throughout Sterling Gentran:Basic are described below:
Key

Description

Enter

Instructs Sterling Gentran to process the current function selected.
You must press Enter to initiate the processing of most commands
in Sterling Gentran, with the exception of the PF5=Select
command. When specified on a screen, use PF5 to process the
desired function.
Note: On your keyboard, the Enter key might be labeled Return
or CR, or with an arrow pointing down and then to the left.

Erase EOF

Clears all data in the available screen field to the right of the
insertion point (including the character the insertion point is
currently on). Sometimes this key is labeled End on the keyboard.

Backspace

Moves the insertion point left and deletes data in enterable screen
fields.

Arrow keys

Moves the insertion point right or left within the line but does not
alter the contents of the line.

Insert

Sets the keyboard to the insert mode. In the insert mode, any
characters entered are inserted at the insertion point position and
all the characters to the right of the insertion point position shift to
the right.

Delete

Deletes the character where the insertion point is currently
positioned. To delete more than one character, select all the
characters in the field and press Delete. The insertion point returns
to the first position in the field.

Home

Moves the insertion point to the Jump Code field at the top of the
screen.

Each menu contains a selection field in which you type the number of a task selection as listed on
the menu. After you type the task selection number and press Enter, the system displays the
appropriate screen.

1 - 28

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Basic File Maintenance Procedures

Getting Started

Basic File Maintenance Procedures
Online file maintenance procedures are the same for all Sterling Gentran:Basic features. File
maintenance consists of these three tasks:
•

Add

•

Update

•

Delete

The following sections describe these tasks in more detail.

Add
The Add command creates a record that did not previously exist. Type the data in the appropriate
screen fields, and press PF9 to process the Add command. The system displays a message
informing you that the record was added. If the system was unable to add a record, or if there are
missing required field data or errors, a warning is displayed. If you exit the screen before you press
PF9 to add the record, the data you entered on the screen is not saved.

Update
When you change an existing record, update the record to apply the changes. The system displays
a message telling you that the record has been updated, or a warning if there were any errors. If
you exit the screen before you press PF10 for Update, the information you entered on the screen is
not saved. To update the file, press PF10 before you exit the screen.

Delete
When you want to delete an existing record from the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, use the Delete
command. You cannot recover a deleted record.
See your system administrator for more information on data recovery.
To delete a file or record, first display the correct record and then press PF11 to delete the file or
record. The system displays a message requesting you to verify that the item you selected is the
item you want to delete by pressing PF11 again. The system displays a message telling you that
the record has been deleted. If you decide not to delete the record, press PF12 for Cancel key. The
cancel feature does not work if you have already confirmed the deletion.
Note: The Databanking feature uses the term delete in a slightly
different manner from the file maintenance delete. In the
online Databank Maintenance, you mark a record for
deletion but it is not physically removed from the file
until the batch Databank Maintenance is run against the
databank file.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 29

Getting Started

Jump Codes

Jump Codes
A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling
Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to another
while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible via a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have
jump code values associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens do not
have jump code values associated with them.

How to Jump Between Screens
You can jump between screens without having to navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic
menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens:
1.

Press Home.
The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the right of the
screen name.

2.

Type the jump code and press Enter.

See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens.
Following are some terms and definitions used in this discussion:

1 - 30

Term

Meaning

Subsystem

A set of functionally-related screens that are directly accessible
from the Sterling Gentran Main Menu (Partner Maintenance,
Standards Maintenance, Databank Maintenance, Administrative
Maintenance, Mapping Maintenance)

Navigation

The movement from screen to screen by entering data then
pressing function keys (such as PF1, PF2) or by selecting options
on menus and pressing Enter

Position

The location within a subsystem file (or group of files) that
displays the data (either one record or multiple records) on the
screen

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Jump Codes

Getting Started

Types of Jump Codes
There are three types of jump codes, which are listed below. These types of jump codes are
described more fully in the paragraphs that follow.
•

Numeric

•

Alphabetic

•

Special character

Numeric Jump Codes
Numeric jump codes consist of numbers separated by periods (.). The numbers in the jump code
correspond to the numbers selected on menus, in the order in which they are selected.
Example
To display the Application Data ID screen, you could navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic
menus by performing the following steps:
1.

Type 5 on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu and press Enter.

2.

Type 1 on the Mapping Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

3.

Type 2 on the Application Definition Menu and press Enter.

... OR you could jump directly to the Application Data ID screen by performing these steps:
1.

Press Home.

2.

Type 5.1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens.

Alphabetic Jump Codes
Alphabetic jump codes consist of alphabetic characters separated by periods (.). The alphabetic
code is an abbreviated reference to the screen name or function. For example, to display the
Application Data ID screen using the alphabetic jump code, type APP.DEF or APP.ID in the Jump
Code field of any screen and press Enter.
See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens.

Special Character Jump Codes
Special character jump codes enable you to perform standard or generic functions with jump
codes. The two special character jump codes are SWAP and EXIT.
•

SWAP enables you to jump between Sterling Gentran:Basic online subsystems
(not within subsystems). When you use jump code SWAP, you jump to the last
screen you jumped from (but not navigated from), from another subsystem. When
you jump from a different subsystem, you reset the SWAP positioning to the
screen you are jumping from.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 31

Getting Started

Jump Codes
Example
Let’s say you have the Group Information screen in the Partner subsystem
displayed, and then you display the Transaction Information screen (also in the
Partner subsystem). From here, you jump to the Name and Address screen (again,
in the Partner subsystem). Next, you jump to the Transaction screen in the
Standards subsystem. After you view the information on the Transaction screen,
you type SWAP in the Jump Code field to return to your previous location in the
Partner subsystem. As you expect, SWAP returns you to the Name and Address
screen in the Partner subsystem, because this is the screen from which you jumped
to the Standards subsystem.

•

EXIT (or X) enables you to jump to the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logoff screen.
This feature provides a quick and easy way to exit the Sterling Gentran:Basic
system from any screen.

User-defined Jump Code Table
The User-Defined Jump Code table is a user customization facility that enables you to define your
own jump code values. This facility requires a table that consists of the 10-character user code and
the 10-character Sterling Gentran:Basic jump code. It must be coded in an Assembler table and the
name of the table must be entered on the Configuration file (Record Type 0). An entry for the table
name must be added to your CICS resource definitions.
When you type a jump code, the system verifies that the jump code you entered is valid by first
checking the User-Defined Jump Code table. If you have not defined a User-Defined Jump Code
table, or if the jump code you entered is not in that table, then the system checks the default jump
code table.
For help using the User-Defined Jump Code Table, see member EDIJUMP in the
GENTRAN.V6X6.UTILITY SOURCE LIBRARY.

Jump Code Guidelines
The Sterling Gentran:Basic system keeps independent position information for each subsystem
(Partner, Standards, Databank, Administrative, Mapping), as well as for Sterling Gentran:Basic
add-on products (Plus, Control, Realtime, Viewpoint). The independence of these subsystems
enables you to jump or navigate from subsystem to subsystem without having to re-enter a key for
that screen.
The general rules for using jump codes are the following:

1 - 32

•

You can jump to only screens that are directly accessible through selecting menu
options.

•

You can jump from any screen.

•

Navigating or jumping to the Sterling Gentran:Basic Copyright/Signon screen, or
exiting the Sterling Gentran:Basic system, clears the positions for all subsystems.

•

After you jump from one subsystem to another subsystem, you can return directly
to the screen you jumped from by typing SWAP in the Jump Code field.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Jump Codes

Getting Started
•

You cannot use SWAP to jump between screens within the same subsystem.

•

Typing SWAP is the only method by which you can jump to a screen that has no
jump code associated with it, as long as SWAP positioning has been established
by jumping from one subsystem screen to a different subsystem screen.

•

An invalid jump code causes the system to return to the jumped from screen and
display the message Invalid jump code entered.

•

You cannot jump to subsystems that are not installed or for which you do not have
security access. The message Invalid jump — user lacks authority is
displayed on the screen.

How To Get Help
The IBM® Sterling Customer Center provides a wealth of online resources that are available
around the clock to enrich your business experience with IBM® Sterling Gentran®. By using
Sterling Customer Center, you gain access to many self-support tools, including a KnowledgeBase, Documentation, Education, and Case Management. Access Sterling Customer Center at
http://customer.sterlingcommerce.com.
Once logged in, select Support Center from the top navigation menu, and then locate Sterling
Gentran product-specific support information from the left navigation menu.
Additionally, our Customer Support Reference Guide outlines our support hours, contact
information, and key information that will enhance your support experience with us. For detailed
information about Customer Support, please refer to the Customer Support Reference Guide
accessible from the login page. (http://customer.sterlingcommerce.com)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

1 - 33

Getting Started

1 - 34

Jump Codes

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter

2

The Partner Subsystem

Overview
This chapter contains the following topics related to the Partner subsystem.

Topic

Page

Before You Begin .................................................................................................................. 2-3
Partner Maintenance Menu.............................................................EDIM005 .................... 2-10
Partner Directory ............................................................................EDIM010 .................... 2-10
Partner Selection Menu ..................................................................EDIM007 .................... 2-17
Header Information Screen ............................................................EDIM026 .................... 2-22
Interchange Directory Screen .........................................................EDIM027 .................... 2-27
Control Information Screen 1 .........................................................EDIM015 .................... 2-31
Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options.................................EDIM016 .................... 2-37
Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options .................................EDIM018 .................... 2-43
Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options.....................EDIM017 .................... 2-48
Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options...............................EDIM012 .................... 2-52
Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options...............................EDIM019 .................... 2-57
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 ................................................................EDIM021 .................... 2-62
Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 ................................................................EDIM022 .................... 2-67
Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options................................EDIM013 .................... 2-71
Control Information Screen 2—STX Options................................EDIM014 .................... 2-76
Group Directory..............................................................................EDIM020 .................... 2-81
Group Information Screen ..............................................................EDIM030 .................... 2-86
Group Information Screen—BAT Options ....................................EDIM031 .................... 2-93
Group Information Screen—UNG Options ...................................EDIM032 .................... 2-98
Group Information Screen—GS Options ......................................EDIM033 .................. 2-103
Transaction Directory .....................................................................EDIM025 .................. 2-108
Transaction Information Screen .....................................................EDIM040 .................. 2-113
Transaction Information Screen—ST Options ..............................EDIM043 .................. 2-120

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2-1

The Partner Subsystem

Overview

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 1 ..............................................................................................EDIM042 .................. 2-124
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 2...............................................................................................EDIM046 .................. 2-128
Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 3...............................................................................................EDIM047 .................. 2-132
Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options .........................EDIM041 .................. 2-136
Name and Address Screen..............................................................EDIM035 .................. 2-140
Name and Address Part 2 Screen ...................................................EDIM036 .................. 2-144
User Defined Screen ......................................................................EDIM045 .................. 2-148
Data Separation Screen...................................................................EDIM050 .................. 2-152
Error Rejection Screen....................................................................EDIM055 .................. 2-158
Copy All Records Screen ...............................................................EDIM060 .................. 2-162
Partner Cross Reference Menu .......................................................EDIM009 .................. 2-166
Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen................................EDIM008 .................. 2-168
Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen ..............................EDIM006 .................. 2-172
Trading Partner Relationship Menu................................................EDIM009 .................. 2-175
Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen ...........................EDIM023 .................. 2-177
Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen............................EDIM024 .................. 2-182

2-2

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Partner Subsystem

Before You Begin
What is a Partner Profile?
To successfully facilitate electronic commerce, Sterling Gentran requires specific information
about each trading partner. Whether intra-company or inter-company in nature, all trading partner
relationships are defined and maintained in Sterling Gentran, on the Partner Maintenance
subsystem.
You can choose from two processing methodologies when defining the partner profile: Partner/
Qualifier mode and Relationship mode. The Partner/Qualifier method defines your organization
and each trading partner as separate and distinct entities on the partner profile. This method
permits each trading partner to be used in multiple relationships. With the Relationship method,
you first identify the inter- or intra- business relationships. Then, you define each identified
relationship separately and distinctly on the partner profile. This method is ideal for defining
multiple entities within your organization with shared (common) trading partners. In addition, the
Relationship method provides uniqueness for identification purposes that would not be possible if
the trading partner were defined using the Partner/Qualifier method. Both processing modes can
be selected and maintained through the Configuration subsystem.
The Partner/Qualifier mode creates a loosely coupled relationship between trading partners. One
Partner ID and Qualifier is defined for each trading partner and for each entity within an
organization involved with e-commerce. With the Partner/Qualifier method, relationships are
defined externally to the partner profile during processing.
The Relationship mode creates a closely coupled relationship between trading partners. Each
relationship is uniquely defined on the partner profile in a user/partner format where the User side
always represents your organization and the Partner side always represents your trading partner.
To bridge the transition from EDI Sender ID, EDI Sender ID Qualifier, EDI Receiver ID, and EDI
Receiver ID Qualifier found on your EDI documents to a user/partner key on the partner profile,
Sterling Gentran uses a partner Relationship file. This file is built and maintained online through
CICS.
Note: For the existing Sterling Gentran user who used
Relationship mode in Release 6.0 and who does not want
to expand that usage to the partner profile, a Mixed mode
is available in Release 6.6. In Mixed mode, the partner
profile is configured in Partner/Qualifier mode, and the
databank is set up in Relationship mode.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2-3

The Partner Subsystem

Before You Begin

What is in this Chapter?
This chapter explains the menus and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic partner profile, which is
accessed through the Partner subsystem. In addition, this chapter describes how to perform the
following functions:
•

Add a new trading partner using either Partner/Qualifier or Relationship mode

•

Copy and rename an existing trading partner

•

Add name, address, and contact information for a trading partner

•

Set up error rejection criteria by trading partner

•

Set up data separation by trading partner

•

Add notes or special instructions to a user defined record by trading partner

•

Define an alias Partner ID and Qualifiers through a partner cross-reference file

•

Define user/partner relationships for a trading partner

•

Define and maintain multiple interchange, group, and transaction sets under a
common trading partner

•

Maintain interchange header, functional groups, and transaction set information
for inbound and outbound processing by trading partner

How to Access the Partner Subsystem
The screen flow is determined by the partner processing mode, Partner/Qualifier or Relationship
mode, selected from Configuration Maintenance.
Note: In the Configuration Maintenance, the On-Line Options –
Record Type 0 (Panel 2 of 3) screen enables you to define
the partner processing mode for the trading partner
profile.
See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for
more information about Configuration Maintenance.
You can display all the screens in the Partner subsystem from the Partner Maintenance Menu.
Perform either of these two actions to display the Partner Maintenance Menu:

2-4

•

From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 1 to select the Partner Maintenance
Menu subsystem.

•

Type 1.0 in the Jump Code field on any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Partner Subsystem

Each menu contains a selection field allowing you to type the number of a task selection as listed
on the menu. After typing the task number and pressing Enter, Sterling Gentran displays the
appropriate screen. When you make a menu selection, the system displays screens that prompt you
through the processes available in the Partner Profile Maintenance feature. There are 39 screens
available in the Partner Profile Maintenance feature. Some screens allow you to perform a subtask
and are only accessible from another screen (e.g., Control Information screens). Subtask screens
are not listed on the menus.
When performing partner profile maintenance, consider the following:
1.

There are eight record types that comprise a single trading partner definition on the partner
profile. All screens point to one or more of these records. The order of the record key is
defined by you and consists of the Partner ID and Qualifier (Partner/Qualifier mode) or
user/partner (Relationship) mode. Adding or selecting a particular trading partner can only
be accomplished through the Partner Selection Menu screen. The record key entered on
this screen is used to read (or write) all other record types that make up a trading partner
on the partner profile.

2.

For any hexadecimal conversion fields (e.g., element separators), the system evaluates the
single position alphanumeric field first, then the two position hexadecimal field.
Therefore, any time data is entered in both fields, the system overlays the value entered in
the hexadecimal field with the hexadecimal value of the first alphanumeric field.

3.

Users with Level 1 security have unrestricted file maintenance rights. If you have Level 2
security, you may be allowed to perform additions, updates, and deletions to the trading
partner profile records. The system displays the PF9=Add, PF10=Updt, and PF11=Del
function keys. If you have Level 3 security, you are not able to add, update, or delete
trading partner profile records, and the function keys are not displayed. When adding a
new record, the default value is Y for the Update Flag.

4.

You can view and maintain records only for those trading partners having the same
division code as your own. The system displays all trading partners when the division
code equals 000. Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a
corporate record, and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these
records.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for more information on Division access.

Figure 2.1 and Figure 2.2 illustrate how to navigate through the Partner subsystem for the
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes. The labeled boxes represent screens in the subsystem.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2-5

The Partner Subsystem

Before You Begin

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Partner
Maintenance
Menu

Partner
Cross
Reference

Partner
Directory
Partner
Selection
Menu

Partner
Cross Ref
by X–Ref ID

Header

Partner
Cross Ref
by Partner ID

Control

Group

Transaction

Name

User

Data

Error

Copy All

Directory

Directory

Directory

and
Address

Defined

Separation

Rejection

Records

Control

Group

Transaction

Information

Information

Information

Figure 2.1 Partner Subsystem Screen Flow

2-6

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Partner
Maintenance
Menu

Partner Trading
Relationship
Menu

Partner
Directory
Partner
Selection
Menu

Trading Partner
Relationship by
EDI ID

Header

Trading Partner
Relationship by
User/Part ID

Control

Group

Transaction

User

Data

Error

Copy All

Directory

Directory

Directory

Defined

Separation

Rejection

Records

Control

Group

Transaction

Information

Information

Information

Name
and
Address
(User)

Name
and
Address
(Part)

Figure 2.2 Relationship Screen Flow
Note: The screen flow is determined by the partner profile
processing mode selected on the Configuration file to
define a trading partner, Partner/Qualifier or Relationship
(user/partner).

Partner Jump Codes
A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling
Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to
another, within a subsystem, while bypassing menu screens. All screens that are accessible through
a Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible
only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2-7

The Partner Subsystem

Before You Begin

You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use
the following procedure to jump between screens:
Step 1:

Press Home.
The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the
right of the screen number.

Step 2:

Type the jump code and press Enter.
Note: If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field
and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab
to return to the next entry field on the screen.

The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Partner subsystem menus
and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are
displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus.

Screen Title
Sterling Gentran Main Menu
Partner Maintenance Menu

Screen
Number
EDIM001
EDIM005

Numeric
0.0

Jump Codes
Alphabetic
BSC

0

MAIN

1.0

PART

1
Partner Directory

EDIM010

1.1

PART.DIR

Partner Selection Menu

EDIM007

1.2

PART.MENU

Header Information

EDIM026

1.2.1

PART.HDR

Interchange Directory

EDIM027

1.2.2

PART.INTD

Control Information

EDIM015

1.2.2.1

PART.CNTL
PART.CTL

Group Directory

EDIM020

1.2.3

PART.GRPD

Group Information

EDIM030

1.2.3.1

PART.GRP

EDIM033
Transaction Directory

EDIM025

1.2.4

PART.TRND

Transaction Information

EDIM040

1.2.4.1

PART.TRN

EDIM043
Name and Address

EDIM035

1.2.5

PART.NAME

User Defined

EDIM045

1.2.6

PART.USER

Data Separation

EDIM050

1.2.7

PART.DSEP
PART.SEP

Error Rejection

EDIM055

1.2.8

PART.ERR

Copy All Records

EDIM060

1.2.9

PART.CPY
PART.COPY

2-8

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Partner Subsystem

Screen
Number

Screen Title

Numeric

Jump Codes
Alphabetic

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Partner Cross-Reference
Menu

EDIM009

1.3

PART.XREF

Partner Cross Reference by
X-Ref ID

EDIM008

1.3.1

PART.XREFX

Partner Cross Reference by
Partner ID

EDIM006

1.3.2

PART.XREFP

Relationship (User/Partner) Mode
Trading Partner Relationship
Menu

EDIM009

1.3

PART.REL

Trading Partner Relationship
by EDI ID

EDIM023

1.3.1

PART.RELE

Trading Partner Relationship
by User/Partner

EDIM024

1.3.2

PART.RELP

Note: You can jump to the Partner screens at the 1.2.# level
only if the partner position has already been established
(e.g., a Partner ID has already been selected and is
present in the Position work area).
In instances in which multiple screens comprise a logical
operation, only the first screen is assigned a jump code.
To display subsequent screens in this scenario, jump to
the first screen, and then press PF5 to display the next
screen.
See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2-9

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005

Partner Maintenance Menu

EDIM005

Purpose
The Partner Maintenance Menu contains three menu options for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes that you can use to perform partner profile maintenance. The
three maintenance screens allow you to display, add, and maintain Partner profiles.

How to Access
Access the Partner Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways:
•

From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 1 to select the Partner Maintenance
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Examples
The following examples illustrate the Partner Maintenance Menu for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM005

1.0_______

PARTNER MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

1. Partner Directory
2. Partner Maintenance
3. Partner Cross-Reference Menu

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

2 - 10

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM005 1.0_______

PARTNER MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_ 1.

Partner Directory

2.

Partner Maintenance

3.

Trading Partner Relationship

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

Menu Options
The following table describes the three menu options on the Partner Maintenance Menu for both,
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Menu Options

Description

1.

Partner Directory

Lists all currently defined partner control
records.

2.

Partner Maintenance

Enables you to add, display, and maintain
trading partner record definitions for each of
your trading partners.

3.

Partner Cross-Reference Menu

Enables you to perform a search by Cross
Reference ID or Partner ID to display and
maintain a particular trading partner crossreference.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 11

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Maintenance Menu EDIM005

Relationship (User/Partner)
Mode Menu Option

Description

1.

Partner Directory

Lists all currently defined partner control
records.

2.

Partner Maintenance

Enables you to add, display, and maintain
trading partner record definitions for each of
your trading partners.

3.

Trading Partner Relationship

Enables you to perform a search by EDI ID or
User/Partner ID to display and maintain a
particular trading partner relationship.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code automatically is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home; type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press
Enter to perform the selected function.

2 - 12

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Directory EDIM010

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Directory

EDIM010

Purpose
The Partner Directory displays a list of all Partner IDs currently on file. This list includes only the
Partner IDs that exist on your trading partner header records.
You can only view a list of those trading partners that have the same security division as defined
for your logon or those defined with a division code of spaces. Logon IDs defined with a division
of ‘000’ may view all trading partner records.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for
more information on division access.

How to Access
Access the Partner Directory in either of the following ways:
•

Type 1 to select the Partner Directory option from the Partner Maintenance Menu
and press Enter.

•

Type 1.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Partner Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM010 1.1_______

PARTNER DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Starting Partner Id: ___________________________________
U
A Partner
Qual
Name
A
_ !!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1
GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER
Y
_ BG-PARTNER
EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER
Y
_ ICS-PARTNER
EXAMPLE OF AN ICS PARTNER
Y
_ ISA-PARTNER
EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Y
_ STX-PARTNER
EXAMPLE OF AN STX PARTNER
Y
_ UNA-PARTNER
EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER
Y
_ VENDOR-1
TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Y
_ VENDOR-2
TUTORIAL - BULK PAPER COMPANY
Y
_ VENDOR-3
TUTORIAL - TWO WAY COMMUNICATIONS Y
_ VENDOR-4
TUTORIAL - RANDOM OFFICE SUPPLY
Y
_ VENDOR-5
TUTORIAL - OVERSEAS MINING COMPAN Y
_ VENDOR-6
TUTORIAL - SOFTWARE HOUSE PLC
Y
_
END OF PARTNERS
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Maint
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 13

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Directory EDIM010

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM010 1.1_______

PARTNER DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Starting User .....: ___________________________________
Partner ..: _______________
A User
Partner
User Name
Partner Name
_ YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
YOUR COMPANY NAME
VENDOR-1 NAME
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE PARTNER AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE KEY
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Maint
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

U
A
Y

Screen Actions
In the Partner Directory, Sterling Gentran displays a list of all Partner IDs on file.
Note: You can advance to the trading partner you want to
access by using the Starting Partner Id field for Partner/
Qualifier mode, or the Starting User and Starting Partner
fields for Relationship mode.
See the following “Field Descriptions” sub-topic for
more information.
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Partner Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action...
Retrieve the Partner
Selection Menu screen
for a trading partner
selected on the Partner
Directory

2 - 14

Associated
with this
Do this...
screen
action...
Select
To select a Partner ID to view or maintain,
type S in the A field next to the Partner ID
you want to view on the Partner Directory.
Then, press PF5.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Directory EDIM010

The Partner Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Maint

Displays the Partner Selection Menu with the Partner ID you have selected.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Starting
A 35-position alphanumeric field
Partner Id
used to specify a Partner ID from
which viewing begins. Type the
Partner ID you want to access. If
you type a partial Partner ID in
this field, the system displays up
to 13 Partner IDs starting with the
nearest Partner ID match.

Field
Starting
User

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-position alphanumeric field used
to specify the User portion of a User/
Partner ID from which viewing
begins. Type the desired User ID. You
can type a partial User ID in this field
and the system displays up to 13 User/
Partner IDs starting with the nearest
User ID match.

2 - 15

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Directory EDIM010

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Partner
Displays the Partner ID.
(protected)

Field
Starting
Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-position alphanumeric field used
to specify the Partner portion of a
User/Partner ID from which viewing
begins. Type the desired Partner ID.
You can type a partial Partner ID in
this field and the system displays up
to 13 User/Partner IDs starting with
the closest User/Partner ID match.
Note: This directory lists Partner IDs
only as they are displayed on their
header records. Also, remember that
you can only view a listing of those
Partner IDs having the same security
division as defined for your logon.
Division 000 displays ALL Partner
IDs.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance
Screen” in Chapter 5 for more
information on division access.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier associated
with the trading partner, if
applicable.

User
(protected)

Displays the User portion of the User/
Partner Profile ID.

Name
(protected)

Displays the trading partner name
describing the Partner ID, if it
exists on file.

Partner
(protected)

Displays the Partner portion of the
User/Partner Profile ID.

User Name
(protected)

Displays the trading partner name
defining the User ID, if it exists on
file.

Partner
Name
(protected)

Displays the trading partner name
describing the Partner ID, if it exists
on file.

A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) and
press PF5 to display the Partner Selection Menu.
UA (Update Allowed) (protected)
Displays the current value for the Update Allowed flag that controls whether this trading
partner may be updated. Valid values are:

2 - 16

N

=

No, user cannot make updates to the current parameters. The value N
is set for a user maintaining Level 1 Security (typically a system
administrator) to lock the established parameters set for Partner IDs
that are currently in production.

Y

=

Yes, allow a user with Level 2 or Level 1 Security to change the
parameters for the specified trading partner.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Selection Menu EDIM007

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Selection Menu

EDIM007

Purpose
The Partner Selection Menu displays a list of menu selections from which to choose to view, add,
or maintain Partner Profile IDs.
From the Partner Selection Menu, you can select a record type to display information for an
existing Partner Profile ID by typing the selection number of the record type in the selection field.
Information for each of the eight record types listed on the Partner Selection Menu is entered on a
separate screen. The Control Information, Group, and Transaction records have multiple screens.
This section discusses each partner maintenance screen and the Copy All feature.

How to Access
Access the Partner Selection Menu in either of the following ways:
•

Type 2 to select Partner Maintenance from the Partner Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type 1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Examples
The following examples illustrate the Partner Selection Menu for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM007 1.2_______

Part ID:
Copy ID:

PARTNER SELECTION MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual: _______________
___________________________________
Qual: _______________
Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER,
or press the PF3 key to Exit.
_ 1. Header Information
2. Interchange Directory
3. Group Directory
4. Transaction Directory
5. Name and Address
6. User Defined
7. Data Separation
8. Error Rejection
9. Copy All Records
Job Name: _______

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Rpt

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 17

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Selection Menu EDIM007

Relationship Mode
EDIM007 1.2_______

User:
Copy User:

PARTNER SELECTION MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
YOUR_COMPANY_______________________ Partner: VENDOR-1_______
___________________________________ Partner: _______________
Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER,
or press the PF3 key to Exit.
_ 1. Header Information
2. Interchange Directory
3. Group Directory
4. Transaction Directory
5. Name and Address
6. User Defined
7. Data Separation
8. Error Rejection
9. Copy All Records
Job Name: _______

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Rpt

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

PF5=Ref

Menu Options
There are nine selections on the Partner Selection Menu. There are eight partner maintenance
record options and one menu function available (i.e., Copy All Records feature).
Note: The Partner Selection Menu provides the same menu
options for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship
modes.
The following table provides the eight options and their descriptions.

2 - 18

Menu Option

Description

1.

Header Information

Enables you to add, change, or delete partner profile
information

2.

Interchange Directory

Enables you to add, change, or delete interchange
control records for partner profile information

3.

Group Directory

Enables you to add or maintain separate processing
rules for various groups

4.

Transaction Directory

Enables you to add or maintain separate processing
rules for various transactions

5.

Name and Address

Enables you to add or maintain each trading partner's
name, address, and telephone number

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Selection Menu EDIM007

(Continued)
Menu Option

The Partner Subsystem

Description

6.

User Defined

Enables you to maintain additional reference
information that you want to define for any trading
partner

7.

Data Separation

Enables you to establish inbound split files based
upon group or transaction type or outbound split files
based upon trading partner

8.

Error Rejection

Enables you to designate those errors that you decide
are not acceptable, allowing you to reject the data at
the partner (interchange), group, or transaction level

9.

Copy All Records

Enables you to duplicate all of an existing trading
partner's records using one step to create a new
partner record

Menu Functions
Copy All Feature
Sterling Gentran:Basic helps prevent you from duplicating and overwriting user records that may
already exist. The Copy All Records feature provides you with the ability to efficiently copy
records from an existing trading partner to a newly added trading partner. From the Partner
Selection Menu, you can add a new Partner Profile ID and copy to it all of the records from an
existing Partner Profile ID.
See the topic “Copy All Records Screen” for more information about the Copy All feature.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as
the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1.
To display a record type for an existing Partner Profile ID, or to begin to create a record type for a
new Partner ID, type the Partner ID and associated Qualifier code for Partner/Qualifier mode or
User and Partner for Relationship mode. Use the Tab key to move the insertion point to the
selection field, type the selection number of the desired record type and press Enter. The system
then displays the selected record type entry screen.
PF4=Dir

Returns to the Partner Directory where you can view a listing of Partner
Profile IDs. If a complete or partial Partner ID exists in the Partner ID field,
the system displays the directory starting with the selected Partner ID (or
nearest match) at the top.

PF7=Rpt

Allows you to submit the batch Partner Print report for the Profile ID
displayed at the top of the screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 19

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Selection Menu EDIM007

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9)
and press Enter to access to the selected menu.
Job Name
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to designate a user-specified jobname when
printing a report using the PF7 key. Valid values are any valid jobname.
To select reports for printing, type the user-specified jobname in the Job Name field and
press PF7. If you do not type a value in the Job Name field, the system uses a default
value, which is user-specified during installation customization of the JCL (EDIRJCL)
file.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
(Partner
A 35-position
Name alphanumeric field used
protected)
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to help to further
identify the Partner ID.
Part ID

2 - 20

A 35-position alphabetic
field used to select a
Partner ID for which you
are displaying, creating,
modifying, or deleting
records.

Field
(User –
protected)

(Partner –
protected)

Relationship Mode
Description
Displays up to a 15-position
User ID, if it exists on file for
Relationship mode.

Displays up to a 15-position
alphabetic Partner ID, if it exists
on file for Relationship mode.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Selection Menu EDIM007

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Qual
A 4-position
alphanumeric field used
to enter the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.
Copy ID

Qual

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to enter the Partner ID of
an existing trading
partner from which you
are copying all records.
This field (on this screen)
is used only with the
COPY ALL feature. The
COPY ALL feature is
discussed in detail under
the Menu Functions
header above.

The Partner Subsystem

Field
User/
Partner
(required)

Copy User/
Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
Two 15-position alphanumeric
fields used to select a User ID
and Partner ID for the
Relationship for which want to
display, create, modify, or delete
records.
Two 15-position alphanumeric
fields used to enter the User/
Partner ID of an existing trading
relationship from which you are
copying all records. The Copy
User/Partner ID field is used
only with the Copy All feature.
See the topics “Menu Functions”
and “Menu Options” previously
in this section for more
information about the COPY
ALL feature.

A 4-position
alphanumeric field used
to enter the Qualifier
Code (if applicable)
associated with the
Partner ID entered in the
Copy From ID field.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 21

The Partner Subsystem

Header Information Screen EDIM026

Header Information Screen

EDIM026

Purpose
The Header Information screen enables you to display, update, add, or delete information about a
trading partner. This information is required for all other partner profile maintenance procedures
and screens. The Header Information screen is the first record that you will need to create to add a
new trading partner.
Caution: When you delete the header record for a trading partner,
all other records for this trading partner are deleted as
well.

How to Access
Access the Header Information screen in either of the following ways:
•

Type 1 to select Header Information from the Partner Selection Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 1.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this functions
only if the Partner ID has been established).

At installation, Sterling Gentran:Basic automatically sets up a default Partner ID. The default
Partner ID contains default Group and Transaction records that are required for each trading
partner. Each time you add a new Partner ID and Control record, the system automatically uses the
default Group and Transaction record templates to create default Group and Transaction records
for the new trading partner. You have the capability to modify the values in the generic default
records to create your own default records. After modification, Sterling Gentran will then use the
values specified in your default records.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
The default Partner ID containing the default Group and Transaction records is:
!!! GENTRAN–RESERVED–PARTNER–ID–1

Relationship Mode
Following is the default Partner Profile ID containing the default Group and Transaction records:
!!! GENTRAN–RU1

!!! GENTRAN–RP1

The default Partner ID can be viewed and modified from the Partner Selection Menu like any other
ID (and associated records).
See the topic “Partner Selection Menu” for information on how to display and change the records
for a specified Partner ID.

2 - 22

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Header Information Screen EDIM026

The Partner Subsystem

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Header Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM026 1.2.1_____

HEADER INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISA-PARTNER

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

Description:
EXAMPLE_OF_AN_ISA_PARTNER_______________
________________________________________
Underscore Character :
Division . . . . . . :
Update Allowed . . . :

_
000
Y

Last Update Date . . :

00/00/00

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF5=IDir
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

(Y/N)
Time . . :

00:00:00

User . . :

SCI

Relationship Mode
EDIM026 1.2.1_____

HEADER INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1 NAME
Partner: VENDOR-1

Description:
GENTRAN_TEST_PARTNER____________________
________________________________________
Underscore Character :
Division . . . . . . :
Update Allowed . . . :

_
000
Y

Last Update Date . . :

00/00/00

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF5=IDir
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

(Y/N)
Time . . :

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

00:00:00

User . . :

SCI

2 - 23

The Partner Subsystem

Header Information Screen EDIM026

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=IDir

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF9=Add

Adds a header record for a new Partner ID being added to the partner profile.
Note: When you add a new header record, the system
automatically adds default Group and Transaction
records, based on the
!!!GENTRAN–RESERVED–PARTNER– ID–1 (Partner/
Qualifier mode)
OR
!!!GENTRAN-RU1/!!!GENTRAN-RP1
(Relationship mode)

PF10=Updt

Updates the header record for an existing Partner ID.

PF11=Del

Deletes a header record AND SUBSEQUENTLY ALL OTHER
RECORDS for an existing Partner ID.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

2 - 24

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Header Information Screen EDIM026

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

Displays up to a 35-position
alphanumeric user name, if
it exists on file for the User/
Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

Displays up to a 35-position
alphanumeric partner name,
if it exists on the file for the
User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Displays two 15-position
alphabetic fields that
contain the User/Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Description
A 120-position alphanumeric field that can be used to further describe this partner profile,
if you are processing in Partner/Qualifier mode. This field also describes the user/partner
relationship if you are processing in Relationship mode.
Underscore Character
A 1-position alphabetic field that contains the underscore substitution character that will
be used in place of the actual underscore ( _ ) on the screen display of selected fields for
this partner. Valid values are: ~, ! , @ , #, $, %, ¬, &, *,
( , ) , - , = , +, { , } , : , ; , < , > , / , ? , | , \ , and space.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution Characters” in Chapter 7 for more
information about this feature.
Division (protected, except Division 000)
A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the partner profile is
added. The default value is 000. Although this field is called Division, it is used for
grouping partners under a common access. That is, access to a trading partner is tied to the
Division code on your Security Profile. Before changing the Division code from 000,
consider how users are organized in respect to adding and updating the partner profile. For
most companies, leaving the Division code as 000 and preventing unauthorized changes
through the Security Profile by access and level is sufficient.
Any record that contains a Division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record
and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 25

The Partner Subsystem

Header Information Screen EDIM026

Update Allowed (May be protected for users with Level 2 or 3 Security)
Displays the current value for the Update Allowed flag that controls whether this trading
partner may be updated. Valid values are:
N

=

No, user cannot make updates to the current parameters. The value N
is set for a user maintaining Level 1 Security (typically a system
administrator) to lock the established parameters set for Partner IDs
that are currently in production.

Y

=

Yes, allow a user with Level 2 or Level 1 Security to change the
parameters for the specified trading partner.

Note:Remember, ONLY a user with Level 1 security can
change the Update Allowed field.
Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the date on which this Trading Partner Header was
created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
Last Update Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which this Trading Partner Header was created
or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Last Update User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed this
Trading Partner Header.

2 - 26

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027

The Partner Subsystem

Interchange Directory Screen

EDIM027

Purpose
The Interchange Directory displays a list of all interchange control records currently on file for this
Partner Profile ID.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 2 to select Interchange Directory from the Partner Selection Menu.

•

Type 1.2.2 in the Jump Code field (this functions only if the Partner Profile ID
has already been established).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM027 1.2.2_____

INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY

GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER
Part ID: !!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1
MULTIPLE
HEADER
A ENV ID
OPTION
VERSION
_
ISA
ISA
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Hdr
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

PF5=Ctrl

2 - 27

The Partner Subsystem

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM027 1.2.2_____

User:

INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1

MULTIPLE
HEADER
A ENV ID
OPTION
VERSION
_
ISA
ISA
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Hdr
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF5=Ctrl

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action...
View the Control screen
for the header option
selected on the
Interchange Directory

Associated
with this
Do this...
screen
action...
Select
To select a header option to view or
maintain, type S in the A field, next to the
header option you want to view, on the
Interchange Directory. Then, press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

2 - 28

PF4=Hdr

Displays the Header Information screen.

PF5=Ctrl

Displays the Control Information screen with the header option you have
selected.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027

The Partner Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field
displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file
for the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field used to select a
Partner ID for which you
are displaying, creating,
modifying, or deleting
records.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Qual
(protected)

A 4-position
alphanumeric field used
to enter the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

User/Partner
protected

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that are used to select
a Partner Relationship for
which you are displaying,
creating, modifying, or
deleting records.

A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to
a Partner ID, and then press PF5 to display the Partner Selection Menu.
Multiple Env ID (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for the interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 29

The Partner Subsystem

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM027

uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Header Option (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field identifying the type of interchange envelope. Valid values
include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, and STX.
Example: ISA = the segment ID for the interchange envelope header segment; GS = the
segment ID for group envelope header segment when an interchange envelope is not used.
Version (protected)
A 12-position field that displays the version associated with this header option, if it exists.

2 - 30

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 1

EDIM015

Purpose
The Control Information – screen 1 enables you to specify control information, required for all
other file maintenance procedures and screens, for a trading partner. You can display, update, add,
or delete control information. After you add this record, Sterling Gentran creates default group and
transaction records.
Note: You can modify default group and transaction records
with customized data or you can use the system default
values.

How to Access
Access the Control Information screen (screen 1) in either of these two ways:
•

From the Interchange Directory, select the header option and press PF5.

•

Type 1.2.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this
functions only if the Partner ID has been established).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 1) for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM015 1.2.2.1___

CONTROL INFORMATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

GENTRAN RESERVED PARTNER
Part ID:!!!GENTRAN-RESERVED-PARTNER-ID-1
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: ___
Version: ____________
Interchange Header Option....: ___ (ISA ICS BG GS UNA UNB SCH STX)
Last Incoming Sequence Number: ______________
EDI Databank Inbound.........: _ (D/N)
Outbound.........: _ (F/D/N)
Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI....: _ (Y/N)
Network Tracking.: _ (Y/N)
Acknowledge Interchange......: _ (Y/N/E)
Errors...........: _ (Y/N)

Last Incoming BG Password....:
Remote ID..(For PLUS)........:
Network ID.(For PLUS)........:
Viewpoint - Exception........:
Reconciliation Delay (days)..:

Enter PF1=Help

__________
Syntax Version...:
________
_______________
_ (Y/N)
Tracking.........:
___

_

_

(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=IDir
PF5=Control
PF6=Next Ctl
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 31

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

Relationship Mode
EDIM015 1.2.2.1___

CONTROL INFORMATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Multiple Envelope Id: ___
Version: ____________
Interchange Header Option....: ISA (ISA ICS BG GS UNA UNB SCH STX)
Last Incoming Sequence Number: ______________
EDI Databank Inbound.........: D (D/N)
Outbound.........: F (F/D/N)
Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI....: N (Y/N)
Network Tracking.: Y (Y/N)
Acknowledge Interchange......: Y (Y/N/E)
Errors...........: Y (Y/N)

Last Incoming BG Password....:
Remote ID..(For PLUS)........:
Network ID.(For PLUS)........:
Viewpoint - Exception........:
Reconciliation Delay (days)..:

Enter PF1=Help

__________
Syntax Version...:
TEST____
TEST___________
_ (Y/N)
Tracking.........:
___

_

_

(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=IDir
PF5=Control
PF6=Next Ctl
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=IDir

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF5=Control

Displays the Control Information screen (screen 2), for the Partner ID and
interchange header option selected. For example, if the ISA interchange
header option is selected for the specified Partner ID, the Control Information
screen (screen 2 – ISA OPTIONS) screen is displayed.

PF6=Next Ctl

Displays the next sequential control record.

PF9=Add

Adds a control record for a new Partner ID being added to the partner profile.
Note: When you add a new Control record, Sterling Gentran
automatically adds default Group and Transaction
records, based on the !!!GENTRAN–RESERVED–
PARTNER– ID–1 (Partner/Qualifier mode)
OR
!!!GENTRAN-RU1/!!!GENTRAN-RP1
(Relationship mode)

PF10=Updt

2 - 32

Updates the control record for an existing Partner ID.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

The Partner Subsystem

PF11=Del

Deletes a control record and its subordinates (i.e., records with the same
Version/Multiple Envelope IDs) for an existing Partner ID for the indicated
header option.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, that indicate
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
that you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 33

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

Multiple Envelope Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined. For example, if you currently run
ISAs with version 004010 and need to test 004020 with the trading partner, you would set
up another ISA control with the version being 004020.
Caution: Setting up partners using the version should only be used
when two like envelopes need to be generated with
different information.
Interchange Header Option (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field identifying the type of interchange envelope to be used for
outbound transactions. The envelope allows you to label an outbound transaction.
standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX. For example, ISA = the segment
ID for the interchange envelope header segment; GS = the segment ID for group envelope
header segment when an interchange envelope is not used.

Sterling Gentran:Structure Installed
Value: GEN = Generic
Last Incoming Sequence Number
A 14-position numeric field defining the control number of the last incoming interchange
received. If left as spaces, sequence checking for this interchange is not done.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – INCREMENTAL or
PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters.
EDI Databank Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank used. Valid values are:
D
N

=
=

Directory only
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter.
Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used. Valid values are:
F
D
N

=
=
=

Full (message store and directory)
Directory only
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter.

2 - 34

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

The Partner Subsystem

Expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI
A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates if interchange acknowledgments are
expected for outbound interchanges. A TA1 acknowledges an ISA interchange, an AC1
acknowledges an ICS interchange, and a UCI acknowledges a UNB interchange
(EDIFACT). Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Yes, expect TA1, AC1, or UCI acknowledgments.
Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to W(aiting).
No, do not expect a TA1, AC1, or UCI acknowledgments.
Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to N(ot required).

Network Tracking
A 1-position field indicating whether network tracking is done. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, network tracking is done.
No, network tracking is not done.

Acknowledge Interchange
A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system whether to create an acknowledgment
(that is, TA1 or AC1) for each inbound interchange. The default value is N (no, do not
create interchange acknowledgments). Valid values are:
Y
N
E

=
=
=

Yes, create interchange acknowledgment.
No, do not create interchange acknowledgment.
Create interchange acknowledgment based on incoming envelope.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter.
Errors
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you create segments identifying
errors in the received transactions (AK3/AK4, A1, USC, UCD). Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, create segments to identify errors.
No, do not create segments to identify errors (default value).

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter.
Note: If errors occur and this field is set to Y, acknowledgments
are generated (even if acknowledgment generation is
turned off at the group and transaction levels).
Last Incoming BG Password
A 10-position alphanumeric field defining the valid password for an incoming BG
segment (interchange header record).
Only applicable if used with the BG PARTNER YES global parameter.
Syntax Version
A 1-position numeric field used to define the Syntax Rules version number of the ISO
9735 to be used. This is only valid for the UNA/UNB header option.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 35

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 1 EDIM015

Remote ID (For PLUS) (For Sterling Gentran:Plus Only)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that is used to link the partner profile to the remote
identifier, if applicable.
Network ID (For PLUS) (For Sterling Gentran:Plus Only)
A 15-position alphanumeric field that is used to link the partner profile to the network
identifier, if applicable.

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed
Viewpoint – Exception
A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management
activity is performed at the interchange level for this partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
blank =

Yes, Exception Management is performed.
No, Exception Management is not performed.
Defaults to the value Y and the Exception Management processing is
controlled by the Configuration File Exception Management Partner
Default Indicator.

Viewpoint – Tracking
A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management
activity is performed at the interchange level for this trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
blank =

Yes, Tracking Management is performed.
No, Tracking Management is not performed.
Defaults to the value Y and the Tracking Management processing is
controlled by the Configuration Field Tracking Management Partner
default indicator.

See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint®
for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception
Management is performed.

2 - 36

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options

EDIM016

Purpose
The Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange segment type identified on screen 1, another screen (screen 2) exists that
identifies the information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can
display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen from the Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing PF5.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, ISA Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM016 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840
Multiple Envelope Id: ISA
Outbound envelope information for ISA segment:

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

Authorization Qual....ISA01: 00
Authorization.ISA02: __________
Security Code Qual....ISA03: 00
Security Code.ISA04: __________
Sender ID Qual........ISA05: ZZ
Sender ID.....ISA06: YOUR_COMPANY___
Receiver ID Qual......ISA07: ZZ
Receiver ID...ISA08: TRADING_PARTNER
Repeat Sep / Stds ID..ISA11: ? or Hex 6F
Version...............ISA12: 00200
Use................: I (A/I/D)
Control Number........ISA13: 000000000 Ack Requested.ISA14: 0 (1=Yes,0=No)
Test or Production....ISA15: P (T/P)
Subelement Separator..ISA16: > or Hex 5C
Element Separator..........: * or Hex 5C
Segment Terminator.........: _ or Hex 15
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 37

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

Relationship Mode
EDIM016 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id:
Outbound envelope information for ISA segment:
Authorization Qual....ISA01:
Security Code Qual....ISA03:
Sender ID Qual........ISA05:
Receiver ID Qual......ISA07:
Repeat Sep / Stds ID..ISA11:
Version...............ISA12:
Control Number........ISA13:
Test or Production....ISA15:
Subelement Separator..ISA16:
Element Separator..........:
Segment Terminator.........:
Enter PF1=Help

__
__
__
__
_ or Hex
_____
_________
_ (T/P)
_ or Hex
_ or Hex
_ or Hex

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

Authorization.ISA02:
Security Code.ISA04:
Sender ID.....ISA06:
Receiver ID...ISA08:
__
Use................:
Ack Requested.ISA14:

__________
__________
_______________
_______________
_
_

(A/I/D)
(1=Yes,0=No)

__
__
__

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the specified trading partner's ISA parameters, you must first return to the Control
Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key.
PF4=Control

Displays the first Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the ISA parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 38

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

The Partner Subsystem

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
that you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.
Authorization Qual
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier associated with the
authorization code your trading partner has assigned to you.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 39

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

Authorization
A 10-position numeric field used to define the authorization code your trading partner has
assigned to you. If you are not sending an authorization code, type 00 for the Qualifier.
Security Code Qual
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier associated with the security
code your trading partner has assigned to you.
Security Code
A 10-position numeric field used to define the security code your trading partner has
assigned to you. If you are not sending a security code, type 00 for the Qualifier.
Sender ID Qual
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner.
Sender ID
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Receiver ID Qual
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment.
Receiver ID
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s interchange ID.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

2 - 40

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

The Partner Subsystem

Repeat Sep / Stds ID
A 1-position field that contains either the repetition separator or the Interchange Control
Standards ID Code. As of ASC X-12 version 004030, the ISA 11 contains the repetition
separator that is to be used for repeating data elements. Sterling Gentran will check the
ISA 12 Interchange Version to determine the correct value for this field. If ISA 12 is less
than 00403, valid values are:
U
=
United States of America
X
=
ANSI Accredited Standards Committee X12
If ISA 12 is 00403 or greater, select any non-alphabetic, non-numeric character not
contained in the EDI data.
Version
A 5-position numeric field defining the version of the EDI standards used to process
interchange control envelopes sent to or received from this trading partner.
Use
A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the Version previously
defined. Valid values are:
A
I
D

=
=
=

blank =

Always use the version designated.
Use the version designated in the input.
Use this version as a default if the input’s identified version cannot be
located in the standards table.
Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter.
Control Number
A 9-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for
generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers
sequentially, adding 1 (one) to the number you type in this field. If you type a zero (0), the
system assigns 1 (one) as the beginning control number for your first interchange. Control
Number is also termed Envelope Reference ID.
Ack Requested
A 1-position numeric field used to set the Acknowledgment Requested field on an
outbound ISA. Valid values are:
1
0

=
=

Yes, interchange acknowledgment requested.
No, interchange acknowledgment not requested.

Test or Production
A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether data is test or production. Valid
values are:
T
P

=
=

Test data.
Production data.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 41

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ISA Options EDIM016

Subelement Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value that separates portions of an outbound element.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value
for that character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields
must have different values.
Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that separates elements in an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, such as * and ^, and the system converts and
enters the hexadecimal value for that character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system converts and
enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields
must have different values.
Segment Terminator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value identifying the end of an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value
for that special character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.

2 - 42

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options

EDIM018

Purpose
This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not
sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, ICS Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM018 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF AN ICS PARTNER
Part ID: ICS-PARTNER
Multiple Envelope Id: ICS
Outbound envelope information for ICS segment:
Element Separator.............ICS01:
Subelement Separator..........ICS02:
Control Standards Identifier..ICS03:
Version.......................ICS04:
Version Use........................:
Sender ID Qualifier...........ICS05:
Sender ID.....................ICS06:
Receiver ID Qualifier.........ICS07:
Receiver ID...................ICS08:
Control Number................ICS11:
Segment Terminator............ICS12:
Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

* or Hex 5C
: or Hex 7A
_ or ____
00200
A (A/I/D)
01
YOUR-ID________
01
TRADING-PARTNER
000000001
_ or Hex 15

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 43

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018

Relationship Mode
EDIM018 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: ICS
Outbound envelope information for ICS segment:
Element Separator.............ICS01:
Subelement Separator..........ICS02:
Control Standards Identifier..ICS03:
Version.......................ICS04:
Version Use........................:
Sender ID Qualifier...........ICS05:
Sender ID.....................ICS06:
Receiver ID Qualifier.........ICS07:
Receiver ID...................ICS08:
Control Number................ICS11:
Segment Terminator............ICS12:
Enter PF1=Help

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

* or Hex 5C
: or Hex 7A
_ or AIAG
00200
A (A/I/D)
01
YOUR-ID________
01
TRADING-PARTNER
000000001
_ or Hex 15

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete ICS parameters for the trading partner, you must first return to the Control Information
screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key.
PF4=Control

Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the ICS parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 44

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018

The Partner Subsystem

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 45

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018

Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the
hexadecimal value for that character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system converts and
enters the special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields
must have different values.
Subelement Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value used to separate portions of an outbound element.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value
for that special character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Subelement Separator and Element Separator fields
must have different values.
Control Standards Identifier
A 1-position or 4-position alphabetic field (long or short) used to define the organization
responsible for the EDI standard used in the interchange. Valid values are:
U
X
E

=
=
=

USA EDI community
ASC X12
EDIFACT

Version
A 5-position numeric field that is used to define the version of the EDI standards used to
process control envelopes sent to or received from this trading partner.

2 - 46

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—ICS Options EDIM018

The Partner Subsystem

Version Use
A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the version previously
defined. Valid values are:
A
I
D

=
=
=

blank =

Always use the version designated.
Use the version designated in the input.
Use this version as a default if the identified version in the input
cannot be located in the standards table.
Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter.
Sender ID Qualifier
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner.
Sender ID
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier.
Receiver ID Qualifier
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment.
Receiver ID
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s interchange ID.
Control Number
A 9-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for
generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers
sequentially, adding 1 (one) to the number you type in this field. If you type a zero (0), the
system assigns 1 (one) as the beginning control number for your first interchange.
Segment Terminator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value used to identify the end of an outbound segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value
for that special character in the second field.
OR
In the second field, type the two-character hexadecimal value, and the system enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 47

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017

Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options

EDIM017

Purpose
This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not
sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen – 2, GS and BG
Options), for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM017 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER
Part ID: BG-PARNTER
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: BG
Version:
Outbound envelope information for GS and BG segments:
Element Separator................:
Segment Terminator...............:

*
'

or Hex 5C
or Hex 7D

Outbound envelope information for BG segment:
Communication ID.............BG01:
Communication Password.......BG02:
Application Sender Code......BG03:
Application Receiver Code....BG04:
Control Number...............BG07:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 48

YOUR-ID___
TP-PASSWD_
6147937900__
6147937155__
00017

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM017 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Multiple Envelope Id: BG
Version:
Outbound envelope information for GS and BG segments:
Element Separator................:
Segment Terminator...............:

*
'

or Hex 5C
or Hex 7D

Outbound envelope information for BG segment:
Communication ID.............BG01:
Communication Password.......BG02:
Application Sender Code......BG03:
Application Receiver Code....BG04:
Control Number...............BG07:

Enter PF1=Help

YOUR-ID___
TP-PASSWD_
6147937900__
6147937155__
00017

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the GS or BG parameters for a trading partner, you must first return to the Control
Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key.
PF4=Control

Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates either the GS or BG parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 49

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.

2 - 50

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—GS and BG Options EDIM017

The Partner Subsystem

Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the
hexadecimal value for that character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Segment Terminator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value
for that special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character
for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Communication ID
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to define your BG Communication ID. This ID is
displayed on the BG Interchange header.
Communication Password
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to define a password agreed upon by you and your
trading partner. This password is displayed on the BG Interchange header.
Application Sender Code
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate your application sender code as it is
displayed on the BG interchange header segment sent to this trading partner.
Application Receiver Code
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate this trading partner's application
receiver code as it is displayed on the BG interchange header.
Control Number
A 5-position numeric field used to designate the beginning control sequence number for
generating outbound interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers
sequentially, adding 1 to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system
assigns 1 as the beginning control number for your first interchange. Control number is
also termed Envelope Reference ID.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 51

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options

EDIM012

Purpose
This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not
sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – UNA Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM012 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER
Part ID: UNA-PARTNER
Multiple Envelope Id: UNA
Outbound envelope information for UNA segment:
Component Element Separator...UNA01:
Element Separator.............UNA02:
Decimal Notation..............UNA03:
Release Indicator.............UNA04:
Repetition Separator..........UNA05:
Segment Terminator............UNA06:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 52

:
+
.
?
*
'

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

or Hex 7A
or Hex 4E
(, OR .)
or Hex 5C
or Hex 7D

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=UNB
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM012 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: UNA
Outbound envelope information for UNA segment:
Component Element Separator...UNA01:
Element Separator.............UNA02:
Decimal Notation..............UNA03:
Release Indicator.............UNA04:
Repetition Separator..........UNA05:
Segment Terminator............UNA06:

Enter PF1=Help

:
+
.
?
*
'

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

or Hex 7A
or Hex 4E
(, OR .)
or Hex 5C
or Hex 7D

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=UNB
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the trading partner's UNA outbound parameters, you must first return to the Control
Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key.
PF4=Control

Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=UNB

Displays the UNB screen for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the UNA parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 53

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.

2 - 54

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012

The Partner Subsystem

Component Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that is used to separate the individual component elements in a data element.
In the first field, type the special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special
character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Component Element Separator and Element
Separator fields must have different values.
Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the
hexadecimal value for that special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Component Element Separator and Element
Separator fields must have different values.
Decimal Notation
A 1-position alphabetic field used to type either a comma (,) or a period (.) to indicate the
decimal point in a numeric field.
Release Indicator
A 1-position alphanumeric field used to define a unique character that restores a
syntactical character back to its original meaning when used in conjunction with that
syntactical separator or terminator character in a document.
Repetition Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field OR a 2-position hexadecimal field, used to define
the value that is to be used to separate the occurrences of each element in a repeating data
element.
In the first field, type the special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value so that the system converts the special
character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 55

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNA Options EDIM012

Segment Terminator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position hexadecimal field used to define
the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type a special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for
that special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character
for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.

2 - 56

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options

EDIM019

Purpose
This Control Information (screen 2) is used for creating outbound UNB envelopes for syntax
versions 1, 2, and 3. If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this
screen. If you plan to send outbound documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – UNB Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM019 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER
Part ID: UNB-PARTNER
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Version:
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment:
Syntax ID.............UNB01:
Sender ID.............UNB02:
Rev Routing Address...UNB02:
Recipient ID..........UNB03:
Routing Address.......UNB03:
Control Reference.....UNB05:
Recipients Password...UNB06:
Appl Reference........UNB07:
Priority Code.........UNB08:
Comm Agreement ID.....UNB10:
Test Indicator........UNB11:
Enter PF1=Help

____
Version..:
___________________________________ Qual:
______________
___________________________________ Qual:
______________
______________
______________
Qual:
______________
_
Ack Requested..UNB09:
___________________________________
_ (1=Yes, Blank=No)

1
____
____

__
_

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 57

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019

Relationship Mode
EDIM019 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment:
Syntax ID.............UNB01:
Sender ID.............UNB02:
Rev Routing Address...UNB02:
Recipient ID..........UNB03:
Routing Address.......UNB03:
Control Reference.....UNB05:
Recipients Password...UNB06:
Appl Reference........UNB07:
Priority Code.........UNB08:
Comm Agreement ID.....UNB10:
Test Indicator........UNB11:
Enter PF1=Help

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

____
Version..:
___________________________________ Qual:
______________
___________________________________ Qual:
______________
______________
______________
Qual:
______________
_
Ack Requested..UNB09:
___________________________________
_ (1=Yes, Blank=No)

1
____
____

__
_

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Control

Displays the previous Control Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 58

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019

The Partner Subsystem

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.
Syntax ID
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., UNO). The
fourth position in this field contains the character set indicator. Valid values are: A, B, C,
D, E, and F.
Version
A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax
identifier.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 59

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019

Sender ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for your interchange sender.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your Sender ID as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner.
Rev Routing Address
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to identify your Reverse Routing Address.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Recipient ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for the trading partner’s
interchange.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment.
Routing Address
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to identify your trading partner’s recipient routing
address.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

2 - 60

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—UNB Options EDIM019

The Partner Subsystem

Control Reference
A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning control sequence number for
generating interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially,
adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type 0 (zero), the system assigns
1 as the beginning interchange control number.
Note: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this
value as alphanumeric and does not automatically
increment the value.
Recipients Password
A 14-position alphabetic field used to define the password to the trading partner's system
or third party network.
Qual
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to indicate the Qualifier associated with the trading
partner's system or third party network.
Appl Reference
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange
contains only one type of message.
Priority Code
A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this trading partner's processing priority
code as mutually agreed upon.
Ack Requested
A 1-position numeric field used to designate that you want this trading partner to
acknowledge your request. Valid values are:
1
=
blank =

Yes, you request that trading partner acknowledges your request
No, you do not expect an acknowledgment (default value)

Comm Agreement ID
A 34-position alphanumeric field used to define the type of communication agreement
controlling the interchange (e.g., Customs or ECE agreement).
Test Indicator
A 1-position numeric field used to define to the system whether the interchange is in test
mode or production mode. Valid values are:
1
=
blank =

Interchange is in test mode
Interchange is in production mode

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 61

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4

Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 1 / Syntax Version 4

EDIM021

Purpose
This Control Information screen (Part 1) is used for creating UNB envelopes for syntax version 4.
If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to
send outbound documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen, for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM021 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 1

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER
Part ID: UNB-PARTNER
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Version:
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 1:
Syntax ID................UNB01: ____
Version..: 4
Directory Version Nbr....UNB01: ______
Character encoding ......UNB01: ___
Sender ID ...............UNB02: _________________________________ Qual: ____
Sender Internal ID.......UNB02: _________________________________
Sender Internal Sub-ID...UNB02: _________________________________
Recipient ID.............UNB03: _________________________________ Qual: ____
Recipient Internal ID....UNB03: _________________________________
Recipient Internal SubID.UNB03: _________________________________
Control Reference
.....UNB05: ______________

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 62

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=Control-2
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM021 The Partner Sub-

Relationship Mode
EDIM021 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 1

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Version:
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 1:
Syntax ID................UNB01: ____
Version..: 4
Directory Version Nbr....UNB01: ______
Character encoding ......UNB01: ___
Sender ID ...............UNB02: _________________________________ Qual: ____
Sender Internal ID.......UNB02: _________________________________
Sender Internal Sub-ID...UNB02: _________________________________
Recipient ID.............UNB03: _________________________________ Qual: ____
Recipient Internal ID....UNB03: _________________________________
Recipient Internal SubID.UNB03: _________________________________
Control Reference
.....UNB05: ______________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=Control-2
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Control

Displays the Control Information screen (screen 1).

PF5=Control – 2

Displays the Control Information – UNB Part 2 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 63

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.
Syntax ID
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., UNO).
Version
A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax
identifier.

2 - 64

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM021 The Partner SubDirectory Version Nbr
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to define the Service Code List Directory version
number.
Character encoding
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the Character encoding value.
Sender ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define an ID for your interchange sender.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for your sender identification
as it is displayed on the interchange header segment sent to this trading partner.
Sender Internal ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange sender internal
identification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Sender Internal Sub-ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange sender internal subidentification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 65

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 1 / Syntax Version 4

Recipient ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define this trading partner's interchange
identification code.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment.
Recipient Internal ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange recipient internal
identification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Recipient Internal Sub-ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the interchange recipient internal subidentification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Control Reference
A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning control sequence number for
generating interchange envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially,
adding one (1) to the number you enter in this field. If you type 0 (zero), the system
assigns 1 as the beginning interchange control number.
Note: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this
value as alphanumeric and does not automatically increment
the value.

2 - 66

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM022 The Partner Sub-

Control Information Screen—UNB Options
Part 2 / Syntax Version 4

EDIM022

Purpose
This Control Information screen (Part 2) is used for creating UNB envelopes for syntax version 4.
If you are not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to
send outbound documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information – UNB Part 2 screen, for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM022 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 2

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF A UNB PARTNER
Part ID: UNB-PARTNER
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Version:
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 2:
Recipient Password.......UNB06:
Appl Reference...........UNB07:
Priority Code ...........UNB08:
Comm Agreement ID........UNB10:
Test Indicator...........UNB11:

Enter PF1=Help

__________
Qual: __
ORDERS____
_
Ack Requested..UNB09: _
___________________________________
_
(1=Yes, Blank=No)

PF3=Exit PF4=Control-1 PF5=Gdir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 67

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4

Relationship Mode
EDIM022 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION - UNB PART 2

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Multiple Envelope Id: UNB
Version:
Outbound envelope information for UNB segment Part 2:
Recipient Password.......UNB06:
Appl Reference...........UNB07:
Priority Code ...........UNB08:
Comm Agreement ID........UNB10:
Test Indicator...........UNB11:

Enter PF1=Help

__________
Qual: __
ORDERS____
_
Ack Requested..UNB09: _
___________________________________
_
(1=Yes, Blank=No)

PF3=Exit PF4=Control-1 PF5=Gdir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Control–1

Displays the Control Information – UNB Part 1 screen.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the UNB parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 68

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4 EDIM022 The Partner SubJump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
is a text name that may
help to further identify
the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
value for the Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.
Recipient Password
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define the application password to the partner's
division, department, or sectional system, if required.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the interchange header segment.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 69

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen—UNB Options Part 2 / Syntax Version 4

Appl Reference
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange
contains only one type of message.
Priority Code
A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this trading partner's processing priority
code as mutually agreed upon.
Ack Requested
A 1-position numeric field used to designate that you want this trading partner to
acknowledge your request. Valid values are:
1
=
blank =

Yes, you request that trading partner acknowledges your request
No, you do not expect an acknowledgment (default value)

Comm Agreement ID
A 34-position alphanumeric field used to define the type of communication agreement
controlling the interchange (e.g., Customs or ECE agreement).
Test Indicator
A 1-position numeric field used to define to the system whether the interchange is in test
mode or production mode. Valid values are:
1
=
blank =

2 - 70

Interchange is in test mode
Interchange is in production mode

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options

EDIM013

Purpose
This Control Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – SCH Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM013 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF A SCH PARTNER
Part ID: SCH-PARTNER
Multiple Envelope Id: SCH
Outbound envelope information for SCH segment:
Segment Code Separator........SCH01:
Component Element Separator...SCH02:
Element Separator.............SCH03:
Segment Terminator............SCH04:
Release Indicator.............SCH05:
Decimal Notation...................:

=
:
+
'
?
.

or
or
or
or

Hex
Hex
Hex
Hex

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

7E
7A
4E
7D

(, or .)

MAKE CHANGES, AND HIT PF10 TO UPDATE
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=STX
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 71

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013

Relationship Mode
EDIM013 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: SCH
Outbound envelope information for SCH segment:
Segment Code Separator........SCH01:
Component Element Separator...SCH02:
Element Separator.............SCH03:
Segment Terminator............SCH04:
Release Indicator.............SCH05:
Decimal Notation...................:

Enter PF1=Help

=
:
+
'
?
.

or
or
or
or

Hex
Hex
Hex
Hex

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

7E
7A
4E
7D

(, or .)

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=STX
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the trading partner's SCH or STX outbound parameters, you must first return to the
Control Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4.
PF4=Control

Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=STX

Displays the STX screen for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the SCH parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 72

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013

The Partner Subsystem

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier for
the Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 73

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013

Segment Code Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define
the value that is used to separate the segments in a composite data element.
In the first field, type the special character. The default value is = for ANA
TRADACOMS.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special
character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Component Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define
the value that is used to separate the component data elements in a composite data
element.
In the first field, type the special character. The default value is “:” for ANA
TRADACOMS.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts the special
character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Component Element Separator and Element
Separator fields must have different values.
Element Separator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field, used to define
the value that is used to separate elements in an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type the special character, and the system converts and enters the
hexadecimal value for that special character. The default value is + for ANA
TRADACOMS.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system converts and enters the
special character for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that
correspond to the hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Note: The Component Element Separator and Element
Separator fields must have different values.

2 - 74

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—SCH Options EDIM013

The Partner Subsystem

Segment Terminator
Either a 1-position alphanumeric field, OR a 2-position alphanumeric field used to define
the value used to identify the end of an outbound data segment.
In the first field, type a special character, and the system enters the hexadecimal value for
that special character.
OR
In the second field, type the hexadecimal value, and the system enters the special character
for that hexadecimal value. If no printable characters exist that correspond to the
hexadecimal value, the character field is blank.
Release Indicator
A 1-position alphanumeric field used to define a unique character that restores a
syntactical character back to its original meaning when used in conjunction with that
syntactical separator or terminator character in a document.
Decimal Notation
A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter either a comma (,) or a period (.) to indicate the
decimal point in a numeric field. The default value is “.” for ANA TRADACOMS.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 75

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options

EDIM014

Purpose
This Control Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
For each interchange identified on screen 1, a separate screen (screen 2) exists that identifies the
information needed to generate that interchange segment. From screen 2, you can display or
change any of the fields shown for this outbound interchange envelope.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Control Information screen (screen 2 – STX Options), for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM014 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF A STX PARTNER
Part ID: STX-PARTNER
Multiple Envelope Id: STX
Outbound envelope information for STX segment:
Syntax Identifier.............STX01:
Syntax Version................STX01:
Sender ID Code................STX02:
Sender ID Name................STX02:
Recipient ID Code.............STX03:
Recipient ID Name.............STX03:
Senders Reference ...(SNRF)...STX05:
Recipients Reference (RCRF)...STX06:
Application Reference.........STX07:
Transmission Priority Code....STX08:
Network Identification.(For PLUS)..:
Enter PF1=Help

2 - 76

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

ANA_ (ANA or ANAA)
1
1234567890____
___________________________________
0987654321____
___________________________________
YOUR-REF______
TP-REF________
INVOICE_______
_
__________

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM014 __________

CONTROL INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: STX
Outbound envelope information for STX segment:
Syntax Identifier.............STX01:
Syntax Version................STX01:
Sender ID Code................STX02:
Sender ID Name................STX02:
Recipient ID Code.............STX03:
Recipient ID Name.............STX03:
Senders Reference ...(SNRF)...STX05:
Recipients Reference (RCRF)...STX06:
Application Reference.........STX07:
Transmission Priority Code....STX08:
Network Identification.(For PLUS)..:
Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

ANA_ (ANA or ANAA)
1
1234567890____
___________________________________
0987654321____
___________________________________
YOUR-REF______
TP-REF________
INVOICE_______
_
__________

PF3=Exit PF4=Control
PF5=GDir
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the trading partner's STX outbound parameters, you must first return to the Control
Information screen (screen 1) by pressing the PF4 key.
PF4=Control

Displays the Control Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the STX parameters for an existing Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 77

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for the interchange
record within this partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one control with the same header
option is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple
controls with the same header option need to be defined.
Syntax Identifier
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Controlling Agency (e.g., ANA or
ANAA).
Syntax Version
A 1-position numeric field used to define the version number associated with the syntax
identifier.

2 - 78

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014

The Partner Subsystem

Sender ID Code
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier code.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Sender ID Name
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the name associated with the sender
identification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Recipient ID Code
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define this trading partner's interchange
identification code.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Recipient ID Name
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the name associated with the recipient
identification.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Senders Reference
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter the sender transmission code.
Recipients Reference
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter the recipient transmission code.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 79

The Partner Subsystem

Control Information Screen 2—STX Options EDIM014

Application Reference
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a message identification if the interchange
contains only one type of message.
Transmission Priority Code
A 1-position alphanumeric field used to enter this partner's transmission priority code as
mutually agreed upon.
Network Identification (For PLUS)
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the network identifier.

2 - 80

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM020

The Partner Subsystem

Group Directory

EDIM020

Purpose
The Group Directory allows you to display a list of all group records for a selected partner.

How to Access
Access the Group Directory in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 3 to select Group Directory from the Partner Selection Menu.

•

Press PF5 from the second Control Information screen.

•

Type 1.2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship
(user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM020 1.2.3_____

GROUP DIRECTORY

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840
Qual:
Multiple Envelope Id: ___
Multiple
Accept
A Group ID
Env Id
Version
Compliance Version
Flag
_
!!!DFT
ISA
004030
Y
_
BF
ISA
004010
Y
_
FA
ISA
002040
Y
_
IN
ISA
003050
Y
_
PO
ISA
003020
Y
_
PT
ISA
003050
Y
_
SH
ISA
003010
Y
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Ctrl
PF5=Group
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Send
Flag
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

2 - 81

The Partner Subsystem

Group Directory EDIM020

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM020 1.2.3_____

GROUP DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
PARTNER: VENDOR-1

YOUR COMPANY NAME
USER:
YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Envelope Id: ___
Multiple
Accept
A Group ID
Env Id
Version
Compliance Version
Flag
_
!!!DFT
ISA
004030
Y
_
BF
ISA
004010
Y
_
FA
ISA
002040
Y
_
IN
ISA
003050
Y
_
PO
ISA
003020
Y
_
PT
ISA
003050
Y
_
SH
ISA
003010
Y
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Ctrl
PF5=Group
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Send
Flag
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Ctrl

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF5=Group

Displays the partner Group Information screen for the selected Group ID.

Screen Actions
Screen actions are displayed at the top of the Group Directory. The following table describes how
to perform the screen action functions associated with the partner Group Directory.

To perform
this action...
To view the Group
Information screen for a
functional group selected on
the Group Directory

2 - 82

Associated
with this
Do this...
screen
action...
Select
Type S next to the Group ID you want
to view on the Group Directory, and
press PF5.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM020

The Partner Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

USER/
PARTNER
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Envelope Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to
the Group ID, and then press PF5 to display a Group Information record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 83

The Partner Subsystem

Group Directory EDIM020

Group ID (protected)
Displays the Group ID as defined for the Partner ID displayed. This is the functional group
identification as assigned by the standards.
Multiple Env Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this
interchange record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA,
ICS, BG, GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID
is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple groups
with the same Group ID need to be defined.
Note: Version is not valid for Group ID of !!!DFT.
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Compliance Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays the version from the standards file to be
used in compliance checking for the group record. This could also be an Implementation
Convention.
Note: This is the version field used by inbound and outbound
mapping for map selection.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter.
Global parameter, PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP, instructs both Editors to
only look at this field to get the version for compliance checking. If this field is incorrect
or missing, the Editors suspend the group.
Accept Flag (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of
group from your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner.
No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner
(default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: The value N literally prevents the acceptance of this
group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of a
particular group from a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.

2 - 84

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM020

The Partner Subsystem

Send Flag (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of
group to your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I send this type of group to my trading partners.
No, I do not send this group to my trading partners (default value).
Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this
group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of
a particular group to a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 85

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen EDIM030

Group Information Screen

EDIM030

Purpose
The Group Information screen allows you to identify separate types of processing for various
functional groups. For example, you can verify which groups can be sent or received, or specify
control numbers within a functional group.
The system automatically creates a default group record when you add a new Partner Control
record. If you intend to use the default group record, you should update the record to reflect the
appropriate information for your trading partner. However, we strongly recommend creating a
separate group record for each type of functional group that is sent or received.

How to Access
Access the Group Information screen by doing one of the following:
•

Type S to select a Group ID from the Group Directory and press Enter.

•

Type 1.2.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM030 1.2.3.1___

Part ID.:
Group ID:

GROUP INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
ISG DOMESTIC PARTNER ISSUE M10840
!!!DFT
Multiple Env Id: ISA

XXX

Qual:
Version:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

____________

Compliance Version.................: 004030______
Version Use: I (A/I/D)
Accept Flag........................: Y (Y/N)
Send Flag..: Y (Y/N)
Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF...........: Y (Y/N)
Acknowledge Group or Transaction...: T (G/T)
Acknowledgment overdue after.......: 000:00 (HHH:MM)
Alternate Acknowledgment Partner...: ___________________________________
Alternate Partner Qualifier........: ______________
Last Incoming Control Number.......: ______________

EDI Databank Inbound...............:
Viewpoint - Exception..............:
Enter PF1=Help

2 - 86

D
_

(D/N)
(Y/N)

Outbound...:
Tracking...:

D
_

(D/N)
(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=GDir
PF5=Group
PF6=Next Grp
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen EDIM030

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM030 1.2.3.1___

User....:
Group ID:

GROUP INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY
PO
Multiple Env Id:

ISA

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version: ____________

Compliance Version.................: 004030______
Version Use: I (A/I/D)
Accept Flag........................: N (Y/N)
Send Flag..: Y (Y/N)
Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF...........: Y (Y/N)
Acknowledge Group or Transaction...: _ (G/T)
Acknowledgment overdue after.......: ___:__ (HHH:MM)
Alternate Acknowledgment User......: ___________________________________
Alternate Acknowledgment Partner...: ______________
Last Incoming Control Number.......: ______________

EDI Databank Inbound...............:
Viewpoint - Exception..............:
Enter PF1=Help

D
_

(D/N)
(Y/N)

Outbound...:
Tracking...:

D
_

(D/N)
(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=GDir
PF5=Group
PF6=Next Grp
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To display a different group definition, type a partial or complete Group ID in the Group ID field,
and press Enter.
PF4=GDir

Displays the Group Directory for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Group

Displays the second screen of group information for the specified Group ID.

PF6=Next Grp

Displays the next functional group record for this partner.

PF9=Add

Adds the new group record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF11=Del

Deletes an existing group record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 87

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen EDIM030

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Group ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Group ID as defined for the Partner ID
displayed. This is the functional group identification as assigned by the standards.
Multiple Env Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic field that identifies the envelope type for this interchange
record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.

2 - 88

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen EDIM030

The Partner Subsystem

Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID
is needed. This is an optional field in the key and should only be used if multiple groups
with the same Group ID need to be defined.
Note: Version is not valid for Group ID of !!!DFT.
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Compliance Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the version from the standards file to be
used in compliance checking for the group record.
Note: This is the version field used by inbound and outbound
mapping for map selection.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter.
Global parameter, PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP, instructs both Editors to
only look at this field to get the version for compliance checking. If this field is incorrect
or missing, the Editors suspends the group.
Version Use
A 1-position alphabetic field used to tell the system when to use the version defined
above. Valid values are:
A
I
D

=
=
=

blank =

Always use the version designated.
Use the version designated in the input.
Use this version as a default if the identified version cannot be located
in the standards table.
Defaults to the value I, use the version designated in the input.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER VERSION global parameter.
Accept Flag
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of
group from your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner.
No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner
(default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering a value N literally prevents the acceptance of
this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of
a particular group from a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 89

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen EDIM030

Send Flag
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of
group to your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I send this type of group to my trading partners.
No, I do not send of this group to my trading partners (default value).
Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this
group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of
a particular group to a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.
Expect a AK1, B5, or UCF
A 1-position alphanumeric field indicating whether group acknowledgments are expected
for outbound groups. Valid values are:
Y

=

Yes, expect AK1, B5, or UCF acknowledgments. Databank
Acknowledgement Status will be initially set to W (waiting).
N
=
No, do not expect AK1, B5, or UCF acknowledgments. Databank
Acknowledgement Status will be initially set to N (not required).
Acknowledge Group or Transaction
A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether to acknowledge inbound
transactions at the group or transaction level. Valid values are:
G
T

=
=

blank =

Group (AK1/AK9, B5, UCF)
Transaction (AK2/AK5, UCM)
No acknowledgements will be generated.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter.
Acknowledgment overdue after (hours/minutes)
A 5-position numeric field used to enter the number of hours and minutes after which an
acknowledgment is considered overdue. The format is HHH:MM.
Used in databank reporting. Used in reconciliation with received acknowledgments and
outbound groups.
Note: A blank value in this field is considered to be a value of 0
hours.

2 - 90

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen EDIM030

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Alternate
Acknowledgment
Partner

A 35-position
alphanumeric field that
identifies an alternative
acknowledgment
partner (i.e., an alias for
you or your trading
partner), designated so
that acknowledgments
received with Sender
IDs different than the
documents sent can be
reconciled. Example:
Send Document to a
division and receive an
acknowledgment from
their Corporate.

Alternate
Acknowledgment
User

A 15-position field used
with the Alternate
Acknowledgement
Partner field. Together,
these fields identify an
alternate partner
relationship designated so
those acknowledgements
received with Sender IDs
different from the
documents sent can be
reconciled.

Alternate Partner
Qualifier

A 4-position field used
to indicate the Qualifier
associated with the
alternative
acknowledgment
partner, if applicable.
This field is used in
association with the
Alternate
Acknowledgment
Partner field to
reconcile
acknowledgments
received with different
Sender IDs than the
documents sent.

Alternate
Acknowledgment
Partner

A 15-position field used
with the Alternate
Acknowledgement User
field. Together, these
fields identify an alternate
partner relationship
designated so those
acknowledgements
received with Sender IDs
different from the
documents sent can be
reconciled.

Last Incoming Control Number
A 9-position numeric field defining the control number of the last incoming group
received. This value is used to verify whether inbound groups with this Group ID have
sequential control numbers. If this field is blank, no sequence checking is performed.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–INCREMENTAL or
PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 91

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen EDIM030

EDI Databank Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank to be used inbound. Valid
values are:
D
=
Directory only (Audit)
N
=
None
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter.
EDI Databank Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used outbound. Valid
values are:
D
N

=
=

Directory only (Audit)
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK LEVEL global parameter.

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed
Viewpoint – Exception
A 1-position field indicating whether to perform Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception
Management activity at the group level for this trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
blank =

Yes, perform Exception Management.
No, do not perform Exception Management.
Defaults to the value Y, the Exception Management processing is
controlled by the Configuration File Exception Management Partner
Default Indicator.

See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/
OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception Management is
performed.
Tracking
A 1-position field indicating whether to perform Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking
Management activity at the group level for this trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
blank =

2 - 92

Yes, perform Tracking Management.
No, do not perform Tracking Management.
Defaults to the value Y, the Tracking Management processing is
controlled by the Configuration File Tracking Management Partner
Default Indicator.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—BAT Options

EDIM031

Purpose
This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate group screen (screen 2) exists for each interchange segment. From screen 2, you can
display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope.
A default group is automatically created when you add a new Partner Control record. You can
modify this default group record or use it unchanged.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Group Information screen. The group screen that
displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control
Information (screen 1).

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (BAT options), for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM031 __________

Part ID.:
Group Id:

GROUP INFORMATION

XXX

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
INVOIC
Multiple Env. Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

Outbound envelope information for BAT segment:
Message Reference Number......BAT01:
Controlling Agency.................:

000000000001
UN

Accept BAT Inbound.................:
Permit BAT Outbound................:

Y
Y

Transaction Segment ID.............:
Message Reference Number...........:

___ ( /MHD)
____________

GROUP UPDATED
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

(Y/N)
(Y/N)

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

PF6=Next Grp

2 - 93

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031

Relationship Mode
EDIM031 __________

User...:
Group Id:

GROUP INFORMATION

XXX

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY
INVOIC
Multiple Env Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

Outbound envelope information for BAT segment:
Message Reference Number......BAT01:
Controlling Agency.................:

000000000001
UN

Accept BAT Inbound.................:
Permit BAT Outbound................:

Y
Y

Transaction Segment ID.............:
Message Reference Number...........:

___ ( /MHD)
____________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

(Y/N)
(Y/N)

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

PF6=Next Grp

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the trading partner's BAT parameters, you must first return to the Group Information
(screen 1) by pressing PF4.

2 - 94

PF4=Group

Displays the Group Information (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=TDir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Next Grp

Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031

The Partner Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Group ID (protected)
Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID for the Group as defined for the Partner ID
displayed at the top of the screen.
Multiple Env Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange
record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 95

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031

Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID
is needed. The version resulted from the value specified on the Group Information (screen
1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Message Reference Number
A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for
generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding
one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as
the beginning transaction control number.
Controlling Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency
controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type.
Accept BAT Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of
group from your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I receive this type of group from my trading partner.
No, I do not accept this type of group from my trading partner
(default value). Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of
this group. Use only when you wish to prohibit receipt of
a particular group from a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.
Permit BAT Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of
group to your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I send this type of group to my Trading Partners
No, I do not send of this group to my trading partners (default value).
Prohibited groups are placed in the Suspense file.

Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER GROUP global parameter.
Caution: Entering a value N literally prevents the sending of this
group. Use only when you wish to prohibit the sending of
a particular group to a trading partner.

2 - 96

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—BAT Options EDIM031

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Segment ID
A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. Valid values are:
MHD for TRADACOMS, or spaces. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of
transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a
specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists
for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction
Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific
transaction or !!!DFT record is used.
Message Reference Number
A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for
generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding
one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as
the beginning transaction control number. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing
of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a
specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists
for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction
Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific
transaction or !!!DFT record is used.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 97

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032

Group Information Screen—UNG Options

EDIM032

Purpose
This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate group screen (screen 2) exists for each interchange segment. From screen 2, you can
display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope.
The system automatically adds a default group when you add a new Partner Control record. You
can modify this default group record or use it unchanged.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen from the Group Information (screen 1) by pressing PF5. The group screen that
displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control
Information (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (UNG options), for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM032 __________

Part ID.:
Group ID:

GROUP INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF A UNA PARTNER
UNA-PARTNER
INVOIC
Multiple Env Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version:

UNA

Outbound envelope information for UNG segment:

2 - 98

Functional Group ID...UNG01:
Sender ID.............UNG02:
Recipients ID.........UNG03:
Reference Number......UNG05:
Controlling Agency....UNG06:
Version Number........UNG07:
Application Password..UNG08:

INVOIC
YOUR-ID__________________________ Qual: ____
TRADING-PARTNER__________________ Qual: ____
00000000000001
E__
090
Release: 1__
Association: ______
______________

Transaction Segment ID:

___

( /UNH)

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

Reference Number:

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

______________

PF6=Next Grp

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM032 __________

User...:
Group ID:

GROUP INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY
INVOIC
Multiple Env Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

UNA

Outbound envelope information for UNG segment:
Functional Group ID...UNG01: INVOIC
Sender ID.............UNG02: YOUR-ID____________________________ Qual: ____
Recipients ID.........UNG03: TRADING-PARTNER____________________ Qual: ____
Reference Number......UNG05: 00000000000001
Controlling Agency....UNG06: E__
Version Number........UNG07: 090
Release: 1__
Association: ______
Application Password..UNG08: ______________
Transaction Segment ID:

___

( /UNH)

Reference Number:

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

______________

PF6=Next Grp

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To delete the trading partner's UNG parameters, you must first return to the Group Information
(screen 1) by pressing PF4.
PF4=Group

Displays the Group Information (screen 1) for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=TDir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Next Grp

Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 99

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Header Option

A 3-position field
identifying the interchange
envelope. This field is used
to restrict the group records
that are displayed on this
screen.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

2 - 100

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032

The Partner Subsystem

Group ID (protected)
Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID that identifies the Group as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Multiple Env Id (protected)
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange
record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group exists with the same
Group ID. The version results when a value is entered on the Group Information (screen).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Functional Group ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to display the functional group identification as
defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered).
Sender ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define your interchange identifier.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the Sender ID as it is
displayed on the group header segment (UNG) sent to this trading partner.
Recipients ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to define the trading partner’s Interchange ID.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to define the Qualifier for the trading partner as it is
displayed on the group header segment (UNG).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 101

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—UNG Options EDIM032

Reference Number
A 14-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control number for
generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding
one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as
the beginning transaction control number.
Caution: If you do not enter leading zeros, the system regards this
value as alphanumeric and does not automatically
increment the value.
To prevent the generation of optional UNG envelopes,
leave this field blank.
Controlling Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency
controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type.
Version Number
A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the
functional group.
Release
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current
version number.
Association
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code assigned by the association
responsible for the design and maintenance of the message type.
Application Password
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to define the application password to the partner's
division, department, or sectional system, if required.
Transaction Segment ID
A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. The purpose of
this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction
type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more
than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this
feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference Number must be
present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. The valid value for
this field is UNH for EDIFACT.
Reference Number
A 14-position (if EDIFACT) numeric field used to define the beginning sequence control
number for generating control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers
sequentially, adding one (1) to the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the
system assigns 1 as the beginning transaction control number.
The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather
than transaction type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be
defined or if more than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is
desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Message Reference
Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used.

2 - 102

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—GS Options

EDIM033

Purpose
This Group Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not sending
documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate Group Information screen (screen 2) exists for each group segment. From screen 2, you
can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound group envelope.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Group Information (screen 1). The group screen that
displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control
Information (screen 1). A default group is automatically added when you add a new Partner
Control record. You can modify this default group record or use it unchanged.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Information screen (GS options), for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM033 __________

Partner ID:
Group ID..:

GROUP INFORMATION

XXX

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
ISA–PARTNER
PO
Multiple Env Id: BG

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual...:
Version:

Outbound envelope information for GS segment:
Functional Group ID............GS01:
Applications Senders Code......GS02:
Applications Receivers Code....GS03:
Control Number.................GS06:
Responsible Agency Code........GS07:
Version........................GS08:

PO
1234567890___
0987654321___
000000001
X_
002040________

Transaction Segment ID.........: __ ( /ST)
Transaction Control Number.....: _________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

PF6=Next Grp

2 - 103

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033

Relationship Mode
EDIM033 __________

User....:
Group ID:

GROUP INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY
PO
Multiple Env Id:

ISA

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:

Outbound envelope information for GS segment:
Functional Group ID............GS01:
Applications Senders Code......GS02:
Applications Receivers Code....GS03:
Control Number.................GS06:
Responsible Agency Code........GS07:
Version........................GS08:

PO
STERLING_______
XYZ____________
000000227
X_
____________

Transaction Segment ID.............:
Transaction Control Number.........:

___ ( /ST)
_________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF10=Updt

PF5=TDir
PF14=Info

PF6=Next Grp

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Group

Displays the Group Information screen for the Partner ID selected. To delete
the GS parameters for a trading partner, you must first return to the Group
Information (screen 1) by pressing PF4.

PF5=TDir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Next Grp

Displays the next group record defined for this Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing group record defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

2 - 104

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033

The Partner Subsystem

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Partner ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Group ID (protected)
Displays a 6-position alphanumeric ID that identifies the group as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Multiple Env Id
Displays a 3-position alphabetic ID that identifies the envelope type for this interchange
record within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS,
UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one group with the same Group ID
is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Group Information (screen
1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5 for details on using this feature
for Editors and Mappers.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 105

The Partner Subsystem

Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033

Functional Group ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field displays the functional group identification as defined for
the Partner ID displayed. This field is a display of the Group ID from the key.
Applications Senders Code
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate your application sender code as it is
displayed on the GS group envelope sent to this trading partner.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Applications Receivers Code
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to designate this trading partner's application
receiver code as it is displayed on the GS group envelope.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Control Number
A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning group control number for group
control envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to the
number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the beginning
group control number.
Responsible Agency Code
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency
controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type. Valid
values are: X – ASC X12 and T – TDCC.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used by the envelope generation program when creating
GS Envelopes outbound. If this field is left blank, the envelope generation program uses
the compliance version from the Group Information (screen 1) instead.

2 - 106

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Information Screen—GS Options EDIM033

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Segment ID
A 3-position alphabetic field used to define the Transaction Segment ID. The purpose of
this field is to permit sequencing of transactions outbound by group rather than transaction
type. This is only important if a specific transaction record is not to be defined, or if more
than one transaction type exists for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this
feature, both the Transaction Segment ID and Transaction Control Number must be
present. Otherwise, the specific transaction or !!!DFT record is used. The valid value is ST
for American ASC X12/TDCC.
Transaction Control Number
A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence number for generating
transaction envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, adding one (1) to
the number you type in this field. If you type zero (0), the system assigns 1 as the
beginning transaction control number. The purpose of this field is to permit sequencing of
transactions outbound by group rather than transaction type. This is only important if a
specific transaction record is not to be defined or if more than one transaction type exists
for a group and sequencing by group is desired. To use this feature, both the Transaction
Segment ID and Transaction Control Number must be present. Otherwise, the specific
transaction or !!!DFT record is used.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 107

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM025

Transaction Directory

EDIM025

Purpose
The Transaction Directory allows you to display a list of all transaction records for a selected
partner.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways:
•

On the Partner Selection Menu, type 4 to select Transaction Directory and press
Enter.

•

Press PF5 from the Group Information screen (screen 2).

•

Type 1.2.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier
Select
EDIM025 1.2.4_____

TRANSACTION DIRECTORY

XXX

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISA-PARTNER
Qual:
Multiple Env Id: ___
Multiple
Accept
A
Trans ID Rlse# Env Id
Version
Group ID
Flag
_
!!!DFT
ISA
Y
_
832
ISA
SC
Y
_
850
ISA
PO
Y
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT TRANS ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=GDir
PF5=Trans
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

2 - 108

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Send
Flag
Y
Y
Y

T/P
P
T
T

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Directory EDIM025

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM025 1.2.4_____

TRANSACTION DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User:
YOUR COMPANY
Multiple Env Id: ___
Multiple
Accept
A
Trans ID Rlse# Env Id
Version
Group ID
Flag
_
!!!DFT
ISA
Y
_
832
ISA
SC
Y
_
850
ISA
PO
Y
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT TRANS ENTER AN S BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=GDir
PF5=Trans
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Send
Flag
Y
Y
Y

T/P
P
T
T

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Partner Transaction Directory. The following
table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action...
Retrieve the Partner
Transaction Information
screen for a transaction set on
the Partner Transaction
Directory

Associated
with this
Do this...
screen
action...
Select
To select a Transaction Set ID to view
or maintain, type S next to the selected
ID you want to view on the Partner
Transaction Directory. Then, press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=GDir

Displays the Group Directory.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Partner Transaction Information screen for the selected
Transaction ID.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 109

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM025

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to
the Transaction ID, and then press PF5 to display the Transaction Information screen.
Trans ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).

2 - 110

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Directory EDIM025

The Partner Subsystem

Rlse # (protected)
A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is
displayed only for TRADACOMS transactions.
Multiple Env Id (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field that displays the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG, GS, UNA,
UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to display the standard’s Version ID to be used for
this transaction. This field is used only if duplicate Transaction IDs are needed for
different versions of the standard.
Note: Version is not valid for Transaction ID of !!!DFT.
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Group ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that displays the functional group identification as
defined for the Partner ID displayed. This field is a display of the Group ID from the key.
Each transaction record has a functional group associated with it. This resolves the
problem with the mapper selecting the incorrect functional group for partner-specific
maps, when multiple functional groups are defined to the application.
Accept Flag (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of
transaction from your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, accept this type of transaction from my trading partner.
No, do not accept this type of transaction from my trading partner
(default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense
file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of
this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit
receipt of a particular transaction from a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter.
Send Flag (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of
transaction to your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I send this type of transaction to my trading partner.
No, I do not send of this transaction to my trading partner (default
value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this
transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit the
sending of a particular transaction to a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 111

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM025

T/P (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to define whether this is a test or production transaction
type. This field is used in Data Separation and Error Rejection. Valid values are:
T
P

2 - 112

=
=

test transaction
production transaction (default value)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen

EDIM040

Purpose
The Transaction Information screen allows you to identify separate processing for various
transactions. For example, you can verify which transactions may be sent or received, or specify
Control numbers within a transaction set.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Information screen in either of the following ways:
•

Type S to select a Transaction ID from the Transaction Directory, and press Enter.

•

Type 1.2.4.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1,” for information on how to modify the default record.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen for both Partner/Qualifier
and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM040 1.2.4.1___

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISA-PARTNER
Transaction ID: 850___
Functional Group ID.............:
Test or Production..............:
Translation Map ID Inbound......:
EDI Databank Inbound............:
Application Databank Inbound....:
Last Incoming Control Number....:
Accept Transaction Inbound......:
Send Transaction Outbound.......:
Expect an AK2 or UCM............:
Acknowledge this Transaction....:
Transaction Acknowledgment Type.:
Viewpoint - Exception...........:
Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Version: ____________
Multiple Env Id: ISA
PO____
T (T/P)
__________
Outbound: __________
D (D/N)
Outbound: D (D/N)
D (F/D/N)
Outbound: D (D/N)
______________
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
997___ (997/999/Contrl)
_ (Y/N)
Tracking: _ (Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=TDir
PF5=Trans
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Next Trn

2 - 113

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

Relationship Mode
EDIM040 1.2.4.1___

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: 810
Functional Group ID.............:
Test or Production..............:
Translation Map ID Inbound......:
EDI Databank Inbound............:
Application Databank Inbound....:
Last Incoming Control Number....:
Accept Transaction Inbound......:
Send Transaction Outbound.......:
Expect an AK2 or UCM............:
Acknowledge this Transaction....:
Transaction Acknowledgment Type.:
Viewpoint - Exception...........:
Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version: ____________
Multiple Env Id: ISA
IN____
P (T/P)
__________
Outbound: __________
D (D/N)
Outbound: D (D/N)
F (F/D/N)
Outbound: D (D/N)
______________
Y (Y/N)
N (Y/N)
N (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
997___ (997/999/Contrl)
_ (Y/N)
Tracking: _ (Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=TDir
PF5=Trans
PF6=Next Trn
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To display a different transaction definition, type a partial or complete Transaction ID in the
Transaction ID field, and press Enter.

2 - 114

PF4=TDir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen (screen 2) for the Partner ID currently
displayed.

PF6=Next Trn

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF9=Add

Adds the new transaction definition for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF11=Del

Deletes the transaction information record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

The Partner Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 115

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the standard’s Version ID to be used for
this transaction. This field is used only if duplicate Transaction IDs are needed for
different versions of the standard.
Only applicable if used with the TRANSACTION VERSION global parameter.
Note: Version is not valid for Transaction ID of !!!DFT.
Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Functional Group ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the functional group identification as
defined for the Partner ID displayed (entered). This field is a display of the Group ID from
the key. Each transaction record has a functional group associated with it. This prevents
the mapper from selecting the incorrect functional group for partner-specific maps, when
multiple functional groups are defined to the application.
Test or Production
A 1-position alphabetic field used to define whether this is a test or production transaction
type. This field is used in Data Separation and Error Rejection. Valid values are:
T
P

=
=

test transaction
production transaction (default value)

Translation Map ID Inbound
A 10-position alphanumeric field that identifies the specific map for the application to use
for this partner and transaction. Used for partner-specific mapping only.
Translation Map ID Outbound
A 10-position numeric field that identifies the specific map for the application to use for
this partner and transaction. Used for partner-specific mapping only.
EDI Databank Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of databank to be used. Valid values
are:
D
N

=
=

Directory only
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter.

2 - 116

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

The Partner Subsystem

EDI Databank Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of databank to be used. Valid values are:
D
N

=
=

Directory only
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter.
Application Databank Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field that identifies the level of application databank to be used.
Valid values are:
F
D
N

=
=
=

Full
Directory only
None

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter.
Application Databank Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field identifying the level of application databank to be used. Valid
values are:
D
=
Directory only
N
=
None
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER DATABANK global parameter.
Last Incoming Control Number
A 9-position numeric field defining the number of the last incoming group received. This
value is used to verify whether the groups coming in are in incremental or chronological
order. If this field is blank, no sequence checking is performed.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–INCREMENTAL or
PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR–CHRONOLOGICAL global parameters.
Accept Transaction Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to accept this type of
transaction from your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I receive this type of transaction from my trading partner.
No, I do not accept this type of transaction from my trading partner
(default value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense
file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the acceptance of
this transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit
receipt of a particular transaction from a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 117

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

Send Transaction Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate whether you agree to send this type of
transaction to your trading partner. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, I send this type of transaction to my trading partner.
No, I do not send of this transaction to my trading partner (default
value). Prohibited transactions are placed in the Suspense file.

Caution: Entering the value N literally prevents the sending of this
transaction. Use only when you wish to prohibit the
sending of a particular transaction to a trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION global parameter.
Expect an AK2 or UCM
A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates if transaction acknowledgments are
expected for outbound transactions. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Yes, expect AK2 or UCM acknowledgment.
Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to W(aiting)
No, do not expect AK2 or UCM acknowledgments.
Databank Acknowledgment Status is initially set to N(ot required)

Acknowledge this Transaction
A 1-position alphabetic field used to indicate whether to generate a 997 or CONTRL
acknowledgement for this transaction. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, acknowledge this transaction.
No, do not acknowledge this transaction.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter.
Transaction Acknowledgment Type
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the type of acknowledgment you want. Valid
values are:
997
=
999
=
Contrl =

ANSI functional acknowledgment (default value).
UCS functional acknowledgment.
EDIFACT acknowledgment.

Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGMENT global parameter.

2 - 118

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen EDIM040

The Partner Subsystem

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Installed
Viewpoint – Exception
A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception Management
activity is performed at the transaction level for this partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
Blank =

Yes, Exception Management is performed.
No, Exception Management is not performed.
Exception Management processing is controlled by the Configuration
File Exception Management Partner Default Indicator.

Tracking
A 1-position field indicating whether Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Tracking Management
activity is performed at the transaction level for this partner. Valid values are:
Y
=
N
=
Blank =

Yes, Tracking is performed.
No, Tracking is not performed.
Defaults to the value Y. The Tracking Management processing is
controlled by the Configuration File Tracking Management Partner
Default Indicator.
See the topic “Defining and Initializing Files” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint® for z/
OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide. The installation default is Exception Management is
performed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 119

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043

Transaction Information Screen—ST Options

EDIM043

Purpose
This Transaction Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not
sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate Transaction screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From screen 2, you
can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope.
A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record.
You can modify this record or use it unchanged. Sterling Gentran also gives you the ability to
modify the default record itself to create a custom default.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information (screen 1). The transaction
screen displayed is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous
Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen (ST options), for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM043 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: ISA-PARTNER
Transaction ID: 850

Qual:
Version:
Multiple Env ID:
Outbound envelope information for ST segment:
Transaction Set Identifier.....ST01:
Control Number.................ST02:
Implementation Convention......ST03:
Version............................:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 120

ISA

850
000000001
____________________________________
004010______

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF10=Updt

PF5=Name
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM043 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: 850

EXAMPLE OF A BG PARTNER
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:
Multiple Env Id: ISA
Outbound envelope information for ST segment:
Transaction Set Identifier.....ST01:
Control Number.................ST02:
Implementation Convention......ST03:
Version............................:

Enter PF1=Help

850
000000001
___________________________________
____________

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF5=Name
PF10=Updt
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=Name

Displays the Name and Address screen for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Next Tran

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 121

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Version (protected)
A 12-position field that displays the version associated with this header option, if it exists.

2 - 122

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—ST Options EDIM043

The Partner Subsystem

Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Transaction Set Identifier (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the transaction set identifier as defined by
the standards.
Control Number
A 9-position numeric field used to define the beginning sequence number for generating
transaction envelopes. The system assigns control numbers sequentially, beginning with
the number you enter.
Implementation Convention
A 35-position field that contains the name of the Implementation Convention Guide that is
to be used for compliance rules for this transaction set.
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field used when more than one transaction with the same
Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the Transaction
Information screen (screen 1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 123

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 1

EDIM042

Purpose
This Transaction Information screen (Part 1) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are
not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send
outbound documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate Transaction Information screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From
screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope.
The system automatically adds a default transaction record when you add a new Partner Control
record.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information screen. The Transaction screen
that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the previous Control
Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen – UNH Part 1 screen, for
both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM042 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 1

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: UNA-PARTNER
Transaction ID: INVOIC

Qual:
Version:
Multiple Env ID:
Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 1:
Message Reference Number......UNH01:
Message Type..................UNH02:
Version Number................UNH02:
Version Release Number........UNH02:
Controlling Agency............UNH02:
Version Association Code......UNH02:
Code List Directory Version #.UNH02:
Message Type Sub-Function ID..UNH02:
Common Access Reference.......UNH03:
Status of Transfer............UNH04:
Enter PF1=Help

2 - 124

UNA

00000000000001
INVOIC
090
001
___
______
______
______
___________________________________
_ (C/F)

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF10=Updt

PF5=Part2
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM042 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 1

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: INVOIC

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:
Multiple Env Id: UNA
Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 1:
Message Reference Number......UNH01:
Message Type..................UNH02:
Version Number................UNH02:
Version Release Number........UNH02:
Controlling Agency............UNH02:
Version Association Code......UNH02:
Code List Directory Version #.UNH02:
Message Type Sub-Function ID..UNH02:
Common Access Reference.......UNH03:
Status of Transfer............UNH04:
Enter PF1=Help

00000000000001
INVOIC
090
001
ED
______
______
______
__NNN______________________________
_ (C/F)

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF10=Updt

PF5=Part2
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Information screen (screen 1) for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=Part2

Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 125

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction
with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the
Transaction Information screen (screen 1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.

2 - 126

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 1 EDIM042

The Partner Subsystem

Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Message Reference Number
A 14-position alphanumeric field used to enter a unique reference number assigned by
your division or department.
Message Type (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the type of message.
Version Number
A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the
functional group (e.g., D55).
Version Release Number
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current
version number (e.g., 99B).
Controlling Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency
controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type (e.g., UN).
Version Association Code
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code assigned by the association
responsible for the design and maintenance of the message type.
Code List Directory Version #
A 6-position alphanumeric field the defines the Code List Directory Version Number. This
is valid for Syntax Version 4 and greater.
Message Type Sub-function ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Type Sub-function. This is valid
for Syntax Version 4 and greater.
Common Access Reference
A 35-position alphanumeric field that indicates a key used to relate all transfers of data to
the partner currently displayed.
Status of Transfer
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates the status of the transfer. Valid values are:
C
F

=
=

Creation (first)
Final (last)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 127

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 2

EDIM046

Purpose
This Transaction Information screen (Part 2) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are
not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send
outbound documents, you must complete this screen.

How to Access
Access this screen from the Transaction Information – UNH Part 1 screen by pressing PF5.

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen, for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM046 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 2

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: UNA PARTNER
Transaction ID: INVOIC

Qual:
Version:
Multiple Env Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

UNA

Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 2:
Message Subset id.............UNH05:
Message Subset Version Nbr....UNH05:
Message Subset Release Nbr....UNH05:
Controlling Agency............UNH05:
Message Imp. Guideline ID.....UNH06:
Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr...UNH06:
Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr...UNH06:
Controlling Agency............UNH06:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 128

______________
___
___
___
______________
___
___
___

PF3=Exit PF4=Part1
PF5=Part3
PF10=Updt PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM046 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 2

YOUR COMPANY
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: INVOIC

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:
Multiple Env Id: ISA

Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 2:
Message Subset id.............UNH05:
Message Subset Version Nbr....UNH05:
Message Subset Release Nbr....UNH05:
Controlling Agency............UNH05:
Message Imp. Guideline ID.....UNH06:
Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr...UNH06:
Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr...UNH06:
Controlling Agency............UNH06:

Enter PF1=Help

______________
___
___
___
______________
___
___
___

PF3=Exit PF4=Part1
PF5=Part3
PF10=Updt PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Part1

Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 1 screen.

PF5=Part3

Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 3 screen.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 129

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
is the name that may help
to further identify the
Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction
with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the
Transaction Information screen (screen 1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.

2 - 130

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 2 EDIM046

The Partner Subsystem

Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Message Subset id
A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Identification.
Message Subset Version Nbr
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Version Number.
Message Subset Release Nbr
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Subset Release Number.
Controlling Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this Message
Subset.
Message Imp. Guideline ID
A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline
Identification.
Message Imp. Guide Vers Nbr
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline
Version Number.
Message Imp. Guide Rlse Nbr
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the Message Implementation Guideline
Release Number.
Controlling Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this Message
Implementation Guideline.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 131

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options
Part 3

EDIM047

Purpose
This Transaction Information screen (Part 3) is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are
not sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send
outbound documents, you must complete this screen.

How to Access
Access this screen from the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen by pressing PF5.

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information – UNH Part 3 screen, for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM047 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 3

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: UNA-PARNTER
Transaction ID: INVOIC

Qual:
Version:
Multiple Env Id:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

UNA

Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 3:
Scenario Identification.......UNH07:
Scenario Version Nbr..........UNH07:
Scenario Release Nbr .........UNH07:
Controlling Agency............UNH07:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 132

______________
___
___
___

PF3=Exit PF4=Part2
PF5=Name
PF10=Updt PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM047 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION - UNH PART 3

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: INVOIC

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Version:
Multiple Env Id: UNA

Outbound envelope information for UNH segment part 3:
Scenario Identification.......UNH07:
Scenario Version Nbr..........UNH07:
Scenario Release Nbr .........UNH07:
Controlling Agency............UNH07:

Enter PF1=Help

______________
___
___
___

PF3=Exit PF4=Part2
PF5=Name
PF10=Updt PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Part2

Displays the Transaction Information – UNH Part 2 screen.

PF5=Name

Displays the next name and address screen for the Partner Profile ID currently
displayed.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 133

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).

2 - 134

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—UNH Options Part 3 EDIM047

The Partner Subsystem

Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction
with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the
Transaction Information screen (screen 1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Scenario Identification (reserved for future use)
A 14-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario identification.
Scenario Version Nbr (reserved for future use)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario version number.
Scenario Release Nbr (reserved for future use)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the scenario release number.
Controlling Agency (reserved for future use)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that defines the controlling agency for this scenario.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 135

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041

Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options

EDIM041

Purpose
This Transaction Information screen is used for creating outbound envelopes. If you are not
sending documents to your trading partner, you can skip this screen. If you plan to send outbound
documents, you must complete this screen.
A separate Transaction Information screen (screen 2) exists for each transaction segment. From
screen 2, you can display or change any of the fields shown for this outbound transaction envelope.
When entering this screen, the !!!DFT default record is always the first transaction displayed.
A default transaction record is automatically added when you add a new Partner Control record.
You can modify this record or use it unchanged. Sterling Gentran also gives you the ability to
modify the default record itself to create a custom default record.
See the topic “Control Information Screen 1” for information on how to modify the default record.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 on the Transaction Information screen (screen 1). The
Transaction screen that displays is based on the interchange segment (header option) chosen in the
previous Control Information screen (screen 1).

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Information screen (MHD Options), for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM041 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Part ID: YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
Transaction ID: INVOIC
Release:

Qual:
Version:
Multiple Env Id:
Outbound envelope information for MHD segment:
Message Reference Number......MHD01:
Message Type..................MHD02:
Release Number................MHD02:
Version Number.....................:
Version Release Number.............:
Controlling Agency.................:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 136

STX

00000000000001
INVOIC
8 (0-9)
ANA
001
__

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF10=Updt

PF5=Name
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM041 __________

TRANSACTION INFORMATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Transaction ID: INVOIC

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Release:
Version:
Multiple Env Id: STX
Outbound envelope information for MHD segment:
Message Reference Number......MHD01:
Message Type..................MHD02:
Release Number................MHD02:
Version Number.....................:
Version Release Number.............:
Controlling Agency.................:

Enter PF1=Help

00000000000001
INVOIC
8 (0-9)
ANA
001
__

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF10=Updt

PF5=Name
PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt Tran

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Name

Displays the next Name and Address screen for the Partner ID currently
displayed.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays processing instructions for the next transaction defined for this
Partner ID.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing transaction definition, as defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 137

The Partner Subsystem

Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Transaction ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that provides the Transaction ID as defined for the Partner
ID displayed (entered).
Release (protected)
A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is
displayed only for TRADACOMS transactions.

2 - 138

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Information Screen—MHD Options EDIM041

The Partner Subsystem

Version (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that displays a value when more than one transaction
with the same Transaction ID is needed. The version results when a value is entered on the
Transaction Information screen (screen 1).
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance” in Chapter 5, “The Administration
Subsystem,” for details on using this feature for Editors and Mappers.
Multiple Env Id
A 3-position alphabetic field used to identify the envelope type for this interchange record
within the partner profile. This field allows a single partner profile to have multiple EDI
standards (e.g., X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined under it. It eliminates the need
to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading partner in the event that the partner
uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values include these standards: ISA, ICS, BG,
GS, UNA, UNB, SCH, STX, and spaces.
Message Reference Number
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter a unique reference number assigned by
your division or department.
Message Type (protected)
A 6-position field that contains the Transaction ID.
Release Number
A 1-position numeric field used to define the release number within the current version
number. Valid values are: 0 – 9.
Version Number
A 3-position numeric field used to designate the version number of the message type in the
functional group.
Version Release Number
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define the release number within the current
version number.
Controlling Agency
A 2-position alphanumeric field used to enter the code that identifies the agency
controlling the specification, maintenance and publication of the message type.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 139

The Partner Subsystem

Name and Address Screen EDIM035

Name and Address Screen

EDIM035

Purpose
The Name and Address screen enables you to log each trading partner's name, address, telephone
number, and personal contact name so that you can reference the information and use it for
reporting purposes.

How to Access
Access the Name and Address screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 5 to select the Name and Address option from the Partner Selection Menu
and press Enter.

•

Type 1.2.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Name and Address screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM035 1.2.5_____

Partner..:

NAME AND ADDRESS

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
ISA-PARTNER

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

Name...:
Address:

EXAMPLE_OF_AN_ISA_PARTNER__________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
City...: ______________________________
State..: ____
Zip....: _____ - ____
Country Code: __
Contact: ______________________________
Phone..: ( ___ ) ___ - ____ x ____
International Dial Code: 000
Enter PF1=Help

2 - 140

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF5=Name2
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Name and Address Screen EDIM035

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM035 1.2.5_____

NAME AND ADDRESS

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
User/Part: PART (PART,USER)

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1

Name...:
Address:

XYZ_COMPUTER_COMPANY_______________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
City...: ______________________________
State..: ____
Zip....: _____ - ____
Country Code: __
Contact: ______________________________
Phone..: ( ___ ) ___ - ____ x ____
International Dial Code: 000
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF5=Name2
PF6=NXT NAME
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Information screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Name2

Displays the second name and address screeen for the Partner ID currently
displayed..

PF9=Add

Adds the new name and address information for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing name and address information, as defined for the Partner
ID displayed.

PF11=Del

Deletes the name and address record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

For Relationship Mode
PF6=NXT NAME Displays the next Partner ID record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 141

The Partner Subsystem

Name and Address Screen EDIM035

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Partner
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

User (protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Partner
(protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Part

A 4-position alphabetic
field indicating which
portion of the user/partner
relationship this record
contains information. Valid
values are:

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Part=Partner name and
address information
User=User name and
address information
Name
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to describe the trading partner's business name.
This name is displayed above the Partner IDs on other Partner Maintenance screens.

2 - 142

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Name and Address Screen EDIM035

The Partner Subsystem

Address
This field has five lines. Each line is a 35-position alphanumeric field used to indicate the
trading partner's business address.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
City
A 30-position alphabetic field used to enter the trading partner's city.
State
A 4-position field used to enter the trading partner's state.
Zip
Two fields. A 5-position numeric field followed by a 4-position numeric field. Used to
enter the trading partner's Zip code, and extended Zip code.
Country Code
A 2-position alphabetic field used to enter the trading partner's country code.
Contact
A 30-position alphanumeric field used to designate the name of a personal contact at this
trading partner's office.
Phone
Four alphanumeric fields that are used to enter the trading partner's telephone number
(area code – 3 positions, number – 7 positions, and internal extension – 4 positions).
International Dial Code
A 3-position numeric field used to enter the trading partner's international dial code (must
be numeric).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 143

The Partner Subsystem

Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036

Name and Address Part 2 Screen

EDIM036

Purpose
The Name and Address Part 2 screen enables you to enter an e-mail address so that you can
reference the information and use it for reporting purposes.

How to Access
Access the screen by pressing PF5 on the Name and Address Screen (EDIM035).

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Name and Address Part 2 screen for both Partner/Qualifier
and Relationship (user/partner) modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM036 __________

Partner..:

IBM

E-mail Address:

Enter PF1=Help

2 - 144

NAME AND ADDRESS - PART 2

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

EDI_COODINATOR@SIBM.COM_______________________

PF3=Exit PF4=Name1
PF5=UserDef
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036

The Partner Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM036 __________

User:
User/Part:

NAME AND ADDRESS - PART 2

TRADING_PARTNER ID
PART (PART,USER)

E-mail Address:

Partner:

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

STERLING_COMM

EDI_COODINATOR@STERCOMM.COM_______________________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Name1
PF5=UserDef
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

PF6=Nxt Name
PF14=Info

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Name1

Displays the Name and Address Information screen for the Partner ID
selected.

PF5=User Def

Displays the User Definition screen for the Partner ID currently
displayed.

PF9=Add

Adds the new name and address part 2 information definition for the
Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates an existing name and address part 2 information definition, as
defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF11=Del

Deletes the name and address part 2 record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 145

The Partner Subsystem

Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036

For Relationship Mode
PF6=Nxt Name

Displays the next Partner ID record.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Partner
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

User (protected)

A 15-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Partner
(protected)

A 15-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Part

A 4-position alphabetic
field indicating which
portion of the user/partner
relationship this record
contains information. Valid
values are:

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Part=Partner name and
address information
User=User name and
address information
E-Mail Address
A 50-position alphanumeric field used to enter an e-mail address for the trading partner.
The e-mail address is displayed on the Expected Acknowledgment Monitor Report
(EDID510).

2 - 146

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Name and Address Part 2 Screen EDIM036

The Partner Subsystem

Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic "Using Underscore Substitution Characters" in Chapter 7 for
more information about this feature.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 147

The Partner Subsystem

User Defined Screen EDIM045

User Defined Screen

EDIM045

Purpose
The User Defined screen provides you with a place to maintain any additional information you
need on file for a specified trading partner. For example, you might enter record or field definitions
using your own structure, as they relate to the specified trading partner. Or, you could use this
screen to define an alternative personal contact and phone number to be used in case the primary
contact for the specified trading partner cannot be reached. The data residing on this record is left
up to you to define. You can have multiple user-defined records for each trading partner, and can
use your own numbering scheme for each access.
$TCR Record ID is reserved by Sterling Gentran:Basic. This user-defined record provides
transmission control information for generating the $TCR record during envelope generation.
See the topic “Outbound Data Mapping” in Chapter 3 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/
OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide and the topic “Outbound EDI Databank Extract
Program” in Chapter 5 of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical
Reference Guide for more details on using the $TCR record.

How to Access
Access the User Defined screen in either of the following ways:
•

Type S to select User Defined from the Partner Selection Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.2.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the User Defined screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

2 - 148

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User Defined Screen EDIM045

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM045 1.2.6_____

Part ID..:
Record ID:

User Data.:

USER DEFINED

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
ISA-PARTNER
AP01

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

1
1
2
2
3
3
4
1...5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0
CALL_MS._JONES_AT_212-555-5555_IF_THERE_
IS_A_PROBLEM_WITH_INCOMING_PO'S.________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
_____________________________________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Name2
PF5=Data Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

PF6=Nxt User

Relationship Mode
EDIM045 1.2.6_____

User.....:
Record ID:

User Data.:

USER DEFINED

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY
____

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1

1
1
2
2
3
3
4
1...5....0....5....0....5....0....5....0
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
_____________________________________

USER NOT FOUND
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Name2
PF5=Data Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Nxt User

2 - 149

The Partner Subsystem

User Defined Screen EDIM045

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
To display a different user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed, change the Record ID
number, and press Enter.
PF4=Name2

Displays the Name and Address part 2 screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Data Sep

Displays the Data Separation screen for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Nxt User

Displays the next user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF9=Add

Adds the user-defined record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the user-defined record for the specified Partner ID.

PF11=Del

Deletes the user-defined record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

2 - 150

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User Defined Screen EDIM045

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Record ID
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter a user-specified record type defining each
record you add for the trading partner.
User Data
This field consists of 6 lines you can use to define reference information for the Partner ID
specified: 5 lines of a 40-position alphanumeric field and 1 line of a 37-position
alphanumeric field. You can use these fields to enter any additional data that you need for
this Partner ID. The information in these fields is not used by Sterling Gentran:Basic for
processing.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 151

The Partner Subsystem

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

Data Separation Screen

EDIM050

Purpose
The Data Separation screen enables you to set up data separation parameters for each inbound and
outbound processing run. Data is separated into a maximum of 899 staging areas for direct
transmission, transmission to networks (if outbound), or 99 staging areas for your different
applications (if inbound). Staged data can be subsequently added to with additional Sterling
Gentran:Basic processing steps. You can have multiple output data separation records for each
trading partner.
Inbound data splitting enables you to separate incoming documents for processing by your
application files. Documents can be separated by functional group, transaction set, by test/
production, or by version. Outbound Data Splitting enables you to separate outgoing data for
transmission to your trading partners. Outbound data can only be separated at the partner level.
Typically, data in outbound split files are run through your communications software.
Only applicable if used with the DIRECTED OUTPUT FILES global parameter.

How to Access
Access the Data Separation screen in either of the following ways:
•

Type 7 to select Data Separation from the Partner Selection Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 1.2.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Data Separation screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

2 - 152

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM050 1.2.7_____

Part ID:

DATA SEPARATION

TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
VENDOR-1

Level.................:
Direction.............:
Level ID..............:
Release...............:
Test/Production.......:
Version...............:
Inbound Application ID:
Outbound Network......:
Output File Identifiers:
0002
____

____
____

____
____

Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

T
(P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction)
I
(I=Inbound, O=Outbound)
810___ (Group ID or Transaction ID)
_
_
(T/P)
____________
__________
__________
GENTRAN:Realtime
Option
Priority
____
____
___
_
____
____

PF3=Exit PF4=User Def
PF5=Error Rej PF6=Next Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

Relationship Mode
EDIM050 1.2.7_____

User...:

DATA SEPARATION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY

Level.................:
Direction.............:
Level ID..............:
Release...............:
Test/Production.......:
Version...............:
Inbound Application ID:
Outbound Network......:
Output File Identifiers:
0002
____

____
____

Enter PF1=Help

____
____

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

THEIR COMPANY NAME
Partner: THEIR COMPANY

T
(P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction)
I
(I=Inbound, O=Outbound)
810___ (Group ID or Transaction ID)
_
_
(T/P)
____________
__________
__________
GENTRAN:Realtime
Option
Priority
____
____
___
_
____
____

PF3=Exit PF4=User Def
PF5=Error Rej PF6=Next Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 153

The Partner Subsystem

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=User Def

Displays the User Defined screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF5=Error Rej

Displays the Error Rejection screen for the Partner ID currently displayed.

PF6=Next Sep

Displays the next output data separation record defined for the Partner ID
displayed.

PF9=Add

Adds the output data separation record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the output data separation record for the specified Partner ID.

PF11=Del

Deletes the output data separation record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

2 - 154

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Level
A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the level of data separation for this file. If the
Direction field contains the value O (Outbound), you must type the value P (Interchange).
P
G
T

=
=
=

Interchange
Group
Transaction

Direction
A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the transmission direction of the data being
separated. If the Level field contains the value G or T, you must type the value I
(Inbound). Valid values are:
I
O

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

Level ID
This field is used ONLY for inbound splitting. A 6-position alphanumeric field used to
enter either the functional group or the Transaction ID. If the Level field contains the value
G (Group), use this field to define the functional group. If the Level field contains the
value T (Transaction), use this field to define the transaction set. Leave this field blank if
the Level field contains the value P (Partner). For example:
Functional Groups
Transaction Sets

PO, IN, or FA
850, 810, or 997

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 155

The Partner Subsystem

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

Release
A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field is
displayed only for TRADACOMS transaction.
Test/Production
A 1-position alphabetic field used to separate test data from production data. This flag is
only used at the transaction level, and is used in combination with the Test/Production flag
on the Transaction record. This field is used for inbound data only. Valid values are:
T
P

=
=

Test data
Production data

Only applicable if used with the TRANSACTION TEST/PRODUCTION SPLIT global
parameter.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the standard Version ID to be used for
splitting inbound data by version. This field is optional for group and transaction, and is
NOT used at the interchange level.
Only applicable if used with the GROUP VERSION SPLIT or TRANSACTION
VERSION SPLIT global parameters.
Inbound Application ID
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the name of an inbound application. This
field must be completed at the transaction level when using ##INSTREAM in the Inbound
Mapper.
Outbound Network
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to enter the final destination for the outbound
application, which is used by the Outbound EDI Data Extract program. The network name
can be any meaningful name that is used to group outbound data that is going to the same
destination.
See the topic “Outbound EDI Databank Program” in Chapter 5 of the IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide.
Output File Identifiers (required)
Two rows of five fields. Each field is a 4-position numeric field used to enter an identifier
for the file to which the data should be written. Fields must be entered left to right, top to
bottom. Valid values are: 1 – 99 if the direction is equal to “I,” and 1 – 99 and 200 – 999 if
the direction is equal to “0.”

Sterling Gentran:Realtime Installation Only
Option
A 3-position numeric field that contains the Realtime option number for this data
separation record. The option number can be either an Immediate option or a Queue
option.

2 - 156

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Separation Screen EDIM050

The Partner Subsystem

Priority
A 1-digit numeric field indicating how long you want to delay processing the data for the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime option. Valid values are 1 through 9.
Note: If the option is an Immediate option, a priority 1 causes
the process to be started immediately. Each priority
greater than 1 causes a 10-second time delay over the
previous priority. For example, a priority of 2 results in a
10-second delay while a priority of 9 results in an 80second delay.
If the option is a Queue option, the priority is ignored and
the data is written to the queue file immediately.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 157

The Partner Subsystem

Error Rejection Screen EDIM055

Error Rejection Screen

EDIM055

Purpose
The Error Rejection screen enables you to designate specific data transmissions to be rejected,
based upon errors you specify as unacceptable. You can have multiple error rejection records for
each trading partner.
Only applicable if used with the PARTNER ERROR CONTROL global parameter.
The ability to add Partner Error Rejection depends on the settings on the Error Message and
Control File as follows:
“”
“A”
“D”
“P”

Specific or global rejection records can be added.
No partner rejection records can be added.
Only global partner rejection records can be added.
Only specific partner rejection records can be added.

How to Access
Access the Error Rejection screen in either of the following ways:
•

Type 8 to select Error Rejection from the Partner Selection menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.2.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Error Rejection screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

2 - 158

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Error Rejection Screen EDIM055

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM055 1.2.8_____

Part ID:

ERROR REJECTION

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:

Level..........:
Level ID.......:
Release........:
Error Number...:
Version........:

G
(P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction)
I_____ (Group ID or Transaction ID)
_
00689
____________

Reject Inbound.:
Reject Outbound:

Y
Y

Enter PF1=Help

(Y/N)
(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=Data Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

PF6=Next Err

Relationship Mode
EDIM055 1.2.8_____

User...:

ERROR REJECTION

YOUR COMPANY NAME
YOUR COMPANY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1

Level..........:
Level ID.......:
Release........:
Error Number...:
Version........:

G
(P=Interchange, G=Group, T=Transaction)
I_____ (Group ID or Transaction ID)
_
00689
____________

Reject Inbound.:
Reject Outbound:

Y
Y

Enter PF1=Help

(Y/N)
(Y/N)

PF3=Exit PF4=Data Sep
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del PF14=Info

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Next Err

2 - 159

The Partner Subsystem

Error Rejection Screen EDIM055

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Data Sep

Displays the Data Separation screen for the Partner ID selected.

PF6=Next Err

Displays the next error rejection record defined for the Partner ID displayed.

PF9=Add

Adds the error rejection record for the Partner ID displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the error rejection record for the specified Partner ID.

PF11=Del

Deletes the error rejection record for the specified Partner ID.

PF14=Info

Displays the date, time, and user initials on the message line that reflects
when the information on this screen was created or last changed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

2 - 160

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Error Rejection Screen EDIM055

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Part ID
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

(Partner Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the partner
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.
Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Level
A 1-position alphabetic field used to enter the level that this error occurs. Valid values are:
P
G
T

=
=
=

Interchange: Error occurs on interchange header or trailer.
Group: Error occurs on group header or trailer.
Transaction: Error occurs on transaction header or trailer or within the
actual transaction.

Level ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Group or Transaction ID for this error.
If the Level field contains value P, Level ID must be spaces.
Release
A 1-position field that indicates the release level for this transaction. This field displays
only for TRADACOMS transaction.
Error Number
A 5-position alphanumeric field used to enter the number of the error to be rejected. This
number must be on Sterling Gentran:Basic Error Message file.
Version
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Version ID of the standard to be used
for rejection of errors by version.
Only applicable if used with system configuration options, Interchange Version
(outbound), Group Version, Transaction Version.
Reject Inbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate to Sterling Gentran:Basic whether to reject
inbound data with this error.
Y
N

=
=

Yes, reject inbound data with the error indicated.
No, do not reject inbound data with the error indicated.

Reject Outbound
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate to Sterling Gentran:Basic whether to reject
outbound data with this error.
Y
N

=
=

Yes, reject outbound data with the error indicated.
No, do not reject outbound data with the error indicated.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 161

The Partner Subsystem

Copy All Records Screen EDIM060

Copy All Records Screen

EDIM060

Purpose
The Copy All Records screen enables you to copy records from an existing trading partner to a
newly added trading partner.

How to Access
Access the Copy All Records screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 9 to select Copy All Records from the Partner Selection Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 1.2.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter (this is active
only after a partner has been established).

To copy all records from an existing trading partner and duplicate them for a new trading partner,
from the Partner Selection Menu, perform the following:
1.

For Partner/Qualifier mode, type the new, unique Partner Profile ID in the Part ID field.
Then, type the Partner ID of the existing trading partner from which you are copying in the
records in the Copy ID field.
OR
For Relationship mode, type the new, unique User ID in the User field and the Partner ID
in the Part ID field. Then, type the User/Partner ID of the existing trading partner from
which you are copying the records in the Copy User field.

2.

Type 9 (Copy All Records) in the selection field to initiate the COPY ALL feature. The
system displays the Copy All Records screen, which lists records copied to the new
Partner Profile ID.

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Copy All Records screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship (user/partner) modes.

2 - 162

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Copy All Records Screen EDIM060

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM060 1.2.9_____

COPY ALL RECORDS

XXX

EXAMPLE OF AN ISA PARTNER
Partner Id: BG-PARTNER
Copy Partner YOUR COMPANY
Record Type
---------------------------------

Qual.:
Qual.:

Records Added
-------------

Header Data
Control Data
Group Information
Transactions
Name and Address
User Defined Data
Output Data Separation
Error Rejection Control
----- TOTAL -----

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Duplicates
----------

0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
4

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1

COPY-ALL SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED.
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit

Relationship Mode
EDIM060 1.2.9_____

COPY ALL RECORDS

XXX

YOUR COMPANY NAME
User...: YOUR COMPANY
Copy User..: APLS
Record Type
---------------------------------

06/01/2011
12:00:00

XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
Partner: VENDOR-1
Partner...: BG
Records Added
-------------

Header Data
Control Data
Group Information
Transactions
Name and Address
User Defined Data
Output Data Separation
Error Rejection Control
----- TOTAL -----

0
1
2
2
2
0
12
0
19

Duplicates
---------1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1

COPY-ALL SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED.
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 163

The Partner Subsystem

Copy All Records Screen EDIM060

Screen Actions
To process the Copy All function, press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays a list of all record types
that includes the number of each record type added to the new Partner ID (as copied from the
existing Partner ID) and the number of duplicate records not added to the new Partner ID (if they
exist). Sterling Gentran also displays a Copy All confirmation message.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field

Description

Field

(Partner
Name –
protected)

A 35-position
alphanumeric field used
to display the partner
name, as found on the
Name and Address
record. The partner name
can help to further
identify the Partner ID.

(User Name protected)

A 35-position alphabetic
field displaying the user
name, if it exists on file for
the User/Partner ID.

Partner Id
(protected)

Displays the Partner ID
you have entered or
selected.

User/Partner
(protected)

Two 15-position alphabetic
fields that display the User/
Partner ID you have entered
or selected.

Note: The Partner ID and
Qualifier make up the key
for all associated records.

2 - 164

Relationship Mode
Description

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Copy All Records Screen EDIM060

The Partner Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field

Description

Field

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier
associated with the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Copy User/
Partner

Copy Partner

Displays the Partner ID
of an existing trading
partner from which you
are copying all records.

Qual
(protected)

Displays the Qualifier (if
applicable) associated
with the new Partner ID
from the Copy Partner
field.

Relationship Mode
Description
Displays the User/Partner
ID of an existing trading
partner from which you are
copying all records.

Record Type (protected)
Displays each record type available in the partner profile.
Records Added (protected)
Displays the number of records, for each record type, that were successfully added to the
new Partner ID.
Duplicates (protected)
Displays the number of existing records, for each record type, that Sterling Gentran:Basic
found for the new Partner ID to which you were copying. If a duplicate record is found,
the original record existing for the new Partner ID is not overwritten by the new (Copy
From) record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 165

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Cross Reference Menu EDIM009

Partner Cross Reference Menu

EDIM009

Purpose
The Partner Cross Reference Menu contains two menu options to permit viewing the Partner Cross
Reference file by X-Ref ID and Qualifier or by Partner ID and Qualifier. This screen is valid only
for Partner/.

How to Access
Access the Partner Cross Reference Menu, if you are in Partner/Qualifier mode, in either of these
two ways:
•

On the Partner Maintenance Menu, type 3 to select the Partner Cross Reference
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Partner Cross Reference Menu.
EDIM009 1.3_______

PARTNER CROSS REFERENCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

Enter PF1=Help

1.

Partner Cross Reference by X–Ref ID

2.

Partner Cross Reference by Partner ID

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

2 - 166

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Cross Reference Menu EDIM009

The Partner Subsystem

Menu Options
The Partner Cross Reference Menu contains two options, which are listed below. The list of menu
options, as well as a brief description of each option follows.

Menu Option

Description

1.

Partner Cross Reference
by X-Ref ID

Enables you to perform a search by X-Ref ID to
display and maintain a particular trading partner
cross-reference.

2.

Partner Cross Reference
by Partner ID

Enables you to perform a search by Partner ID to
display and maintain a particular trading partner
cross-reference.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump codes displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1 or 2) to select a menu
option.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 167

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008

Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen

EDIM008

Purpose
EDI data can have two Partner IDs in the envelopes: one for the interchange-level and a second for
the group-level. Often, these Partner IDs are DUNS numbers, network telephone numbers, access
codes and/or communication IDs. Remembering your trading partners’ numbers (literally
hundreds) can be difficult and confusing for those who have to maintain the file. The Cross
Reference by X-Ref ID screen, which is valid only for Partner/, provides you with the capability to
reduce the number of partner records for each trading partner and assign ONE Partner ID that is
meaningful to you.

How to Access
Access the Cross-Reference by X-Ref ID screen in either of two ways:
•

Type 1 to select Partner Cross Reference by X-Ref ID from the Partner Cross
Reference Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Cross-Reference by X-Ref ID screen.
Add Delete Info Update Select
EDIM008 1.3.1_____
CROSS-REFERENCE BY X-REF ID

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Starting X-Ref...: ___________________________________
A
_ X-Ref
Partner

___________________________________
___________________________________

Qual
____
____

Div
____

_

X-Ref
Partner

___________________________________
___________________________________

____
____

____

_

X-Ref
Partner

___________________________________
___________________________________

____
____

____

_

X-Ref
Partner

___________________________________
___________________________________

____
____

____

Enter PF1=Help PF2=XRefP
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

2 - 168

PF3=Exit

PF5=Maint

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008

The Partner Subsystem

Screen Actions
To search for a particular cross-reference, type the Cross Reference ID or a partial ID in the
Starting X-Ref field, and press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays the first cross-reference and
Partner ID matching the search key you entered.
The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Cross Reference screen. The following table
describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action...

Associated
with this
screen
action...

Do this...

To add a cross-reference
entry to the Cross
Reference File for an
existing Partner ID

Add

Type A in the A field, type the new
cross-reference and Qualifier (this
becomes the search Partner ID and
Qualifier), type the Partner ID and
Qualifier of a Partner ID that exists on
the partner profile in the Partner fields,
and press Enter.

To delete a cross-reference
entry on the Cross
Reference File

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the desired
cross-reference, and press Enter.
Remember, you are only deleting the
cross-reference on the Cross Reference
File, NOT the Partner ID as it exists on
your partner profile.

Display the date, time and
user initials on the message
line that reflects when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

To update a cross-reference
entry in the Cross
Reference file

Update

Type U in the A field corresponding to
the appropriate cross reference, modify
the Partner ID and Qualifier, and press
Enter.

To select a Partner ID from
the cross-reference to
maintain

Select

Type S in the A field next to the crossreference that is linked to the Partner
ID, and press PF5.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 169

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=XrefP

Displays the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen. To access, type S in the A
field next to the Partner ID to view, and press PF2=XrefP.

PF5=Maint

Displays the Partner Selection Menu (for the Partner ID selected) from which
you can perform partner profile maintenance.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Starting X-Ref
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to specify where you want to begin examining the
cross-referenced Partner ID listing. To specify a search, type the X-Ref ID, or partial XRef ID.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

2 - 170

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Cross Reference By X-Ref ID Screen EDIM008

The Partner Subsystem

A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Valid values include the
following codes:
A

=

D
S

=
=

I

=

U

=

Add: add a new cross-reference and Qualifier for an existing Partner
ID and Qualifier.
Delete: delete an existing cross-reference.
Select: select a cross-reference listing from which to perform Partner
ID maintenance.
Info: Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that
reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or
last changed.
Update: update an existing cross-reference.

X-Ref
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter or display the X-Ref ID cross-reference for
a specific Partner ID.
Note: The values in the X-Ref and X-Ref Qual fields make up
the key, which cannot be updated. If you need to change
these values you should delete the old record and add a
new one.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
X-Ref Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the X-Ref ID cross-reference Qualifier
associated with the X-Ref ID cross-reference Partner ID, if applicable.
Note: The values in the X-Ref and X-Ref Qual fields make up
the key, which cannot be updated. If you need to change
these values you should delete the old record and add a
new one.
X-Ref Div
A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the cross-reference is
added. The default value is 000.
Partner
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID that exists on the partner
profile. This is the Partner ID to which you are cross-referencing.
Partner Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier (if applicable) associated with
the Partner ID as it exists on the partner profile.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 171

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006

Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen

EDIM006

Purpose
The Cross Reference by Partner ID, valid only for Partner/, screen provides you with an alternative
view of the Partner Cross Reference file. This screen provides you with the ability to see what XRef ID entries have been established for a particular trading partner.
If you need to add, update, or delete a cross-reference record, use the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID
screen. Access the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen directly from the Cross Reference by
Partner ID screen. Also, you can access the Partner Maintenance screen for a Partner ID directly
from the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen.

How to Access
Access the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen in any one of the following ways:
•

On the Partner Cross Reference Menu, type 2 to select the Partner Cross
Reference by Partner ID screen, and press Enter.

•

Type S to select the desired Partner ID on the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen
and press PF2.

•

Type 1.3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Cross Reference by Partner ID screen.
Info Select
EDIM006 1.3.2_____

CROSS REFERENCE BY PARTNER

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner ID: VENDOR-1___________________________ Qual: ____
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Cross Reference ID
100200345
1003347899000
121212121
5136666666
6147937000

END OF CROSS REFERENCE
Enter PF1=Help PF2=XRefX
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

2 - 172

Qual
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ

PF3=Exit

Div
000
000
000
000
000

PF5=Maint

PF6=Nxt Part

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006

The Partner Subsystem

Screen Actions
To view the X-Ref IDs for a specific Partner ID, type the Partner ID and Qualifier in the
appropriate fields at the top of the screen.
The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Cross Reference by Partner screen. The
following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
Associated
with this
screen
action...

To perform
this action...

Do this...

Display the date, time and user
initials on the message line that
reflects when the information
for the selected entry was
created or last changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

To select a Cross Reference ID
to maintain.

Select

Type S in the A field next to the desired
Cross Reference ID, and press PF2.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=XRefX

Displays the Cross Reference by X-Ref ID screen for the Cross Reference ID
selected.

Note: Pressing PF2 without selecting a specific Cross
Reference ID transfers you back to the Cross Reference
by X-Ref ID screen using the first cross-reference record
on the Cross Reference by Partner screen for positioning.
PF5=Maint

Displays the Partner Selection Menu for the Partner ID listed at the top of the
screen from which you can perform partner profile maintenance.

PF6=Nxt Part

Displays the Cross Reference IDs for the next Partner ID found on the partner
profile.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 173

The Partner Subsystem

Partner Cross Reference By Partner ID Screen EDIM006

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID that exists on the partner
profile. This is the Partner ID to which you are cross-referencing.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Partner ID Qualifier (if applicable)
associated with the Partner ID as it exists on the partner profile.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S (Select) next to
the Cross Reference ID and press PF5 to select a cross-reference listing from which to
perform cross-reference maintenance. Type I (Info) next to the Cross Reference ID and
press Enter to display the date, time and user initials on the message line that indicate
when the information for the selected entry was created or last changed.
Cross Reference ID (protected)
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the cross-reference identifications for a
specific Partner ID.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the X-Ref ID
(if applicable).
Div (protected)
A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the cross-reference is
added. The default value is 000.

2 - 174

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship Menu

EDIM009

Purpose
The Trading Relationship Menu contains two menu options to permit viewing the relationship file
by EDI ID or by user/partner. This screen is valid only for Relationship mode.

How to Access
Access the Trading Partner Relationship Menu in either of these two ways:
•

On the Partner Maintenance Menu, type 3 to select Trading Partner Relationship
and press Enter.

•

Type 1.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship Menu.
EDIM009 1.3_______

TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

1. Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID
2. Trading Partner Relationship by User/Partner

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 175

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship Menu EDIM009

Menu Options
The Trading Partner Relationship Menu contains two selections, which are described in the
following table.

Menu Option

Description

1.

Trading Partner Relationship by
EDI ID

Enables you to perform a search by EDI ID to
display and maintain a particular trading
partner relationship.

2.

Trading Partner Relationship by
user/partner

Enables you to perform a search by user/
partner to display and maintain a particular
trading partner relationship.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1 or 2) and press Enter to
perform the selected function.

2 - 176

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen

EDIM023

Purpose
The Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen provides you the capability of uniquely
identifying relational conditions with your trading partners. By combining the Sender and
Receiver ID with Qualifiers and associating this combination to the user/partner Profile ID, a
unique relationship can be defined. This screen is valid only for Relationship mode.

How to Access
Access the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 1 to select Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID from the Trading Partner
Relationship Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen.
Add Delete Info Update Select
EDIM023 1.3.1_____ TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP BY EDI ID

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

USER EDI ID.........: ___________________________________ Qual: ____ Div: ___
Starting Part EDI ID: ___________________________________ Qual: ____
A
_

Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____
User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________

_

Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____
User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________

_

Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____
User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________

_

Partner EDI ID..: ___________________________________ Qual: ____
User/Partner....: _______________ / _______________

END OF RELATIONSHIP FILE
Enter PF1=Help PF2=TPPrt PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

STATUS

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

ADD: 000 DEL: 000 UPD: 00
PF5=Maint
PF6=Nxt User

2 - 177

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023

Screen Actions
To search for a particular User EDI ID, type the User EDI ID or partial User EDI ID information in
the User EDI ID field and press Enter. Sterling Gentran will display the first user that matches the
search key or partial search key you entered.
To search for a particular User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combination, type the User EDI ID in
the User EDI ID field and type the full or partial, Partner EDI ID in the first PART EDI ID field
and press Enter. The system will display the first Trading Partner Relationship that matches the
search key you entered.
The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Trading Partner Relationship screen. The
following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action...

2 - 178

Associated
with this
screen
action...

Do this...

To add a cross-reference
entry to the trading partner
Relationship file for an
existing Partner ID

Add

Type A in the A field, type the new Partner
EDI ID in Partner EDI ID and Qual, type
the existing User/Partner ID in User/
Partner, and then press Enter.

To add a new relationship
entry to the trading partner
Relationship file for an
existing User/Partner ID

Add

Type the new User EDI ID in User EDI ID
and Qual. Type A in the A field, type a
new Partner EDI ID in Partner EDI ID and
Qual, type the existing User/Partner ID in
User/Partner, and then press Enter.

To delete a trading partner
relationship entry on the
trading partner
Relationship file

Delete

Make sure you are on the correct User EDI
ID then type D in the A field next to the
desired Partner EDI ID, and press Enter.

Display the date, time and
user initials on the message
line that reflects when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

To update a trading partner
relationship entry in the
Trading Partner
Relationship file

Update

Type U in the A field corresponding to the
appropriate Partner EDI ID, modify the
User/Partner, and press Enter.

To select a user/partner
profile from the trading
partner relationship field to
which you want to perform
maintenance

Select

Make sure you are on the correct User EDI
ID and then type S in the A field next to
the desired Partner EDI ID that is linked to
the user/partner profile. Then, press the
PF5 key.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023

Associated
with this
screen
action...

To perform
this action...
To view other User EDI ID
and Partner EDI ID
combinations that share
this User/Partner ID

Select

The Partner Subsystem

Do this...

Make sure you are on the correct User EDI
ID and then Type S in the A field next to
the desired Partner EDI ID that is linked to
the User/Partner ID, and press the PF2
key.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=TPPrt

Displays the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen (starts with the
user/partner selected.

PF5=Maint

Displays the Partner Selection Menu (for the User/Partner ID selected) from
which you can perform partner profile maintenance.

PF6=Nxt User

Displays the user EDI and Partner ID starting with the next User EDI ID.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 179

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023

USER EDI ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter or display the User EDI ID portion of the
user/trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the User EDI
ID, if applicable.
Div
A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the trading partner
relationship is added. The default value is 000.
Starting Part EDI ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to specify where you want to being examining the
partner relationship listing. To specify a search, type the Partner EDI ID, or a partial
Partner EDI ID. This will be paired with the User EDI ID to position within the list. The
display will begin at this relationship or the nearest matching relationship.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
(Starting Part EDI ID) Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Starting
Partner EDI ID, if applicable.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Valid values include the
following codes:

2 - 180

A

=

D
S

=
=

I

=

U

=

Add: add a new trading partner relationship for an existing User/
Partner ID.
Delete: delete an existing trading partner relationship.
Select: select a trading partner relationship from which to perform
User/Partner ID maintenance.
Info: Display the date, time and user initials on the message line that
reflects when the information for the selected entry was created or
last changed.
Update: update an existing trading partner relationship.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship By EDI ID Screen EDIM023

The Partner Subsystem

Partner EDI ID
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner relationship EDI ID
portion of the user/trading partner relationship for a specific user/partner on the partner
profile.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
User/Partner (user portion)
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the user portion of the User/Partner ID that
exists on the partner profile.
User/Partner (partner portion)
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner portion of the User/
Partner ID that exists on the partner profile.
Qual
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to enter the Qualifier associated with the Partner ID,
if applicable.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 181

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen

EDIM024

Purpose
The Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen provides you with an alternative view of the
partner Relationship file. This screen provides you with the ability to see which relationship
entries have been established for a user/partner combination. This screen is valid only for
Relationship mode.
Note: If you need to add, update, or delete a relationship record,
use the Trading Partner by EDI ID screen.

How to Access
Access the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen using any one these methods:
•

Type 3 to select Trading Partner Relationship by User/Partner from the Trading
Partner Relationship Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 1.3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

•

On the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen, type S next to the Partner
EDI ID User/Partner field and press PF2.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Trading Partner Relationship by Partner screen.
Info Select
EDIM024 1.3.2_____

TRADING PARTNER RELATIONSHIP BY PARTNER

Start User/Partner:
YOUR_COMPANY___ /
A
User EDI ID/Partner EDI ID
_
ABLANK
VENDOR-1
_
YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_
YOUR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1_______
Qual
Div
000
000
000
ZZ

_
_
_
END OF CROSS REFERENCE RECORDS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=TPEDI PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

2 - 182

PF5=Maint

PF6=Nxt Part

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024

The Partner Subsystem

Screen Actions
To view the relationship records for a specific User/Partner ID, enter the User/Partner ID in the
appropriate fields at the top of the screen.
The screen actions are displayed on the top of the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen.
The following table describes each function and gives instructions on how to perform those
functions.
Associated
with this
screen
action...

To perform
this action...

Do this...

Display the date, time and
user initials on the message
line that reflects when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

To select the User EDI ID
and Partner EDI ID
combination from Trading
Partner Relationship File
and return to Trading
Partner Relationship by
EDI ID.

Select

Make sure you are on the correct User
EDI ID and Partner EDI ID. Then, type
S in the A field next to the desired User
EDI ID and press PF2.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=TPEDI

Displays the Trading Partner Relationship by EDI ID screen (begins with the
User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID selected).

PF6=Nxt Part

Displays the User EDI ID and Partner EDI ID combination (begins with the
next User Partner ID).

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 183

The Partner Subsystem

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024

Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Start User (user portion)
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the user portion of the User/Partner ID that
exists on the partner profile.
Start Partner (partner portion)
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to enter the trading partner portion of the User/
Partner ID that exists on the partner profile.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action to perform. Type S to select a
trading partner relationship for which to perform User/Partner ID maintenance and press
PF5. Type I (for Info) and press Enter to display the date, time and user initials on the
message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or last
changed.
User EDI ID (protected)
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the User EDI ID portion of the user/
trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character
(USC). To use a USC, the substitution character must
exist on the defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.
User EDI ID Qualifier (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the User EDI
ID, if applicable.
Partner EDI ID (protected)
A 35-position alphanumeric field used to display the Partner EDI ID portion of the user/
trading partner relationship for a specific User/Partner ID on the partner profile.
Note: This field supports the underscore substitution character.
To use a USC, the substitution character must exist on the
defined partner header record.
See the topic “Using Underscore Substitution
Characters” in Chapter 7 for more information about this
feature.

2 - 184

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024

The Partner Subsystem

Div (protected)
A 3-position alphanumeric field assigned by the user at the time the trading partner
relationship is added. The default value is 000.
Partner EDI ID Qualifier (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to display the Qualifier associated with the Partner
EDI ID, if applicable.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

2 - 185

The Partner Subsystem

2 - 186

Trading Partner Relationship By Partner Screen EDIM024

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter

3

The Standards Subsystem

Overview
This chapter contains the following topics related to the Standards subsystem.

Topic

Page

Before You Begin .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Standards Maintenance Menu ........................................................EDIM100 ....................... 3-8
Version Directory............................................................................EDIM111 ..................... 3-11
Version Screen ................................................................................EDIM110 ..................... 3-14
Version/Transaction Directory........................................................EDIM113 ..................... 3-17
Transaction Directory .....................................................................EDIM121/EDIM122.... 3-21
Transaction Screen..........................................................................EDIM120 ..................... 3-27
Segments Screen.............................................................................EDIM130 ..................... 3-33
Segment Element Screen ................................................................EDIM140 ..................... 3-38
Segment Element............................................................................EDIM141 ..................... 3-44
Segment Element Activity Screen..................................................EDIM150 ..................... 3-49
Data Element Definition Screen .....................................................EDIM160 ..................... 3-54
Standard Code Menu ......................................................................EDIM170 ..................... 3-58
Standard Code Directory ................................................................EDIM171 ..................... 3-60
Standard Code Maintenance Screen ...............................................EDIM172 ..................... 3-63
Code Maintenance List Options Screen .........................................EDIM173 ..................... 3-66
Transaction in Use Screen ..............................................................EDIM180 ..................... 3-68
Standard Association Screen ..........................................................EDIM105 ..................... 3-72

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3-1

The Standards Subsystem

Before You Begin

Before You Begin
What are Standards?
To use EDI effectively, trading partners must use industry-agreed-upon guidelines on what data
they transmit and how that data is arranged. Standards are those guidelines by which trading
partners conduct electronic data interchange (EDI).
Standards, though permanent and uniform, continually evolve to meet changing requirements of
the individuals and organizations that use them. However, even with the evolution of EDI
standards to meet changing needs, occasionally trading partners require unique applications of
these standards. Standards agencies issue updates to standards versions during regular intervals;
they might issue small changes, fixes, and additions intermittently. EDI users need to be able to
respond to these intermittent changes and non-standards communications quickly and easily.
The Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem has been designed to support the various national
and international EDI Standards, such as, ASC X12, UN/EDIFACT, TRADACOMS, ODETTE,
and GENCOD. Because of conflicts with Version/Release among the various Standards
Controlling Agencies, Sterling Gentran Agency is used along with Version ID to uniquely identify
a standard. The agency is a three position code that represents the Controlling Agency or board
that is responsible for issuing and maintaining the standard. Sterling Gentran uses the following
default agency codes:
X

ASC X12

UN

UN/EDIFACT

A

TRADACOMS

T

TDCC

F

Fixed Format

A sample usage would be ASC X12 and UN/EDIFACT both have a version 002 release 001. The
ASC X12 version is implemented as ‘002001’ with an agency of ‘X.’ The UN/EDIFACT version
is implemented as ‘002001’ with an agency of ‘UN.’
Sterling Gentran encompasses provisions to support subsets and localized standards. These
standards are based on other standards, but have been customized for specific industry or region
usage. The version is 12 positions and is comprised of the version number for three characters,
version release for the characters, and version association for six characters. The version
association identifies the subset. For example, UCS version 003010UCS is a subset of ASC X12
003010. The version association is UCS. EDIFICE version 001921ED3 is a subset of UN/
EDIFACT 001921. The version association is ED3. The controlling agency for these two subsets
are different from the original versions. To identify the agency to Sterling Gentran and maintain
uniqueness for these subsets, the Association file contains a cross-reference between the version
association and agency. The Editors in the standard loading process use this file to determine the
agency. If a version association is present, the association file is read to retrieve the agency. If no
version association is present, the default agency values identified above is used. Any time a
version is added that contains a version association, an appropriate Association/Agency record
must be added via the EDIM105 – Standard Association screen.

3-2

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Standards Subsystem

For our example, an association record is set up for 003010UCS as Association = UCS and
Agency = T, for 001921ED3 as Association = ED3 and Agency = UN. This tells the Editor to use
agency ‘T’ for any version that has a version association of ‘UCS,’ ‘UN’ for any version that has a
version association of ‘ED3.’ The agency to be used for an association should reflect the
controlling agency.
See the topics “Inbound Processing Programs” and “Outbound Processing Programs” in the IBM®
Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for more information
about using agency and association for standard loading in the Editors and Mappers.
Several international standards, such as ODETTE, Brokernet and TRADACOMS include multiple
definitions of segments and elements within the same version. Sterling Gentran:Basic has been
structured to support up to 100 different definitions of a Segment ID or Element ID per version. A
segment version is associated with Segment ID and an element version is associated with Element
ID. The majority of segments and elements use a segment/element version of ‘00.’ If additional
definitions are needed, versions ‘01’ – ‘99’ are available. Sterling Gentran:Basic uses the segment/
element version to identify the correct definition when building maps or compliance editing
interchanges.
Sterling Gentran:Basic supports code lists for code validation in the mappers and compliance
Editors. Four files are used to contain these code values. File 1 contains supported code lists for
elements with a maximum length of 5 or less. File 2 contains supported code lists for elements
with a maximum length of 6 – 10. File 3 contains supported code lists for elements with a
maximum length of 11 – 20. File 4 contains supported code lists for elements with a maximum
length of 21 – 40.
Using the Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem, your EDI coordinator can:
•

Specify EDI standards transactions for use in data translation.

•

Examine transaction standards, in full detail.

•

Perform interim maintenance to standard transactions.

•

Create special transactions for use in unique trading partner communication.

The Standards subsystem contains all the screens you need to view, add, change, or delete data
relating to EDI standards.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3-3

The Standards Subsystem

Before You Begin

What is in this Chapter?
The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with the reference information you need to use the
Standards subsystem of Sterling Gentran:Basic. This chapter is divided into several sections. Each
section is comprised of all reference information relating to a particular screen. In each section,
you will find the following reference information:
•

The purpose of the screen

•

Instructions on how to access the screen

•

An example of the screen

•

Descriptions of screen actions, when applicable

•

A list of the valid function keys for the screen, as well as descriptions of each key

•

A description and valid values for each field on the screen

How to Access the Standards Subsystem
Access all the screens in the Standards subsystem from the Standards Maintenance Menu. Perform
either of these two actions to access the Standards Maintenance Menu:
•

In the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 2 in the Selection field to select
Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 2.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

The Standards Maintenance Menu contains an unlabeled selection field in which you type the
number corresponding to a menu option. The selection field is displayed to the left of the first
menu option. After you type the number of the menu option in the selection field, you must press
Enter for the system to display the screen corresponding to the menu option you selected.

3-4

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Standards Subsystem

Refer to Figure 3.1as you navigate the Standards subsystem. In this figure, each screen is
identified in a box. The uppermost box identifies the Standards Maintenance Menu, from which
you can access all other Standards screens. The arrow lines illustrate which screens you can access
from various locations in the Standards subsystem.
Standards
Maintenance
Menu

Version

Transaction

Directory

Directory

Version/
Transaction
Directory

Transaction
in Use

User
Envelope
Specification

Association

Version
Outbound
Specification
Version

Transaction

Standard
Code
Directory
Standard
Code
Menu

Segment
Standard
Code
Maintenance

Segment
Element

Segment
Element
Activity

Standard
Code List
Options

Data
Element
Definition

Standard
Code
Maintenance

Figure 3.1

Standards Subsystem Screen Flow

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3-5

The Standards Subsystem

Before You Begin

Standards Jump Codes
A jump code is a 1- to 10-position alphabetic or numeric code in the Jump Code field located at the
upper left corner of each Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. Use the jump code to move, or jump,
directly from one screen to another, while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible via the
Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible
only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use
the following procedure to jump between screens:
Step 1: Press Home.
The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field.
Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter.
Note:If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field
and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab
to return to the next entry field on the screen.
The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Standards subsystem
menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are
displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus.
Screen
Screen Title

Jump Codes

Name

Numeric

Alphabetic

Sterling Gentran Main Menu

EDIM001

0.0
0

BSC
MAIN

Standards Maintenance Menu

EDIM100

2.0
2

STD

Version Directory

EDIM111

2.1

STD.VDIR

Version

EDIM110

2.2

STD.VER

Version/Transaction Directory

EDIM113

2.3

STD.VTDIR

Transaction Directory

EDIM121

2.4

STD.TDIR

EDIM122

3-6

Transaction

EDIM120

2.5

STD.TRN
STD.TRAN

Segment

EDIM130

2.6

STD.SEG

Segment Element

EDIM140

2.7

STD.SEGELE

Segment Element Activity

EDIM150

2.8

STD.ACT

Data Element Definition

EDIM160

2.9

STD.DD
STD.ELE

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Standards Subsystem

Screen
Screen Title

Jump Codes

Name

Numeric

Alphabetic

Standard Code Menu

EDIM170

2.10

STD.CDE
STD.CODE

Standard Code Directory

EDIM171

2.10.1

STD.CDEDIR

Standard Code Maintenance

EDIM172

2.10.2

STD.CDEMNT

Code Maintenance List
Options

EDIM173

2.10.3

STD.CDEOPT

Transaction In Use

EDIM180

2.11

STD.TUSE
STD.USE

Standard Association

EDIM105

2.13

STD.ASSOC

If Sterling Gentran:Structure is installed
User Envelope Specification

EDIM190

2.12

STD.ENV
STD.UENV

See Appendix A for a complete list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic jump codes and their associated
screens.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3-7

The Standards Subsystem

Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100

Standards Maintenance Menu

EDIM100

Purpose
The Standards Maintenance Menu contains thirteen menu options that you can use to perform
standards file maintenance online. Use these screens to display, add, and change EDI standards.
Note: Menu option 12, User Envelope Specification, is
available only if IBM® Sterling Gentran:Structure® for
z/OS® is installed on your system.

How to Access
Access the Standards Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways:
•

In the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 2 in the selection field to select the
Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 2.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Standards Maintenance Menu.
EDIM100 2.0_______

STANDARDS MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
__

Enter PF1=Help

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Version Directory
Version
Version/Transaction Directory
Transaction Directory
Transaction
Segment
Segment Element
Segment Element Activity
Data Element Definition
Standard Code Menu
Transaction in Use
User Envelope Specification
Standard Association
PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

3-8

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100

The Standards Subsystem

The Standards Maintenance Menu contains menu options that enable you to perform various
online standards maintenance functions. The list of menu options, as well as a description of each
option follows.
Note: The Standards subsystem contains additional screens that
are not listed below. The screens that are not listed are
detail screens that are displayed only from one of the
screens listed below.
Menu Option

Description

1.

Version Directory

Lists all versions defined on the Version file.

2.

Version

Enables you to add or maintain a version
definition.

3.

Version/Transaction
Directory

Lists all versions that contain a given
transaction.

4.

Transaction Directory

Lists all transactions for a given version.

5.

Transaction

Enables you to add or maintain a transaction
definition.

6.

Segment

Enables you to add or maintain a segment
definition.

7.

Segment Element

Enables you to add or maintain a data element
definition within a specific segment (to add or
maintain segment element conditions).

8.

Segment Element Activity

Enables you to add or maintain the activity
description and accumulators (if applicable)
for a data element.

9.

Data Element Definition

Enables you to add or maintain the data
element definition for the description of
individual data elements.

10.

Standard Code Menu

Provides access to the screens that enable you
to display, add, or maintain the list of codes
for a data element.

11.

Transaction In Use

Enables you to select the versions and specific
transactions that you use for EDI
communication.

12.

User Envelope Specification

Enables you to add or maintain the user
envelope definition used during fixed standard
mapping. (This menu option is available to
Sterling Gentran:Structure customers only.)

13.

Standard Association

Enables you to display and modify standard
association records.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3-9

The Standards Subsystem

Standards Maintenance Menu EDIM100

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
Type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to select and press Enter.

3 - 10

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Version Directory EDIM111

The Standards Subsystem

Version Directory

EDIM111

Purpose
The Version Directory lists all standards versions, whether they are user-specific or public
standard, that are in the Standards file. The system displays up to ten standards versions on the
Version Directory at one time.
You can type a partial Version ID in the Starting Version ID field. The screen contains ten Version
IDs, beginning with the closest matching Version ID, in the Version ID column. If you leave the
Starting Version ID field blank, the list begins with the first Version ID on the Standards file.

How to Access
Access the Version Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 1 to select Version Directory from the Standards Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type 2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Version Directory.
Select
EDIM111 2.1_______

VERSION DIRECTORY

Starting Version Id:
Search Agency......:
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Version
ID
G2/7
G2/8
G2/9
G3/0
G3/1
00100
00200
00300
00400
004001

Agncy
T
T
T
T
T
X
X
X
X
UN

G2/7________
___

Envelope
Type
TDCC
TDCC
TDCC
TDCC
TDCC
ANSI-X12
ANSI-X12
ANSI-X12
ANSI-X12
EDIFACT

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Agency..: T__

Description

U
A
TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 7
N
TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 8
N
TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 2 RELEASE 9
N
TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 3 RELEASE 0
N
TDCC (GENERAL) VERSION 3 RELEASE 1
N
ANSI INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMEN N
ANSI INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMEN N
INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
N
INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
N
EDIFACT CONTRL/AUTACK/KEYMAN MESSAGES (VERS N

TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE VERSION ID AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Tdir
PF3=Exit
PF5=Vers
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 11

The Standards Subsystem

Version Directory EDIM111

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Version Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...
View the Version screen for a
version on the Version
Directory.

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...

Type S next to the version for which you want
to view the Version screen, and then press
PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Tdir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the version selected. Type S in the A
field of the version you want to select and press PF5. If no version is selected,
the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected.

PF5=Vers

Displays the Version screen for the version selected. Type S in the A field of
the version you want to select and press PF5. If no version is selected, the first
version displayed on this screen is automatically selected.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

3 - 12

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Version Directory EDIM111

The Standards Subsystem

Starting Version Id
A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version at which the display list is to
start.
You can type a partial Version ID in this field. The system will then display ten Version
IDs, starting with the closest matching Version ID. If you leave this field blank, the
version list begins with the first version found on the Standards file.
Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is combined with the
starting version identification to position the display list.
Search Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field that restricts the Version IDs being displayed on this
screen to those that match the Search Agency. If you leave this field blank, all agencies
will display.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a version record. Type S next to the selected
Version ID, and then press PF2 to display the Transaction Directory or PF5 to display the
Version screen.
Version ID (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version.
Agncy (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Envelope Type (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that indicates the agency responsible for the standard.
Valid values are:
TRADACOMS
EDIFACT
TDCC
ANSI-X12
USER DEF

=
=
=
=
=

ANA TRADACOMS
EDIFACT
TDCC
ASC X12
User-defined standard

Description (protected)
A 27-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version.
UA (Update Allowed) (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not this Version record can be
updated. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, any records for this version can be updated.
No, none of the records for this version can be updated.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 13

The Standards Subsystem

Version Screen EDIM110

Version Screen

EDIM110

Purpose
The Version screen displays the highest level of standards maintenance. All standards records are
associated with a specific Version ID. The definition for a Version ID is maintained at this level.
You can view, change, or delete the definition for the Version ID on this screen.

How to Access
Access the Version screen in any one of the following ways:
•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 2 to select Version and press Enter.

•

Type S to select a Version ID and press PF2 on the Version/Transaction Directory.

•

Press PF2 on the Transaction screen.

•

Type S to select a Version ID and press PF5 on the Version Directory.

•

Type 2.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Version screen.
EDIM110 2.2_______

VERSION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Version Id.......:

004010______

Agency...........:

X__

Description......:

ANSI_VERSION_4_RELEASE_1_SUBRELEASE_0__ASC_X12________

Envelope Type....:

X

(A=ANA, E=EDIFACT, T=TDCC, X=X12)

Update Allowed...:

N

(Y/N)

Last Update Date: 01/23/03
Time: 10:38:21
User: XXX
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Tdir

3 - 14

PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir
PF5=Trans
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

PF6=Nxt Vers

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Version Screen EDIM110

The Standards Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Tdir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the version displayed on the Version
screen.

PF4=Vdir

Displays the Version Directory beginning with the version displayed on the
Version screen.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen for the displayed version.

PF6=Nxt Vers

Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions are displayed in
ascending alphanumeric order.

PF9=Add

Creates a new Version record.

PF10=Updt

Updates the current Version record after you have changed information on the
Version screen.

PF11=Del

Deletes the current Version record.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Description
A 54-position alphanumeric field that contains information about this version.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 15

The Standards Subsystem

Version Screen EDIM110

Envelope Type
A 1-position alphanumeric field where you indicate the code for selecting the EDI
envelope type. Valid values are:
A
E
T
X
D

=
=
=
=
=

ANA TRADACOMS
EDIFACT
TDCC
ASC X12
User-defined standard

Update Allowed
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not this Version record can be
updated. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, any records for this version can be updated.
No, none of the records for this version can be updated.

Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the date on which this Version record was created or last
changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
Last Update Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which this version record was created or last
changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user whom created or last changed this
Version record.

3 - 16

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113

The Standards Subsystem

Version/Transaction Directory

EDIM113

Purpose
The Version/Transaction Directory lists all versions containing a specific transaction. The list of
versions begins with the value entered in the Starting Version ID field.
You can type a partial Version ID in the Starting Version ID field. The system displays up to ten
Version IDs, beginning with the closest matching Version ID, in the Version ID column. If you
leave the Starting Version ID field blank, the list begins with the first Version ID on the Standards
file.

How to Access
Access the Version/Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 3 to select Version/Transaction Directory in the Standards Maintenance
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type S to select the appropriate Transaction number and press PF14 on the
Transaction Directory.

•

Press PF14 on the Transaction screen.

•

Type 2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Version/Transaction Directory.
Select
EDIM113 2.3_______

Transaction Id.....:
Starting Version Id:
Search Agency......:
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

VERSION/TRANSACTION DIRECTORY

______
004010______
X__

Version
Agncy Rlse Envelope
ID
Type
004010
X
ANSI-X12
004010AIAG
X
ANSI-X12
004010RIFMAT X
ANSI-X12
004010TI0900 X
ANSI-X12
004011
X
ANSI-X12
004012
X
ANSI-X12
00402
X
ANSI-X12
004020
X
ANSI-X12
004021
X
ANSI-X12
1
X
ANSI-X12

Search Limit:

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

0050

Description
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 A
AIAG - X12 VERSION 4, RELEASE 1, FEBRUAR
RAIL INDUSTRY FORUM
VERSION 4, RELEASE
X12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY - ISSUE
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 1 A
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 2 A
INTERCHANGE CONTROL AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 2 SUBRELEASE 0 A
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 2 SUBRELEASE 1 A
VERSION 1 SPECIAL FOR CHRYSLER CORP

TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE VERSION ID AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers
PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir
PF5=Trans
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 17

The Standards Subsystem

Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Version/Transaction Directory. The
following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those
functions.

To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View the Version screen for a
version on the Version/
Transaction Directory.

Select

Type S next to the version for which
you want to view the Version screen,
and then press PF2.

View the Transaction screen
for a version on the Version/
Transaction Directory.

Select

Type S next to the version for which
you want to view the Transaction
screen, and then press PF5.

View the Transaction
Directory for a version on the
Version/Transaction
Directory.

Select

Type S next to the version for which
you want to view the Transaction
Directory, and then press PF4.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

3 - 18

PF2=Vers

Displays the Version screen for the version selected. Type S in the A field of
the version you want to select and press PF2. If no version is selected, the first
version displayed on this screen is automatically selected.

PF4=Tdir

Displays the Transaction Directory for the version selected. Type S in the A
field of the version you want to select and press PF4. If no version is selected,
the first version displayed on this screen is automatically selected.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113

The Standards Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Transaction Id
A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification for which the
system displays versions containing that transaction.
Starting Version Id
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the identification of the version at
which the display list is to start. You can type a partial Version ID in this field. The system
displays a list of Version IDs, starting with the nearest matching Version ID, in the Version
ID column. If you leave this field blank, the list begins with the first version found on the
Standards file.
Search Limit
A 4-digit numeric field in which you enter the maximum number of reads of the
Transaction file before the results are displayed on the screen. The default value is 50. If
the system reaches the search limit, the message ‘Search Limit Exceeded’ is displayed
near the bottom of the screen. To view additional versions, press PF8 or change the limit
and press Enter.
Note: To improve response time, reduce the search limit.
Search Agency
A 3-position alphanumeric field that restricts the Version IDs being displayed on this
screen to those that match the Search Agency. If you leave this field blank, all agencies
will display.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the
selected Transaction ID, and then press PF2 to display the Version screen, PF4 to display
the Transaction Directory, or PF5 to display the Transaction screen.
Version ID (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 19

The Standards Subsystem

Version/Transaction Directory EDIM113

Agncy (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Rlse (protected)
A 1-position alphanumeric field that specifies the release number for the transaction
identification. The release number is currently only being used for ANA TRADACOMS
standards.
Envelope Type (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that indicates the envelope category that the version
belongs. Valid values are:
TRADACOMS
EDIFACT
TDCC
ANSI-X12
USER DEF

=
=
=
=
=

ANA TRADACOMS
EDIFACT
TDCC
ASC X12
User-defined standard

Description (protected)
A 41-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version.

3 - 20

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Directory

EDIM121/EDIM122

Purpose
The Transaction Directory lists all transactions for a given version. The system displays as many
as ten transactions on the Transaction Directory at one time. To view additional transactions, press
PF8.
You can type a partial Version ID in the Version ID field then press PF6. The system will start
displaying Transactions for the Version ID with the closest matching Version ID. If you leave the
Starting Trans ID field blank, the list begins with the first transaction for the Version ID on the
standards file.
Two screens exist for transaction directories. The EDIM122 screen displays for TRADACOMS
standards Version IDs and the EDIM121 screen displays for non-TRADACOMS standards
Version IDs.

Difference Between the Two Transaction Directories
The Transaction Directory for TRADACOMS versions functions the same as the nonTRADACOMS Transaction Directory. The difference is the order in which the transactions are
listed.
The non-TRADACOMS Transaction Directory lists transactions in the order in which they are
displayed on the standard Transaction file (e.g., in ascending alphanumeric version order).
The TRADACOMS Transaction Directory lists transactions in logical order within the document,
within ascending numeric release order, within ascending alphanumeric order. This means that a
document’s header transaction is followed by its detail transaction(s), followed by its trailer
transaction.

How to Access
Access the appropriate Transaction Directory in any one of the following ways.
Note: You do not need to indicate whether you need EDIM121
or EDIM122. The system automatically displays the
Transaction Directory, based on the version you select.
•

Type 4 to select Transaction Directory on the Standards Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type S to select the appropriate Version ID and press PF2 on the Version
Directory.

•

Type a Version ID on the Version screen and press PF2.

•

Type a transaction code and Version ID on the Transaction screen and press PF4.

•

Type S to select a Version ID on the Version/Transaction screen and press PF4.

•

Type 2.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 21

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

Screen Example
This example illustrates the Transaction Directory (EDIM121) that displays for most versions.
Select
EDIM121 2.4_______

Version ID. . . . . :
Starting Trans ID . :

TRANSACTION DIRECTORY

004010______
______

XXX

Agency.

.

:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

X__

Description:
ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 ASC X12
Trans
Func
A
ID
Id
Description
_
CONTROL TRANSACTION
_
100
PG
INSURANCE PLAN DESCRIPTION
_
101
NL
NAME AND ADDRESS LISTS
_
104
SA
AIR SHIPMENT INFORMATION
_
105
BF
BUSINESS ENTITY FILINGS
_
106
MH
MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
_
107
MC
REQUEST FOR MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
_
108
MK
RESPONSE TO A MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
_
109
VE
VESSEL CONTENT DETAILS
_
110
IA
AIR FREIGHT DETAILS AND INVOICE
TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE TRANS NO AND PRESS THE APPROPRIATE PFKEY
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir
PF5=Trans
PF6=Nxt Vers
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd
PF14=VTdir

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Directory. The following table
describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

3 - 22

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View the Version Directory for a
transaction on the Transaction
Directory.

Select

Type S next to the transaction for
which you want to view the Version
Directory, and then press PF4.

View the Transaction screen for a
transaction on the Transaction
Directory.

Select

Type S next to the transaction for
which you want to view the
Transaction screen, and then press
PF5.

View the directory of
transactions for the next version.

N/A

Press PF6.

View the Version/Transaction
Directory for a transaction on the
Transaction Directory.

Select

Type S next to the transaction for
which you want to view the Version/
Transaction Directory, and then press
PF14.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

The Standards Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Vdir

Displays the Version Directory, starting with the version displayed on the
Transaction Directory.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected.

PF6=Nxt Vers

Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions are displayed in
ascending alphanumeric order.

PF14=VTdir

Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the version/ transaction
selected.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version ID
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you identify the version of the standard.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Starting Trans ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification with which the
Version ID list is to begin. Type a Transaction ID in this field. You can type a partial
Transaction ID in this field. The system displays up to ten transactions for the closest
matching Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this
field blank, the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the
Standards file.
Description (protected)
A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the
selected Trans ID, and then press PF4 to display the Version Directory, PF5 to display the
Transaction screen, or PF14 to display the Version/Transaction Directory.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 23

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

Trans ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the transaction.
Func Id (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that displays the functional group identification for the
transaction, if a functional group identification exists.
Description (protected)
A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction.

Screen Example
This example illustrates the Transaction Directory that is displayed only for transactions in ANA
TRADACOMS versions (EDIM122).
Select
EDIM122 2.4________

TRANSACTION DIRECTORY

Version ID.........: ANA001______
Starting Trans ID..: _______

XXX

Agency....:
Release...:

Description:
TRADACOMS UNITED KINGDOM
Trans
A
ID
Rel
Description
_
0
CONTROL TRANSACTION
_ AVLHDR
1
AVAILABILITY REPORT HEADER
_ AVLDET
1
AVAILABILITY REPORT DETAILS
_ AVLTLR
1
AVAILABILITY REPORT TRAILER
_ GENHDR
1
GENERAL COMMUNICATION HEADER
_ GENRAL
2
GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS TEXT
_ GENTLR
1
GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS TRAILER
_ LPRHDR
1
DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT HEADER
_ LPRDET
1
DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT DETAILS
_ LPRTLR
1
DRAFT - LOC PLAN RPT TRAILER
END OF TRANSACTION SET
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Vdir
PF5=Trans
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

06/01/2011
12:00:00

A
__

PF6=Nxt Ver
PF14=VTdir

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Directory. The following table
describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...
View the Version Directory for a
transaction on the Transaction
Directory.

3 - 24

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...

Type S next to the transaction for which
you want to view the Version Directory,
and then press PF4.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

To perform
this action ...

The Standards Subsystem

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View the Transaction screen for a
transaction on the Transaction
Directory.

Select

Type S next to the transaction for which
you want to view the Transaction
screen, and then press PF5.

View the directory of
transactions for the next version.

N/A

Press PF6.

View the Version/Transaction
Directory for a transaction on the
Transaction Directory.

Select

Type S next to the transaction for which
you want to view the Version/
Transaction Directory, and then press
PF14.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Vdir

Displays the Version Directory, starting with the version displayed on the
Transaction Directory.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen for the transaction selected.

PF6=Nxt Vers

Displays the next consecutive Version record. Versions will display in
ascending alphanumeric order.

PF14=VTdir

Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the version/ transaction
selected.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 25

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Directory EDIM121/EDIM122

Version ID
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you identify the version of the standard.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version
identification.
Starting Trans ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification with which the
Version ID list is to begin. Type a Transaction ID in this field. You can type a partial
Transaction ID in this field. The system displays up to ten transactions for the closest
matching Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this
field blank, the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the
Standards file.
Release
A 1-digit numeric field that specifies the release number for the starting Transaction ID
entered.
Description (protected)
A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a transaction record. Type S next to the
selected Trans ID, then press PF4 to display the Version Directory screen, PF5 to display
the Transaction screen, or PF14 to display the Version/Transaction Directory.
Trans ID (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the transaction for the specific transaction.
Rel (protected)
A 1-position alphanumeric field that displays the release number of the Transaction ID.
Description (protected)
A 46-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction.

3 - 26

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Screen EDIM120

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Screen

EDIM120

Purpose
The Transaction screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for a specific
transaction within a version.
The Transaction screen is displayed differently, depending on whether the standard version entered
on the screen is TRADACOMS or non-TRADACOMS.

Difference Between the Two Transaction Screen Displays
The Transaction screen for TRADACOMS versions displays additional information specific to
TRADACOMS. This information consists of release number, previous transaction indicator, next
transaction (1) code, next release (1) number, next transaction (2) code, next release (2) number,
next transaction (3), next release (3), next transaction (4), next release (4), and RSGRSG release
number.
See the “Field Descriptions” sub-topic following in this section for further information on the
TRADACOMS fields.

How to Access
Access the appropriate Transaction screen in any one of the following ways:
•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 5 to select Transaction and press Enter.

•

Press PF5 on the Version screen.

•

Press PF5 on the Version/Transaction Directory.

•

Type S to select a transaction number and press PF5 on the Transaction Directory.

•

Type 2.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 27

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Screen EDIM120

Screen Examples
The following example illustrates the Transaction screen that is displayed for most versions.
EDIM120 2.5_______

Transaction Code.....:
Version Id...........:
Description..........:
Functional Id........:
LS/LE Bounding Ind...:
NTE Float Ind........:
Number of Segments...:

TRANSACTION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

______
004010______
Agency.: X__
CONTROL_TRANSACTION________________________________
______
_ (Y/N/ )
_ (Y/N/ )
0026
Repeat Ind: N (Y/N)

Job Name: _________
Last Update Date: 05/01/04
Time: 11:08:55
User: XXX
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers
PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir
PF5=Segment
PF6=Nxt Tran
PF7=Rpt
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=Vtdir

The following example illustrates the Transaction screen that is displayed only for transactions in
ANA TRADACOMS versions.
EDIM120 2.5_______

Transaction Code.....:
Version Id...........:
Description..........:
Functional Id........:
LS/LE Bounding Ind...:
NTE Float Ind........:
Number of Segments...:
Prev Transaction.....:
Next Transaction (1).:
Next Transaction (2).:
Next Transaction (3).:
Next Transaction (4).:
RSGRSG Release.......:

TRANSACTION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

INVOIC
Release: 9
ANA001______
Agency.: A__
INVOICE_DETAILS____________________________________
INVOIC
_ (Y/N/ )
_ (Y/N/ )
0010
Repeat Ind: N (Y/N)
Y
VATTLR Release: 9
______ Release: _
______ Release: 0
______ Release: 0
Job Name: _________
_
Last Update Date: 03/31/04
Time: 11:39:24
User: XXX

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Vers
PF3=Exit PF4=Tdir
PF5=Segment
PF6=Nxt Tran
PF7=Rpt
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del
PF14=VTdir

3 - 28

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Screen EDIM120

The Standards Subsystem

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction screen. The following table
describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View an existing Transaction
record.

N/A

Type the transaction code and Version
ID and press Enter.

Create a new Transaction
record.

N/A

Complete the screen fields and press
PF9 to add the record.

Change an existing
Transaction record.

N/A

Display the record, type the changes,
and then press PF10 to update the
record.

Delete an existing
Transaction record.

N/A

Press PF11 to delete the record. The
system prompts you to confirm or
cancel the deletion.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and PF15=Logoff, as well as
the Enter key, are defined in Chapter 1.
PF2=Vers

Displays the Version screen for the transaction selected on the Transaction
Directory.

PF4=Tdir

Displays the Transaction Directory.

PF5=Segment

Displays the Segments screen for the displayed transaction. If no transaction
is displayed on this screen, a blank Segments screen is displayed.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays the next consecutive Transaction record. Transactions are displayed
in ascending alphanumeric order.

PF7=Rpt

Allows you to submit the batch Standards Print report for the standard
transaction displayed at the top of the screen.
Note: Codes are not printed for the requested transaction. If you
need to print all of the code records associated with a
transaction, execute the EXEC036 JCL member and set
the "Print Codes" flag to "Y" in the parameter record.

PF14=VTdir

Displays the Version/Transaction Directory for the transaction selected on the
Transaction screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 29

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Screen EDIM120

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Transaction Code (required)
A 6-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the transaction code.
Release (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 1-digit numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Description
A 51-position alphanumeric field containing information about the transaction.
Functional Id
A 6-position alphanumeric field that identifies the functional group. You can leave this
field blank if a functional identification does not exist for the specified transaction. The
functional identification is usually determined by the controlling agency.
LS/LE Bounding Ind (required)
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates how LS/LE segments are used within a
transaction. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

blank =

3 - 30

LS/LE segments are present in the transaction and are used to
determine position (bounded).
LS/LE segments are present in the transaction but are not used to
determine position (unbounded).
No LS/LE segments are present in the transaction.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Screen EDIM120

The Standards Subsystem

NTE Float Ind (required)
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether or not the NTE segment (the Note
segment) is displayed outside of a defined sequence order in the transaction (to float).
Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

blank =

NTE segments are present in the transaction and are displayed
anywhere in the document.
NTE segments are present in the transaction but are assigned a
position in the document.
NTE segments are NOT present in the transaction.

Number of Segments (required)
A 4-position numeric field that contains the number of segments in this transaction. This
number must be greater than zero.
Repeat Ind
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates if there are any repeating elements/group
elements in the transaction set. Valid values:
Y
N

=
=

Yes, there are repeating elements/group elements in this transaction.
No, there are no repeating elements/group elements (default value).

Prev Transaction (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that indicates if this Transaction ID (message) is part of a
logical document and is preceded by another message. The first message in a logical
document (usually a Header message) contains the value ‘N’ in this field as it begins the
logical document. Valid values:
Y

=

N

=

Yes, this message is part of a logical document and is preceded by
another message.
No, this message is not preceded by another message in the logical
document.

Next Transaction (1) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document.
This field is blank for the last message in a logical document (usually a Trailer message).
Release
A 1-position numeric field that displays the release for the message in Next Transaction
(1).
Next Transaction (2) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document.
This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. This field is blank
if the message is only used in a single logical document.
Release
A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the
Next Transaction (2) field.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 31

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction Screen EDIM120

Next Transaction (3) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document.
This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. Also, this field is
blank if the message is only used in a single logical document.
Release
A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the
Next Transaction (3) field.
Next Transaction (4) (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that indicates the next message for the logical document.
This field is used if the message is used in multiple logical documents. This field is blank
if the message is only used in a single logical document.
Release
A 1-position numeric field that displays the release of the next linked transaction in the
Next Transaction (4) field.
RSGRSG Release (ANA TRADACOMS versions only)
A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release of RSGRSG message that belongs
with this message. This field is coded for the first message (usually a Header message) of
those logical documents that can use the RSGRSG message.
Job Name
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to designate a user-specified jobname when
printing a report using the PF7 key. Valid values are any valid jobname.
To select reports for printing, type the user-specified jobname in the Job Name field and
press PF7. If you do not type a value in the Job Name field, the system uses a default
value, which was defined during installation customization of the JCL (EDIRJCL) file.
Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position numeric field that indicates the date on which the Transaction record was
created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which this Transaction record was created or
last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed this
Transaction record.

3 - 32

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segments Screen EDIM130

The Standards Subsystem

Segments Screen

EDIM130

Purpose
The Segments screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for a specific segment
within a transaction.

How to Access
Access the Segments screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 6 to select Segment from the Standards Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Press PF5 on the Transaction screen.

•

Type 2.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following example illustrates the Segments screen that is displayed for most versions.
Add Delete Update Select Info
EDIM130 2.6_______
SEGMENTS

Version Id......: 00001______
Transaction ID..: ______

A
_
_
_
_
_

XXX

Agency..:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

X__

******Segment******
Man ***Use*** **Loop*** DE
Seg Loop
LP Act
No
Id
Ver Ty Req Cde Min
Max Min
Max Count Grp
Id
B/E Cnt
0001
AC1_ 00 H _
O
1 999999
_ ______
___5 __ ______ _ ___
INTERCHANGE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT__________________________________________
0002
BG__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___7 __ ______ _ __1
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_HEADER________________________________________
0003
EG__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___4 __ ______ _ __1__
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_TRAILER______________________________________ _
0004
GE__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___2 __ ______ _ __1_
FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_TRAILER__________________________________________
0005
GS__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___8 __ ______ _ __1
FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_HEADER_____________________________________________

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Elements

PF6=Nxt Tran

3 - 33

The Standards Subsystem

Segments Screen EDIM130

This an example of the Segments screen that is displayed only for transactions in ANA
TRADACOMS versions.
Add Delete Update Select Info
EDIM130 2.6_______
SEGMENTS

Version Id......: ANA001______
Transaction ID..: ______

A
_
_
_
_
_

XXX

Agency..:
Release:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

A__
0

******Segment******
Man ***Use*** **Loop*** DE
Seg Loop
LP Act
No
Id
Ver Ty Req Cde Min
Max Min
Max Count Grp
Id
B/E Cnt
0001
AC1_ 00 H _
O
1 999999
_ ______
___5 __ ______ _ ___
INTERCHANGE_ACKNOWLEDGEMENT______________________________________
0002
BG__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___7 __ ______ _ __1
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_HEADER______________________________________
0003
EG__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___4 __ ______ _ __1
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_TRAILER_____________________________________
0004
GE__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___2 __ ______ _ __1
FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_TRAILER_________________________________________
0005
GS__ 00 H _
O
1 _____1
_ ______
___8 __ ______ _ __1
FUNCTIONAL_GROUP_HEADER__________________________________________

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

PF5=Elements

PF6=Nxt Tran

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segments screen. The following table
describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

3 - 34

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View an existing Segment
record.

N/A

Type the ID for the version in the
Version ID field, the agency in the
Agency field, and the transaction code
in the Transaction Code field, and
then press Enter

View the Segment Element
screen for an existing
segment.

Select

Type S in the A field next to the
segment for which you want to view
elements, and then press PF5.

Create a new Segment record.

Add

Type A in the A field, complete the
fields for the segment, and then press
Enter.

Change an existing Segment
record.

Update

Type U in the A field next to the
segment you want to change, change
the data in any of the fields for that
segment, and then press Enter

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segments Screen EDIM130

To perform
this action ...

The Standards Subsystem

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

Delete an existing Segment
record.

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the
segment you want to delete, and then
press Enter. The system prompts you
to confirm or cancel the deletion.

Display the date, time, and
user initials, on the message
line, to indicate when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the
desired entry and press Enter.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction screen for these segments.

PF5=Elements

Displays the Segment Elements screen. Type S in the A field next to the
segment for which you want to view elements, and then press PF5 to display
the Segment Elements screen.

PF6=Nxt Tran

Displays the Segments screen for the next consecutive Transaction ID.
Segments are displayed in ascending alphanumeric order.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 35

The Standards Subsystem

Segments Screen EDIM130

Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Transaction ID (required)
A 6-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the transaction code.
Release (ANA TRADACOMS version only)
A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to specify an action. Type S next to the selected
Segment ID and press PF5 to display the Segment Element screen. Type A to add a
segment record, U to update a record, D to delete a record, or I to display the date, time and
user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the selected entry
was created or last changed. Press Enter to perform the function.
Segment No (required)
A 4-position numeric field indicating the position the segment is displayed in the
transaction.
Segment Id (required)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier.
Segment Ver (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment.
Segment Ty (required)
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates the section where the segment is displayed.
Valid values are:
H
D
S
F

=
=
=
=

Header
Detail
Summary
Float

Req
Reserved for future use.
Man Cde (required)
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the segment is required to be present
in the transaction. Valid values are:
M
O
F
C

3 - 36

=
=
=
=

Mandatory – segment must be present.
Optional – segment is not required.
Floating – segment is displayed anywhere in transaction.
Conditional – segment is not required.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segments Screen EDIM130

The Standards Subsystem

Min Use
A 1-position numeric field that indicates the minimum number of required occurrences for
this segment. The default is zero for optional segments and one for mandatory segments.
Max Use (required)
A 6-digit numeric field that indicates the maximum number of times that a particular
segment is allowed to occur, in succession, at a specific location within the transaction.
Min Loop
A 1-position numeric field that indicates the minimum number of required occurrences for
this loop. The default is zero for optional loops and one for mandatory loops.
Max Loop
A 6-digit numeric field that indicates the maximum number of times that the loop is
allowed to occur at a specific location sequence of the transaction. This field is coded on
the first segment of the loop.
DE Count (required)
A 4-position numeric field that contains the number of data elements that comprise the
segment.
Seg Grp
A 2-position numeric field that contains the segment group number that uniquely
identifies each segment group (loop) within a message. This value is used with the anticollision segments UGH/UGT for positioning in EDIFACT.
Loop Id
A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the identification for the loop.
LP B/E
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the segment is a beginning or ending
segment in a loop. Valid values are:
B

=

C

=

E
=
space =

Beginning of loop – mandatory/optional flags are to be used
regardless of whether the first segment of the loop is present.
Beginning of Conditional loop – mandatory flags are to be treated as
optional if the first segment of the loop is not present.
End of loop.
If loop ID is coded, this segment is in the middle of the loop. If loop
ID is not coded, this segment is not part of a loop.

Act Cnt
A 3-position numeric field that contains the total number of Element Activity records that
are associated with this segment.
Description (required)
A 65-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the segment.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 37

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

Segment Element Screen

EDIM140

Purpose
The Segment Element screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition for specific
data elements within a segment. This definition includes updating a segment element record with
conditional codes, if necessary. If conditional codes exist for a segment element, an asterisk (*) is
displayed to the right of the description in the Cd field.
From the Segment Element screen, you can view and update the conditional codes on the Segment
Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen.
It is important to note that you must first add a segment element record before you update it with
conditional codes. Following is a brief overview of the steps for adding and then updating a
segment element record:
1.

To add the segment element record, type A in the A field.

2.

To update the new segment element record with conditional codes, type S in the A field.
The system displays the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen.

3.

Type the conditional codes in the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance
screen.
Note: An asterisk displays in the Cd field.

See the next topic, “Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance Screen,” for details on that
screen.

How to Access
Access the appropriate Segment Element screen in any one of the following ways:

3 - 38

•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 7 to select Segment Element and press
Enter.

•

Type S in the A field next to the element for which you want to view detail on the
Segments screen, and press PF5.

•

Type 2.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

The Standards Subsystem

Screen Examples
The following example illustrates the Segment Element screen that is displayed for most standards
versions.
Add Update Delete Select Info
EDIM140 2.7_______

Version Id...:
Segment Id...:

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Seq
Num
0001
0002
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

Ele
Seq
001
002
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___

SEGMENT ELEMENT

XXX

004010______
Agency..:
B3A_
Segment Version..:

Sub Man Com Ad
Ele Ele Ele In
000 M
M
_
000 O
O
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_
___ _
_
_

Element
Id
Ver
640__ 00
21___ 00
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __
_____ __

06/01/2011
12:00:00

X__
00

**Group**
Dsg Ty Description
Cd
_____ _ TRANSACTION TYPE CODE
_____ _ NUMBER OF SHIPMENTS
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _
_____ _

R
0001
0001
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____

END OF SEGMENT ELEMENTS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Actvty PF3=Exit PF4=Segment
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF5=Elem Def

PF6=Nxt Segm

The following example illustrates the Segment Element screen that is displayed only for segment
elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions.
Add Update Delete Select Info
EDIM140 2.7_______
SEGMENT ELEMENT

Version Id...:
Segment Id...:

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Seq
Num
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
____

Ele
Seq
001
001
001
002
003
003
003
003
003
___

ANA001______
Agency..:
CLO_
Segment Version..:

Sub Man Com Ad
Ele Ele Ele In
001 M
O
_
002 M
O
_
003 M
O
_
000 O
O
_
001 O
O
_
002 O
O
_
003 O
O
_
004 O
O
_
005 O
O
_
___ _
_
_

Element
Id
Ver
CLO0_ 08
CLO1_ 08
CLO2_ 08
CNAM_ 08
CAD0_ 08
CAD1_ 08
CAD2_ 08
CAD3_ 08
CAD4_ 08
_____ __

R
0001
____
____
0001
0001
____
____
____
____
____

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

A__
08

**Group**
Dsg Ty
CLOC_ G
CLOC_ R
CLOC_ _
_____ _
CADD_ G
CADD_ R
CADD_ R
CADD_ R
CADD_ _
_____ _

END OF SEGMENT ELEMENTS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Actvty PF3=Exit PF4=Segment
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Description
Cd
CUSTOMER'S ANA LOCATI
CUSTOMER'S OWN LOCATI
SUPPLIER'S IDENT. OF
CUSTOMER'S NAME
CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI
CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI
CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI
CUSTOMER'S ADDRESS LI
CUSTOMER'S POST CODE

PF5=Elem Def

PF6=Nxt Segm

3 - 39

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segment Element screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

3 - 40

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View an existing Segment
Element record.

N/A

Type the ID for the version in the Version
ID field, the agency in the Agency field, the
ID for the segment in the Segment ID field,
and the version for the segment in the
Segment Version field, and then press Enter

Add a new segment element.

Add

Type A in the A field, complete the fields
for the segment element, and then press
Enter

Update an existing segment
element.

Update

Type U in the A field next to the element
you want to update, change the data in any
of the fields for that segment element, and
then press Enter

Delete an existing segment
element.

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the segment
element you want to delete, and then press
Enter. The conditional codes, if any exist,
are also deleted. The system prompts you to
confirm or cancel the deletion.

Update a segment element
with conditional codes.

Select

Type S in the A field next to the segment
element for which you want to perform
conditional code maintenance, and then
press Enter. The Segment Element
Conditional Code Maintenance screen is
displayed.

View the Data Element
Definition screen.

Select

Type S in the A field next to the segment
element for which you want to view data
element definitions, and then press PF5.

Display the date, time, and
user initials, on the message
line, to indicate when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

The Standards Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Actvty

Displays the Segment Element Activity screen. Type S in the A field next to
the segment element for which you want to view activity, and then press PF2
to display the Segment Element Activity screen.

PF4=Segment

Displays the Segment screen for these elements.

PF5=Elem Def

Displays the Data Element Definition screen. Type S in the A field next to the
segment element for which you want to view data element definitions, and
then press PF5 to display the Data Element Definition screen.

PF6=Nxt Segm

Displays the elements for the next consecutive Segment record. Segments will
display in ascending in alphanumeric order.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Segment Id (required)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier.
Segment Version (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 41

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates the action you want to perform for a particular
segment element. The top line of the screen lists valid actions. The valid action codes for
the Segment Element screen are the following:
A
U
D
S

=
=
=
=

I

=

Add a new segment element
Update an existing segment element
Delete an existing segment element.
Select an existing segment element, then press Enter to display the
Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen, PF2 to
display the Segment Element Activity screen, or PF5 to display the
Data Element Definition screen.
(Info) Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to
indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or
last changed.

Seq Num (required)
A 4-digit number representing the physical position of the element/subelement within the
segment.
Ele Seq (required)
A 3-digit numeric field that contains the position of the simple element/group element
within the segment.
Sub Ele
A 3-digit numeric field that specifies a subelement within a group element. Valid values
are:
000
=
001-999 =

simple elements
subelements within a group element

Man Ele
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of simple element/group
element is required in the segment. Valid values are:
M
O
C

=
=
=

Mandatory
Optional
Conditional

Com Ele
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of the subelement is
required in the group element. Valid values are:
M
O
C

3 - 42

=
=
=

Mandatory
Optional
Conditional

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Screen EDIM140

The Standards Subsystem

Ad In
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains a flag that indicates if information in this
element should be passed to reports and databanking.
Y
blank

=
=

Information is to be passed to reports and databanking
Not used

Element Id
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element identification (dictionary
number) for this element.
Element Ver (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
R
A 4-position numeric field that indicates the number of times an element/group element
can repeat within the segment.
Group Dsg
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the group element identification that has
been assigned to this set of subelements.
Group Ty
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates the beginning/ending of group element. Valid
values are:
G
R
blank

=
=
=

First subelement in a group
Subelement is in middle of group
End of group

Description (protected)
A 21-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined
on the dictionary file.
Cd (protected)
A 1-character alphabetic flag that indicates whether the segment element contains
conditional information. Conditional codes can be updated and displayed on the Segment
Element Code Maintenance screen. Valid values are:
*
blank

=
=

Conditional information exists for the segment element.
No conditional information.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 43

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element EDIM141

Segment Element

EDIM141

Conditional Code Maintenance Screen
Purpose
The Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen enables you to view and update
conditional codes for a specified segment element.

Data Element Relational Conditions
Relational conditions can occur between elements, based on the presence or absence of those
elements. The information in the CONDITIONAL AREA identifies to Sterling Gentran:Basic the
condition of the element relationship (e.g., how two or more elements are related), and exactly
which elements are involved. If a data element has more than one relational condition, the order of
the conditional codes is very important.You can specify and update the segment element
conditional codes for a specified segment element in the CONDITIONAL AREA. Relational
conditions are:
•

conditions in which one or more data elements within the same segment are
associated with another one or more data elements, or

•

one or more composite elements within the same group element are associated
with another one or more composite elements.

ASC X12 and EDIFACT use different dependency identifiers. However, Sterling Gentran supports
both types of dependency identifiers.
The following table lists the ASC X12 and EDIFACT equivalency dependency identifiers.
ASC X12

3 - 44

EDIFACT

Description

E

D1

One and only one of the entities in the list will be
present.

P

D2

If one entity in the list is present, the rest will be
present.

R

D3

At least one of the entities in the list will be present.

C

D5

If the first entity in the list is present, all of the
others will be present. It is permissible that one or
more of the entities not specified as the first entity
in the list may be present, without requiring the first
entity to be present.

L

D6

If the first entity in the list is present, at least one
more will be present. It is permissible that one or
more of the entities not specified as the first entity
in the list may be present, without requiring the first
entity to be present.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element EDIM141

The Standards Subsystem

Example – Relational Condition
Let’s say a paired relational condition exists between the third and fourth data elements in a
segment. According to the definition (above) for a paired relational condition, both elements must
be defined in order to have a clear meaning.
To set up the paired relational condition, type P in the Code 1 field in the CONDITIONAL AREA
of the screen, 3 in the Code 2 field, and 4 in the Code 3 field. Typing P in the Code 1 field signifies
to Sterling Gentran:Basic that a paired relationship exists; typing the three-digit numbers in the
Code 2 and Code 3 fields indicates the position of the affected data elements (e.g., segment
sequence number).
Sterling Gentran:Basic creates and reports data element conditional codes using the values in the
Code fields. In the above example, conditional code P00304 is generated.

How to Access
The Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen is a continuation of the Segment
Element screen. Access this screen by typing S to select a segment element from the Segment
Element screen and pressing Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Segment Element Conditional Code Maintenance screen that
is displayed for most standards versions.
EDIM141 __________

SEGMENT ELEMENT
CONDITIONAL CODE MAINTENANCE

Version Id: 004030
Agency.........: X
Segment Id: AC1
Segment Version: 00
Element Description:
INTERCHANGE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT NOTE CODE
Mandatory

Element: O

Audit Id Indicator:

(M/O/C)

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Sequence: 0005

Element Id: 9918 Element Version: 00

(Y)

************************** CONDITIONAL AREA **************************
Code 1: ___ Code 2: ___ Code 3: ___ Code 4: ___ Code 5: ___
Code 6: ___ Code 7: ___ Code 8: ___ Code 9: ___ Code 10: ___
Group Conditional......: _

Enter PF1=Help

Last Update Date: 06/01/03
Time: 12:00:00
User: XXX

PF3=Exit PF4=Seg Elem
PF10=Updt

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 45

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element EDIM141

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Seg Elem

Returns to the Segment Element screen for the segment element displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the conditional codes after you type changes to the conditional codes
in the Code fields for the displayed segment element.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that indicates the version identification of the standard.
Agency (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Segment Id (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier.
Segment Version (protected)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment.
Sequence (protected)
A 4-position numeric field that indicates the physical position of the element within the
segment or subelement within the group element.
Element Description (protected)
A 65-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined
on the dictionary file.
Mandatory Element (protected)
A 1-character alphabetic field that indicates whether the presence of the element or
subelement is required in the segment/group element.

3 - 46

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element EDIM141

The Standards Subsystem

Element Id (protected)
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number)
identification for this element.
Element Ver (protected)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Audit Id Indicator (protected)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that indicates if information in this element should be passed
to reports and databanking.
Y
=
blank =

Information is to be passed to reports and databanking
Not used

CONDITIONAL AREA:
Code [#]:
An area of this screen that contains ten 3-position alphanumeric code fields in which you
can enter conditional code values that describe relationships between elements or
subelements. Alphabetic codes indicate the type of element relationship; the 3-digit
numeric values indicate the position of the affected data elements/subelements. Valid
values describing the relationships are:
ASC X12
Values

EDIFACT
Values

Description

E

D1

Indicates that one and only one of the entities in the
list will be present.

P

D2

Indicates that if any of the referenced elements/
subelements are present, they all must be present.

R

D3

Indicates that at least one of the referenced
elements/subelements may be present.

C

D5

Indicates that if the first referenced element/
subelement is used, all remaining referenced
elements/subelements must be used.

L

D6

Indicates that if the first referenced element/
subelement is used, at least one of the remaining
referenced elements/subelements must be used.

Group Conditional
A 1-position alphabetic field that indicates whether the conditional relationships identified
in the Conditional Area relate to the elements within a segment or subelements in a group
element. Valid values are:
Y

=

Conditional relationship corresponds to subelements in a group of
elements.

N or Space =

Conditional relationship corresponds to the elements in segments.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 47

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element EDIM141

Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified segment element record
(including the conditional information) was created or last changed. The date format is
MM/DD/YY.
Last Update Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which the specified segment element record
(including the conditional information) was created or last changed. The time format is
HH:MM:SS.
Last Update User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the
segment element record.

3 - 48

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Activity Screen

EDIM150

Purpose
The Segment Element Activity screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition of
accumulation activity (if applicable) for specific segment elements.

How to Access
Access the Segment Element Activity screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 8 to select Segment Element Activity from the Standards Maintenance
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type S in the A field on the Segment Element screen next to the element for
which you want to view segment element activity, and press PF2.

•

Type 2.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following example illustrates the Segment Element Activity screen that is displayed for most
standards versions.
EDIM150 2.8_______

SEGMENT ELEMENT ACTIVITY

Version Id.............:
Transaction Code.......:
Segment Id.............:
Position in Transaction:
Position in Segment....:
Position in Element....:

004030______
______
BG_
0002
0007
000

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Agency.............: X__
Segment Version....: 00

Element Id: 404 Ver: 00 TRANSMISSION CONTROL NUMBER
Activity Desc............: STORE_INTERCHANGE_CONTROL_NUMBER_______________
Action
Number
Accumulators......:
1)
_
__
(A)ddition, (C)ompare,
2)
_
__
(I)ncrement, (S)ave,
3)
_
__
(V)erify
4)
_
__
5)
_
__
Element Compare1: ______ Element Compare2: ______ Element Compare3: ______
Store Element Req: S (S/ ) Last Update Date/Time/User: 06/01/11 12:00:00 XXX
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Elements
PF5=Elem Def
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Nxt Actv

3 - 49

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150

The following example illustrates the Segment Element Activity screen that is displayed only for
segment elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions. The ANA TRADACOMS screen is displayed
only if you type A (for ANA TRADACOMS) in the Envelope Type field of the Version screen.
EDIM150 2.8_______

SEGMENT ELEMENT ACTIVITY

Version Id.............:
Transaction Code.......:
Segment Id.............:
Position in Transaction:
Position in Segment....:
Position in Element....:

ANA001______
______
STX
0023
0009
000

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Agency.............: A__
Release............: 0
Segment Version....: 00

Element Id: 9848 Ver: 00 FUNCTION GROUP REFERENCE NUMBER
Activity Desc............: _______________________________________________
Action
Number
Accumulators......:
1)
_
__
(A)ddition, (C)ompare,
2)
_
__
(I)ncrement, (S)ave,
3)
_
__
(V)erify
4)
_
__
5)
_
__
Element Compare1: ______ Element Compare2: ______ Element Compare3: ______
Store Element Req: S (S/ ) Last Update Date/Time/User: 06/01/03 12:00:00 XXX
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Elements
PF5=Elem Def
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

PF6=Nxt Actv

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

3 - 50

PF4=Elements

Displays the Segment Element screen for this Activity record.

PF5=Elem Def

Displays the Data Element Definition screen for the displayed Activity
record.

PF6=Nxt Actv

Displays the next consecutive Activity record. Activity records are displayed
in ascending alphanumeric sequence.

PF11=Del

Deletes the current Activity record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150

The Standards Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Transaction Code (required)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the transaction code.
Release (ANA TRADACOMS version only)
A 1-digit numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID.
Segment Id (required)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that indicates the segment identifier.
Segment Version (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment.
Position in Transaction (required)
A 4-position numeric field indicating the position the segment is displayed in the
transaction.
Position in Segment (required)
A 4-position numeric field that indicates the position of the element within the segment.
Position in Element
A 3-position numeric field that indicates the position of the subelement within the group
element.
Element Id (protected)
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number)
identification for this element.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 51

The Standards Subsystem

Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150

Ver (protected)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Element Description (protected)
A 43-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element as defined
on the dictionary file.
Activity Desc
A 46-position alphanumeric field that describes the activity action that is to be taken for
this element/subelement.
Action
A 1-character alphabetic field that specifies the action for the accumulator. There are five
accumulators, which are numbered 1 – 5 in the column to the left of the Action column.
Valid values are:
A
C

=
=

I

=

S

=

V

=

Add value in this element/subelement to the indicated accumulator.
Compare value in this element/subelement to the value in the
indicated accumulator.
When there is a value in this element/subelement, increment the
indicated accumulator by one.
Save the value in this element/subelement to the indicated
accumulator.
Initialize the indicated accumulator to zero.

Number
A 2-digit numeric field that specifies the number of the accumulator for this activity.
There are five accumulators, which are numbered 1 – 5 in column to the left of the Action
column. Valid values are 01 – 99.
Element Compare1
A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current
element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the
corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric
bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes.
Element Compare2
A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current
element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the
corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric
bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes.
Element Compare3
A 6-byte field that allows comparison of a previously stored element to the current
element. This is typically used for comparing control numbers in a header segment to the
corresponding value in the trailer segment. The format is: Segment ID – 3 alphanumeric
bytes, followed by Element Position in Segment – 3 numeric bytes.

3 - 52

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Element Activity Screen EDIM150

The Standards Subsystem

Store Element Req
A 1-character alphabetic flag to indicate if the value in this element/subelement is to be
saved for future comparison. Valid values are:
S
=
blank =

Save the element/subelement
Not used

Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified segment element activity
record was created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
Last Update Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which the segment element activity record was
created or last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Last Update User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the
segment element activity record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 53

The Standards Subsystem

Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160

Data Element Definition Screen

EDIM160

Purpose
The Data Element Definition screen enables you to add, display, and change the definition of
individual data elements within a segment.
Note: Online modifications do not affect batch standards unless
the Batch Maintenance program (EXEC030) is run.

How to Access
Access the Data Element Definition screen in any of the following ways:
•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 9 to select Data Element Definition and
press Enter.

•

Press PF5 on the Segment Element Activity screen.

•

Press PF5 on the Segment Element screen.

•

Type 2.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Data Element Definition screen.
EDIM160 2.9_______

DATA ELEMENT DEFINITION

XXX

Version Id....: 004030______

Agency.........:

X__

Element Id....: 404__

Element Version:

00

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Description:
TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_NUMBER______________________________________
Element Type..: N0

(AN/ID/R/Nn/DT/D8/TM/T6/T8/CD/B)

Minimum Length: 001
Maximum Length: 00005
Composite Code Definition: ____________________ Last Update Date: 06/01/11
Time: 12:00:00
User: XXX
Enter PF1=Help

3 - 54

PF3=Exit PF4=Seg Elem
PF5=Code Dir
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

PF6=Nxt Elem

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160

The Standards Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Seg Elem
PF5=Code Dir
PF6=Nxt Elem
PF11=Del

Displays the Segment Element screen for this Data Element Definition record.
Displays the Standard Code Directory for the displayed Data Element
Definition record. Codes are valid only with element type of AN or ID.
Displays the next consecutive Data Element Definition record. Data Element
Definition records are displayed in ascending alphanumeric sequence.
Deletes the current Data Element Definition record.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Element Id (required)
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number)
identification.
Element Version (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Description (required)
A 65-position alphanumeric field that displays information about the element.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 55

The Standards Subsystem

Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160

Element Type
A 2-position alphanumeric field that specifies the editing format of the data contained in
this data element.
Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for Sterling
Gentran:Structure only include:
CM
CY
DD
JD
J8
MM
PD
PJ
PM
PY
Pn
Sn
YY
ZD
ZJ
ZM
ZY

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Date format = MMDDYYYY
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Date format = DDMMYY
Date format = Julian YYDDD
Date format = Julian YYYYDDD
Date format = MMDDYY
Date format = Packed DDMMYY
Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD
Date format = Packed MMDDYY
Date format = Packed YYMMDD
Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions
Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions
Date format = YYMMDD
Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY
Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD
Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY
Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD

Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include:
AN
CD
DT
D8
ID
Nn
R
Rn

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

TM
T6
T8

=
=
=

string type – alphanumeric
Date format = DDMMYYYY
Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Identifier type – element has code list
Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied
Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point
Decimal – n indicates the maximum number of explicit decimal
positions
Time format = HHMM
Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds
Time format = HHMMSSss, where ss = hundreds of seconds

Minimum Length
A 3-digit numeric field that specifies the minimum length for the element/subelement.
Maximum Length
A 5-digit numeric field that specifies the maximum length for the element/subelement.
Composite Code Definition
A 10-position alphanumeric field that specifies the breakdown of composite codes.
Format is n/m/x/ where n is the length of the first part of composite code, m is the length
of the second part of composite code, and x is the length of the third part. Up to 5

3 - 56

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Element Definition Screen EDIM160

The Standards Subsystem

component pieces can be supported and the total of the pieces must equal the maximum
length specified.
Last Update Date (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the date on which the specified data element record was
created or last changed. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
Last Update Time (protected)
An 8-position field that displays the time at which the data element record was created or
last changed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Last Update User (protected)
A 3-position field that displays the initials of the user who created or last changed the data
element record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 57

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Code Menu EDIM170

Standard Code Menu

EDIM170

Purpose
The Standard Code Menu contains three menu options that you can use to display codes and
perform standard code maintenance.

How to Access
Access the Standard Code Menu in either of the following ways:
•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 10 to select Data Element Code Values
and press Enter.

•

Type 2.10 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Standard Code Menu.
EDIM170 2.10______

STANDARD CODE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

Enter PF1=Help

1.

Standard Code Directory

2.

Standard Code Maintenance

3.

Standard Code List Options

PF3=Exit PF4=Elem
PF15=Logoff

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Elem

3 - 58

Displays the Data Element Definition screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standard Code Menu EDIM170

The Standards Subsystem

Menu Options
Menu Option

Description

1. Standard Code Directory

Enables you to display code records for an Element
ID.

2. Standard Code Maintenance

Enables you to perform maintenance to code
records.

3. Standard Code List Options

Enables you to move, copy, or delete code lists.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press
Enter to perform the selected function.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 59

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Code Directory EDIM171

Standard Code Directory

EDIM171

Purpose
The Standard Code Directory allows you to display standard code records. If you access the screen
from the Data Element Definition screen, the system displays code records for that Element ID. If
you access the screen from Standards Code Menu, you can type a Version ID, Agency, Language,
Element ID and Element Version, and then press Enter. Scroll forward through the records using
the PF6 key.

How to Access
Access the Standard Code Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 1 to select Standard Code Directory from the Standard Code Menu and press
Enter.

•

From the Data Element Definition, press PF5.

•

Type 2.10.1 in Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Standard Code Directory.
Select Info
EDIM171 2.10.1____

Version Id:
Element Id:
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

004010______
Agency:
235__ Element Version:

X__
00

Language.:
Min/Max..:

XXX

EN_
0002 /

06/01/2011
12:00:00

0002

Comp Code/Description
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

AA____AMERICAN_TRUCKING_ASSOCIATIONS_ASSEMBLY_________________________
AB____ASSEMBLY________________________________________________________
AC____AGGREGATION_CODE_(USED_TO_CONSOLIDATE_PART_FAMILIES)____________
AD____AMERICAN_DENTAL_ASSOCIATION_CODES_______________________________
AE____SERIAL_ITEM_AND_CONTRIBUTION_IDENTIFIER_(DEFINED_IN_ANSI_239.56)
AF____FRONT_AXLE_SERIAL_NUMBER________________________________________
AG____AGE_____________________________________________________________
AH____BILLBOARDS_COMMERCIAL___________________________________________
AI____ALTERNATE_ISBN__________________________________________________
AJ____PIGGYBACK_COMMERCIAL____________________________________________

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

3 - 60

STANDARD CODE DIRECTORY

PF3=Exit PF4=Elem Defin PF5=Code Maint PF6=Nxt Code

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standard Code Directory EDIM171

The Standards Subsystem

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Standard Code Directory. The following
table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View existing code records.

N/A

Type the Version ID, Agency,
Language, Element ID, and Element
Version and press Enter

Transfer to Standard Code
Maintenance screen

Select

Type S next to the code value for
which you want to maintain, and then
press PF5.

Display the date, time, and
user initials, on the message
line, to indicate when the
information for the selected
entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the
desired entry and press Enter.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Elem Defin

Displays the Data Element Definition screen.

PF5=Code Maint Displays the Standard Code Maintenance screen for the code selected.
PF6=Nxt Code

Displays code records for the next consecutive element on file.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 61

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Code Directory EDIM171

Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Language (required)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the
Version ID and Agency, always EN (English).
Element Id (required)
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number)
identification.
Element Version (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Min (protected)
Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
Max (protected)
Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a
particular code value. Type S to select an existing code value. Type I to display the date,
time and user initials on the message line that indicate when the information for the
selected entry was created or last changed.
Comp
A 1-digit numeric field that identifies which composite part of the code value is defined.
The value in the Composite Code Definition field on the Data Element Definition screen
(EDIM160) determines how many composite parts comprise the code. Valid values
are 1 – 5.
Code/Description
A 70-position alphanumeric field that shows a code and its description. The line is split as
follows, based on the maximum element length:

3 - 62

•

Maximum element length 1 – 5 displays a 5-byte code with a 65-byte description.

•

Maximum element length 6 – 10 displays a 10-byte code with a 60-byte
description.

•

Maximum element length 11 – 20 displays a 20-byte code with a 50-byte
description.

•

Maximum element length 21 – 40 displays a 40-byte code with a 30-byte
description.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Code Maintenance Screen

EDIM172

Purpose
The Standard Code Maintenance screen enables you to add, delete, display, and change the
definition for individual data elements coded as an ID or AN type on the Data Element Definition
screen.

How to Access
Access the Standard Code Maintenance screen in any one of the following ways:
•

In the Standard Code Menu, type 2 to select Standard Code Maintenance and
press Enter.

•

Type 2.10.2 in the Jump Code field from any screen.

•

Type S in the A field on the Standard Code Directory for the next code you want
to maintain and press PF5.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Standard Code Maintenance screen.
Add Delete Update Info
EDIM172 2.10.2____

Version Id:
Element Id:
A

STANDARD CODE MAINTENANCE

004010______
Agency:
235__ Element Version:

X__
00

Language.:
Min/Max..:

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

EN_
002 /

00002

Comp Code/Description

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

_

AA______________________________________
AMERICAN_TRUCKING_ASSOCIATIONS_ASSEMBLY__________________________
AB______________________________________
ASSEMBLY_________________________________________________________
AC______________________________________
AGGREGATION_CODE_(USED_TO_CONSOLIDATE_PART_FAMILIES)_____________
AD______________________________________
AMERICAN_DENTAL_ASSOCIATION_CODES________________________________
AE______________________________________
SERIAL_ITEM_AND_CONTRIBUTION_IDENTIFIER_(DEFINED_IN_ANSI_239.56)_

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Code Dir

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Nxt Code

3 - 63

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Standard Code Maintenance screen. The
following table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those
functions.

To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

Add a new code definition.

Add

Type A in the A (Action Code) field, type
the appropriate values in the Version Id,
Agency, Language, ELement Id, Element
Version, Min/Max, Comp and Description
fields for the code you are defining and
press Enter.

Delete an existing code definition.

Delete

Type D in the A field corresponding to the
code you want to delete and press Enter.

Modify an existing code
definition.

Update

Type U in the A field corresponding to the
code you want to update, type the changes
to the existing code definition, and press
Enter.

Display the date, time, and user
initials on the message line to
indicate when the information for the
selected entry was created or last
changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the desired
entry and press Enter.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Code Dir

Displays the Standard Code Directory.

PF6=Nxt Code

Displays the next consecutive element on the current code file. There are four
code files. This function key processes the current code file sequentially to
locate the next element identification.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.

3 - 64

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standard Code Maintenance Screen EDIM172

The Standards Subsystem

To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version Id (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version
identification.
Language (required)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the
Version ID and Agency, always EN (English).
Element Id (required)
A 5-position alphanumeric field that indicates the data element (dictionary number) ID.
Element Version (required)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Min (protected)
Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
Max (protected)
Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a
particular code value. Valid values are:
A
D
U
I

=
=
=
=

Add a new code value
Delete an existing code value
Update an existing code value
(Info) Display the date, time, and user initials, on the message line, to
indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or
last changed.

Comp
A 1-digit numeric field that identifies the composite part of a data element code value
being defined. This field works with Composite Code Definition from Data Element
Definition (EDIM160) screen.
Code
A 40-position alphanumeric field that contains the code value.
Description
A 65-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the code value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 65

The Standards Subsystem

Code Maintenance List Options Screen EDIM173

Code Maintenance List Options Screen

EDIM173

Purpose
The Code Maintenance List Options screen allows you to move or copy entire code lists from
version/release to a new version/release.

How to Access
Access the Code Maintenance List Options screen in either of the following ways:
•

From the Standard Code Menu, type 3 to select Standard Code List Options and
press Enter.

•

Type 2.10.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Code Maintenance List Options screen.
EDIM173 2.10.3____

CODE MAINTENANCE LIST OPTIONS

XXX

"FROM"
List
Version Id....: 004010______
Element Id....: 235__
Language Code.: EN_

Agency.........:
Element Version:

X__
00

"TO"
List
Version Id....: ____________
Element Id....: _____
Language Code.: EN_

Agency.........:
Element Version:

___
__

List Options..: _

Enter PF1=Help

06/01/2011
12:00:00

(Move, Copy, Delete)

PF3=Exit

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

3 - 66

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Code Maintenance List Options Screen EDIM173

The Standards Subsystem

“From” List
Version Id (required)
The 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard that contains
the code list that is to be moved or copied.
Agency (required)
The 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is associated with the
‘From’ version identification.
Element Id (required)
The 5-position alphanumeric field that identifies the element of the code list that is to be
moved or copied.
Element Version (required)
The 2-position numeric field that identifies the version of the ‘From’ element.
Language Code
The 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the
Code List. The value is always EN (English)
“To” List
Version Id (required)
The 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the version of the standard that is to
receive the code list.
Agency (required)
The 3-position alphanumeric field that identifies the agency that is associated with the
‘To’ version identification.
Element Id (required)
The 5-position alphanumeric field that identifies the element that is to receive the code
list.
Element Version (required)
The 2-position numeric field that identifies the version of the element that is to receive the
code list.
Language Code
The 3-position alphanumeric field that contains the language code associated with the
Code List. The value is always EN (English)
List Options (required)
The 1-position alphabetic field that identifies what action is to be performed. Valid Values
are:
M
C
D

Move the code list to a new version. The code list will be deleted in ‘from’
version.
Copy the code list to a new version.
Delete the code list from a version.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 67

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180

Transaction in Use Screen

EDIM180

Purpose
The Transaction in Use screen enables you to select the standard version transactions required by
your EDI environment.
All transaction definitions within each standard version required by your EDI environment must
be identified to Sterling Gentran:Basic. You can identify these transaction definitions to Sterling
Gentran:Basic by doing the following:
1.

Select the required transactions within each version via the Transaction in Use
screen.

2.

Load the selected transactions via the batch Selective Standards Download
program (EBDI030).

3.

Notify your system administrator, who then executes the batch program to
download the selected transactions.

How to Access
Access the Transaction in Use screen in either of the following ways:

3 - 68

•

Type 11 to select Transaction in Use from the Standards Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type 2.11 in the Jump Code field of any screen in Sterling Gentran:Basic and
press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180

The Standards Subsystem

Screen Examples
The following example illustrates the Transaction In Use screen that is displayed for most
standards versions.
Select Unselect
EDIM180 2.11______

TRANSACTION IN USE

Version ID.....: 004010______
Transaction ID.: ______

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Agency...... X__
Release No.. _

Description..: ANSI VERSION 4 RELEASE 1 SUBRELEASE 0 ASC X12
Trans
No.
Description
CONTROL TRANSACTION
100
INSURANCE PLAN DESCRIPTION
101
NAME AND ADDRESS LISTS
104
AIR SHIPMENT INFORMATION
105
BUSINESS ENTITY FILINGS
106
MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
107
REQUEST FOR MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
108
RESPONSE TO A MOTOR CARRIER RATE PROPOSAL
109
VESSEL CONTENT DETAILS
110
AIR FREIGHT DETAILS AND INVOICE

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit

PF6=Nxt Vers

The following example illustrates the Transaction In Use screen that is displayed only for segment
elements in ANA TRADACOMS versions. The ANA TRADACOMS screen is displayed only if
you type A (for ANA TRADACOMS) in the Envelope Type field of the Version screen.
Select Unselect
EDIM180 2.11______

TRANSACTION IN USE

Version ID.....: 002901EAN005
Transaction ID.: ______

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Agency...... UN_
Release No.. 0

Description..: EDIFACT 1990 RELEASE 901
Trans
ID
Description
CONTROL TRANSACTION
CONTRL
EDIFACT CONTROL MESSAGE
INVOIC
INVOICE
ORDERS
EDIFACT PURCHASE ORDER

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
ENTER A TRANSACTION SELECTION
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Nxt Vers

3 - 69

The Standards Subsystem

Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction in Use screen. The following
table describes each screen function, and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.

To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

View an existing transaction
in Use record.

N/A

Type the Version ID in the Version ID
field and the agency in the Agency
field, and then press Enter

Select a version transaction
for EDI.

Select

Type S in the A field next to the
transaction you want to select, and then
press Enter

Unselect a version transaction
for EDI.

Unselect

Type U in the A field next to the preselected transaction (indicated by the
word selected next to the transaction)
you want to unselect, and press Enter.
The system removes the word selected
that is displayed next to the transaction.
Note: The control transaction and the
acknowledgement transactions (e.g.,
997, 999, control) must always be
selected if any other transactions are
selected for a version.

Note: If you receive the message Update not allowed the
value in the Update Allowed field on the Version screen
is set to N. This means that the version and all its
transactions, segments, and elements cannot be updated.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF6=Nxt Vers

Displays transaction codes for the next consecutive Version ID. Versions are
displayed in ascending alphanumeric sequence.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.

3 - 70

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction in Use Screen EDIM180

The Standards Subsystem

Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Version ID (required)
A 12-position alphanumeric field in which you enter the version identification of the
standard.
Agency (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version
identification from the Standards file.
Transaction ID
A 6-position alphanumeric field that specifies a transaction identification in which the
version identification list is to begin. You can type a complete or partial Transaction ID in
this field. The system displays up to ten transactions, starting with the nearest matching
Transaction ID. To view additional transactions, press PF8. If you leave this field blank,
the system begins with the first transaction for the particular version on the Standards file.
Release No.
A 1-position numeric field that specifies the release number for the starting transaction
identification entered.
Description (protected)
A 52-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the version.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field in which you indicate the action you want to perform for a
particular transaction identification. Valid values are:
S
U

=
=

Select transaction
Unselect transaction

Trans No. (protected)
A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the transaction identification.
Rlse No (protected)
A 1-position alphanumeric field that specifies the release number of the transaction code.
The release number is currently being used only for ANA TRADACOMS standards.
Description (protected)
A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains information about the transaction.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 71

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Association Screen EDIM105

Standard Association Screen

EDIM105

Purpose
The Standards Association screen allows you to access the Standards Association file. This file
contains a list of Association values and the Agency codes that have been assigned to them. The
batch Editors use this file to determine the agency to be used with the Version ID as the key to the
optimized table file. The Association is located in positions 7 – 12 of the Version ID.

How to Access
Access the Standard Association screen in either of the following ways:
•

In the Standards Maintenance Menu, type 13 to select Standard Association and
press Enter.

•

Type 2.13 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Standard Association screen.
Add Delete Info Update
EDIM105 2.13______

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Association
AIAG__
AMP___
ATE___
A01051
A02031
A03031
A04031
A09041
A10011
A14041
A15031
A16031
A94___
BISAC_
BR____

Agency
X__
X__
SC_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
UN_
NH_
X__
JV_

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

3 - 72

STANDARD ASSOCIATION

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Description
AIAG*______________________________
AMP*_______________________________
LOADED_BY_STANDARDS_MAINTENANCE____
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_SUBSET_ID*__________________
ODETTE_REMADV_V3R1*________________
ODETTE_STATAC_V3R1*________________
NHS*_______________________________
BOOK_INDUSTRY_ASSOCIATION*_________
JOINT_VENTURE______________________

PF3=Exit

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Standard Association Screen EDIM105

The Standards Subsystem

Screen Actions
Associated
with this
screen
action ...

To perform
this action ...

Do this ...

Add a new Association record.

Add

Complete the screen fields, type A in
A field and press Enter.

Delete an existing Association
record.

Delete

Display the record, type D in A field
and press Enter.

Display the date, time, and user
initials, on the message line, to
indicate when the information for
the selected entry was created or
last changed.

Info

Type I in the A field next to the
desired entry and press Enter.

Change an existing Association
record.

Update

Display the record, type the changes,
type U in A field and press Enter.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position field that indicates the action you want to perform for a particular
association. The top line of the screen lists valid actions. The valid action codes for the
Standard Association screen:
A
I

=
=

U
D

=
=

Add a new Association
(Info) Display the date, time and user initials, on the message line, to
indicate when the information for the selected entry was created or
last changed.
Update an existing Association
Delete an existing Association

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

3 - 73

The Standards Subsystem

Standard Association Screen EDIM105

Association
A 6-position alphanumeric field that contains the ‘Association’ value as it is displayed in
the EDI envelope (GS or UNG/UNH). Association is contained in positions 7 – 12 of the
Version ID.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the version
identification.
Description
A 35-position that contains information about the Association/Agency relationship.

3 - 74

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter

4

The Databank Subsystem

Overview
This chapter contains the following topics related to the Databank subsystem.

Topic

Page

Before You Begin ................................................................................................................. 4-3
Databank Screens and Functions.......................................................................................... 4-10
How to Use the Maintenance Functions............................................................................... 4-14
Databank Maintenance Menu.........................................................EDIM250 ..................... 4-24
Interchange Directory Screen .........................................................EDIM254 .................... 4-27
Group Directory..............................................................................EDIM255 .................... 4-31
Group Directory – Date ..................................................................EDIM25A ................... 4-36
Interchange Status Screen...............................................................EDIM251 .................... 4-41
Group Status Screen .......................................................................EDIM252 .................... 4-48
Transaction Status Screen...............................................................EDIM253 .................... 4-55
Document Directory .......................................................................EDIM262 .................... 4-61
Document Status Screen .................................................................EDIM263 .................... 4-65
Change Audit Directory..................................................................EDIM268 .................... 4-70
Change Audit Status Screen ...........................................................EDIM269 .................... 4-74
Online Log Display Screen.............................................................EDIMOLD.................. 4-79
Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen.................................EDIM240 .................... 4-83
Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen ......................................EDIM241 .................... 4-89
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound ................................EDIM271 .................... 4-94
Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound...................................EDIM271 .................... 4-99
Interchange Display Screen ............................................................EDIM256 .................. 4-103
Group Display Screen.....................................................................EDIM257 .................. 4-108
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound ................................EDIM258 .................. 4-113
Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound ..................................EDIM258 .................. 4-118
Transaction Display Screen ............................................................EDIM259 .................. 4-123
Segment Display Screen.................................................................EDIM260 .................. 4-127
Data Element Display Screen .........................................................EDIM261 .................. 4-131
Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound ..................................EDIM265 .................. 4-135
Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound.....................................EDIM265 .................. 4-140
Document Display Screen ..............................................................EDIM264 .................. 4-145
Record Display Screen ...................................................................EDIM266 .................. 4-149

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4-1

The Databank Subsystem

Overview

Field Display Screen.......................................................................EDIM267 .................. 4-152
Change Audit Status Detail Screen ................................................EDIM270 .................. 4-155

4-2

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Databank Subsystem

Before You Begin
What is the Databank?
A databank is a repository for storing document/transaction data and any related control
information. Using the Databank subsystem, you can control and monitor the document/
transaction flow through the Sterling Gentran:Basic system.

What is in this Chapter?
This chapter explains the menus and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Maintenance
subsystem. In addition, this chapter describes how to use the databank maintenance functions.

Databank Facility
The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Facility provides a powerful set of capabilities for
controlling and tracking the flow of documents between your EDI-enabled applications and your
EDI trading partners.
The Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Facility takes advantage of the proven functions already in
the Sterling Gentran:Basic family of products while adding functions that provide flexible control
of documents as they pass through the system. The Databank Facility option, if implemented, is an
integral part of your Sterling Gentran:Basic system, as shown in Figure 4.1.
Use of the Databank Facility is optional.

Outbound
Communications

Outbound
Applications
Sterling
Gentran:Basic

Databank
Inbound
Applications

Inbound
Communications
Figure 4.1 Databank Context

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4-3

The Databank Subsystem

Before You Begin

Feature Summary
The Sterling Gentran:Basic databank provides advanced features for addressing your EDI
requirements.
See the “Features and Functions” figure within this topic for an illustration of the features.
The Databank Facility option provides control and tracking of documents through your EDI
system for a wide range of users.
See the “Databank Facility Users” figure within this topic for an illustration.
The following major features are provided with the Databank Facility option.
•

Flexible Configuration
All of the Databank features are optional. Configuring the various components of the
Databank Facility is defined by the user based on their EDI processing requirements.
For example, one implementation may choose to capture all application and EDI data on
the databank. Another implementation may chose to capture just outbound EDI control
and status information.
If acknowledgment reconciliation is to be part of your implementation then the Outbound
EDI Databank Directory must be used at a minimum. Acknowledgment reconciliation is
reconciling acknowledgments received from your trading partners to outbound documents
that have been sent to those trading partners.

•

Full Processing Concurrency
All processing, including Batch/Online, Mapping/Compliance, and Inbound/Outbound,
can run concurrently.

•

Complete Online Control and Tracking
Immediate control and tracking of both application documents and EDI transactions is
available to you with Databank Maintenance.
With Online Databank Maintenance, the following actions can be performed against your
application and EDI data:
Select (Inquiry)
Delete
Data Edit (optionally restricted at installation)
Manually Acknowledge
Manual Network Status Update
Reset for Reprocessing

•

Complete Online Change Audit Trails
All online updates performed against the databank by users are captured and available for
online inquiry.

4-4

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin
•

The Databank Subsystem

Comprehensive Security
Security by User ID and Division can be set up as tightly or loosely as required.

•

Data Archive/Restore Capabilities
Application and EDI data can be archived and restored with the Databank Facility. You
can manage their archives selectively based on flexible selection criteria and/or use the
Housekeeping mode to maintain archives based on retention periods.

•

Duplicate Checking
Application document duplicate checking is performed based on the user defined User
Reference. EDI duplicate checking is also provided using the EDI Envelope Reference
IDs. Processing can be controlled using these duplicate indicators.

•

Distribution and Process Control
Application and/or EDI data can be stored in, and selectively extracted from, the Databank
Facility.
This store and extract capability allows processing to be scheduled based on your business
needs. The store capability allows application and communication scheduling to be set up
independently. The selective extract capability allows application documents and EDI
interchanges to be extracted in the groupings that are required by your applications and
communications.

•

Network Tracking
Network Tracking extends EDI tracking to your networks. Network Tracking reconciles
Network Status information to Interchanges that have been sent. The Online Network
Status information posted to Interchanges is Received by Network, Processed by Network
and Picked Up by Trading Partner.

•

Deferred Enveloping
Deferred Enveloping is an optional feature that can be used to store un-enveloped data on
the outbound EDI databank files throughout the day. This data can then be extracted for
enveloping using a number of criteria, including transaction type, data, time, network,
test-production status, partner, user, and batch run number. These selected transactions can
then be enveloped and transmitted to the trading partner.
This feature provides the following benefits:
•

Application and transmission schedule independence

•

Minimize the number of envelopes

•

Document-level control over mapping and editing errors

•

Document-level control over duplicate documents

•

Establish the maximum number of transactions per envelope

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4-5

The Databank Subsystem

Before You Begin

Features and Functions
Figure 4.2 illustrates the databank features and functions.
CICS Online

Inquiry

Edit

Delete

Reprocess

Manually
Acknowledge

Network
Status
Update

Databank

Archive/
Restore

Inquiry

Extract

Store/
Reprocess

Batch

Figure 4.2 Databank Features/Functions

4-6

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Facility Users
Figure 4.3 illustrates the databank facility users.

Purchasing
Sterling
Gentran:Basic

Sterling
Connect:Enterprise

Accounts
Receivable
In-house
Databank
Accounts
Payable

Communications

Facility

Online Databank

Batch Databank

Maintenance

Maintenance

- EDI Coordinator
- Order Desk Clerk

- Operations
- Management

Figure 4.3 Databank Facility Users

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4-7

The Databank Subsystem

Before You Begin

Architecture
This section describes the Databank facility architecture and the major components.
The Databank Facility provides Application/EDI data and information access, as illustrated in
Figure 4.4.
Application

EDI

Directory

Directory

- Control
- Status

- Control
- Status

Message Store

Message Store

- Document
Data

- EDI Data

Change Audit

Figure 4.4 Databank Information
Databank Components
The major components of the Databank facility are:
Online Databank Facility
All control and tracking of EDI transactions and your application documents can be
performed online using the CICS-based Databank Maintenance option. Document,
acknowledgment, network and communication status information for your document/
transactions can all be maintained online using the Online Databank Maintenance option.
Batch Databank Maintenance
With the Databank Facility, both application and EDI data can be archived and restored
based on retention periods or flexible selection criteria.
Batch Databank Inquiry
Powerful Databank Inquiry tools provide both summary and detailed reporting of your
databank information.
Flexible Extract Tools
The Databank Facility's Extract tools provide a wide range of selection criteria. The ability
to extract application documents and EDI data, grouped according to the needs of your
applications and communications, is provided with these Extract tools.

4-8

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Processing Flow
The Databank facility allows all forms of user data entering and exiting Sterling Gentran:Basic to
be stored and processed. Figure 4.5 provides a detailed view of the processing flow.
Outbound

Outbound
Mapper

Application

Application

Application

Inbound
Application
Extract

Outbound
Editor

Outbound

Outbound

Application

EDI

Databank

Databank

Inbound

Inbound

Application

EDI

Databank

Databank

Inbound
Mapper

Outbound
EDI
Extract

C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

Inbound
Editor

Inbound

Figure 4.5 Databank Processing Flow
Who Should Use Databank Maintenance?
Sterling Gentran:Basic provides many options for controlling both EDI and application document
activity in your EDI environment.
Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Maintenance functions should be used by the persons
responsible for monitoring, controlling, and reconciling the flow of documents through Sterling
Gentran:Basic to and from your communications and applications.

Security Set-up
Access to the Databank Maintenance feature is controlled through the use of the self-contained
security system. The system allows you to define users with their own privileges.
See Chapter 5, “The Administration Subsystem,” for information about security set-up.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4-9

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Screens and Functions

Databank Screens and Functions
Figure 4.6 illustrates the overall flow of the Databank Maintenance feature.
Databank
Maintenance
Menu

Interchange

Group

Document

Directory

Directory

Directory

Change

Log

Audit

Display

Directory

Interchange

Group

Transaction

Document

Status

Status

Status

Status

Change
Audit
Status

Interchange

Transaction

Document

Status

Status

Status

Detail

Detail

Detail

Interchange

Group

Display

Display

EDI
Transaction

Document
Display

Display

Detail

Segment

Record

Display

Display

Data
Element
Display

Change
Audit Status

Field
Display

Figure 4.6 Databank Maintenance Screen Flow

4 - 10

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Databank Screens and Functions

The Databank Subsystem

Additional Functions
The following functions are available within Databank Maintenance from screens other than the
Databank Maintenance Menu:
Interchange Status Detail
Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI interchange on the
databank.
EDI Interchange Display
Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific interchange on the databank.
EDI Group Display
Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific functional group on the databank.
EDI Transaction Display
Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific transaction on the databank.
Transaction Status Detail
Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI transaction on the
databank.
Segment Display
Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific segment on the databank.
Data Element Display
Used to display the actual EDI data for a specific data element on the databank.
Document Status Detail
Used to display detailed status information about a specific EDI transaction on the
databank.
Document Display
Used to display the application data for a specific document on the databank.
Record Display
Used to display the application data for a specific record on the databank.
Field Display
Used to display the application data for a specific field on the databank. From this screen
users can edit the data.
Change Audit Status Detail
Used to view the details regarding a change that has been made to data on the databank by
a user using Databank Maintenance.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 11

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Screens and Functions

Databank Jump Codes
A jump code is a 10-character alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each Sterling
Gentran:Basic screen. This field enables you to move, or jump, directly from one screen to
another, within a subsystem, while bypassing menu screens. All screens that are accessible by a
Sterling Gentran:Basic menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible
only from detail screens do not have jump codes associated with them.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for more information about using jump codes.
You can jump between screens without having to display the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus. Use
the following procedure to jump between screens:
Step 1: Press Home.
The insertion point moves to the Jump Code field.
Step 2: Type the jump code and press Enter.
Note: If you move the insertion point to the Jump Code field
and you then decide not to enter a jump code, press Tab
to return to the next entry field on the screen.
The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank subsystem
menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are
displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus.

4 - 12

Screen Title
Sterling Gentran Main Menu

Screen
Name
EDIM001

Jump Codes
Numeric
0.0
0

Databank Maintenance Menu

EDIM250

3.0
3

DB

Interchange Directory

EDIM254

3.1

DB.IDIR

Group Directory

EDIM255

3.2

DB.GDIR

Group Directory – Date

EDIM25A

3.11

DB.GDTE

Interchange Status

EDIM251

3.3

DB.ISTAT

Group Status

EDIM252

3.4

DB.GSTAT

Transaction Status

EDIM253

3.5

DB.TSTAT

Document Directory

EDIM262

3.6

DB.DDIR

Document Status

EDIM263

3.7

DB.DSTAT

Change Audit Directory

EDIM268

3.8

DB.CADIR
DB.ADIR

Change Audit Status

EDIM269

3.9

DB.CASTAT
DB.ASTAT

Online Log

EDIMOLD

3.10

DB.LOG

Alphabetic
BSC
MAIN

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Databank Screens and Functions

Screen Title
Acknowledgment Overdue
Directory
Acknowledgment Overdue
Detail

The Databank Subsystem

Screen
Name
EDIM240

Jump Codes
Numeric
3.12

Alphabetic
ACK.OVER

EDIM241

3.12.1

ACK.OVDTL

See Appendix A for a complete list of jump codes and their associated screens.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 13

The Databank Subsystem

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

How to Use the Maintenance Functions
To demonstrate the use of Databank Maintenance, a number of commonly used procedures are
presented. The scenarios provided are:
•

Review detailed information regarding security setup.

•

Display the detailed status information for an EDI interchange.

•

Manually acknowledge a functional group.

•

Delete an outbound application document.

•

Reset an inbound application document for re-extraction.

•

Select an EDI transaction for detailed status viewing, and then link to the document status
detail for that transaction.

•

View all change audit status information for online changes that have been applied to databank data for a specific partner.

Display the Detailed Status Information for an EDI Interchange
The procedure to display the detailed status information for an EDI interchange is described
below:
1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Interchange Status function and press
Enter. The Interchange Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Interchange Status screen, type the Interchange ID and Qualifier to be displayed
and press Enter.

4.

Advance the insertion point to the interchange you wish to display. Type S beside the
interchange you wish to display then press PF14. The Interchange Status Detail is
displayed.

5.

To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

Manually Acknowledge a Functional Group
The procedure to manually acknowledge a functional group is described below:

4 - 14

1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Interchange Status function and press
Enter. The Interchange Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Interchange Status screen, type the Interchange ID and Qualifier to be displayed
and press Enter.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

The Databank Subsystem

4.

Advance the insertion point to the interchange you wish to display. Type S beside the
interchange you wish to display then press PF5. The Group Status screen is displayed.

5.

Advance the insertion point to the group you wish to acknowledge. Type A beside the
group you wish to acknowledge then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed.

6.

Press PF10 to acknowledge the functional group or PF12 to cancel the request. A
confirmation message is displayed.

7.

To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

Delete an Outbound Application Document
The procedure to delete an outbound application document is described below:
1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Document Status function and press
Enter. The Document Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Document Status screen, type the Partner ID and Qualifier to be displayed and
press Enter.

4.

Advance the insertion point to the application document you wish to delete. Type D beside
the document you wish to delete then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed.

5.

Press PF11 to delete the application document or PF12 to cancel the request. A
confirmation message is displayed.

6.

To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

Reset an Inbound Application Document for Reprocessing
The procedure to reset an inbound application document for reprocessing is described below:
1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Document Status function and press
Enter. The Document Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Document Status screen, type the Partner ID and Qualifier to be displayed and
press Enter.

4.

Advance the insertion point to the document you wish to reset. Type R beside the
document you wish to reset then press Enter. A system prompt is displayed.

5.

Press PF10 to reset the application document or PF12 to cancel the request. A
confirmation message is displayed.

6.

To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 15

The Databank Subsystem

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

Select an EDI Transaction For Detailed Status Viewing, and Link to the Document
Status Detail Screen for the Transaction
The procedure to display the EDI transaction detailed status information and then link to the
document status detail for the transaction is described below:
1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Transaction Status function and press
Enter. The Transaction Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Transaction Status screen, type the Group ID and Qualifier to be displayed and
press Enter.

4.

Advance the insertion point to the transaction you want to display. Type S beside the
transaction you wish to display then press PF5. The Transaction Status Detail screen is
displayed.

5.

From the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5 to display document status detail.

6.

To exit the display, press PF3. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

View All Change Audit Status Information for Online Changes that have been
Applied to Databank Data for a Specific Partner
The procedure to view all change audit status information is described below:

4 - 16

1.

From the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main Selection Menu, select the Databank Maintenance
function and press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

2.

From the Databank Maintenance Menu, select the Change Audit Status function and press
Enter. The Change Audit Status screen is displayed.

3.

From the Change Audit Status screen, type the Partner ID, Qualifier, and Databank file to
be displayed then press Enter.

4.

To exit the display, press Enter. The Databank Maintenance Menu is displayed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

The Databank Subsystem

Functions
Actions that can be performed in Databank Maintenance are identified on the first row of each
screen in Databank Maintenance. Valid actions that can be performed from screens within
Databank Maintenance include:
Acknowledge:
Used to manually acknowledge EDI data for which you expect an acknowledgment for
outbound EDI databank.
Delete:
Used to logically delete databank information.
Reset:
Used to reset databank data for reprocessing.
Select:
Used for viewing databank information.
Network:
Used to manually set the Network Status for an interchange to be completed on the
outbound EDI databank.
Note: These actions are described further in the sections that
follow each screen.

User Reference Information
User reference information provides a relationship link between application data and EDI data.
When you need to refer to databank records, user reference information will be helpful in locating
a specific record. You have the option of defining your own user reference information. Creating
an application key when performing application databanking or activating the Audit Indicator flag
for a segment element when performing EDI databanking, can result in user reference information.
During a databank run, Sterling Gentran:Basic generates a sequential default number, referred to
as a Reference Tag, for each transaction. Then, for each transaction, Sterling Gentran looks for an
application key or an active Audit Indicator. If found, Sterling Gentran concatenates the data to the
databank and specifies it as user reference information. If not found, Sterling Gentran uses the
Reference Tag as user reference information.
Sterling Gentran displays “protected” user reference information in the User Reference field on the
following screens:
•

Transaction Status (EDIM253)

•

Transaction Status Detail (EDIM258)

•

Document Status (EDIM263)

•

Change Audit Status Detail (EDIM269)

•

Document Display (EDIM264)

This section explains how to apply user reference information and the process in which Sterling
Gentran performs to populate the User Reference fields. The processes vary for inbound and
outbound, as well as for EDI databanking and application databanking.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 17

The Databank Subsystem

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

Inbound EDI Databanking
For inbound EDI databanking, you can instruct Sterling Gentran to use the value specified for a
segment element as user reference information by activating the Audit Indicator flag for the
element.
Scenario:
Let’s say that you are receiving an 810 (invoice) document and you have entered an elementspecific value for each segment existing in the 810. When you activate the Audit Indicator flag for
the element on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling Gentran will pass the element
value from the application standard to the databank key and use the value as user reference
information.
See the topic “Segment Element Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each
transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is IEnnnnnnnn. When
an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element screen (EDIM140), Sterling
Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the User Reference information.

Inbound Application Databanking
On the Application Partner Reference (EDIM555) screen, you can create a user reference key by
entering information that is meaningful to your organization in the Application Key field(s). After
a databank run, Sterling Gentran looks for a user reference key. When Sterling Gentran finds the
key, the data represented in the key is applied as user reference information.
See the topic “Application Partner Reference Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each
transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is IAnnnnnnnn. When
an application key is not created on the Application Partner Reference screen, Sterling Gentran
uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information.

4 - 18

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

The Databank Subsystem

Inbound EDI Databank Flow
Figure 4.7 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when
performing inbound EDI databanking.

Audit Indicator
First Choice:
Looks for value in Element

(EDI) Reference Tag
Second Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(EDI) User Reference
Result:
ŒIf Audit Indicator, value in Element
ŒIf Audit Indicator not activated,
Reference Tag

(EDI) User Reference
Action:
Passes User Reference to Sterling
Gentran Mapper

Figure 4.7 User Reference – Inbound EDI Processing Flow

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 19

The Databank Subsystem

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

Inbound Application Processing Flow
Figure 4.8 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when
performing inbound application databanking.

Application Definition
First Choice:
Looks for values defined Application
Key fields

(EDI) User Reference
Second Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(Application) Reference Tag
Third Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(Application) User Reference
Result:
ŒIf Application Key defined, values in fields
ŒIf Application Key not defined, EDI User Ref
ŒIf Application Key not defined or EDI
databanking not performed, Reference Tag

Figure 4.8 User Reference – Inbound Application Processing Flow
Note: When inbound EDI Databanking is not performed and
inbound Application databanking is performed, the only
value choice for user reference information is the value
generated for the application Reference Tag
(i.e., IAnnnnnnnn).

4 - 20

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

The Databank Subsystem

Outbound Application Databanking
On the Application Partner Reference (EDIM555) screen, you can create a user reference key by
entering information that is meaningful to your organization in the Application Key field(s). After
a databank run, Sterling Gentran looks for a user reference key. When Sterling Gentran finds the
key, the data represented in the key is applied as user reference information.
See the topic “Application Partner Reference Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each
transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is OAnnnnnnnn.
When an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling
Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information.

Outbound EDI Databanking
For inbound EDI databanking, you can instruct Sterling Gentran to use the value specified for a
segment element as user reference information by activating the Audit Indicator flag for the
element.
Scenario:
Let’s say that you are sending an PO (850) document and you have entered an element-specific
value for each segment existing in the PO. When you activate the Audit Indicator flag for the
element on the Segment Element (EDIM140) screen, Sterling Gentran will pass the element value
from the application standard to the databank key and use the value as user reference information.
See the topic “Segment Element Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information.
Sterling Gentran creates a sequential, unique reference number, called a Reference Tag, for each
transaction passing through the databank. The format for the Reference Tag is OEnnnnnnnn. When
an Audit Indicator flag is not specified on the Segment Element screen (EDIM140), Sterling
Gentran uses the Reference Tag number as the user reference information.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 21

The Databank Subsystem

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

Outbound Application Processing Flow
Figure 4.9 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when
performing outbound application databanking.

Application Definition
First Choice:
Looks for values defined Application
Key fields

(EDI) User Reference
Second Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(Application) Reference Tag
Third Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(Application) User Reference
Result:
ŒIf Application Key defined, values in fields
ŒIf Application Key not defined, EDI User Ref
ŒIf Application Key not defined or EDI
databanking not performed, Reference Tag

Figure 4.9 User Reference – Outbound Application Processing Flow
Note: When outbound EDI Databanking is not performed and
outbound Application databanking is performed, the only
value choice for User Reference information is the value
generated for the application Reference Tag
(i.e., IAnnnnnnnn).

4 - 22

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

How to Use the Maintenance Functions

The Databank Subsystem

Outbound EDI Databank Flow
Figure 4.10 shows how Sterling Gentran processes data to populate the User Reference field when
performing outbound EDI databanking.

Audit Indicator
First Choice:
Looks for value in Element

(EDI) Reference Tag
Second Choice:
Looks for Sterling Gentran
generated value

(EDI) User Reference
Result:
ŒIf Audit Indicator, value in Element
ŒIf Audit Indicator not activated,
Reference Tag

(EDI) User Reference
Action:
Passes User Reference to Sterling
Gentran Mapper

Figure 4.10 User Reference – Outbound EDI Processing Flow

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 23

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250

Databank Maintenance Menu

EDIM250

Purpose
Databank Maintenance provides the online ability to directly control and view application data and
EDI data that are processed by Sterling Gentran:Basic. Change Audit functions provide complete
details of all online changes made by users to databank data. The Online Log display is also
available within Databank Maintenance for viewing system status and exceptions.
The Databank Maintenance Menu provides a list of options for selecting the Databank
Maintenance functions.

How to Access
Access the Databank Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways:
•

Type 3 to select Databank Maintenance Menu from the Sterling Gentran:Basic Main
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 3.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Databank Maintenance Menu.
EDIM250

3.0

DATABANK MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER,
or press the PF3 key to Exit.
__

Enter PF1=Help

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Interchange Directory
Group Directory
Interchange Status
Group Status
Transaction Status
Document Directory
Document Status
Change Audit Directory
Change Audit Status
Log Display
Group Directory - Date
Acknowledgments Overdue

PF3=Exit

PF6=Refresh
PF15=Logoff

Databank Maintenance functions fall into the following four general categories:

4 - 24

•

EDI data related control and inquiry functions

•

Application document related control and inquiry functions

•

Change Audit related inquiry functions

•

Online Log display from which you can monitor system status and exceptions

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Maintenance Functions
The following table describes the Databank Maintenance functions that can be selected from the
Databank Maintenance Menu.
Menu Options

Description

1

Interchange
Directory

Lists the Interchange IDs that have EDI interchanges
on the databank.

2

Group Directory

Lists the Group IDs that have EDI functional groups
on the databank.

3

Interchange Status

Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI
interchanges currently on the databank.

4

Group Status

Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI
functional groups within an EDI interchange.

5

Transaction Status

Enables you to maintain and change the status of EDI
transactions within a functional group.

6

Document Directory

Lists the Partner IDs for which there are application
documents on the databank.

7

Document Status

Enables you to maintain and change the status of
application documents on the databank.

8

Change Audit
Directory

Lists the Partner IDs that have data on the databank to
which users have applied online changes.

9

Change Audit Status

Lists the Envelope Reference IDs that have data on the
databank to which users have applied online changes.

10

Log Display

Displays the monitor system status and exceptions.

11

Group Directory – Date

Lists the Group IDs that have EDI functional groups
on the databank.

12

Acknowledgment
Overdue

Lists the Partners that have overdue/waiting
acknowledgments.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF6=Refresh
Caution:

Refreshes the CICS VSAM buffers after a batch update. The VSAM buffers
are refreshed by closing and opening all of the databank files.
All databank files are updated through a batch program. Any
online changes go to a pending file and are later applied through a
batch program. CICS uses buffers, or hold areas, when reading

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 25

The Databank Subsystem

Databank Maintenance Menu EDIM250

files. While the information you need is still available in those
buffers, CICS does not re-read the file. Whether or not CICS
automatically refreshes the buffers is influenced by these factors:
volume of activity against the file, VSAM share options assigned
to the file, number of buffers, and pool sizes.
In most environments, the Refresh function is not required
because normal CICS processing results in sufficient VSAM
activity to refresh VSAM buffers automatically. However, if
batch updates are run while the online databank is active, the
CICS buffers do not show the latest information until the buffers
are refreshed. Problems navigating between different levels of
EDI envelopes or between directory and data screens may
indicate that your databank buffers need to be refreshed.
Pressing PF6 immediately interrupts all online databank users
and repositions them to the Databank Maintenance Menu. Any
databank online changes prior to the last save need to be
re-applied after the Refresh function has completed. Closing and
re-opening all of the databank files requires a few seconds to
complete.
Because of the impact of the Refresh function on the databank,
only users with security access Level 1 are permitted to use the
Refresh function.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
Type the number corresponding to the menu option you want to select and press Enter.

4 - 26

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Directory Screen

EDIM254

Purpose
The Interchange Directory is used to view which Interchange IDs have EDI interchanges on the
databank. This screen enables you to start the list at a specified Interchange ID/Qualifier and
restrict the list to just inbound or outbound interchanges. Leaving these fields blank produces a list
of all Interchange IDs for which there are interchanges on the databank.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 1 to select Interchange Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM254 3.1_______

Intchg Part ID
In/Outbound

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

_______________VENDOR-1____________
Qual _______________
_
Databank
G
(Gentran,Realtime)

Interchange Partner ID
VENDOR
VENDOR-1
QCICSSEND
QCISASEND
XXX1
VENDOR-1
YOUR COMPANY
616094041A

Qual
12
ZZ
ZZ
ZZ
01

TO SELECT INTERCHANGE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

I/O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

Dbk
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

Div
000
000
000
000
000
000
000

PF5=Interchg

4 - 27

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM254 3.1_______

Intchg - User
In/Outbound

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1___________________________ Partner _______________
I
Databank
G
(Gentran,Realtime)

User
VENDOR-1
1234
5000119000006
5000169
6147937000

Partner
1234
5010081000001
5010081000001
5136666666

I/O
I
I
I
I
I

Dbk
G
G
G
G
G

Div
000
000
000
000
000

TO SELECT USER/PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE USER
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Interchg
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
Display the Interchange Status screen
for an Interchange ID on the
Interchange Directory

Associated
with this
Do this ...
screen
action ...
Select
By typing S in the A field and
pressing PF5, you can select
an Interchange ID from which
you can view the status of
interchanges for that
Interchange ID.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Interchg

4 - 28

Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected. Type S
in the A field of Interchange ID you want to select and press PF5. This screen
displays a list of either inbound, outbound, or both inbound and outbound
interchanges (as specified on the Interchange Directory) and their statuses.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254

The Databank Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Intchg Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the interchangelevel trading Partner ID to
which the Interchange
Directory list should begin.
A partial value for the
Interchange Partner ID can
be entered to position the list
at the selected value.
Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Qualifier for the
interchange-level trading
partner (if applicable).

Field
Intchg –
User

Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the
interchange-level User ID field to
which the Interchange Directory
list should begin. A partial value
for the Interchange User ID may
be entered to position the list at
the selected value.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the interchange-level trading
partner (if applicable).

In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Interchange IDs which are inbound-only,
outbound-only or both. Valid values are:
I
O
blank

Inbound only Interchange IDs
Outbound only Interchange IDs
Both inbound and outbound Interchange IDs

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Interchange IDs from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
R

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 29

The Databank Subsystem
blank

Interchange Directory Screen EDIM254
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select an Interchange ID. The top line of the screen
lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Interchange ID you
want to select, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Interchange Status screen for a particular Interchange
ID on the Interchange Directory, type S in the A field for the interchange you want to
view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Interchange Directory.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Interchange A 35-character
Partner ID
alphanumeric field that
(protected)
identifies the interchange.
The Interchange Partner ID
is the interchange-level
trading partner name.

Relationship Mode
Field
Description
User
A 15-character alphanumeric
(protected) field that contains the
interchange-level User ID.

Qual
(protected)

Partner
(protected)

A 4-character field that
contains the interchangelevel trading partner
Qualifier, if applicable.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the interchange-level trading
partner (if applicable).

I/O (protected)
Displays the inbound or outbound code that is defined for the Interchange Partner ID. This
code designates whether the interchange was outbound or inbound.
Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the Interchange Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or
on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
R

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

Div (protected)
Displays the division code that has been associated with the Databank record.

4 - 30

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM255

The Databank Subsystem

Group Directory

EDIM255

Purpose
The Group Directory is used to view EDI functional groups, by their group-level trading partner
name and Qualifier. You can also restrict the list to inbound or outbound data, acknowledgment
status types and a search limit.

How to Access
Access the Group Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 2 to select Group Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 3.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and Relationship
modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM255 3.2_______

GROUP DIRECTORY

XXX

Group Part ID VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual
In/Outbound
I
Acknowledge Stat
Databank
G
Search Limit

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Group Partner ID
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5

06/01/2011
12:00:00

_______________
_
___

Group
Qual I/O Dbk Envelope Ref
I
G 000000007
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155

TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Group

Func. Ack
ID
St
IN
A
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7
INVOIC 7

PF6=GDate

4 - 31

The Databank Subsystem

Group Directory EDIM255

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM255 3.2_______

Group - User
In/Outbound
Databank

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

GROUP DIRECTORY

XXX

YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner
_
Acknowledge Stat
G
Search Limit

User
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY
YOUR-COMPANY

Partner
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-1

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1_______
_
___

Group
I/O Dbk Envelope Ref
O
G ( DEFERRED )
O
G ( DEFERRED )
O
G 000000003
O
G 000000004
O
G 000000005
O
G 000000005
O
G 000000006
O
G 000000006
O
G 000000006
I
G 000000007
PF5=Group

Func. Ack
ID
St
RA
TX
TX
W
PO
W
TX
W
PO
W
RA
W
PO
W
PO
W
IN
A

PF6=GDate

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Group Status screen for a
Group ID on the Group Directory

Associated
with this
Do this ...
screen
action ...
Select
Type S in the A field next to
the Group ID you want to
view and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Group

To select a Group ID, type S in the A field next to the selected Group ID, and
press PF5. The Group Status screen for the Group ID selected is displayed.
This screen displays a list of inbound or outbound functional groups (as
specified on the Group Directory) and their statuses.

PF6=GDate

To transfer to the Group Directory – Date screen, do one of the following:
• Press PF6 without selecting a Group ID.
• Select a Group ID by typing S in the A (Action Code) field next to
the selected Group ID and pressing PF6.

4 - 32

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM255

The Databank Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the group-level
trading partner name that the
Group Directory list should
begin with. A partial value
for the Group – Part ID can
be entered.
Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Qualifier for the
group-level trading partner
(if applicable).

Field
Group –
User

Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the group-level
user name that the Group
Directory list should begin with.
A partial value for the Group –
User can be entered.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the group-level trading
partner (if applicable).

In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups which are inbound-only,
outbound-only or both. Valid values are:
I
O
blank

Inbound only functional groups
Outbound only functional groups
Both inbound and outbound functional groups

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 33

The Databank Subsystem

Group Directory EDIM255

Acknowledge Stat
A 1-character alphabetic field which can be used to restrict the list to functional groups
with a specific acknowledgment status. Valid values are:
A
E
G
I
N
O
P
R
U
W

Accepted
Accepted with errors
Received (EDIFACT only)
Indeterminate
Not required
Overdue acknowledgment
Partial acceptance
Rejected
Manually acknowledged
Waiting acknowledgment

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
blank
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks
Search Limit
A 3-digit number used to limit the number of records that should be read for matching the
acknowledge status criteria requested. This limit restricts the amount of time the system
searches for matching records. Search limit is only used when using acknowledge status as
a search criteria.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Group Partner ID. The top line of the screen
lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S next to the selected Group Partner ID,
and then press PF5.
If you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Group Partner ID on the
Group Directory, type S in the A field for the group you want to view. Then, press PF5.
If you want to view the Group Directory – Date screen for a particular group partner ID,
type S in the A field for the group you want to view, then press PF6.

4 - 34

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory EDIM255

The Databank Subsystem

See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Group Directory.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group
A 35-character field that
Partner ID
identifies the group-level
(protected)
partner name.

Field
User
(protected)

Qual
(protected)

Partner
(protected)

A 4-character field that
contains the group-level
trading partner Qualifier, if
applicable.

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character field that
identifies the group-level user
name.
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the group-level trading
partner (if applicable).

I/O (protected)
Displays the inbound or outbound code. This code designates whether the functional
group for the Group Partner ID was outbound or inbound.
Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the functional group is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Group Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the functional group envelope reference identification for the functional group
being displayed.
Func. ID (protected)
Displays the functional identification (e.g., PO, IN, or FA) for the Group Partner ID
displayed.
Ack St (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the functional group displayed. Valid
values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
G
Received (EDIFACT only)
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 35

The Databank Subsystem

Group Directory – Date EDIM25A

Group Directory – Date

EDIM25A

Purpose
The Group Directory – Date is used to view EDI functional groups by their group-level trading
partner name and Qualifier. You can also restrict the list to inbound or outbound data, date, and a
search limit.

How to Access
Access the Group Directory – Date screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 11 to select Group Directory – Date from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.11 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Directory – Date screen for both Partner/Qualifier
and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM25A 3.11______

Group Part ID
In/Outbound
From Date...:
To Date.....:
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

GROUP DIRECTORY - DATE

VENDOR-1___________________________
I
Databank
G
__________
__________

Group Partner ID
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5
VENDOR-5

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual _______________
Search Limit
___

Group
Qual I/O Dbk Envelope Ref
I
G 000000007
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155
I
G 00000000000155

TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 36

XXX

PF5=Group

Date
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

PF6=GDir

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory – Date EDIM25A

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM25A 3.11______

Group - User
In/Outbound
From Date...:
To Date.....:
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

User
YOUR
YOUR
YOUR
YOUR
YOUR

GROUP DIRECTORY - DATE

___________________________________
_
Databank
G
__________
__________

COMPANY
COMPANY
COMPANY
COMPANY
COMPANY

Partner
THEIR COMPANY
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-2
VENDOR-3
VENDOR-4

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner _______________
Search Limit
___

Group
I/O Dbk Envelope Ref
I
G 000000007
O
G 000000001
O
G 000000001
O
G 000000001
O
G 000000001

TO SELECT GROUP ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE USER
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF5=Group

Date
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

PF6=GDir

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Directory – Date screen. The
following table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those
functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Group Status screen for a
Group ID on the Group DirectoryDate

Associated
with this
Do this ...
screen
action ...
Select
Type S in the A field next to
the Group ID you want to
view and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Group

To select a Group ID, type S in the A field next to the selected Group ID, and
press PF5. The Group Status screen for the Group ID selected is displayed.
This screen displays a list of inbound or outbound functional groups (as
specified on the Group Directory) and their statuses.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 37

The Databank Subsystem
PF6=GDir

Group Directory – Date EDIM25A
To transfer to the Group Directory screen, do one of the following:
• Press PF6 without selecting a Group ID.
• Select a Group ID by typing S in the A (Action Code) field next to
the selected Group ID and pressing PF6.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the group-level
trading partner name that the
Group Directory list should
begin with. A partial value
for the Group – Part ID can
be entered.
Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Qualifier for the
group-level trading partner
(if applicable).

Field
Group –
User

Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the group-level
user name that the Group
Directory list should begin with.
A partial value for the Group –
User can be entered.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the group-level trading
partner (if applicable).

In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups which are inbound-only,
outbound-only or both. Valid values are:
I
O
blank

4 - 38

Inbound only functional groups
Outbound only functional groups
Both inbound and outbound functional groups

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Directory – Date EDIM25A

The Databank Subsystem

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select functional groups from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
blank
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks
Search Limit
A 3-digit number used to limit the number of records that should be read for matching the
acknowledge status criteria requested. This limit restricts the amount of time the system
searches for matching records. Search limit is only used when using acknowledge status as
a search criteria.
From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that indicates the date you want the list of groups to
start with. Type the date in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY.
If a date is not entered for this field, all dates are selected. The value in the From Date field
must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the
date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date
used for the search is the output date.
To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that indicates the date you want the list of groups to end
with. Type the date in the following format: MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY.
The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the
date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date
used for the search is the output date.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Group Partner ID. The top line of the screen
lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S next to the selected Group Partner ID,
and then press PF5.
If you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Group Partner ID on the
Group Directory-Date screen, type S in the A field for the group you want to view. Then,
press PF5.
If you want to view the Group Directory screen for a particular Group Partner ID, type S
in the A field for the group you want to view, then press PF6.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Group Directory.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 39

The Databank Subsystem

Group Directory – Date EDIM25A

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group
A 35-character field that
Partner ID
identifies the group-level
(protected)
partner name.

Relationship Mode
Field
Description
User
A 15-character field that
(protected) identifies the group-level user
name.

Qual
(protected)

Partner
(protected)

A 4-character field that
contains the group-level
trading partner Qualifier, if
applicable.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the interchange-level trading
partner (if applicable).

I/O (protected)
Displays the inbound or outbound code. This code designates whether the functional
group for the Group Partner ID was outbound or inbound.
Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the functional group is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Group Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the functional group envelope reference identification for the functional group
being displayed.
Date
For inbound groups, this field displays the date the group was loaded onto the databank.
For outbound groups, this field displays the output date for the group. The date is in the
following format: MM/DD/YYYY.

4 - 40

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Screen

EDIM251

Purpose
The Interchange Status screen displays a list of interchanges and their status for a specified
Interchange Partner ID. Several selection fields are available for specifying which interchanges to
list.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Status screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 3 to select Interchange Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type S in the A field next to the Interchange ID on the Interchange Directory and press
PF5.

•

Type 3.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete Reset Network
EDIM251 3.3_______
INTERCHANGE STATUS

Intchg Part ID. :
Name . . . . . :
From Date . . . :
To Date . . . . :
Status - Network:
In/Outbound . . :

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual _______________
TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
__________ Time _____
Division 000
__________ Time _____
_
Ack _
Int Env Ref: ______________
I
Databank G

Rec Interchange
A Stat Envelope Ref
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005

Date
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Time
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00

Group
Count
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001

Char
Count
0000006392
0000006392
0000006392
0000006552
0000006552
0000006392
0000006392

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Status
Ack Net Comm I/O Dbk
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G

PF5=Group

PF6=Next ID
PF14=Dtl

4 - 41

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

Relationship Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete Reset Network
EDIM251 3.3_______
INTERCHANGE STATUS

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Intchg - User
___________________________________ Partner _______________
Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
From Date . . . : __________ Time _____
Division 000
To Date . . . . : __________ Time _____
Status - Network: _
Ack _
Int Env Ref: ______________
In/Outbound . . : I
Databank G
Rec Interchange
A Stat Envelope Ref
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005
_
000000005

Date
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Time
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00
12:00

Group
Count
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001
00001

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

Char
Count
0000006392
0000006392
0000006392
0000006552
0000006552
0000006392
0000006392

Status
Ack Net Comm I/O Dbk
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G
N
I G

PF5=Group

PF6=Next ID
PF14=Dtl

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Status screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...

Associated
with this
screen
action ...

Do this ...

Manually acknowledge an
interchange

Acknowledge

Type A in the A field next to the desired
Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press
Enter. Respond to the system prompt to complete
the request.

Display the Group Status
screen

Select

Type S in the A field next to the desired
Interchange Envelope Reference ID and press
PF5.

Delete an interchange

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the desired
interchange and press Enter. Respond to the
system prompt to complete the request.

Reset an interchange for
reprocessing

Reset

Type R in the A field next to the desired
interchange and press Enter. Respond to the
system prompt to complete the request.

Manually update an
interchange network status
to complete

Network

Type N in the A field next to the Interchange
Envelope Reference ID and press Enter. Respond
to the system prompt to complete the request.

Note: The above transactions must be applied by:
Inbound: Executing EBDI001 with the global parameter INBOUND
EDI DATABANKING REPROCESS.
Outbound: Executing EDID205.

4 - 42

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

The Databank Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Displays the Interchange Display screen. The EDI data for the Interchange
Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed.

PF4=Dir

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF5=Group

Displays the Group Status screen. The functional groups for the Interchange
Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed.

PF6=Next ID

Displays the interchanges for the next Interchange ID on the databank.

PF14=Dtl

Displays the Interchange Status Detail screen. Status detail information for the
Interchange Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field is displayed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Intchg Part
ID

A 35-character alphanumeric
field used to advance to an
interchange-level Partner ID
that you want to review. When
this field is left blank, the list of
interchanges starts with the
first found interchange on the
databank.

Field
Group –
User

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric field
used to advance to an interchangelever user identification that you
want to review. When this field is left
blank, the list of interchanges starts
with the first interchange on the
databank.

4 - 43

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Qual
(Partner)

Field

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the trading
partner Qualifier for the
Interchange ID (if applicable).
If this field is left blank, the
first qualifier value for the
Interchange Partner ID is listed.

Partner

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric field
that contains the Partner ID for the
group-level trading partner (if
applicable).

Name (protected)
A description of the Interchange ID using the Partner subsystem.
From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of interchanges
to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all
dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the
current date.
Note: For inbound interchanges, the date used for the search is
the date the interchange was loaded. For outbound
interchanges, the date used for the search is the output
date.
From Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of interchanges to
start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
Note: For inbound interchanges, the time used for the search is
the time the interchange was loaded. For outbound
interchanges, the time used for the search is the output
time.
Division (protected)
A 3-character alphanumeric field that contains the division defined to the partner profile,
which was used to process the interchange.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information about
division access.
To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of interchanges
to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates
are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound interchanges, the date used for the search is
the date the interchange was loaded. For outbound
interchanges, the date used for the search is the output
date.

4 - 44

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

The Databank Subsystem

To Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of interchanges to
end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
Note: For inbound interchanges, the time used for the search is
the time the interchange was loaded. For outbound
interchanges, the time used for the search is the output
time.
Status – Network
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which Network Status type should be used to
build the list. If this field is left blank, all Network Status types are displayed. Valid values
are:
E
N
P
R
S
U
W

Errors were encountered during network processing
As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this
interchange, network tracking is not performed for this interchange.
Partner has picked up the interchange
Network has received the interchange
Network has sorted (processed) the interchange
User has manually set to a network completed status
Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network

Ack
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be
used to build the list. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment Status types are
displayed. Valid values are:
A
G
I
N
O
R
U
W

Accepted
Received (EDIFACT only)
Indeterminate
Not required
Overdue acknowledgment
Rejected
Manually acknowledged
Waiting acknowledgment

Int Env Ref
A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the Interchange Envelope Reference that
should be used to build the list. If this field is left blank, all interchange records will be
displayed regardless of the Interchange Envelope Reference ID.
In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the list to Interchange IDs which are inboundonly, outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, both inbound and outbound
interchanges are listed. Valid values are:
I
O

Inbound only Interchange IDs
Outbound only Interchange IDs

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 45

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the list to Interchange IDs that are from the
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid
values are:
G
R
blank

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in
which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an
action, type the letter next to the selected interchange envelope reference ID. Then, press
PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Group Status screen for a particular Interchange
Envelope Reference ID on the Interchange Status screen, type S in the A field for the
interchange you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Interchange Status screen.
Rec Stat (protected)
Displays the last online action performed against the interchange. Valid values are:
D
has been marked for deletion
A
has been manually acknowledged
N
has been manually set to Network completed status
R
has been reset for reprocessing
B
has been bypassed (review change audit for more information)
P
has been partially applied (review change audit for more information)
Interchange Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange.
Date (protected)
For inbound interchanges, displays the date the interchange was loaded onto the databank.
For outbound interchanges, displays the output date for the interchange. The date has the
format MM/DD/YYYY.
Time (protected)
For inbound interchanges displays, the time the interchange was loaded onto the databank.
For outbound interchanges, displays the output time for the interchange. The time has the
format HH:MM.
Group Count (protected)
Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange.
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters within the interchange.

4 - 46

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Screen EDIM251

The Databank Subsystem

Status Ack (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Status Net (protected)
Displays the current network status for the interchange. Valid values are:
E
N

Errors were encountered during network processing
As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this
interchange, network tracking is not performed for this interchange.
Partner has picked up the interchange
Network has received the interchange
Network has sorted (processed) the interchange
User has manually set to a network completed status
Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network

P
R
S
U
W
Status Comm (protected)
If the Sterling Gentran:Plus product is installed, this field displays the first five VSAM
Batch Status flags for the interchange.
See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® Release 6.6 User Guide for further
information about status flags.
I/O (protected)
Displays the direction of the interchange. Valid values are:
I
O

Inbound
Outbound

Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the Interchange ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
R

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 47

The Databank Subsystem

Group Status Screen EDIM252

Group Status Screen

EDIM252

Purpose
The Group Status screen displays a list of groups and their status for a Group Partner ID. Several
selection fields are available for specifying which groups to list.

How to Access
Access the Group Status Screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 4 to select Group Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type S in the A field next to the Group ID on the Group Directory and press PF5.

•

Type 3.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.
Note: If you navigate to the Group Status screen from the
Interchange Status screen, and the selected interchange
has been duplicated on the databank, the system displays
only groups for the selected interchange. If you navigate
directly to the Group Status screen and select an
interchange that is duplicated on the databank, the system
displays duplicate groups.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete
EDIM252 3.4_______

Intchg Part ID
Int. Env. Ref :
Group Part ID. .
Group Name . . :
Func Group ID. :
From Date . . :
To Date . . . :
Acknowldge Stat:

GROUP STATUS

XXX

YOUR_COMPANY_______________________
000000023_____
GSSENDER___________________________
______
__________
__________
N

Time
Time

_____
_____

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual

ZZ_____________

Qual

_______________

Division
Loaded
In/Outbound

000
06/01/2011 12:00
I Databank G

Rec
Func
Group
Transactions
Char.
Acknowledged
A Stat ID
Envelope Ref
Count Acptd
Count
Date
Time St
_
BF
000000008
000002 000002 0000003448
N
_
_
_
_
_
END OF GROUPS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg
PF5=Trans
PF6=Nx Gr ID
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 48

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Status Screen EDIM252

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete
EDIM252 3.4_______

Int - User . . .
Int. Env. Ref
Group - User
Group Name . . :
Functional ID
From Date . . .
To Date . . . .
Acknowledge Stat

GROUP STATUS

XXX

YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner
(__DEFERRED__)
YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner
______
__________
__________
_

Time
Time

_____
_____

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1_______
VENDOR-1_______

Division: 000
Output:
In/Outbound O Databank

Rec
Func
Group
Transactions
A Stat ID
Envelope Ref
Count Acptd
_
PO
( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000
_
RA
( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000
_
TX
( DEFERRED ) 000000 000000
_
_
_
END OF GROUPS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Char.
Acknowledged
Count
Date
Time
0000000000
0000000000
0000000000

PF5=Trans

G

St

PF6=Nx Gr ID

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Status screen. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
Manually acknowledge a
functional group

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Acknowledge

Do this ...
Type A in the A field next to the desired
Group Envelope Reference ID and press
Enter. Respond to the system prompt to
complete the request.

Display the Transaction
Status screen

Select

Type S in the A field next to the Group
Envelope Reference ID for which
functional group you want to view. Then,
press PF5.

Delete a group ID

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the desired
Group Partner ID and press Enter.
Respond to the system prompt to
complete the request.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 49

The Databank Subsystem

Group Status Screen EDIM252

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Displays the Group Display screen. The EDI data for the Group Envelope
Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed.

PF4=Dir

Displays the Group Directory.

OR
PF4=Interchg

Displays the Interchange Status.

PF5=Trans

Displays the Transaction Status screen. The transactions for the Group
Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field is displayed.

PF6=Nx Gr ID

Displays the groups for the next Group Partner ID on the databank.

PF10=Ack

Manually acknowledges the selected functional group. The system prompts
for this key to be pressed to complete the Acknowledge action.

PF11=Del

The Delete function key is displayed when a Delete action is requested. The
system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the request.
For further information on Databank Maintenance and available options, refer
to the Databank Utility Programs and Reports chapter in the IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 50

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Status Screen EDIM252

The Databank Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Intchg Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the interchange
identification for which you
want to view groups. If this
field is left blank, the list of
groups starts with the first
interchange on the databank.

Relationship Mode
Field
Description
Int – User
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the interchange
identification for which you want
to view groups. If this field is left
blank, the list of groups starts
with the first interchange on the
databank.

Qual
(Partner)

Partner

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the trading partner
Qualifier for the Interchange
ID (if applicable). If this
field is left blank, the first
qualifier value for the
Interchange Partner ID is
listed.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the group-level trading
partner (if applicable).

Int. Env. Ref
A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the interchange envelope reference
identification for which you want to view functional groups. If this field is left blank, the
first Interchange Envelope Reference ID for the Interchange Partner ID is displayed.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the group
identification for which you
want to view Functional
Groups. If this field is left
blank, the list of groups
starts with the first group on
the databank for the
Interchange ID being
displayed.
Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the trading partner
Qualifier for the Group
Partner ID (if applicable). If
this field is left blank, the
first qualifier value for the
Group Partner ID is listed.

Field
Group –
User

Partner

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Relationship Mode
Description
A 35-character alphanumeric
field that contains the group
partner identification for which
you want to view functional
groups. If this field is left blank,
the list of groups starts with the
first interchange on the databank.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the group
partner identification for the
interchange.

4 - 51

The Databank Subsystem

Group Status Screen EDIM252

Group Name (User/Part) (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the Group Partner ID, using partner
maintenance.
Func(tional Group) ID
A 6-character alphanumeric value that contains the functional group identification that
you want used to limit the search for functional groups.
From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of groups to start
with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are
selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the
date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date
used for the search is the output date.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the group
being displayed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on
division access.
From Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of groups to start
with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected.
The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
Note: For inbound groups, the time used for the search is the
time the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the
time used for the search is the output time.
To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of groups to end
with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates are
selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound groups, the date used for the search is the
date the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the date
used for the search is the output date.
To Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of groups to end
with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are selected.
The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and time.
Note: For inbound groups, the time used for the search is the
time the group was loaded. For outbound groups, the
time used for the search is the output time.

4 - 52

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Status Screen EDIM252

The Databank Subsystem

Loaded
For inbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups
were loaded into the databank.
For outbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups
were processed through the databank (output).
Acknowledge Stat
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be
used to search for functional groups. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment status
types are displayed. Valid values are:
A
E
G
I
N
O
P
R
U
W

Accepted
Accepted with errors
Received (EDIFACT only)
Indeterminate
Not required
Overdue acknowledgment
Partial acceptance
Rejected
Manually acknowledged
Waiting acknowledgment

In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Group IDs which are inbound-only,
outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, any Inbound functional groups and
outbound functional groups are listed. Valid values are:
I
Inbound only Group IDs
O
Outbound only Group IDs
Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select Group IDs that are from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
R
blank

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in
which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute an
action, type the letter next to the selected functional group ID, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Transaction Status screen for a particular functional
group on the Group Status screen, type S in the A field for the functional group you want
to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Group Status screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 53

The Databank Subsystem

Group Status Screen EDIM252

Rec Stat (protected)
Displays the last online action performed against the Group. Valid values are:
D
has been marked for deletion
A
has been manually acknowledged
R
has been reset for reprocessing
B
has been bypassed (review change audit for more information)
P
has been partially applied (review change audit for more information)
Func ID (protected)
Displays the functional identification for the functional group.
Group Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the group envelope reference identification for the Group.
Transactions Count (protected)
Displays the number of transaction sets in the functional group.
Transactions Acptd (protected)
Displays the transaction sets which were accepted according to functional
acknowledgment processing.
Char. Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters in the functional group.
Acknowledged Date (protected)
For inbound functional groups field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was
generated for the group received. For outbound functional groups this field displays the
date a functional acknowledgment was received for the group sent.
Acknowledged Time (protected)
For inbound functional groups, this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment
was generated for the group received. For outbound functional groups this field displays
the time a functional acknowledgment was received for the functional group sent.
Acknowledged St (protected)
For inbound functional groups, this field displays the status set by the Editor during
compliance checking. This status is passed to your partner in the returned
acknowledgment. For outbound functional groups this field displays the acknowledgment
status returned by your partner for this functional group. Valid values are:
A
E
I
N
O
P
R
U
W
4
7
8

4 - 54

Accepted
Accepted with errors
Indeterminate
Not required
Overdue acknowledgment
Partial acceptance
Rejected
Manually acknowledged
Waiting acknowledgment
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
Received (EDIFACT only)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Screen

EDIM253

Purpose
The Transaction Status screen displays a list of transaction sets and their status for a specified
Group. Several selection fields are available for specifying which transactions to list.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Status screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 5 to select Transaction Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.
Note: If you navigate to the Transaction Status screen from the
Group Status screen, and the selected group has been
duplicated on the databank, the system displays only
transactions for the selected group. If you navigate
directly to the Transaction Status screen and select a
group that is duplicated on the databank, the system
displays duplicate transactions.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete
EDIM253 3.5_______

Group Part
Group Name
Group Env.
From Date
To Date .
Acknowldge

ID. :
. . :
Ref :
. . :
. . :
Stat:

TRANSACTION STATUS

XXX

VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual:
TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
000000007_____
Division:
__________ Time: _____
Loaded:
__________ Time: _____
In/Outbound:
_
Envelope Ref:

Rec
Transaction
User
A Stat
Set Envelope Ref
Reference
_
810
000070001
INV01
_
810
000070002
INV02
_
810
000070003
INV03
_
810
000070004
INV04
_
810
000070005
INV05
_
810
000070006
INV06
_
_
END OF TRANSACTIONS
PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

06/01/2011
12:00:00

_______________
000
06/01/2011 12:00
I Databank: G
______________

Acknowledged
Date
Time St
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A

PF5=Detail

PF6=Nx Gr ID

4 - 55

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

Relationship Mode
Acknowledge Select Delete
EDIM253 3.5_______

Group - User . :
Group Name . . :
Group Env. Ref :
From Date . . :
To Date . . . :
Acknowldge Stat:

TRANSACTION STATUS

XXX

YOUR_COMPANY_______________________ Partner:
YOUR COMPANY NAME
THEIR COMPANY
000000007_____
Division:
__________ Time: _____
Loaded:
__________ Time: _____
In/Outbound:
_
Envelope Ref:

Rec
Transaction
User
A Stat
Set Envelope Ref
Reference
_
810
000070001
INV01
_
810
000070002
INV02
_
810
000070003
INV03
_
810
000070004
INV04
_
810
000070005
INV05
_
810
000070006
INV06
_
_
END OF TRANSACTIONS
PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF3=Exit PF4=Group
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

06/01/2011
12:00:00

THEIR_COMPANY__
NAME
000
06/01/2011 12:00
I Databank: G
______________

Acknowledged
Date
Time St
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A
06/01/2011 12:00 A

PF5=Detail

PF6=Nx Gr ID

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Status screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
Manually acknowledge a
transaction for which an
acknowledgment is not
expected

4 - 56

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Acknowledge

Do this ...
Type A in the A field next to the desired
transaction envelope reference ID and
press Enter. Respond to the system
prompt to complete the request.

View the Transaction
Status Detail screen for a
transaction

Select

Type S in the A field next to the
transaction envelope reference ID for
which you want to view. Then, press
PF5.

Delete a transaction

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the desired
transaction set and press Enter. Respond
to the system prompt to complete the
request.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

The Databank Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Group

Displays the Group Display screen.

PF2=Data

Displays the Transaction Display screen.The EDI data for the Transaction
Envelope Reference ID selected in the A field are displayed.

PF5=Detail

Displays the Transaction Status Detail screen. All processing and status
information regarding the selected transaction set is displayed.

PF6=Nx Gr ID

Displays the next Group ID on the databank.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field
Description
Group Part A 35-character
ID
alphanumeric field that
contains the group
identification for which you
want to view transactions. If
left blank the list of
Transactions starts with the
first Group ID on the
databank.
Qual
(Partner)

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the trading partner
Qualifier for the Group ID
(if applicable). If left blank
the first qualifier value for
the Group ID is listed.

Field
Group –
User

Partner

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the interchange
identification for which you want
to view groups. If this field is left
blank, the list of groups starts
with the first interchange on the
databank.

A 15-character alphanumeric
field that contains the Partner ID
for the group-level trading
partner (if applicable).

4 - 57

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

Group Name (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the group identification using Partner
Maintenance.
Group Env. Ref
A 14-character alphanumeric field that contains the group envelope reference
identification for which you want to view transactions. If left blank, the first Group
Envelope Reference ID for the Group ID is displayed.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the
transactions being listed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on
division access.
From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of transactions
to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all
dates are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the
current date.
Note: For inbound transactions, the date used for the search is
the date the transaction was loaded. For outbound
transactions, the date used for the search is the output
date.
From Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of transactions to
start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
Note: For inbound transactions, the time used for the search is
the time the transaction was loaded. For outbound
transactions, the time used for the search is the output
time.
Loaded
For inbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups
were loaded into the databank.
For outbound functional groups – this field displays the date and time functional groups
were processed through the databank (output).
To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of transactions
to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates
are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
Note: For inbound transactions, the date used for the search is
the date the transactions was loaded. For outbound
transactions, the date used for the search is the output
date.

4 - 58

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

The Databank Subsystem

To Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of transactions to
end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and
time.
Note: For inbound transactions, the time used for the search is
the time the transaction was loaded. For outbound
transactions, the time used for the search is the output
time.
In/Outbound (required)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select transactions which are inbound-only,
outbound-only or both. If this field is left blank, any inbound transactions are listed for the
specified Partner. If no inbound transactions are found, outbound transactions are listed.
Valid values are:
I
Inbound only Transaction IDs
O
Outbound only Transaction IDs
Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select transactions that are from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
blank
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks
Acknowledge Stat
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains which acknowledgment status type should be
used to search for transactions. If this field is left blank, all acknowledgment Status types
are displayed. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
G
Received (EDIFACT only)
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
Envelope Ref
A 14-character alphanumeric field used to restrict the screen display to show only
transactions with the specified Envelope Reference ID. If this field is left blank, the
system displays transactions with any Envelope Reference IDs.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in
which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected transaction, and then press PF5.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 59

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253

For example, if you want to view the Transaction Status Detail screen for a particular
transaction envelope reference ID on the Transaction Status screen, type S in the A field
for the transaction you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Transaction Status screen.
Rec Stat (protected)
Displays the last online action performed against the transaction. Valid values are:
A=
transaction has been manually acknowledged
D=
transaction has been marked for deletion
B=
transaction has been bypassed (review change audit for more information
Set (protected)
Displays the EDI transaction set identification for the transaction.
Transaction Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the transaction envelope reference ID for the transaction.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the transaction.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Acknowledged Date (protected)
For inbound transactions, this field displays the date a functional acknowledgment was
generated for the transaction received. For outbound transactions this field displays the
date a functional acknowledgment was received for the transaction sent.
Acknowledged Time (protected)
For inbound transactions, this field displays the time a functional acknowledgment was
generated for the transaction received. For outbound transactions this field displays the
time a functional acknowledgment was received for the transaction sent.
Acknowledged St (protected)
For inbound transactions, this field displays the status generated by the Editor during
compliance checking. For outbound transactions, this field displays the status your partner
has returned for the transaction in a functional acknowledgment. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
R
Rejected
P
Partial acceptance
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)

4 - 60

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Screen EDIM253
8

The Databank Subsystem

Received (EDIFACT only)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 61

The Databank Subsystem

Document Directory EDIM262

Document Directory

EDIM262

Purpose
The Document Directory displays a list of Partner IDs for which there are application documents
on the databank. Each entry displayed on the list indicates whether the document is inbound or
outbound. From this screen, Document Status information can be displayed for a Partner ID's
documents.

How to Access
Access the Document Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 6 to select Document Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.6 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Document Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM262

3.6_______

Partner ID
In/Outbound

DOCUMENT DIRECTORY

___________________________________
Qual ____
_
Databank
_ (Gentran, Realtime)

A
Partner
Qual
_
VENDOR-1
_
VENDOR-1
_
VENDOR-2
_
VENDOR-3
_
VENDOR-4
_
VENDOR-4
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN “S” BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 62

XXX 06/01/2011
12:00:00

I/O
I
O
O
O
O
O

Dbk
G
G
G
R
G
R

PF5=Doc

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Directory EDIM262

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM262 3.6_______

User . . .
In/Outbound

DOCUMENT DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR-COMPANY_________________ Partner VENDOR-1_____
_
Databank G (Gentran, Realtime)

A User
Partner
_
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

I/O
I
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I
O
I
I

Dbk
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

PF5=Doc

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Directory. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Document Status
screen for the Partner ID
selected on the Document
Directory

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the
Partner ID for which you want to
view. Then, press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Doc

Displays the Document Status screen. Documents for the Partner ID selected
in the A field is displayed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 63

The Databank Subsystem

Document Directory EDIM262

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID (User)
A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is
used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first
Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID
field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner)
A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the
Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to just inbound documents or
outbound documents. If left blank the list includes both inbound and outbound documents.
Valid values are:
I
O

Inbound documents only
Outbound documents only

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to documents from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
R
blank

4 - 64

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Directory EDIM262

The Databank Subsystem

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected Partner ID, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Document Status screen for a particular Partner ID
on the Document Directory, type S in the A field corresponding to the partner whose
document status you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Document Directory.
Partner (User) (protected)
Displays the trading partner identification (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user
identification (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Displays the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier
mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
I/O (protected)
Displays the inbound or outbound code for the direction of the documents that belong to
the Partner ID listed.
Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
R

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 65

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Screen EDIM263

Document Status Screen

EDIM263

Purpose
The Document Status screen displays a list of all documents for a Profile ID. Various selection
fields are available to you for selecting which documents should be listed. Each of these fields are
described in more detail in Field Descriptions.

How to Access
Access the Document Status screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 7 to select Document Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 3.7 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Document Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select Delete Reset
EDIM263 3.7_______

Partner ID . .
Appl Data ID
User Reference
In/Outbound
From Date . .
To Date . . .
Rec Appl
A Stat Data ID
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual _______________
____________
_____________________________________________
_
Databank G
__________ Time _____
__________ Time _____

User Reference
REF:IA00000001
REF:IA00000002
REF:IA00000003
REF:IA00000004
REF:IA00000005
REF:IA00000006
REF:IA00000007
REF:IA00000008

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 66

DOCUMENT STATUS

Date
I/O Dbk
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

PF5=Detail

PF6=Nx Pr ID

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Screen EDIM263

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select Delete Reset
EDIM263 3.7_______

User . . . . .
Appl Data ID
User Reference
In/Outbound
From Date . .
To Date . . .

DOCUMENT STATUS

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

YOUR-COMPANY_______________________ Partner VENDOR-1_______
____________
_____________________________________________
_
Databank G
__________ Time _____
__________ Time _____

Rec Appl
A Stat Data ID
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE
_
INVFILE

User Reference
INV01
INV01
INV01
INV01
INV01
INV01
INV01
INV01

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Date
I/O Dbk
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G
06/01/2011
I G

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

PF5=Detail

PF6=Nx Pr ID

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Status screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Document Status
Detail screen for the
document displayed

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the
document for which you want to view,
and then press PF5.

Delete a document

Delete

Type D in the A field next to the
document that is to be deleted and
press Enter. Respond to the system
prompt to complete the request.

Reset a document for
reprocessing

Reset

Type R in the A field next to the
desired document and press Enter.
Respond to the system prompt to
complete the request.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 67

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Screen EDIM263

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Displays the Document Display screen. The application data for the document
selected in the A field are displayed.

PF4=Dir

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF5=Detail

Displays the Document Status Detail screen. All processing and status
information regarding the selected document is displayed.

PF6=Nx Pr ID

Displays documents for the next Profile ID on the databank.

PF10=Updt

The Update function key is displayed when a Reset action is requested. The
system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the requested action.

PF11=Del

The Delete function key is displayed when a Delete action is requested. The
system prompts for this key to be pressed to complete the request.
For further information on Databank Maintenance and available options, refer
to the Databank Utility Programs and Reports chapter in the IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID (User)
A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is
used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first
Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID
field (Relationship mode).

4 - 68

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Screen EDIM263

The Databank Subsystem

Qual (Partner)
A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the
Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Appl Data ID
A 12-character alphanumeric field entered to restrict the list to one application data
identification for listing documents.
User Reference
A 45-character field to restrict the list to documents with the specified user reference
information. If this field is left blank, the system displays documents with any user
reference information.
In/Outbound
A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list to just inbound documents or
outbound documents. If left blank, the list includes both inbound and outbound
documents. Valid values are:
I
O

Inbound documents only
Outbound documents only

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to restrict the list of documents from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic databank, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank, or both. Valid values
are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank only
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank only
blank
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
databanks
From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of documents to
start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates
are selected. The value in the From Date field must be less than or equal to the current
date. When searching for inbound documents, use the date for which documents were
loaded. When searching for outbound documents, use the date for which the documents
were processed (output date).
From Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of documents to
start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the From Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
When searching for inbound documents, use the time for which documents were loaded.
When searching for outbound documents, use the time for which the documents were
processed (output date).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 69

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Screen EDIM263

To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of documents to
end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. If a date is not entered, all dates
are selected. The value in the To Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
When searching for inbound documents, use the date for which documents were processed
(output date). When searching for outbound documents, use the date for which the
documents were loaded.
To Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of documents to
end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. If a time is not entered, all times are
selected. The value in the To Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
When searching for inbound documents, use the time for which the documents were
processed (output time). When searching for outbound documents, use the time for which
the documents were loaded.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to specify an action to be performed against the entry
corresponding to the A field. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions you can
initiate using this field. To execute the action, type the letter next to the selected document,
and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Document Status Detail screen for the document
displayed, type S in the A field for the document you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions you can perform on the Document Status screen.
Rec Stat (protected)
Displays the last action performed for the document. Valid values are:
D
has been marked for deletion
R
has been reset for reprocessing
E
has been edited
Appl Data ID (protected)
Displays the application data identification for the document.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Date (protected)
Displays the load date for inbound documents and the output date for outbound
documents.
I/O (protected)
Displays the inbound or outbound code for the direction of the documents that belong to
the Partner ID being listed.

4 - 70

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Screen EDIM263

The Databank Subsystem

Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 71

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Directory EDIM268

Change Audit Directory

EDIM268

Purpose
The Change Audit Directory lists all Partner IDs that contain change information.

How to Access
Access the Change Audit Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 8 to select Change Audit Directory from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.8 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Change Audit Directory for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM268 3.8_______

Partner ID
Databank

CHANGE AUDIT DIRECTORY

06/01/2011
12:00:00

___________________________________
Qual _______________
1 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE)

A Partner ID
Qual
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN “S” BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 72

XXX

PF5=Chg Aud

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Directory EDIM268

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM268 3.8_______

User . .
Databank

CHANGE AUDIT DIRECTORY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

___________________________________
Partner _______________
1 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE)

A User
Partner
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
_ YOUR-COMPANY
VENDOR-1
TO SELECT PROFILE ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF5=Chg Aud

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Change Audit Directory. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Change Audit
Status screen for the Partner
ID selected

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the
Partner ID for which you want to
view, and then press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Chg Aud

Displays the Change Audit Status screen. For EDI data, a list of Envelope
Reference IDs is displayed. For application data, a list of User References is
displayed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 73

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Directory EDIM268

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID (User)
A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is
used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first
Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID
field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner)
A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the
Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Databank
A 1-character numeric field used to specify the type of databank change data to list.
Specify one of the following values in this field:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

4 - 74

(IE) Inbound EDI data.
(IA) Inbound application data.
(OA) Outbound application data.
(OE) Outbound EDI data.
(RIE) Inbound EDI data.
(RIA) Inbound application data.
(ROA) Realtime outbound application data.
(ROE) Realtime outbound EDI data.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Directory EDIM268

The Databank Subsystem

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected Partner ID, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Change Audit Status screen for a particular Partner
ID on the Change Audit Directory, type S in the A field for the partner you want to view.
Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Change Audit Directory.
Partner ID (User) (protected)
Displays the trading partner identification (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user
identification (Relationship mode) for which there is Change Audit information.
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Displays the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the
Partner ID (Relationship mode).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 75

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269

Change Audit Status Screen

EDIM269

Purpose
The Change Audit Status screen displays all online changes made to application and EDI data on
the databanks.
The display is by EDI Envelope Reference IDs for EDI data, and User References for application
data.

How to Access
Access the Change Audit Status screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 9 to select Change Audit Status from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press
Enter.

•

Type 3.9 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Change Audit screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM269

3.9_______

Partner ID
Databank
From Date
To Date

CHANGE AUDIT STATUS

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1__________________________
Qual ____
4 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE)
__________ Time _____
__________ Time _____

Envelope Reference IDs
A Interchange
Group
Transaction
_ PONUMBER-001
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
END OF CHANGE AUDIT RECORDS
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 76

XXX

Ref Tag
OA00000001

PF5=Detail

Date
Cd
06/01/2011

PF6=Nx Pr ID

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM269 3.9_______

User . . .
Databank
From Date
To Date

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

CHANGE AUDIT STATUS

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

VENDOR-1__________________________
Partner _______________
3 (1=IE, 2=IA, 3=OA, 4=OE, 5=RIE, 6=RIA, 7=ROA, 8=ROE)
__________ Time _____
__________ Time _____

User Reference
PONUMBER-001
PONUMBER-001
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
NUMBER-011
PONUMBER-001

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Ref Tag
OA00000037
OA00000277
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00000170
OA00001094
PF3=Exit PF4=Dir

PF5=Detail

Date
Cd
06/01/2011 R
06/01/2011 E
06/01/2011 E
06/01/2011 E
06/01/2011 R
06/01/2011 E
06/01/2011 R
06/01/2011 E
06/01/2011 R
06/01/2011 E
PF6=Nx Pr ID

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Change Audit Status screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
Displays the Change Audit
Status Detail screen for the
entry selected

Associated with
Do this ...
this screen
action ...
Select
Type S in the A field next to the
desired Interchange Envelope
Reference ID and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Displays the Interchange Directory.

PF5=Detail

Displays the Change Audit Status Detail screen. All change activity related to
the selected entry can be viewed from the Change Audit Status Detail screen.

PF6=Nx Pr ID

Displays Change Audit information for the next Partner ID on the Change
Audit file.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 77

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID (User)
A 35-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner identification that is
used to search for Change Audit information. If left blank, the list starts with the first
Partner ID for which there is Change Audit information.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Partner ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User ID
field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner)
A 15-character alphanumeric field that contains the trading partner Qualifier for the
Partner ID (if applicable). If left blank, the first Qualifier value for the Partner ID is listed.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Databank
A 1-character numeric field that contains what type of databank data has had online
changes applied. Type one of the following values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

4 - 78

(IE) Inbound EDI data.
(IA) Inbound application data.
(OA) Outbound application data.
(OE) Outbound EDI data.
(RIE) Inbound EDI data.
(RIA) Inbound application data.
(ROA) Realtime outbound application data.
(ROE) Realtime outbound EDI data.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269

The Databank Subsystem

From Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of change audit
information to start with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. The date listed is
the Update Online date. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the
From Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
From Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of change audit
information to start with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. The time listed is the
Update Online time. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the From
Time field must be less than or equal to the current time.
To Date
A 10-character alphanumeric field that contains the date you want the list of change audit
information to end with. Type the date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY. The date listed is
the Update Online date. If a date is not entered, all dates are selected. The value in the To
Date field must be less than or equal to the current date.
To Time
A 5-character alphanumeric field that contains the time you want the list of change audit
information to end with. Type the time in this format: HH:MM. The time listed is the
Update Online time. If a time is not entered, all times are selected. The value in the To
Time field must be less than or equal to the current date and time.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected User Reference ID, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Change Audit Status Detail screen for the change
audit displayed, type S in the A field for the user reference you want to view. Then, press
PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Change Audit Status screen.
Envelope Reference IDs (protected)
Displayed for EDI data only. The fields displayed are Interchange, Group or Transaction.
User Reference (protected)
Displayed for application data only. This field displays the User Reference for the
document, depending on whether the document is inbound or outbound and how you have
chosen to implement the User Reference option (the Application Key fields on the
Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping). Editor processing or Data
Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 79

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Screen EDIM269

Ref Tag (protected)
Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction/
document. The inbound EDI databank reference number tag is IEnnnnnnnn.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Date (protected)
Displays the date the record was updated.
Cd (protected)
Displays the code for the type of update performed. Valid values are:
D
E
M
N
R

4 - 80

Delete
Edited
Manually Acknowledged
Network
Reprocess

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD

The Databank Subsystem

Online Log Display Screen

EDIMOLD

Purpose
The Online Log Display screen displays the Online Log file and allows you to monitor any
exception situations that are encountered by the background CICS tasks in Sterling Gentran:Basic.
The Online Log Display screen displays data the same way as a console log: The most recent
entries are displayed at the bottom of the screen. As new entries are added to the file, the display
scrolls upward.
This screen only displays log messages generated by applications in the Sterling Gentran:Basic
system. To view messages generated by the Sterling Gentran:Control, Sterling Gentran:Realtime,
or Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint systems, use the Online Log Display screen for the corresponding
system.

How to Access
Access the Online Log Display screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type 10 to select Log Display from the Databank Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 3.10 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Online Log Display screen.
EDIMOLD 3.10______

ONLINE LOG DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Filters====> Errors Only: _
Program Only: ________
Position
Task #
TranID
Time
Date
Criteria===> _______
____
________
__________

Max Count
3000

TASK
TRAN
TIME
DATE
TERM
PROGRAM
ERROR CODE
06/01/2011 0002
EDIX000
EDI-44500-F 16
00206
EDI
12:00:00
DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI
00326
EDI
12:00:00
06/01/2011 0002
EDIX000
EDI-44500-F 16
DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI
00849
EDI
12:00:00
06/01/2011 0002
EDIX000
EDI-44500-F 16
DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI
06/01/2011 0002
EDIX000
EDI-44500-F 16
01312
EDI
12:00:00
DATABANK SCANNER STALL DETECTED : EDI
01634
EDIP
12:00:00
06/01/2011
EDIBOBI
EDI-10006-F 16
ERROR READING FILE: EDIRJCL, EIBRCODE: 0D==> DISABLED, EIBFN: 0602==> READ
06/01/2011
EDIBOBI
EDI-10006-F 16
01692
EDIP
12:00:00
ERROR READING FILE: EDIRJCL, EIBRCODE: 0D==> DISABLED, EIBFN: 0602==> READ
Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 81

The Databank Subsystem

Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

4 - 82

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD

The Databank Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Filters (optional)
Filters restrict error and message display for specific values. If you enter values in
combination with Position Criteria, the Position Criteria is processed first. When values
are not entered, the filters are not active.
Errors Only (optional)
A 1-position alphanumeric field that indicates whether errors are to be displayed. Errors
are displayed starting with the last error message on the screen and processing backwards
through a file. If no error message is currently on the screen, error messages are displayed
as they are found – processing backwards through the file.
PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd may be used to scroll through error messages. When used in
conjunction with the Program Only filter, errors are displayed for the specified program
entered. Valid values are:
Y
Only severe errors and fatal errors are displayed (i.e., error values, E –
Error, F – Fatal error, S – Severe error).
N

All log information is displayed.

Space

All log information is displayed.

Program Only (optional)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that limits the display to the specified program. Valid
values are any Sterling Gentran:Basic program or the value “No Name”.
After a valid value is entered, only messages for the specified program are displayed.
Messages for the specified program are displayed starting with the last message on the
screen and processing backwards through the file. If no message is currently displayed,
messages are displayed for that program as they are found – processing backwards
through the file.
PF7=Bwd or PF8=Fwd may be used to scroll through the messages for the program.
When used in conjunction with the Errors Only Filter, error messages are displayed for the
specified program.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 83

The Databank Subsystem

Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD

Position Criteria (optional)
A group of five fields that are used to position the display of the Online Log file at a
specific point in the file, based on the criteria in these fields. You can use any combination
of position criteria, or leave the fields blank. When you do not specify position criteria (all
five fields are blank), the last (most recent) record in the file is the last entry on the screen.
When you press Enter, the system searches for log entries matching the position criteria,
beginning with the last record on the Online Log file. When you press either PF7 or PF8,
the system searches for entries, beginning with the last record displayed on the screen.
Task # (optional)
A 7-digit numeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the most
recent entry of a specific CICS task number. Valid values are any valid CICS task number.
The system searches for an exact match of the task number in this field.
TranID (optional)
A 4-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file at the
most recent entry of a specific CICS transaction ID. Valid values are any valid CICS
transaction ID. Some of the primary Sterling Gentran transaction IDs are:
EDI
EDID
EDIP

Main Terminal Transaction
Sterling Gentran:Basic Databank Scanner
Sterling Gentran:Basic Online Batch Initiator

Time (optional)
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The
list begins with entries where the Time field is equal to or less than this value. The time is
formatted in the 24-hour format, HH:MM:SS.
Date (optional)
A 10-position alphanumeric field used to position the display of the Online Log file. The
list begins with entries where the Date field is equal to or less than this value. The date is
formatted MM/DD/YYYY.
Max Count (required)
A 4-position numeric field used to indicate the maximum number of Online Log file
entries to read during a search for position criteria.
When this screen is initially displayed, the Max Count field contains the default value as
defined on the Configuration Maintenance screen (EDIM231) for Record Type 0, the
Online Options. If no records are found that match the selection criteria, the message
EXCEEDED MAX SEARCH COUNT is displayed. You can either press PF7 or PF8 to
continue the search or increase the value in the Max Count field. An extremely large
number in this field may slow down response time.
Task (protected)
A 7-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS task number of the task issuing the
log entry.
Tran (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the CICS Transaction ID of the task issuing
the log entry.

4 - 84

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Online Log Display Screen EDIMOLD

The Databank Subsystem

Time (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the current time of the task issuing the log
entry. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Date (protected)
A 10-position alphanumeric field that displays the current date of the task issuing the log
entry. The date format is MM/DD/YYYY.
Term (protected)
A 4-position alphanumeric field that displays the Terminal ID of the task issuing the log
entry. If this field is blank, the task was executed in background CICS.
Program (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the Sterling Gentran program issuing the
log entry.
Error Code (protected)
A 14-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/information number, severity
indicators, and completion code generated by the task issuing the log entry. The valid
format is:
EDI-XXXXX-Y ZZ
Where:

EDI-XXXXX is the message number
Y is the severity indicator
ZZ is the return code value

See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message
Guide for information about the indicated message.
Severity indicator values are:
I
Informational – usually trace messages.
T
Trace – produced by the Trace facility.
W
Warning – some action may be required.
E
Severe error – controlled termination of processing.
F
Fatal error – results in immediate termination of processing.
Return code values are:
00
Normal – no warnings or errors occurred.
04
Warning – at least one warning level occurred.
08
Error – invalid data was encountered – some action may be required.
12
Severe error – processing was terminated.
16
Fatal error – processing was terminated.
See the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 System Message Guide for
more information on these codes.
Error Message (protected)
A 74-position alphanumeric field that displays the error/informational message generated
by the task issuing the log entry.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 85

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen

EDIM240

Purpose
The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen is used to view EDI interchanges on the
Acknowledgment Overdue File. There is a file for Sterling Gentran:Basic and a different file for
Sterling Gentran:Realtime. EDID510 (Acknowledgment Reconciliation) and EDIR515 (Realtime
Acknowledgment Reconciliation) create the Acknowledgment Overdue files when processing in
Monitor mode. The Acknowledgment Overdue files contain a copy of the Outbound EDI
databank records that have an acknowledgment status of overdue or waiting.
Note: The creation of the Acknowledgment Overdue files is a
configurable option. See chapter 5 in the Sterling
Gentran:Basic User Guide for Configuration
Maintenance for Record Type 2 and for more information
about the system configuration. See chapter 5 in the
IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6
Technical Reference Guide, for EDID510, or chapter 5 of
the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Realtime® for z/OS®
Technical Reference Guide for EDIR515, or for more
Information about the Acknowledgment Overdue file.
The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory screen allows you to start the list at a specified Partner
profile, restrict the list to just overdue or waiting interchanges and restrict the list to just Sterling
Gentran or Sterling Gentran:Realtime information. Leaving these fields blank produces a list of all
IDs for which there are records on the Acknowledgment Overdue files.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 13 to select Acknowledgment Overdue Directory from the Databank Maintenance
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 3.13 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

4 - 86

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240

The Databank Subsystem

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM240 3.12______

Partner ID
Databank
G
Status
_
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

___________________________________
Qual _______________
(Gentran,Realtime)
Monitor Date: G 06/01/11 R
(Overdue,Waiting)
Time:
12:00:00

Partner ID
QCICSSEND
QCISASEND
QCUNASEND
QCUNBSEND
QCSCHSEND
QCSTXSEND
QCXXXSEND
VENDOR-1
VENDOR-2
VENDOR-3

Qual

TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Dbk
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G

Status
O
W
W
W
W
O
O
O
O
O

Div
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000

PF5=Details

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM240 3.12______

User
Databank
Status
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

G
_

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

___________________________________
Partner _______________
(Gentran,Realtime)
Monitor Date: G 06/01/11 R
(Overdue,Waiting)
Time:
12:00:00

User
YOUR COMPANY
YOUR COMPANY
YOUR COMPANY

Partner
QCICSSEND
QCISASEND
QCUNASEND

TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Dbk
G
G
G

Status
O
W
W

Div
000
000
000

PF5=Details

4 - 87

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory. The
following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those
functions.
To perform
this action ...
Display the
Acknowledgment Overdue
Detail screen for a Partner
on the Acknowledgment
Overdue Directory

Associated
with this screen Do this ...
action ...
Select
By typing S in the A field and
pressing PF5, you can select
a Partner from which
you can view the acknowledgment
details for that Partner.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Details

Displays the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen for the Partner selected.
Type S in the A field of Partner you want to select and press PF5. This screen
displays a list of either overdue or waiting interchanges, or both overdue and
waiting interchanges.

Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 88

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240

Partner/Qualifier Mode

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Partner ID

A 35-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the trading
Partner ID to which the
Acknowledgment
Overdue Directory list
should begin. A partial
value for the Partner ID
can be entered to position
the list at the selected
value.

User

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the User ID field
to which the
Acknowledgment Overdue
Directory list should begin.
A partial value for the User
ID may be entered to
position the list at the
selected value.

Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Qualifier for
the trading partner (if
applicable).

Partner

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Partner ID for
the trading partner (if
applicable).

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to display partners from the Sterling Gentran:Basic
Acknowledgment Overdue file, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment overdue
file, or both. Valid values are:
G
R
blank

Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file only
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
Acknowledgment Overdue files

Monitor Date (Sterling Gentran) (protected)
Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file was
created if present.
(Monitor Date Realtime) (protected)
Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file was
created if present.
Status
A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the records from the Acknowledgment
Overdue file that are displayed on the screen Valid values are:
O
W
blank

Overdue status only
Waiting status only
Both Overdue and Waiting status.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 89

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Directory Screen EDIM240

(Monitor) Time (Sterling Gentran) (protected)
Displays the time that the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file was
created if present.
(Monitor Time Realtime) (protected)
Displays the date that the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file was
created if present.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Partner Profile. The top line of the screen
lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Partner you want to
select, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen for a
particular Partner on the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory, type S in the A field for the
partner you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic "Function Key Descriptions" in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory.

Partner/Qualifier Mode

Relationship Mode
Description

Field

Description

Field

Partner ID
(protected)

A 35-character
alphanumeric field that
identifies the partner ID.

User (protected)

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the User ID.

Qual
(protected)

A 4-character field that
contains the trading
partner Qualifier, if
applicable.

Partner
(protected)

A 15-character
alphanumeric
field that contains the
Partner ID, if applicable.

Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment
Overdue file or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file. Valid
values are:
G
Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue File
R
Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue File
Status (protected)
Displays the acknowledgment status. Valid values are:
O
W

Overdue
Waiting

Div (protected)
Displays the division code that has been associated with the Databank record.

4 - 90

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen

EDIM241

Purpose
The Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen is used to view the details about EDI interchanges
on the Acknowledgment Overdue File. This screen displays the interchange, group and
transaction information for overdue/waiting acknowledgments for the indicated partner profile.
The Acknowledgment Overdue Directory screen allows you to enter a specific Partner profile,
restrict the list to just overdue or waiting interchanges and restrict the list to just Sterling Gentran
or Sterling Gentran:Realtime information. Leaving these fields blank produces a list of all records
found for the specified partner profile for which there are records on the Acknowledgment
Overdue files. Intchg Env Ref, Group Env Ref and Trans Env Ref fields can be used to position
down into the display list.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type S in the A field next to the Partner ID on the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory
and press PF5.

•

Type 3.13.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screens for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM241 3.12.1____

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE DETAIL

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner ID
Databank
Status

VENDOR-1___________________________
Qual _______________
G (Gentran,Realtime)
_ (Overdue,Waiting) *---------** CONTACT INFORMATION ** ---------*
| Name: TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
|
| Contact:
|
| Phone:
|
Monitor Date
Time
| E-Mail: TRADING_PARTNER@STERCOMM.COM
|
G 06/01/11
12:00:00
*--------------------------------------------*
R 06/01/11
12:00:00
Sent
Ack Expected
A Type Envelope Ref
Func Id/User Ref Date
Time
Date
Time Dbk Sts
_ G
000000001
SC
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ G
000000046
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ T
000000046
PO-NUMBER-001
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ G
000000049
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ T
000000049
PO-NUMBER-002
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ G
000000050
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ T
000000050
PO-NUMBER-003
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Details
PF6=Nxt Part
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 91

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM241 3.12.1____

ACKNOWLEDGMENT OVERDUE DETAIL

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

User
Databank
Status

YOUR COMPANY_______________________
Partner VENDOR-1____
G (Gentran,Realtime)
_ (Overdue,Waiting) *---------** CONTACT INFORMATION ** ---------*
| Name: TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
|
| Contact:
|
| Phone:
|
Monitor Date
Time
| E-Mail: TRADING_PARTNER@STERCOMM.COM
|
G 06/01/11
12:00:00
*--------------------------------------------*
R 06/01/11
12:00:00
Sent
Ack Expected
A Type Envelope Ref
Func Id/User Ref Date
Time
Date
Time Dbk Sts
_ G
000000001
SC
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ G
000000046
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ T
000000046
PO-NUMBER-001
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ G
000000049
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
W
_ T
000000049
PO-NUMBER-002
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ G
000000050
PO
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
_ T
000000050
PO-NUMBER-003
06/01/11 12:00 06/01/11 12:00 G
O
TO SELECT PARTNER ENTER AN "S" BESIDE THE ID
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Details
PF6=Nxt Part
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Acknowledgment Overdue Directory. The
following table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those
functions.
To perform
this action ...
Display the appropriate
databank status screen
EDIX251, EDIX252, or
EDIX253 for the selected
record Partner on the
Acknowledgment Overdue
Detail screen.

Associated
with this screen Do this ...
action ...
Select
By typing S in the A field and
pressing PF5, you can select
a Partner from which
you can view the outbound databank
status information for that record.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Status

4 - 92

Transfers control to the appropriate databank status screen EDIX251,
EDIX252 or EDIX253 based on the record selected. Interchange record will
transfer to EDIX251 Interchange Status, Group record will transfer to
EDIX252 Group status, and Transaction record will transfer to EDIX253

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status. Type S in the A field of record you want to select and
press PF5.
PF6=NxtPart

Displays the Acknowledgment Overdue detail for the next partner on the file.

Field Decriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Field

Description

Field

Partner ID

A 35-character

User

alphanumeric field to
indicate the trading
Partner ID to use to
display Acknowledgment
Overdue Details.
Qual

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Qualifier for
the trading partner (if
applicable).

Relationship Mode
Description
A 15-character
alphanumeric
field to indicate the User ID
to use to display
Acknowledgment Overdue
Details.

Partner

A 15-character
alphanumeric field that
contains the Partner ID for
the trading partner (if
applicable).

Databank
A 1-character alphabetic field used to display partners from the Sterling Gentran:Basic
Acknowledgment Overdue file, the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue
file, or both. Valid values are:
G
R
blank

Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue file only
Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file only
Both Sterling Gentran:Basic and Sterling Gentran:Realtime
Acknowledgment Overdue files

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 93

The Databank Subsystem

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241

Status
A 1-character alphabetic field used to limit the records from the Acknowledgment
Overdue file that are displayed on the screen. Valid values are:
O
W
blank

Overdue status only
Waiting status only
Both Overdue and Waiting status

(Contact Information) Name (protected)
The 35-position alphanumeric field containing the trading partner's business name. This
name is found of the Partner Name and Address Record.
(Contact Information) Contact (protected)
A 30-position alphanumeric field containing the name of a personal contact at this trading
partner's office. This information comes from the partner name and address record.
(Contact Information) Phone (protected)
Four alphanumeric fields that contain the trading partner's telephone number (area code - 3
positions, number - 7 positions, and internal extension - 4 positions). This information
comes from the partner name and address record.
(Contact Information) Intl Dial Code (protected)
A 3-position numeric field that contains the trading partner's international dial code (must
be numeric). This information comes from the partner name and address record.
(Contact Information) E-mail (protected)
A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains the e-mail address for the trading partner.
This information comes from the partner name and address record.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field used to select a Partner Profile. The top line of the screen
lists the valid actions. To execute an action, type S in the A field of the Partner you want to
select, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Interchange Status screen for a particular Partner on
the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail screen, type S in the A field for the Envelope Ref
you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic "Function Key Descriptions" in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Acknowledgment Overdue Detail.
Type (protected)
A 1-character alphabetic field that identifies the type of information that is being
displayed. Valid values are:
I
G
T

4 - 94

Interchange
Group
Transaction

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Acknowledgment Overdue Detail Screen EDIM241

The Databank Subsystem

Envelope Ref (protected)
Displays the envelope reference identification for the Overdue/waiting record that is being
displayed. If Type is I then this field will display the Interchange Envelope Reference
Number. If Type is G then this field will display the Group Envelope Reference Number.
If Type is T then this field will contain the Transaction Envelope reference number.
Func ID/User Ref (protected)
Displays the functional identification for Group records or the User Reference field for the
Transaction records.
Sent Date (protected)
Displays the output date for the interchange. The date has the format MM/DD/YY.
Sent Time (protected)
Displays the output time for the interchange. The time has the format HH:MM.
Ack Expected Date (protected)
Displays the date that the acknowledgment was/is expected. The date has the format MM/
DD/YY.
Ack Expected Time (protected)
Displays the time that the acknowledgment was/is expected. The time has the format
HH:MM.
Dbk (protected)
Displays whether the Partner ID is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment
Overdue file or on the Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue file. Valid
values are:
G
R

Sterling Gentran:Basic Acknowledgment Overdue File
Sterling Gentran:Realtime Acknowledgment Overdue File

Status (protected)
Displays the acknowledgment status. Valid values are:
O
W

Overdue
Waiting

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 95

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound

EDIM271

Purpose
The Interchange Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for an
outbound interchange. This includes any available status information from communications and
the network that processed the interchange. This screen displays information differently depending
on the direction of the interchange. Therefore, the details for this screen have been split into two
subsections: one section of the screen is displayed for outbound interchanges and the second
section of the screen is displayed for inbound interchanges.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the
Interchange Status screen and pressing PF14.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status Detail (outbound) screen for both
Partner/Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM271 __________

INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL

Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1
Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - ABC COMPUTER COMPAN
Int. Env. Ref : 000000004
Databank Run#

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual :
Duplicate : No

: 00000001

Output . . . . : 06/01/2011
Acknowledged
:
Networked . . : 06/01/2011

12:00

I/O
Databank
DBK Retention Days
Acknowledge Status

: Outbound
: GENTRAN
:
: N

12:00
Group Count : 000001
Character Count : 000001744

Enter PF1=Help

4 - 96

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM271 __________

INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL

Int - User . . : YOUR-COMPANY
Name . . . . . :
Int. Env. Ref : 000000493
Databank Run#

: 00000051

Output . . . . : 06/01/2011
Acknowledged
:
Networked . . :

12:00

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner :VENDOR-1
Duplicate : No
Network
I/O
Databank
DBK Retention Days
Acknowledge Status
Network Status

:
:
:
:
:
:

Outbound
Gentran
N
N

Group Count : 000001
Character Count : 0000001748

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4 Interchg

Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected.

Sterling Gentran:Plus Installed
PF5 Comm

Transfers control to the Communications Maintenance Interchange Detail
screen if the Sterling Gentran:Plus product has been installed. This allows you
to view the interchange data on the actual CONNECT VSAM Queues, and
subsequently return to the Interchange Status Detail Screen.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 97

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271

Intchg Partner ID (Int – User) (protected)
A 1- to 35-character alphanumeric field displaying the interchange identification to which
this interchange is associated.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User
ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for
the Interchange ID (if applicable).
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Name (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the Interchange ID using Partner
Maintenance.
Int. Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange.
Duplicate (protected)
Indicates whether the interchange is a duplicate of a previously processed interchange.
Valid values are:
Yes
Yes, this is a duplicate interchange
No
No, this is not a duplicate interchange
Databank Run# (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the interchange by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the interchange was loaded.
Network (protected)
The name of the network that processed this interchange (if applicable), as specified in the
trading partner profile.
I/O (protected)
Displays whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound
Inbound documents only
Outbound
Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Output (Outbound only) (protected)
Displays the date and time the interchange was output from the translation system.
DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this interchange will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank

4 - 98

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271

The Databank Subsystem

Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the
EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1
(EDIM83B) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field
on the Outbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM864) screen will be used determine if
the interchange should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping
process.
Acknowledged (protected)
Displays the date and time acknowledgment reconciliation was performed against the
transaction.
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
I
Indeterminate
N
No acknowledgment processing
O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually Acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Networked (protected)
Displays the date and time that network reconciliation was performed against the
transaction.
Network Status (protected)
Displays the network status for the interchange. Valid values are:
E
Error on receive, sorting, or pickup
N
Network tracking not active
P
Picked Up
R
Received
S
Sorted (processed)
U
Manual network complete
W
Waiting
Group Count (protected)
Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange.
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters found within the interchange.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 99

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM271

COMMUNICATIONS FIELDS (displayed only if Sterling Gentran:Plus is installed)
Batch# (protected)
Displays the Batch Number assigned to the interchange by CONNECT. Refer to the IBM®
Sterling Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® User Guide for further information regarding this field.
VSAM Batch St (protected)
Displays the VSAM Batch Status of the interchange. Refer to the IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Plus® for z/OS® User Guide for further information regarding this field.
NETWORK ERROR INFORMATION FIELDS (displayed only if an error occurs)
Errors (protected)
Displays the number of errors the network encountered processing the interchange.
First Error (protected)
Provides network information about the first error encountered by the network for the
interchange.

4 - 100

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound

EDIM271

Purpose
The Interchange Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for an
inbound interchange.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the
Interchange Status screen and pressing PF14.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM271 __________

INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL

Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1
Name . . . . . :
Int. Env. Ref : 000000005
Databank Run#

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual :
Duplicate : Yes

: 00000006

I/O : Inbound

Loaded . . . . : 06/01/2011
Edited . . . . : 06/01/2011

12:00
12:00

Databank : Gentran
DBK Retention Days :
Acknowledge Status : N

Group Count : 000001
Character Count : 0000006330

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 101

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271

Relationship Mode
EDIM271 __________

INTERCHANGE STATUS DETAIL

Int - User . . : YOUR-COMPANY
Name . . . . . :
Int. Env. Ref : 000000005
Databank Run#

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner :VENDOR-1
Duplicate : No

: 00000041

I/O : Inbound

Loaded . . . . : 06/01/2011
Edited . . . . : 06/01/2011

12:00
12:00

Databank : Gentran
DBK Retention Days :
Acknowledge Status : N

Group Count : 000001
Character Count : 0000006330

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4 Interchg

Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 102

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271

The Databank Subsystem

Intchg Part ID (Int – User) (protected)
A 1- to 35-character alphanumeric field displaying the interchange identification to which
this interchange is associated.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User
ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for
the Interchange ID (if applicable).
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Name (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner
Maintenance.
Int. Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange.
Duplicate
Indicates whether the interchange is a duplicate of a previously processed interchange.
Valid values are:
Yes
Yes, this is a duplicate interchange
No
No, this is not a duplicate interchange
Databank Run# (protected)
Display the Databank Run number which was assigned to the interchange by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the interchange was loaded.
I/O
Displays whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound
Inbound documents only
Outbound
Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Loaded (Inbound only) (protected)
Displays the date and time the interchange was loaded to the translation system.
DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this interchange will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank
Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 103

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM271

EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1
(EDIM834) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on
the Inbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM865) screen will be used determine if the
interchange should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process.
Edited (Inbound only) (protected)
Display the date and time the interchange was processed by the inbound Editor.
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
I
Indeterminate
N
No acknowledgment processing
O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually Acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Group Count (protected)
Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange.
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters found within the interchange.

4 - 104

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Display Screen EDIM256

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Display Screen

EDIM256

Purpose
The Interchange Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for an interchange. The
Interchange Display screen is accessed from the Interchange Status screen. This screen is utilized
only if using message store.

How to Access
Access the Interchange Display screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the
Interchange Status screen and pressing PF2.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Interchange Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM256 __________

INTERCHANGE DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Intchg Part ID
Name . . . . .
Int. Env. Ref.
Stat - Network
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

:
:
:
:

VENDOR-1
TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
000000002
N
Ack : N

Qual :

Group Count : 000001
I/O : Outbound
Databank : Gentran
Search : ______________
*ZZ*STERLING SFW
*ZZ*XYZ COMPUTERS *030127

ISA*00*
*00*
*1458*?*00403*000000002*0*T*+;
GS*PO*STERLING*XYZ*20030127*1458*1*X*004030;
ST*850*000000001;
BEG*00*NE*PONUMBER-001**20010102;
DTM*010*19950105;
N1*BT*IBM INC.*1*987654321;
N3*4600 LAKEHURST COURT;
N4*COLUMBUS*OH*430170760;
PER*BD**TE*614-793-7000;
N1*VN*XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY*1*121212121;

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search

4 - 105

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Display Screen EDIM256

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM256 __________

INTERCHANGE DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Intchg - User .: YOUR COMPANY
Name . . . . . : YOUR COMPANY NAME
Int. Env. Ref. : 000000005
Stat - Network :
Ack : N
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

Partner : THEIR COMPANY
THEIR COMPANY NAME
Group Count : 000001
I/O : Inbound
Databank : Gentran
Search : ______________
*ZZ*5136666666
*ZZ*6147937000
*010105

ISA*00*
*00*
*1200*:*00403*000000005*0*P*>?
GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030?
ST*810*000070001?
BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001?
NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
NTE**
TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW?
NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?
NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.?
NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
REF*SL*124?

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Interchg

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Interchange Display screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Segment Display
screen for the segment
selected.

Associated
with this screen Do this ...
action ...
Select
Type S in the A field next to the
desired segment and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Interchg

Displays the Interchange Status screen for the Interchange ID selected.

PF5=Seg

The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the
interchange data displayed.

PF6=Search

The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to
search for the specified value in the EDI data records.

Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0

4 - 106

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Display Screen EDIM256

The Databank Subsystem

Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway
searches of large interchanges. When the search fails to
find the search criteria within the specified number of
segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED
MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Interchange ID (Int – User) (protected)
Displays the 35-character alphanumeric interchange identification associated with the
interchange.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User
ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for
the Interchange ID (if applicable).
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Name (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner
Maintenance.
Int. Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange.
Group Count (protected)
Displays the number of functional groups within the interchange.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 107

The Databank Subsystem

Interchange Display Screen EDIM256

Status – Network (protected)
Displays the current network status for the interchange. Valid values are:
E
N
P
R
S
U
W

Errors were encountered during network processing
As defined by the partner profile that was used to process this
interchange, network tracking was not performed for this interchange.
Partner has picked up the interchange
Network has received the interchange
Network has sorted (processed) the interchange
User has manually set to a network completed status
Interchange is waiting for a response from the Network

Status – Ack (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the interchange. Valid values are:
A
E
I
N
O
P
R
U
W
+
7
8

Accepted
Accepted with errors
Indeterminate
Not required
Overdue acknowledgment
Partial acceptance
Rejected
Manually acknowledged
Waiting acknowledgment
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
Received (EDIFACT only)

I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the interchange is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Realtime

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

Search
A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list
of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record.
Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0
Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway
searches of large interchanges. When the search fails to
find the search criteria within the specified number of
segments, the system displays the message: EXCEEDED

4 - 108

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Interchange Display Screen EDIM256

The Databank Subsystem

MAX SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in
which the action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment,
type S in the A field for the segment you want to view, and then press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Interchange Display screen.
EDI Interchange Data (protected)
Displays up to 11 lines of interchange data, one segment per line. Segments greater than
76 characters are continued on the next display line. You may scroll backward and forward
through the segments within the interchange using the PF7 and PF8 keys.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 109

The Databank Subsystem

Group Display Screen EDIM257

Group Display Screen

EDIM257

Purpose
The Group Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for a functional group. The Group
Display screen is accessed from the Group Status screen. This screen is utilized only if using
message store.

How to Access
Access the Group Display screen by typing S to select the desired interchange on the Group Status
screen and pressing PF2.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Group Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM257 __________

GROUP DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Intchg Part ID : VENDOR-1
Qual :
Name . . . . . : TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
Int. Env. Ref : 000000005
Group Part ID. : VENDOR-1
Qual :
Group Env. Ref : 000000007
Transaction Count : 000006
Ack Status . . : A
Transactions Accepted :
Search . . . . : ______________
I/O : Inbound
A
Databank : Gentran
_ GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030?
_ ST*810*000070001?
_ BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001?
_ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
_ NTE**
TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW?
_ NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?
_ NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.?
_ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
_ REF*SL*124?
Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

4 - 110

PF3=Exit PF4=Group

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Display Screen EDIM257

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM257 __________

GROUP DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Intchg - User. : YOUR COMPANY
Partner : THEIR COMPANY
Name . . . . . : YOUR COMPANY NAME
THEIR COMPANY NAME
Int. Env. Ref : 000000005
Group - User
: YOUR COMPANY
Partner : THEIR COMPANY
Group Env. Ref : 000000007
Transaction Count : 000006
Ack Status . . : A
Transactions Accepted :
Search . . . . : ______________
I/O : Inbound
A
Databank : Gentran
_ GS*IN*121212121*987654321*20010105*1200*7*X*004030?
_ ST*810*000070001?
_ BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001?
_ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
_ NTE**
TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW?
_ NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?
_ NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.?
_ NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
_ REF*SL*124?
Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Group

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Group Display screen. The following table
describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Segment
Display screen for the
segment selected.

Associated
with this screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the desired
segment and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Group

Displays the Group Display screen.

PF5=Seg

The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the
group data displayed.

PF6=Search

The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to
search for the specified value in the EDI data records.

Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0
Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 111

The Databank Subsystem

Group Display Screen EDIM257
searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the
search criteria within the specified number of segments,
the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX
SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Interchange ID (Int – User) (protected)
Displays the 35-character alphanumeric interchange identification associated with the
interchange.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Interchange ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User
ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the
Interchange ID (if applicable).
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 4-character Qualifier field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character Partner ID
field (Relationship mode).
Name (protected)
Displays the description that was defined for the interchange identification using Partner
Maintenance.
Int. Env. Ref (protected)
Provides the interchange envelope reference identification for the interchange.
Group ID (Group – User) (protected)
Displays the group (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode) identification
associated with the group.

4 - 112

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Group Display Screen EDIM257

The Databank Subsystem

Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 1- to 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for
the Group ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship
mode).
Group Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the group envelope reference identification for the group.
Transaction Count (protected)
Displays the number of transactions within the group.
Ack Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the group. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Search
A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list
of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record.
Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0
Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway
searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the
search criteria within the specified number of segments,
the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX
SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.
Transactions Accepted (protected)
Displays the number of transaction sets which were accepted according to Accepted
functional acknowledgment processing.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the group is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 113

The Databank Subsystem

Group Display Screen EDIM257

Databank (protected)
Displays whether the interchange is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment,
type S in the A field for the segment you want to view, and then press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Group Display screen.
EDI Group Data (protected)
Displays up to 9 lines of group data, one segment per line. Segments greater than 76
characters are continued on the next display line. You may scroll backward and forward
through the segments within the group using the PF7 and PF8 keys.

4 - 114

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound

EDIM258

Purpose
The Transaction Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for a single
transaction on the databank. This screen displays information differently depending on the
direction of the transaction. Therefore, the details for this screen have been split into two
subsections: one section of the screen is displayed for outbound transactions and the second
section of the screen is displayed for inbound transactions.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Status Detail screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF5.

•

Press PF14 on the Transaction Display screen.

•

Press PF5 on the Document Status Detail screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status Detail (outbound) screen for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM258 __________

TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL

Transaction ID :
Trans. Env Ref :
Transaction Set:
User Reference :

VENDOR-1
000000199
850
PONUMBER-001

Orig. DB Run # :
Last DB Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Mapped . . . . :
Edited . . . . :
Output . . . . :
Acknowledged
:

00000005
00000007
OE00000009
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Division: 000

Network:
I/O: Outbound
Databank: GENTRAN
Acknowledge Status: N
12:00
12:00
12:00
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Enter PF1=Help

XXX

Character Count: 0000001563
Test/Prod: Test

PF2=Data

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Doc

4 - 115

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258

Relationship Mode
EDIM258 __________

TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL

Trans - User
:
Trans. Env Ref :
Transaction Set:
User Reference :

YOUR-COMPANY
000000001
819
0087

Orig. DB Run # :
Last DB Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Mapped . . . . :
Edited . . . . :
Output . . . . :
Acknowledged
:

00000060
00000060
OE00000159
Y
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
00/00/0000

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Enter PF1=Help

PF2=Data

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner: VENDOR-1
Division: 000

Network:
I/O: Outbound
Databank: GENTRAN
Acknowledge Status: N
12:00
12:00
00:00

DBK Retention Days:
Character Count: 0000000222
Test/Prod: Prod

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

PF5=Doc

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Transfers to the Databank Transaction Display (EDIM259). The EDI
segments for the current transaction are displayed.

PF4=Trans

Returns to the Transaction Status screen.

PF5=Doc

Switches to the Document Status Detail screen for the transaction being
viewed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 116

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258

The Databank Subsystem

Trans – Part ID (Trans – User) (protected)
Displays the 35-character alphanumeric Transaction ID associated with the transaction.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a 1to 35-character Transaction ID field (Partner/Qualifier mode) or a 1- to 15-character User
ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the
Transaction ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship
mode).
Trans. Env Ref (protected)
Displays a 14-character alphanumeric reference number from the transaction's envelope.
Transaction Set (protected)
Displays the EDI set identifier for the transaction.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the
transaction being displayed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on
division access.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the transaction.
See the topic “User Reference” in this chapter for more information.
Orig DB Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used
to identify the run that processed the transaction.
Network (protected)
Displays the network as defined on the Partner ID that was used to process this
transaction.
Last DB Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic the last time the data was processed.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 117

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258

Reference Tag (protected)
Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction.
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Reported Status (protected)
Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound transactions. This value
indicates whether EDI Databank Inquiry report (EDID550) was run. Valid values are:
Y
Reported
N
Not reported
Space
Not reported
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Mapped (protected)
Displays the date and time the transaction was last mapped. The format is MM/DD/
YYYY HH:MM.
Edited (protected)
Displays the date and time the transaction was last processed by the Editor. The format is
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Output (protected)
Displays the date and time the transaction was last output. This date and time may be set
by either the outbound Editor or the Outbound Extract program. The format is
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Acknowledged (protected)
Displays the date and time acknowledgment reconciliation was performed against the
transaction.

4 - 118

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Outbound EDIM258

The Databank Subsystem

DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this transaction will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank
Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the
EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1
(EDIM83B) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field
on the Outbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM864) screen will be used determine if
the transaction should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping
process.
Update (protected)
Displays the last online update action which was performed against the transaction. Valid
values are:
Delete
has been marked for deletion
Acknowledged
has been manually acknowledged
Bypassed
has been bypassed
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters in the transaction.
Update User ID (protected)
Displays the three initials of the User ID that performed the update.
Test/Prod (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner
profile that was used to process the transaction. For outbound documents this value is used
to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 119

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound

EDIM258

Purpose
The Transaction Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for a
transaction on the databank.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Status Detail screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF5.

•

Press PF14 on the Transaction Display screen.

•

Press PF5 on the Document Status Detail screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM258 __________

TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL

Transaction ID :
Trans. Env Ref :
Transaction Set:
User Reference :

VENDOR
000070001
810
INV01

Orig. DB Run # :
Last DB Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Loaded . . . . :
Edited . . . . :

00000005
00000005
IE00000162
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

4 - 120

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Division: 000

12:00
12:00

I/O:
Databank:
Acknowledge Status:
Sequence Status:
Envelope Status:
Compliance Status:
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data

XXX

Inbound
GENTRAN
N
00
00
00

Character Count: 0000001011
Test/Prod:
Envelope: Prod
PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

PF5=Doc

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM258 __________

TRANSACTION STATUS DETAIL

Trans - User
:
Trans. Env Ref :
Transaction Set:
User Reference :

YOUR-COMPANY
000070001
810
INV01

Orig. DB Run # :
Last DB Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Loaded . . . . :
Edited . . . . :

00000041
00000041
IE00000169
Y
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

12:00
12:00

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner: VENDOR-1
Division: 000

I/O:
Databank:
Acknowledge Status:
Sequence Status:
Envelope Status:
Compliance Status:
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data

XXX

Inbound
GENTRAN
A
00
00
00

Character Count: 0000001011
Test/Prod: Test
Envelope: Prod
PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

PF5=Doc

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Transfers to the Databank Transaction Display (EDIM259). The EDI
segments for the current transaction are displayed.

PF4=Trans

Returns to the Transaction Status screen.

PF5=Doc

Switches to the Document Status Detail screen for the transaction being
viewed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 121

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258

Transaction ID (Trans – User) (protected)
Displays the 35-character alphanumeric Transaction ID associated with the transaction.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a
35-character User ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the
Transaction ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship
mode).
Trans. Env Ref (protected)
Displays a 14-alphanumeric reference number from the transaction's envelope.
Transaction Set (protected)
Displays the EDI set identifier for the transaction.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the
transaction being displayed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on
division access.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the transaction, depending on whether the transaction is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the transaction.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Orig. DB Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used
to identify the run that processed the transaction.
Last DB Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic the last time the data was processed.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Reference Tag (protected)
Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the transaction.

4 - 122

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258

The Databank Subsystem

Databank (protected)
Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Reported Status (protected)
Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound transactions. This value
indicates whether EDI Databank Inquiry report (EDID550) was run. Valid values are:
Y
Reported
N
Not reported
Space
Not reported
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
E
Accepted with errors
N
Not required
R
Rejected
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Loaded (protected)
Displays the date and time the transaction was loaded onto the databank. The format is
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Sequence Status (protected)
Displays the functional group Envelope Reference ID error checking indicator. Valid
values are:
00
No errors
04
Sequence errors detected
Edited (protected)
Displays the date and time the transaction was last processed by the Editor. The format is
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Envelope Status (protected)
Displays the highest validation error the inbound Editor encountered while processing the
envelopes. Valid values are:
00
No errors were encountered in the document.
04
One or more errors (other than authorization and sequence errors)
were encountered in processing the Transmission Envelope, or one or
more errors (other than unknown user or unknown partner) were
encountered in processing the Functional Group Envelope.
08
No Partner/Qualifier or User/Partner was found corresponding to the
sender/receiver codes contained in the Functional Group, or the
segment count contained in the Transaction Set Trailer was found to
be in error.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 123

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM258

Compliance Status (protected)
Displays the highest validation error the inbound Editor encountered while processing the
documents.
00
No errors were encountered in the document.
04
One or more element errors were detected.
08
One or more missing or misplaced segments were encountered.
12
The transaction set was incomplete.
DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this transaction will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank
Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the
EDI Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Global Parameter Override Maint-1
(EDIM834) screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on
the Inbound EDI Databank Maintenance (EDIM865) screen will be used determine if the
transaction should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process.
Update (protected)
Displays the last online update action which was performed against the transaction. Valid
values are:
M
Manually Acknowledged
D
Marked for delete
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters in the transaction.
Update User ID (protected)
Displays the initials of the User ID that performed the update.
Test/Prod (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner
profile that was used to process the transaction. For outbound documents this value is used
to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope.
Envelope (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is determined, if possible,
from the Interchange envelope for this transaction. Otherwise, this is set from the partner
profile.

4 - 124

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Display Screen EDIM259

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Display Screen

EDIM259

Purpose
The Transaction Display screen is used to view the actual EDI data for a transaction.

How to Access
Access the Transaction Display screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type S to select the desired transaction on the Transaction Status screen and press PF2.

•

Press PF2 in the Transaction Status Detail screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Transaction Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM259 __________

Group ID .
Group Name
Group Env.
Trans. Set
Trans. Env
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

. .
. .
Ref
. .
Ref

:
:
:
:
:

TRANSACTION DISPLAY

VENDOR-1
TUTORIAL - XYZ COMPUTER COMPAN
000000001
850
000000001

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual :

Ack Status
I/O
Databank
Search

:
:
:
:

W
Outbound
Gentran
______________

ST*850*000000001;
BEG*00*NE*PONUMBER-001**20010102;
DTM*010*19950105;
N1*BT*IBM INC.*1*987654321;
N3*4600 LAKEHURST COURT;
N4*COLUMBUS*OH*430170760;
PER*BD**TE*614-793-7000;
N1*VN*XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY*1*121212121;
N3*1212 E. MAIN ST.;
N4*CINCINATTI*OH*430159876;

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search
PF14=Dtl

4 - 125

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Display Screen EDIM259

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM259 __________

Group - User
Group Name . .
Group Env. Ref
Trans. Set . .
Trans. Env Ref
A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

:
:
:
:
:

TRANSACTION DISPLAY

YOUR COMPANY
YOUR COMPANY NAME
000000007
810
000070001

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner : THEIR COMPANY
THEIR COMPANY NAME
Ack Status
I/O
Databank
Search

:
:
:
:

A
Inbound
Gentran
______________

ST*810*000070001?
BIG*20010105*INV01*20010103*PONUMBER-001?
NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
NTE**
TERMS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW?
NTE** DISCOUNT WILL NOT BE APPLIED UNLESS INVOICE IS PAID?
NTE** IN FULL BY THE DISCOUNT DUE DATE.?
NTE**-------------------------------------------------------?
REF*SL*124?
REF*DP*00547?
REF*BC*CONTRACT42?

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

PF5=Seg

PF6=Search
PF14=Dtl

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Transaction Display screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Segment Display screen
for the segment selected

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the
desired segment and press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Display screen.

PF5=Seg

The Segment function key is used to select an EDI data segment from the
transaction data displayed.

PF6=Search

The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to
search for the specified value in the EDI data records.

Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0
Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway
searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the

4 - 126

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Transaction Display Screen EDIM259

The Databank Subsystem

search criteria within the specified number of segments,
the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX
SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.
PF14=Dtl

Displays the Transaction Status Detail screen for the transaction displayed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Group ID (Group – User) (protected)
Displays the 35-character alphanumeric identification for the group associated with the
transaction.
Based on the trading profile mode defined in Sterling Gentran:Basic, this field may be a
35-character User ID field (Relationship mode).
Qual (Partner) (protected)
A 15-character alphanumeric field which indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the
Group ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
Group Name (protected)
Displays the group identification defined using Partner Maintenance.
Group Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the group envelope reference identification for the group associated with the
transaction.
Trans. Set (protected)
Displays the EDI set identification for the transaction.
Ack Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the transaction. Valid values are:
A
E
I
N

Accepted
Accepted with errors
Indeterminate
Not required

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 127

The Databank Subsystem

Transaction Display Screen EDIM259

O
Overdue acknowledgment
P
Partial acceptance
R
Rejected
U
Manually acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
4
Rejected (EDIFACT only)
7
Acknowledged (EDIFACT only)
8
Received (EDIFACT only)
Trans. Env. Ref (protected)
Displays the transaction envelope reference identification for the transaction.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the transaction is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the transaction is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Realtime

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

Search
A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list
of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record.
Note: The number of segments searched is limited by the Log
Max Search value that is defined on the Record Type 0
Configuration record. This is to prevent runaway
searches of large groups. When the search fails to find the
search criteria within the specified number of segments,
the system displays the message: EXCEEDED MAX
SEARCH COUNT – PRESS PF6 TO CONTINUE
SEARCH. You can press PF6 to continue the search;
otherwise it stops.
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry in
which that action is entered. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute
the action, type the letter next to the selected segment, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Segment Display screen for a particular segment,
type S in the A field for the segment you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions you can perform for the Transaction Display screen.
EDI Transaction Data (protected)
Displays up to ten lines of transaction data, one segment per line. Segments greater than
76 characters are continued on the next display line. You can scroll backward and forward
through the segments within the transaction using the PF7 and PF8 keys.

4 - 128

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Display Screen EDIM260

The Databank Subsystem

Segment Display Screen

EDIM260

Purpose
The Segment Display screen views a segment selected from the Interchange, Group, or
Transaction Display screen.

How to Access
Access the Segment Display screen in any of these three ways:
•

Type S to select the desired segment from the Interchange Display screen and press PF5.

•

Type S to select the desired segment from the Group Display screen and press PF5.

•

Type S to select the desired segment from the Transaction Display screen and press PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Segment Display screen for character mode.
Select
EDIM260 __________

SEGMENT DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

I/O . . . . . . . . . . . : Outbound
Databank . . . . . : Gentran
Version ID. . . . . . . . : 004030______ Agency . . . . . . : X__
Transaction ID. . . . . . : 850
Rel. . . . . . . . :
Segment ID. . . . . . . . : N1_
Segment Version. . : 00
Ele Sub Rep
A Seq Ele Nbr
Description
Element Data
_ 001 000
ENTITY IDENTIFIER CODE
VN
_ 002 000
NAME
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
_ 003 000
IDENTIFICATION CODE QUALIFIE 1
_ 004 000
IDENTIFICATION CODE
121212121
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
END OF ELEMENTS
Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex
PF3=Exit PF4=Trans
PF5=Ele Def
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 129

The Databank Subsystem

Segment Display Screen EDIM260

The following example illustrates the Segment Display screen for hexadecimal mode.
Select
EDIM260 __________

I/O . . . .
Version ID.
Transaction
Segment ID.
Ele Sub
A Seq Ele
_ 001 000

. . .
. . .
ID. .
. . .
Rep
Nbr

.
.
.
.

SEGMENT DISPLAY

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

:
:
:
:

Outbound
004030______
850
N1_

XXX

Databank . . . .
Agency . . . . .
Rel. . . . . . .
Segment Version.

.
.
.
.

: Gentran
: X__
:
: 00

Description
ENTITY IDENTIFIER CODE

Element Data
VN
ED
55
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
EEE4CDDDEECD4CDDDCDE
78903647435903647158

_

002

000

NAME

_

003

000

IDENTIFICATION CODE QUALIFIE 1
F
1

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Trans

06/01/2011
12:00:00

PF5=Ele Def

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Segment Display screen. The following
table describes each screen function and gives instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Data Element
Display screen for the data
element selected

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the
element for which you want to view,
and then press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Hex

Displays the element data in hexadecimal mode.

PF2=Chars

Displays the element data in character mode.
Note: The value for the PF2 key changes based on the current
display mode.

4 - 130

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Segment Display Screen EDIM260
PF4=Interchg

Displays the Interchange Display screen.

PF4=Group

Displays the Group Display screen.

PF4=Trans

Displays the Transaction Display screen.

The Databank Subsystem

Note: The value for the PF4 key changes, based on the screen
from which you navigated to the Segment Display
screen.
PF5=Ele Def

The Element Definition function key is used to select an EDI data element
from the segment data displayed and view the element on the Element
Display screen.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
I/O (protected)
An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates direction of data being displayed. Valid values
are:
Inbound Inbound document
Outbound Outbound document
Databank (protected)
An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates in which databank data are stored. Valid
values are:
Gentran
Realtime

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

Version ID
A 12-position alphanumeric field used to identify the standard version associated with the
segment being displayed.
Agency
A 3-position alphabetic field used to locate the agency associated with the Version ID.
Transaction ID (protected)
Displays the EDI set identification for the transaction.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 131

The Databank Subsystem

Segment Display Screen EDIM260

Rel (ANA TRADACOMS version only)
A 1-position numeric field that indicates the release number for the Transaction ID.
Segment ID
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to locate a segment identifier.
Segment Version
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this segment.
This field initially displays using a default segment version of zero; however, you can type
a version to display new segment version information on the screen.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select an element. Type S next to the selected
Element, and then press PF5 to display the Data Element Display.
Ele Seq (protected)
A 3-position numeric field that displays the element sequence number of the data element
within the segment.
Sub Ele (protected)
A 3-position numeric field that displays the sub-element sequence number if the data
element is part of a group element.
Rep Nbr (protected)
A 3-position numeric field displaying the repeat number for a data element.
Description (protected)
A 28-position alphabetic field that contains the element description from the dictionary
file.
Element Data (protected)
A 31-position alphanumeric field that contains the first 31 characters of the data element
within the segment as found in the EDI databank. Use the PF2 key to toggle between the
character and hexadecimal display modes.

4 - 132

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Element Display Screen EDIM261

The Databank Subsystem

Data Element Display Screen

EDIM261

Purpose
The Data Element Display screen is used to view a data element selected from a segment.

How to Access
Access the Data Element Display screen by typing S to select the desired element on the Segment
Display screen and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Data Element Display screen for character mode.
EDIM261 __________

I/O . . . . . . . . .
Version ID. . . . . .
Element ID. . . . . .
Description . . . . .
Repeating Occurrence.

DATA ELEMENT DISPLAY

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

:
:
:
:
:

Outbound
004030
93
NAME

Minimum Length. . . . . . : 001

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Databank . . . . . : Gentran
Agency . . . . . . : X
Element Version. . : 00
Element Type . . . : AN
Maximum Length . . : 00060

Composite Code Definition :
Element Data. . . . . . . : XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Hex

PF3=Exit PF4=Seg

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 133

The Databank Subsystem

Data Element Display Screen EDIM261

The following example illustrates the Data Element Display screen for hexadecimal mode.
EDIM261 __________

I/O . . . . . . . . .
Version ID. . . . . .
Element ID. . . . . .
Description . . . . .
Repeating Occurrence.

DATA ELEMENT DISPLAY

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

:
:
:
:
:

Outbound
004030
93
NAME

Minimum Length. . . . . . : 001

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Databank . . . . . : Gentran
Agency . . . . . . : X
Element Version. . : 00
Element Type . . . : AN
Maximum Length . . : 00060

Composite Code Definition :
Element Data. . . . . . . : XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY
EEE4CDDDEECD4CDDDCDE
78903647435903647158

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Chars

PF3=Exit PF4=Seg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Hex

Displays the element data in hexadecimal mode.

PF2=Chars

Displays the element data in character mode.
Note: The value for the PF2 key changes based on the current
display mode.

PF4=Seg

The Segment function key is used to return to the Segment Display screen.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 134

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Data Element Display Screen EDIM261

The Databank Subsystem

I/O (protected)
An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates direction of data being displayed. Valid values
are:
Inbound Inbound document
Outbound Outbound document
Databank (protected)
An 8-position alphabetic field that indicates in which databank data are stored. Valid
values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Version ID (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the standard version associated with the
element being displayed.
Agency (protected)
A 3-position alphabetic field that contains the agency associated with the Version ID.
Element ID (protected)
A 12-position alphanumeric field that identifies the data element ID as defined by the
standard.
Element Version (protected)
A 2-position numeric field that indicates the version number associated with this element.
Description (protected)
A 50-position alphanumeric field that contains the element description from the dictionary
file.
Repeating Occurrence (protected)
This field indicates the occurrence of a repeating data element for elements with a repeat
value greater than 1.
Element Type (protected)
A 2-position alphanumeric field that specifies the editing format of the data contained in
this data element.
Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for Sterling
Gentran:Structure only include:
CM
CY
DD
JD
J8
MM
PD
PJ
PM

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Date format = MMDDYYYY
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Date format = DDMMYY
Date format = Julian YYDDD
Date format = Julian YYYYDDD
Date format = MMDDYY
Date format = Packed DDMMYY
Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD
Date format = Packed MMDDYY

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 135

The Databank Subsystem

Data Element Display Screen EDIM261

PY
= Date format = Packed YYMMDD
Pn
= Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions
Sn
= Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions
YY
= Date format = YYMMDD
ZD
= Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY
ZJ
= Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD
ZM
= Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY
ZY
= Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD
Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include:
AN
CD
DT
D8
FS
ID
Nn
R
Rn

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

string type – alphanumeric
Date format = DDMMYYYY
Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Fixed string – alphanumeric – pad with spaces
Identifier type – element has code list
Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied
Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point
Decimal where n indicates the maximum number of decimal
positions
TM
= Time format = HHMM
T6
= Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds
T8
= Time format = HHMMSSHS, where HS = hundredths of a second
Minimum Length (protected)
Displays the minimum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
Maximum Length (protected)
Displays the maximum allowed length for the element as defined by the standard.
Composite Code Definition (protected)
Displays the composite code layout for codes if available.
Element Data (protected)
A 100-position alphanumeric field that contains the first 100 characters of the data
element as found in the EDI databank. Use the PF2 key to toggle between the character
and hexadecimal display modes.

4 - 136

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound

EDIM265

Purpose
The Document Status Detail screen displays detailed status and control information for a single
document. This screen displays information differently, depending on the document. Therefore,
the details for this screen have been split into two subsections: one section of the screen is
displayed for outbound documents and the second section of the screen is displayed for inbound
documents.

How to Access
Access the Document Status Detail screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF5.

•

On the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Document Status Detail (outbound) screen for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM265 __________

DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL

Partner ID . . : VENDOR – 1
Appl. Data ID : POVFILE
User Reference : PONUMBER-001
Orig. BD Run # :
Databank Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Loaded . . . . :
Mapped . . . . :

00000001
00000001
IA00000002
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

12:00
12:00

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Division: 000

Network:
I/O:
Databank:
Acknowledge Status:
Mapping Status:
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Outbound
GENTRAN
N
00

Test/Prod: Prod
User Dup. Ind.:
Character Count: 000001600

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF5=Trans

4 - 137

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265

Relationship Mode
EDIM265 __________

DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL

User . . . . . : YOUR-COMPANY
Appl. Data ID : POFILE
User Reference : PONUMBER-001
Orig. DB Run # :
Databank Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Loaded . . . . :
Mapped . . . . :

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner: VENDOR-1
Division: 000

00000011
00000032
OA00000033
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

XXX

Network:
I/O: Outbound
Databank: GENTRAN
Mapping Status: 00
12:00
12:00

DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID : XXX

Test/Prod: Prod
User Dup. Ind.: Y

Character Count: 000005000
Enter PF1=Help

PF2=Data

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

PF5=Trans

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Transfers to the Databank Document Display (EDIM264). The application
records for the current document are displayed.

PF4=Doc

Returns to the Document Status screen.

PF5=Trans

Switches to the Transaction Status Detail screen for the document. From the
Transaction Status Detail screen you can view EDI related status and control
information for the document.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 138

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265

The Databank Subsystem

Partner ID (User) (protected)
Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode)
associated with the document.
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier
mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
Appl. Data ID (protected)
A 12-character alphanumeric field that identifies application data.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile used to process the document
displayed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 3 for more information on
division access.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Orig BD Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used
to identify the run that processed the transaction.
Network (protected)
Displays the network as defined on the Partner ID that was used to process this document.
Databank Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the document was last processed. The Databank Run number is
used to identify the run that processed the document.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Reference Tag (protected)
Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the document.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 139

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265

Databank (protected)
Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Reported Status (protected)
Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound documents. This value
indicates whether Application Databank Inquiry report (EDID551) was run. Valid values
are:
Y
Reported
N
Not reported
Space
Not reported
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the document. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
I
Indeterminate
N
Not required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
R
Rejected
U
Manually Acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
Loaded (protected)
Displays the date and time the document was loaded on to the databank. The format is
MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Mapping Status (protected)
Displays the current Mapping Status for the document.
00

No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the
document.
One or more requirement or relational condition errors were detected.
One or more unknown or unexpected segment errors were detected.
An inbound document could not be translated.

04
08
12
Mapped (protected)
Displays the date and time the document was last mapped. The format is MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM.

DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this document will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank
Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the
Databank Retention Days field on the Outbound Mapper-1 Path Maintenance (EDIM83D)
screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Loaded field on the
Outbound Application Databank Maintenance (EDIM863) screen will be used determine

4 - 140

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Detail Screen – Outbound EDIM265

The Databank Subsystem

if the document should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping
process.
Update (protected)
Displays the last online update action which was performed against the document.
D
Deleted
E
Edited
R
Reset (for reprocessing)
Test/Prod (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the document. This value is defined in the partner
profile that was used to process the document. For outbound documents this value is used
to create the test indicator in the interchange control envelope.
Update User ID (protected)
Displays the three initials of the user which performed the update.
User Dup. Ind (protected)
Identifies whether this document is a duplicate of a document already on the databank.
The duplicate check is based on the Partner and User Reference values.
N
No, is not a duplicate
Y
Yes, is a duplicate
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters in the document.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 141

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound

EDIM265

Purpose
The Document Status Detail screen is used to view detailed status and control information for a
document on the databank.

How to Access
Access the Document Status Detail screen in either of these two ways:
•

Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF5.

•

On the Transaction Status Detail screen, press PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Document Status Detail (inbound) screen for both Partner/
Qualifier and Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM265 __________

DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL

Partner ID . . : VENDOR-1
Appl. Data ID : INVFILE
User Reference : INV01
Orig. BD Run # :
Databank Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Edited . . . . :
Mapped . . . . :
Output . . . . :

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual:
Division: 000

00000015
00000015
IA00000031
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

12:00
12:00
12:00

I/O:
Databank:
Acknowledge Status:
Mapping Status:
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Inbound
GENTRAN
N
04

Test/Prod: Prod
Envelope: Prod
User Dup. Ind.: Y
Character Count: 000001440

Enter PF1=Help PF2=Data

4 - 142

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

PF5=Trans

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265

The Databank Subsystem

Relationship Mode
EDIM265 __________

DOCUMENT STATUS DETAIL

User . . . . . : YOUR-COMPANY
Appl. Data ID : INVFILE
User Reference : INV01
Orig. DB Run # :
Databank Run # :
Reference Tag :
Reported Status:
Edited . . . . :
Mapped . . . . :
Output . . . . :

00000046
00000046
IA00000021
06/01/2011
06/01/2011
06/01/2011

12:00
12:00
12:00

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner: VENDOR-1
Division: 000

I/O:
Databank:
Acknowledge Status:
Mapping Status:
DBK Retention Days:

Update . . . . :
Update User ID :

Inbound
GENTRAN
A
00

Test/Prod: Test
Envelope: Prod
User Dup. Ind.: Y
Character Count: 000001600

Enter PF1=Help

PF2=Data

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

PF5=Trans

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF2=Data

Transfers to the Databank Document Display (EDIM264). The application
records for the current document are displayed.

PF4=Doc

Returns to the Document Status screen.

PF5=Trans

Switches to the Transaction Status Detail screen for the document being
viewed.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 143

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265

Partner ID (User) (protected)
Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode)
associated with the document.
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier
mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
Appl. Data ID (protected)
A 12-character alphanumeric field that displays identification for the application data.
Division (protected)
Displays the division defined to the partner profile which was used to process the
document displayed.
See the topic “User ID Maintenance Screen” in Chapter 5 for more information on
division access.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Orig BD Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the transaction by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the transaction was loaded. The Databank Run number is used
to identify the run that processed the transaction.
Databank Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling
Gentran:Basic, at the time the document was last processed. The Databank Run number is
used to identify the run that processed the document.
Reference Tag (protected)
Displays the Reference Tag Sterling Gentran:Basic has assigned to the document.I/O
This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Reported Status (protected)
Displays the reported status value for inbound or outbound documents. This value
indicates whether Application Databank Inquiry report (EDID551) was run. Valid values
are:
Y
Reported
N
Not reported
Space (Blank)
Not reported

4 - 144

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265

The Databank Subsystem

Databank (protected)
Displays whether the document is on the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or on the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Edited (protected)
Displays the date and time the document was processed by the Inbound Editor.
Acknowledge Status (protected)
Displays the current acknowledgment status for the document. Valid values are:
A
Accepted
I
Indeterminate
N
Not Required
O
Overdue acknowledgment
R
Rejected
U
Manually Acknowledged
W
Waiting acknowledgment
Mapped (protected)
Displays the date and time the document was last mapped.
Mapping Status (protected)
Displays the status that resulted from the inbound Mapper for the document. Valid values
are:
00

No errors were encountered during the mapping process for the
document.
One or more requirement or relational condition errors were detected.
One or more unknown or unexpected segment errors were detected.
An inbound document could not be translated.

04
08
12
DBK Retention Days
Used by Sterling Gentran:Realtime only.
A 3-digit numeric field used to indicate the number of days this document will remain on
the Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank before being deleted during the Databank
Maintenance Housekeeping process. This field will be populated only if you are using the
Databank Retention Days field on the Inbound Mapper-2 Path Maintenance (EDIM84K)
screen. If the value in this field is spaces, the Retention Days Processed field on the
Inbound Application Databank Maintenance (EDIM866) screen will be used determine if
the document should be deleted during the Databank Maintenance Housekeeping process.
Output (protected)
Displays the date and time the document was extracted or written to the application file
from the inbound application databank for processing by the user application.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 145

The Databank Subsystem

Document Status Detail Screen—Inbound EDIM265

Update (protected)
Displays the last online update action which was performed against the document. Valid
values are:
D
Deleted
E
Edited
R
Reset for reprocessing
Test/Prod (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is defined in the partner
profile that was used to process the transaction.
Update User ID (protected)
Displays the initials of the user that performed the update.
Envelope (protected)
Displays the test/production status of the transaction. This value is determined from the
interchange envelope that was received with the transaction from your trading partner.
User Dup. Ind (protected)
Identifies whether this document is a duplicate of a document already on the databank.
The duplicate check is based on the Partner and User Reference values. Valid values are:
N
No, is not a duplicate
Y
Yes, is a duplicate
Character Count (protected)
Displays the number of characters in the document.

4 - 146

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Display Screen EDIM264

The Databank Subsystem

Document Display Screen

EDIM264

Purpose
The Document Display screen is used to view the data detail for all records for a document. The
first 75 characters of data for each record are displayed.

How to Access
Access the Document Display screen in either of the following two ways:
•

Type S to select the desired document from the Document Status screen and press PF2.

•

In the Document Status Detail screen, press PF2.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Document Display screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
Select
EDIM264 __________

DOCUMENT DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner ID . . :
Qual :
Name . . . . . :
User Reference : PONUMBER-002
I/O . . . . . : Outbound
Databank : Gentran
Search : ______________
A Record
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002003010295IBM
INC.
4600 LAKEHURST COURT
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002002010295IBM
INC.
4600 LAKEHURST COURT
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0020050000500EACH0129999CAT-286-12-20 286/12MHZ/20 MEG
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0020050000400EACH0109999CAT-286-10-10 286/10MHZ/10 MEG
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-002008000002
_
_
_
_
_
_
END OF RECORDS FOR DOCUMENT
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit PF4=Doc
PF5=Record
PF6=Search
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd
PF14=Dtl

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 147

The Databank Subsystem

Document Display Screen EDIM264

Relationship Mode
Select
EDIM264 __________

DOCUMENT DISPLAY

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

User . . . . . :
Partner :
Name . . . . . :
User Reference : PONUMBER-001
I/O . . . . . : Outbound
Databank : Gentran
Search : ______________
A Record
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001001010295SIBM
4600 LAKEHURST COURT
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002####################################################
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55
PURCHASE ORDER INSTRUCTIONS
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55ALL ITEMS MUST BE SENT BY REQUESTED SHIP DATE
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55ENTIRE ORDER IS SUBJECT TO CANCELLATION
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55NO SUBSTITUTION OF ITEMS W/O PRIOR BUYER APPR
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002#### 55
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-001002####################################################
_ VENDOR-1PONUMBER-0010050000500EACH0129999CAT-286-12-20 286/12MHZ/20 MEG
Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

PF5=Record

PF6=Search
PF14=Dtl

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Document Display screen. The following
table describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Record Display
screen for the record selected

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the record for
which you want to view, and then press
PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

4 - 148

PF4=Doc

Returns to the Document Status screen.

PF5=Record

The Record function key is used to select an application record from the
record data displayed.

PF6=Search

The Search function key is used when a value is entered in the Search field to
search for the specified value in the EDI data records.

PF14=Dtl

Displays the Document Status Detail screen for the document displayed.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Document Display Screen EDIM264

The Databank Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner ID (User) (protected)
Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode)
associated with the document.
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier
mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
Name (protected)
Displays the name that was defined to the Partner ID using Partner Maintenance.
Search
A 14-character alphanumeric field used to specify a value to search for throughout the list
of records. Type a value and press PF6 to locate the record.
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” for more information.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Realtime

Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 149

The Databank Subsystem

Document Display Screen EDIM264

A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected record, and then press PF5.
For example, if you want to view the Record Display screen for a particular record on the
Document Display screen, type S in the A field for the record you want to view. Then,
press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions you can perform for the Document Display screen.
Record (protected)
Displays up to the first 75 characters of data as found in the record. The complete record
can be viewed from the Record Display screen.

4 - 150

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Record Display Screen EDIM266

The Databank Subsystem

Record Display Screen

EDIM266

Purpose
The Record Display screen is used to view a record selected from a document.

How to Access
Access the Record Display screen by typing S to select the desired record on the Document
Display screen and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Record Display screen.
Select
EDIM266 __________

RECORD DISPLAY

Application Data ID : POFILE
Record ID . . . . . : 001
I/O . . . . . . . .: OUTBOUND
Fld
A Seq Description
_ 010 VENDOR NUMBER (SORT KEY)
_ 020 PO NUMBER
(SORT KEY)
_ 030 RECORD TYPE
(SORT KEY)
_ 040 PO DATE
_ 050 BILL TO NAME
_ 060 BILL TO ADDRESS
_ 070 BILL TO CITY
_ 080 BILL TO STATE
_ 090 BILL TO ZIP
_ 100 VENDOR NAME

Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

XXX

Databank:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Gentran

Field Data
VENDOR-1
PONUMBER-001
001
110190
IBM INC.
4600 LAKEHURST COURT
DUBLIN
OH
43017
XYZ COMPUTER COMPANY

PF3=Exit PF4=Doc

PF5=Field

Screen Actions
The screen actions are displayed on the top line of the Record Display screen. The following table
describes each screen function and provides instructions on how to perform those functions.
To perform
this action ...
View the Field Display
screen for the field selected

Associated
with this
screen
action ...
Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the field
sequence number for which you want
to view, and then press PF5.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 151

The Databank Subsystem

Record Display Screen EDIM266

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Doc

Returns to the Document Status screen.

PF5=Field

The Field function key is used to select an application data field from the
record data displayed and view the field on the Field Display screen.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Application Data ID (protected)
A 12-character alphanumeric field that displays the Application Data ID.
Record ID (protected)
Displays the record ID for the record as defined in the Application file.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound Inbound documents only
Outbound Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
A (Action Code)
A 1-character alphabetic field that contains an action to be performed against the entry that
the action is entered on. The top line of the screen lists the valid actions. To execute the
action, type the letter next to the selected field sequence number, and then press PF5.

4 - 152

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Record Display Screen EDIM266

The Databank Subsystem

For example, if you want to view the Field Display screen for a particular field, type S in
the A field for the field sequence number you want to view. Then, press PF5.
See the sub-topic “Function Key Descriptions” in this section for descriptions of valid
functions that you can perform for the Record Display screen.
Fld Seq (protected)
Displays the field sequence number of the field within the record.
Description (protected)
Displays information about the field as defined in the Application file.
Field Data (protected)
Displays up to the first 31 characters of data as found in the record's field. The complete
field can be viewed from the Field Display screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 153

The Databank Subsystem

Field Display Screen EDIM267

Field Display Screen

EDIM267

Purpose
The Field Display screen enables you to review field information and edit the field data, as
necessary.

How to Access
Access the Field Display screen by typing S to select the desired record on the Record Display
screen and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Field Display screen.
EDIM267 __________

I/O . . . . . .

FIELD DISPLAY

. . :

OUTBOUND

Application Data ID

:

POFILE

Field Description

:

BILL TO ZIP

Field Sequence . . . :

090

Field Type . . . . . :

AN

Field Position . . . :

00107

Field Length . . . . :

05

Field Data . . . . . .

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Databank:

Gentran

43019_______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Record
PF10=Updt

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

4 - 154

PF4=Record

The Record function key is used to select an application record from the
record data displayed.

PF10=Updt

Updates the field data value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Field Display Screen EDIM267

The Databank Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
I/O (protected)
This field indicates whether the document is inbound or outbound. Valid values are:
Inbound
Inbound documents only
Outbound
Outbound documents only
Databank (protected)
Displays whether the document is in the Sterling Gentran:Basic databank or in the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime databank. Valid values are:
Gentran
Sterling Gentran:Basic databank
Realtime
Sterling Gentran:Realtime databank
Application Data ID (protected)
A 12-character alphanumeric identifier for the application data.
Field Description (protected)
Displays information about the field as defined in the application file.
Field Sequence
Displays the sequence number of the field in the record.
Field Type (protected)
Displays the editing format of the data contained in this data element.
Valid values for standards version with Envelope type = User defined for
Sterling Gentran:Structure only include:
CM
CY
DD
JD
J8
MM
PD
PJ

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Date format = MMDDYYYY
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Date format = DDMMYY
Date format = Julian YYDDD
Date format = Julian YYYYDDD
Date format = MMDDYY
Date format = Packed DDMMYY
Date format = Packed Julian YYDDD

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 155

The Databank Subsystem
PM
PY
Pn
Sn
YY
ZD
ZJ
ZM
ZY

Field Display Screen EDIM267
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Date format = Packed MMDDYY
Date format = Packed YYMMDD
Signed Packed with n implied decimal positions
Signed numeric with n implied decimal positions
Date format = YYMMDD
Date format = Packed DDMMYYYY
Date format = Packed Julian YYYYDDD
Date format = Packed MMDDYYYY
Date format = Packed YYYYMMDD

Valid values for standards version of all envelope types include:
AN
CD
DT
D8
FS
ID
Nn
R
Rn
TM
T6
T8

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

string type – alphanumeric
Date format = DDMMYYYY
Date format = YYMMDD or YYYYMMDD
Date format = YYYYMMDD
Fixed string – alphanumeric – pad with spaces
Identifier type – element has code list
Unsigned numeric with n decimal places implied
Decimal – data contains explicit decimal point
Decimal where n indicates the maximum number of decimal positions
Time format = HHMM
Time format = HHMMSS, where SS = seconds
Time format = HHMMSSss, where ss = hundreds of seconds

Field Position (protected)
Displays the offset of the field from the start of the record. The record starts at one.
Field Length (protected)
Displays the fixed length of the field.
Field Data
Displays up to 100 characters (two lines of 50 each) for the field's data value. To edit the
field value, type over the existing value with the new value and press PF10 to update
Sterling Gentran.

4 - 156

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Detail Screen

EDIM270

Purpose
The Change Audit Status Detail screen is used to provide detailed information for an update that
has been applied to a reference on the Change Audit File for a selected Profile ID.

How to Access
Access the Change Audit Status Detail screen by typing S to select the desired change audit record
on the Change Audit Status screen and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following examples illustrate the Change Audit Status screen for both Partner/Qualifier and
Relationship modes.

Partner/Qualifier Mode
EDIM270

CHANGE AUDIT STATUS DETAIL

Partner ID . .
User Reference
Appl Data ID
Databank . . .

:
:
:
:

Update
Update
Update
Update

: Edit
: 06/01/2011
:
: XXX

. . . .
Online
Applied
User ID

Description

VENDOR-1
PONUMBER-001
POFILE
Outbound Application

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Qual :

Databank Run # :

12:00

Bypass :
Reason :

: BILL TO ZIP

Before . . . . : 43017

After

. . . . : 43069

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Chg Aud

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Next DB

4 - 157

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270

Relationship Mode
EDIM270 __________

CHANGE AUDIT STATUS DETAIL

User . . . . .
User Reference
Appl Data ID
Databank . . .

:
:
:
:

Update
Update
Update
Update

: Edit
: 06/01/2011
:
: XXX

. . . .
Online
Applied
User ID

Description

YOUR-COMPANY
PONUMBER-001
POFILE
Outbound Application

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Partner : VENDOR-1

Databank Run # :
Bypass :
Reason :

12:00

: BILL TO ZIP

Before . . . . : 43017

After

. . . . : 43069

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Chg Aud

PF6=Next DB

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Chg Aud

Displays the Change Audit Status screen for the Partner ID described in
detail.

PF6=Next DB

Displays Change Audit information for the next databank of Partner ID.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Fields in which you must enter a value contain the
statement (required) next to the field name in the
documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, and then press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

4 - 158

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270

The Databank Subsystem

Partner ID (User)
Displays the trading partner (Partner/Qualifier mode) or the user (Relationship mode)
associated with the update.
Qual (Partner) (protected)
Indicates the trading partner Qualifier for the Partner ID, if applicable (Partner/Qualifier
mode) or the Partner ID (Relationship mode).
User Reference (protected)
Displays the User Reference for the document, depending on whether the document is
inbound or outbound and how you have chosen to implement the User Reference option
(the Application Key fields on the Application Partner Reference screen in data mapping).
Editor processing or Data Mapping processing creates the information displayed in this
field for the document.
See the topic “User Reference Information” in this chapter for more information.
Appl Data ID (protected)
A 12-character alphanumeric field entered to restrict the list to one Application Data ID
for listing documents.
Env. Ref. ID (EDI data only) (protected)
Identifies the interchange envelope reference for the interchange.
Databank (protected)
This field is used to indicate to which databank changes occurred. Valid values are:
Outbound Application/Gentran
Outbound EDI/Gentran
Inbound EDI/Gentran
Inbound Application/Gentran
Outbound Application/Realtime
Outbound EDI/Realtime
Inbound EDI/Realtime
Inbound Application/Realtime
Databank Run # (protected)
Displays the Databank Run number which was assigned to the document by Sterling
Gentran:Basic. The Databank Run number is used to identify the run that processed the
document.
Update (protected)
Displays the update. Valid values are:
Delete
Edit
Manual Ack
Reset
Network

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

4 - 159

The Databank Subsystem

Change Audit Status Detail Screen EDIM270

Bypass (protected)
Indicates whether the transaction was bypassed or not. Valid values are:
N
Not bypassed (applied)
Y
Yes, was bypassed (See Reason on screen)
P
Was partially applied (See Reason on screen)
Update Online (protected)
Displays the date the update was generated in the online system by a user. The format is
MM/DD/YY HH:MM.
Reason (protected)
If the update was bypassed, a descriptive reason of 20-characters is displayed in this field.
Update Applied (protected)
Displays the date the update was applied to the User Reference in the batch environment.
The format is MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM.
Update User ID (protected)
Displays the three initials of the user ID that performed the update.

Displays only after editing application data
Description (protected)
This field provides information about the field that was edited.
Before (protected)
This field displays the text before it was edited.
After (protected)
This field displays the text after it was edited.

4 - 160

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Chapter

5

The Administration
Subsystem

Overview
This chapter contains the following topics related to the Administration subsystem.

Topic

Page

Before You Begin ........................................................................... ....................................... 5-4
Administrative Main Menu ............................................................EDIM210 ....................... 5-7
Security Maintenance Menu...........................................................EDIM200 ..................... 5-10
User ID Directory ...........................................................................EDIM203 ..................... 5-12
User ID Maintenance Screen..........................................................EDIM201 ..................... 5-15
User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products ..........................EDIM202 ..................... 5-23
Message Maintenance Menu ..........................................................EDIM211 ..................... 5-25
Message Directory..........................................................................EDIM212 ..................... 5-27
Message Maintenance Screen.........................................................EDIM213 ..................... 5-30
Error Rejection Maintenance Screen..............................................EDIM214 ..................... 5-35
Configuration Directory .................................................................EDIM230 ..................... 5-38
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-40
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-43
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-47
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-50
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-53
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-55
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-58
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-61
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-64
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-66
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-69
Configuration Maintenance Screen ................................................EDIM231 ..................... 5-71
Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen...................................................EDIM220/EDIM22A... 5-73
Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen ..................................................EDIM221/EDIM22B ... 5-77
Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen...................................................EDIM222 ..................... 5-82
Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen...................................................EDIM223/EDIM22D... 5-85
Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen...................................................EDIM224/EDIM22E ... 5-89

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5-1

The Administration Subsystem

Overview

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen...................................................EDIM225/EDIM22F.... 5-94
Partner Migration Menu .................................................................EDIY100...................... 5-98
User Selection Screen.....................................................................EDIY200.................... 5-101
User Maintenance Screen ...............................................................EDIY500.................... 5-103
Partner Selection Screen.................................................................EDIY300.................... 5-106
Relationship Maintenance Screen ..................................................EDIY400.................... 5-109
Data Translation Table Directory Screen........................................EDIY600.................... 5-112
Data Table Migration Selection Screen ..........................................EDIY610.................... 5-115
Data Table Migration Maintenance Screen ....................................EDIY620.................... 5-117
Upload Process Maintenance..........................................................EDIM235 ................... 5-120
Separator Main Menu .....................................................................EDIM934 ................... 5-123
Separator Systems Options Maintenance Screen ...........................EDIM935 ................... 5-125
Priority Options Directory Screen ..................................................EDIM936 ................... 5-132
Priority Options Maintenance Screen.............................................EDIM937 ................... 5-135
Change Audit Main Menu ..............................................................EDIM209 ................... 5-140
Partner Change Audit Directory .....................................................EDIM070 ................... 5-143
Partner Change Audit Status...........................................................EDIM071 ................... 5-146
Partner Change Audit Detail...........................................................EDIM073 ................... 5-151
XREF Change Audit Directory .....................................................EDIM074 ................... 5-155
XREF Change Audit Status ............................................................EDIM075 ................... 5-157
XREF Change Audit Detail............................................................EDIM076 ................... 5-160
PARTREL Change Audit Directory ...............................................EDIM077 ................... 5-162
PARTREL Change Audit Status .....................................................EDIM078 ................... 5-164
PARTREL Change Audit Detail .....................................................EDIM079 ................... 5-167
Standards Change Audit Directory.................................................EDIM181 ................... 5-170
Standards Change Audit Status ......................................................EDIM182 ................... 5-172
Standards Change Audit Detail ......................................................EDIM183 ................... 5-176
Application Change Audit Directory..............................................EDIM560 ................... 5-179
Application Change Audit Status ...................................................EDIM561 ................... 5-182
Application Change Audit Detail ...................................................EDIM562 ................... 5-185
Transaction Change Audit Directory..............................................EDIM520 ................... 5-188
Transaction Change Audit Status ...................................................EDIM521 ................... 5-191
Transaction Change Audit Detail ...................................................EDIM523 ................... 5-194
Code Table Change Audit Directory ..............................................EDIM587 ................... 5-197
Code Table Change Audit Status....................................................EDIM588 ................... 5-200
Code Table Change Audit Detail....................................................EDIM589 ................... 5-203
Security Change Audit Directory ...................................................EDIM204 ................... 5-206
Security Change Audit Status.........................................................EDIM205 ................... 5-208
Security Change Audit Detail.........................................................EDIM206 ................... 5-211
Error Message Change Audit Directory .........................................EDIM215 ................... 5-213

5-2

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Overview

The Administration Subsystem

Error Message Change Audit Status...............................................EDIM216 ................... 5-215
Error Message Change Audit Detail...............................................EDIM217 ................... 5-218
Configuration Change Audit Directory ..........................................EDIM232 ................... 5-221
Configuration Change Audit Status................................................EDIM233 ................... 5-223
Configuration Change Audit Detail................................................EDIM234 ................... 5-226
Global Parameter Change Audit Directory ....................................EDIM226 ................... 5-228
Global Parameter Change Audit Status ..........................................EDIM227 ................... 5-230
Global Parameter Change Audit Detail ..........................................EDIM228 ................... 5-233
Separator Change Audit Directory .................................................EDIM938 ................... 5-235
Separator Change Audit Status.......................................................EDIM939 ................... 5-238
Separator Change Audit Detail.......................................................EDIM940 ................... 5-243
Message Center Job Summary .......................................................EDIM245 ................... 5-246
Message Center Job Detail .............................................................EDIM246 ................... 5-250
Message Center Report Display .....................................................EDIM247 ................... 5-253

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5-3

The Administration Subsystem

Before You Begin

Before You Begin
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter defines the menu and screens of the Sterling Gentran:Basic Administration
subsystem. The chapter is divided into different sections relating to a particular screen. Each
section contains the following reference information:
•

The purpose of the screen

•

Instructions on how to access the screen

•

An example of the screen

•

Description of screen actions, when applicable

•

A list of valid function keys and a description of each key

•

A list of fields on the screen with valid values, as well as a description of each
field

Administration Subsystem Jump Codes
A jump code is a 1- to 10-position alphanumeric field located at the upper left corner of each
Sterling Gentran:Basic screen. Use the jump code to move, or jump, directly from one screen to
another, while bypassing menus. All screens that are accessible through a Sterling Gentran:Basic
menu have jump codes associated with them. Screens that are accessible only from detail screens
do not have jump codes associated with them.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
You can jump between screens without having to navigate using the Sterling Gentran:Basic
menus. Use the following procedure to jump between screens:
Step 1:

Press Home.
The cursor moves to the Jump Code field at the top of the screen to the right of the
screen number.

Step 2:

Type the jump code and press Enter.
Note: If the cursor moves to the Jump Code field, and then you
decide not to enter a jump code after all, press Tab to
return to the next entry field on the screen.

5-4

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Before You Begin

The Administration Subsystem

The following table lists the jump codes for the Sterling Gentran:Basic Administration subsystem
menus and screens. The screens are listed by name and are arranged in the order in which they are
displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic menus.
Screen
Screen Title

Number

Sterling Gentran Main Menu

EDIM001

Administrative Main Menu

EDIM210

Jump Codes
Numeric

Alphabetic

0.0

BSC

0

MAIN

4.0

ADM

4
Security Maintenance Menu

EDIM200

4.1

SEC

User ID Directory

EDIM203

4.1.1

SEC.UDIR

User ID Maintenance

EDIM201

4.1.2

SEC.UDEF
SEC.USER

Message Maintenance Menu

EDIM211

4.2

MSG

Message Directory

EDIM212

4.2.1

MSG.DIR

Message Maintenance

EDIM213

4.2.2

MSG.MAINT

Error Rejection Maintenance

EDIM214

4.2.3

MSG.REJ

Configuration Directory

EDIM230

4.3

CFG

Global Parameter Maintenance

EDIM220

4.4

GBL

(Relationship Conversion) Partner
Migration Menu

EDIY100

4.5

PCNV

User Selection

EDIY200

4.5.1

PCNV.USER

User Maintenance

EDIY500

4.5.2

PCNV.UMNT

Partner Selection

EDIY300

4.5.3

PCNV.PART

Relationship Maintenance

EDIY400

4.5.4

PCNV.REVW

Data Translation Table Directory

EDIY600

4.5.5

PCNV.TDIR

Data Table Migration Selection

EDIY610

4.5.6

PCNV.TSEL

Data Table Migration Maintenance

EDIY620

4.5.7

PCNV.TMNT

Upload Processing

EDIM235

4.6

UPLD

Change Audit Main Menu

EDIM209

4.8

CHAD

Partner Change Audit Directory

EDIM070

4.8.1

CHAD.PDIR

Partner Change Audit Status

EDIM071

4.8.1.2

CHAD.STAP

XREF Change Audit Directory

EDIM074

4.8.2

CHAD.XDIR

XREF Change Audit Status

EDIM075

4.8.2.1

CHAD.STAX

PARTREL Change Audit Directory

EDIM077

4.8.2

CHAD.RDIR

PARTREL Change Audit Status

EDIM078

4.8.2.1

CHAD.STAR

Standards Change Audit Directory

EDIM181

4.8.3

CHAD.SDIR

Standards Change Audit Status

EDIM182

4.8.3.1

CHAD.STAS

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5-5

The Administration Subsystem

Before You Begin

Screen

Jump Codes

Screen Title

Number

Numeric

Alphabetic

Application Change Audit Directory

EDIM560

4.8.4

CHAD.ADIR

Application Change Audit Status

EDIM561

4.8.4.1

CHAD.STAA

Transaction Change Audit Directory

EDIM520

4.8.5

CHAD.TDIR

Transaction Change Audit Status

EDIM521

4.8.5.2

CHAD.STAT

Code Table Change Audit Directory

EDIM587

4.8.6

CHAD.CDIR

Code Table Change Audit Status

EDIM588

4.8.6.1

CHAD.STAC

Security Change Audit Directory

EDIM204

4.8.7

CHAD.XDIR

Security Change Audit Status

EDIM205

4.8.7.1

CHAD.STAX

Error Message Change Audit Directory EDIM215

4.8.8

CHAD.EDIR

Error Message Change Audit Status

EDIM216

4.8.8.1

CHAD.STAE

System Configuration CA Directory

EDIM232

4.8.9

CHAD.YDIR

System Configuration CA Status

EDIM233

4.8.9.1

CHAD.STAY

Global Parameter CA Directory

EDIM226

4.8.10

CHAD.GDIR

Global Parameter CA Status

EDIM227

4.8.10.1

CHAD.STAG

Separator Change Audit Directory

EDIM938

4.8.11

CHAD.ZDIR

Separator Change Audit Status

EDIM939

4.8.11.1

CHAD.STAZ

Message Center Job Summary

EDIM245

4.9

MC

See Appendix A for a complete list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic jump codes and their associated
screens.

5-6

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Administrative Main Menu EDIM210

The Administration Subsystem

Administrative Main Menu

EDIM210

Purpose
The Administrative Main Menu (EDIM210) isolates system administrative functions into one area
by including nine menu selections from which to choose. These selections enable you control
system options, such as security, processing, configuration, and conversion.

How to Access
Access the Administrative Main Menu in either of these two ways:
•

From the Sterling Gentran Main Menu, type 4 to select Administrative Main
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 4.0 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Administrative Main Menu.
EDIM210 4.0_______

ADMINISTRATIVE MAIN MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

Enter PF1=Help

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Security Maintenance Menu
Message Maintenance Menu
Configuration Directory
Global Parameter Maintenance
Relationship Conversion
(N/A)
Upload Process Maintenance
Separator Menu
Change Audit Menu
Message Center Job Summary

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5-7

The Administration Subsystem

Administrative Main Menu EDIM210

Menu Options
Menu Option

Description

1.

Security
Maintenance Menu

Enables you to create a series of controls to manage users’
access to Sterling Gentran:Basic online features.

2.

Message
Maintenance Menu

Enables you to display and modify Error message
definitions.

3.

Configuration
Directory

Enables you to display and modify System Configuration
settings.

4.

Global Parameter
Maintenance

Enables you to display and modify global parameter
options.

5.

Relationship
Conversion

Enables you to access the partner migration tools to
convert to the partner Relationship mode.
See Chapter 7, “Migrating to Relationship Processing
Mode,” in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS®
Release 6.6 Installation Guide for more information.

6.

Upload Process
Maintenance

Enables you to upload partners, maps, application data,
and code tables.

7.

Separator Menu

Enables you to access the Separator setup screens that
provide the capability to separate inbound EDI data.

8.

Change Audit
Menu

Enables you to view the change audit records that were
created when partner, standards, or mapping files were
changed.

9.

Message Center Job
Summary

Enables you to view reports that have been saved in the
Message Center.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.

5-8

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Administrative Main Menu EDIM210

The Administration Subsystem

Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,7,8,
or 9), and press Enter to perform the selected function.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5-9

The Administration Subsystem

Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200

Security Maintenance Menu

EDIM200

Purpose
The Security Maintenance Menu (EDIM200) contains two menu selections from which to choose
to perform security file maintenance. These selections provide the ability to modify privileges of a
user's profile.

How to Access
Access the Security Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways:
•

On the Administrative Main Menu, type 1 in the Selection field to select Security
Maintenance Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 4.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Security Maintenance Menu.
EDIM200 4.1_______

SECURITY MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

Enter PF1=Help

1.

User Id Directory

2.

User Id Maintenance

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

5 - 10

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Security Maintenance Menu EDIM200

The Administration Subsystem

Menu Options
The Security Maintenance Menu displays two selections that you use to perform User ID security
maintenance.
Menu Option

Description

1.

User ID Directory

Lists all currently defined User IDs. This method of access
would generally be used when the User ID is unknown.

2.

User ID
Maintenance

Enables you to add or update User ID security
information, such as subsystem access and authority levels
by subsystem; or delete a User ID. This method of access
would generally be used when the User ID is known, or a
new User ID is being added to the Security file.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump and press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value, and the press Enter to
move to the selected screen. Valid values are:
1

=

2

=

Display the User ID Directory listing all the User IDs currently
defined in your Security file.
Display the User ID Maintenance screen where User IDs can be
added, updated, or deleted.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 11

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Directory EDIM203

User ID Directory

EDIM203

Purpose
The User ID Directory (EDIM203) lists all the User IDs that currently exist in your security file.
Sterling Gentran displays all Users IDs (ten at a time) in alphabetical, and then numerical order.
From this list, you can select a User ID to view and/or change security profile details currently
assigned.

How to Access
Access the User ID Directory in either of these two ways:
•

Type 1 to select User ID Directory from the Security Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type 4.1.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the User ID Directory screen.
Select
EDIM203 4.1.1_____

USER ID DIRECTORY

Starting User Id:
A

User Id

Name

_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

ADMIN
AWM
CEC
DDD
DAVID
DIANA
DLHUMM
GAINS
HILL
HELEN

FIRST LAST
ANNA MILFORD
CHRISTOPHER CHARLES
DIANA DIXON
ROBERT DAVIS
DIANA DESALES
DENNIS HUMMERY
DALE GAINS
LARRY HILLS
HELEN WAGNER

TO SELECT USER ENTER AN
Enter PF1=Help
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

5 - 12

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

________

S BESIDE THE ID
PF3=Exit

Initials

Division

XXX
AWM
CEC
DDD
RCD
DDZ
DLH
DEG
LDH
HCW

000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000

PF5=Id Maint

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Directory EDIM203

The Administration Subsystem

Screen Actions
Associated
with this screen
action ...

To perform
this action ...
View the security
information for a user on
the User ID screen.

Select

Do this ...
Type S in the A field next to the User ID
that you want to view, and then press
PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=ID Maint

After one User ID is selected by entering S in the A field next to the selected
User ID, press PF5 to branch to the User ID Maintenance screen for the User
ID selected. This screen displays security information (i.e., user name,
password, subsystem access, authority levels by subsystem) currently on file
for the selected User ID.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump and press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Starting User ID
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to specify the User portion of a User/Partner ID
from which viewing begins. Type the appropriate User ID. You can type a partial User ID
in this field and the system displays up to 10 User IDs starting with the nearest User ID
match.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a User ID. Type S in this field to make a
selection, and press the PF5 key to display the User ID Maintenance screen.
User ID (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field that displays the user identifier. A user enters a user
identification and password to logon to the Sterling Gentran:Basic system. The User ID is
the key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 13

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Directory EDIM203

and authority levels the user is permitted to access. The User ID is also called the Logon
ID.
Name (protected)
Displays the user name associated with the User ID. This field may include the given and
surname of the user.
Initials (protected)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that displays up to three letters or initials associated with
the user name or User ID. These initials are displayed on the top of each menu and screen
when displayed, and are used to identify which user performed the most recent
maintenance on a particular record. Currently, there is no system validation of other User
IDs to determine if initials have been assigned to another user.
Division (protected)
A 3-position alphanumeric field that displays a user-specified code identifying the
division. Division is used by the Sterling Gentran online system to limit the user’s access
to various subsystems, such as Trading Partner and Mapping, to only those records for the
specified division code. The EDI coordinator may be assigned a division of 000 to access
ALL records, regardless of the Division coded on the partner profile.
Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record,
and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records.
See the sub-topic “Field Descriptions” in the “User ID Maintenance Screen” section (next
page) for more information on Division access.

5 - 14

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen

EDIM201

Purpose
The User ID Maintenance-1 (EDIM201) screen enables you to add, display, change, and delete the
security information for a specified User ID. This screen also allows you to set indicators to permit
and restrict user access to all Sterling Gentran:Basic online subsystems, and to determine the level
of access to each subsystem.
This screen also lists the date that the security information was last updated or added for the User
ID, and the User ID of the user who performed the maintenance.

How to Access
Access the User ID Maintenance screen in any one of the following ways:
•

Type 2 to select User ID Maintenance from the Security Maintenance Menu and
press Enter.

•

Type 4.1.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

•

Type S to select the desired User ID on the User ID Directory screen and press
PF5.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the User ID Maintenance screen.
EDIM201

4.1.2_______

USER ID MAINTENANCE-1

User ID.... XXXXX____

Password.. ___________

Division..

Last Name.. XXXXX_____________________
Last Update Date..:

06/01/11

User..:

Options
Partner Maintenance
Standards Maintenance
Databank Maintenance
Mapping Integration
Administrative Maintenance
Security Maintenance
Message Maintenance
Configuration File Maintenance
Global Parameter Maintenance
Enter

PF1=Help

XXX

First..

06/01/2011
12:00:00

01A Initials..

XXXXXX________

XXX

MI.. X

XXX
Access
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)
Y (Y/N)

Authority Level
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3/4/5/6)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)
1
(1/2/3)

PF3=Exit
PF4=Dir
PF5=More Opts
PF9=Add
PF10=Updt PF11=Del

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

PF6=Nxt User

5 - 15

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

Function Key Descriptions
To display security maintenance details for another User ID, type the User ID over the ID currently
displayed, and press Enter. Sterling Gentran displays security information for the new User ID
requested.
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Branches to the User ID Directory screen. This screen lists all User IDs.

PF5=More Opts

Displays Add-on product security options.

PF6=Nxt User

Displays security information for the next consecutive User ID. The sort
sequence is alphabetic, then numeric.

PF9=Add

To add a new User ID to the Security file, type the new User ID (typeover
displayed data, if necessary), name, security access and authority level
information for each Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem, and press PF9. A
confirmation message is displayed to ensure the password was typed in
accurately. Retype the password, and press PF9 to confirm the add. Sterling
Gentran refreshes the screen and displays the newly added User ID, and a
message confirming the addition.
Note: If you access the User ID Maintenance screen directly
from the Security Maintenance Selection Menu, the field
is blank. To add a new user, type the new profile
information, and press PF9. If there is a profile currently
displayed and you would like to add a new profile, type
over the profile shown, and press PF9. The Last Update
Date and User field shows when this addition was made
and by whom.

5 - 16

PF10=Updt

To update security information for a User ID that currently exists, type the
changed information over the existing security data, and press PF10. A
confirmation message is displayed if the password was changed. Retype the
password and press PF10 to confirm the update. Sterling Gentran refreshes
the screen and displays the updated security information for the User ID, and
a message confirming the update. The Last Update Date field displays the
current date.

PF11=Del

To delete a User ID from the Security file, display the selected User ID, and
press PF11. Sterling Gentran displays a message prompting you to confirm by
pressing PF11 again, or cancel the deletion by pressing PF12.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

The Administration Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home, type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump and press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
User ID
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define the user identification. The User ID is the
key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems and
authority levels the user is permitted. The User ID is sometimes called the Logon ID.
To provide additional security, the User ID is encrypted when it is saved on the Security
file.
Password
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define a user's password. Passwords require a
minimum of four and maximum of eight characters in length. The required length is an
installation option defined on the configuration file. The user can change their password
on the Sterling Gentran:Basic logon screen. Sterling Gentran will issue a confirmation
message after adding or updating a password.
To provide additional security, a password is encrypted after saving it on the Security file
and will not display on the screen when typed. For users with security Level 1, you control
the password display by setting the Security Password Suppress flag on System
Configuration Record 0 On-Line options.
See the topic “Configuration Maintenance Screen Part 2 On-Line Options- Record Type
0,” later in this chapter for more information.
Division
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define a user-specific division code. The division
is used in conjunction with the partner profile. When a division is specified for a User ID,
that user may only access information for records having the same division code. The
System Administrator or EDI Coordinator should maintain a division of 000 to access all
trading partner records.
Any record that contains a division code of spaces is considered to be a corporate record,
and can be used by more than one division. All users can access these records.
The following matrix illustrates when you can and cannot access a particular object, based
on your division in your User ID. (An object refers to a trading partner, maps, or databank
records.) This matrix shows that if your division is defined as 000, then you can access any
object. If the object contains blanks, then any user can access that object. The 010 or 020

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 17

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

rows and columns below are merely given as examples, provided to illustrate that you can
access an object only if your division and the object’s division are the same.

Division of Object

Division (in User ID)
(blanks)

000

010

020

etc.

(blanks)

Access

Access

Access

Access

Access

000

No access

Access

No access

No access

No access

010

No access

Access

Access

No access

No access

020

No access

Access

No access

Access

No access

etc.

No access

Access

No access

No access

Access

Initials
A 3-position alphanumeric field used to define up to three characters for the user's initials.
The user’s initials are displayed at the top of each menu and screen when displayed, and
are used to identify which user performed the most recent maintenance on a particular
record. Currently, there is no system validation of other User IDs to determine if these
initials have been assigned to another user.
Last Name
A 30-position alphanumeric field used to define the user’s full surname.
First
A 15-position alphanumeric field used to define the user’s full given name.
MI
A 1-position alphabetic field used to define the initial (first letter) of the user's middle
name.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the last date that security file maintenance was performed for the specified User
ID. This field displays the date that the User ID was first added, or the date the User ID
was last updated. This date does not reflect the date for password changes (by the user via
the Sterling Gentran:Basic logon screen). Date format is MM/DD/YY.
User (protected)
Displays up to three letters or initials of the user who added, or last updated the security
information for the User ID currently displayed.
Options (protected)
Displays a list of all Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems to enable restriction of each
subsystem individually.
Access (Y/N)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate user access rights to the various Sterling
Gentran:Basic subsystems (listed to the right of the Authority Level field). The Access
field is used in conjunction with the Authority Level field to build Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystem security for each User ID. Access to the Databank feature is controlled through

5 - 18

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

The Administration Subsystem

the use of the self-contained security system. Gentran allows you to define users with their
own privileges. The following general security rules apply for data access. These rules are
further restricted by the Databank Security Authority Levels described below.
•

If a user has access to an EDI Transaction or Application Document level
directory record, the corresponding data can be viewed (subject to the authority
levels described below).

•

At the EDI Interchange and Group level, a user is allowed to view the
corresponding EDI data if: all documents within the Interchange or Functional
Group have the same division (this must match the User IDs security division or
the directory record would not be displayed), or the User ID has a system
administrator security division (000). Any record that contains a division code of
spaces is considered to be a corporate record, and can be used by more than one
division. All users can access these records.
See the “Field Descriptions” section in this topic for more information on
Division access.

This may restrict users in a divisional structure or where document/transaction division is
based on document type. Users in this type of environment may be required to access the
EDI related information by switching from the Application Document Status to the EDI
Document Status. Following are valid values for all subsystems:
Y

=

N

=

Caution:

Yes, grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystem. When you specify the Y value in this field, the field is
used in conjunction with the Authority Level field to build
Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem security for each User ID.
No, do not grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystem. By entering the value N is this field, you deny the user
the capability to access the subsystem. The default value is N.
When specifying the N value, the default value for the Authority
Level field is 3, and the subsystem is not displayed as an option
on the Sterling Gentran Main Menu. This is commonly used
when restricting access to the security subsystem.

Typically, access to the Security Maintenance
subsystem is reserved for use by a System
Administrator/EDI coordinator. Access to this
subsystem at authority Level 1 enables you to see
the passwords assigned to each user. Other users
can view only their own password.

Authority Level
A 1-position numeric field used to set inquiry and update rights to the various Sterling
Gentran:Basic subsystems (listed immediately to the right of this field) that the specified
user might access. The Authority Level field is used in conjunction with the Access field
to build Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystem security for each User ID. To support the
required security for the Databank subsystem, the security access level allowed for the
databank is from 1 – 6. These levels of security identify the following areas as requiring
security: Directory Record Viewing, Directory Record Update Access, Data Viewing, and
Data Editing.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 19

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

Valid values for Sterling Gentran:Basic, Sterling Gentran:Plus, Sterling
Gentran:Realtime, and Sterling Gentran:Control are:
1

Update rights granted, including the right to change the Update
Allowed field for any of the Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems.
The Update Allowed field designates whether or not a user
having an authority Level 2 is locked from changing applications
such as Standards versions, transaction maps, the Application ID,
tables, and the partner profile. This is an unrestricted security
level.
Note: If you have authority Level 1, you can add and update
users. Sterling Gentran will display all passwords to you
on the User ID Maintenance screen.
Caution:

=

To protect the integrity of applications, such as Standards
versions, transaction maps, the Application Data ID, tables,
and the partner profile, authority Level 1 can be reserved for
use by only the system administrator. You can also set the
Update Allowed flag to N (do not allow changes to these
locked applications) to prohibit system modifications after
establishing a file or parameter setup. Specifying either Y or
N in the Update Allowed flag provides the applicable
authority to users maintaining authority Level 2.

2

=

Limited update rights granted, may make additions throughout
Sterling Gentran:Basic, and changes and deletions to those
applications in Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems having an
Update Allowed flag set to Y. If you have authority Level 2, you
can both add and update users.
Note: Sterling Gentran will display only your password on the
User ID Maintenance screen.
3

=

Display-only rights granted; no file maintenance is permitted.
The default value is 3. If you have authority Level 3, you cannot
add or update users. Your own password will display on the User
ID Maintenance screen, but other users’ passwords will not
display.

If the Access field has the Y value, you MUST type a value in this field. If the Access field
has the N value, this field value defaults to 3 (although it has no meaning because access
to that subsystem is completely restricted).
Note: Authority Level 3 for Sterling Gentran:Realtime prevents
access to any of the Realtime System Maintenance
screens.

5 - 20

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

The Administration Subsystem

Valid Values for Databank Maintenance and Realtime Databank Maintenance are:
Note: Levels 1, 2, and 3 are the same as those of the base
Sterling Gentran:Basic System.
4

=

Limited update rights granted, including the right to change the
Update Allowed field for any of the Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystems. The Update Allowed field designates whether or not
a user having an Authority Level 2 is locked from changing
applications, such as Standards versions, transaction maps, the
Application ID, tables, and the partner profile. View and update
rights for databank are not available. This is an unrestricted
security level.

5

=

Limited update rights granted; may make additions throughout
Sterling Gentran:Basic, and changes and deletions to those
applications in Sterling Gentran:Basic subsystems having an
Update Allowed flag set to Y. Viewing rights for databank are
available.

6

=

Display-only rights granted for system and databank; no file
maintenance (adding, updating, or deleting) is permitted. The
default value is 3.

Valid Values for Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint are:
1

=

2

=

3

=

4

=

This level has access to all System Option and Extended System
Management options, and can view/update all data in Exception
Management, Exception Inquiry, and Tracking Management.
View and update rights available in Exception Management,
Exception Inquiry, and Tracking Management. No access to System
Options or Extended System Management.
View and update rights available in Exception Inquiry and Tracking
Management.
Viewing rights available in Exception Inquiry and Tracking
Management with no update.

Security Set-up
Access to the Databank Maintenance feature is controlled through the use of the self-contained
security system. Sterling Gentran allows you to define users with their own privileges.
The following general security rules apply for data access. These rules are further restricted by the
Databank Security Access Levels described below.
•

If a user has access to an EDI Transaction or Application Document level
directory record, the corresponding data can be viewed (subject to the access
levels).

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 21

The Administration Subsystem
•

User ID Maintenance Screen EDIM201

At the EDI Interchange and Group level, a user is allowed to view the
corresponding EDI data if:
•

all documents within the Interchange or Functional Group have the same
division (this must match the User IDs security division or the directory
record would not be displayed).
OR

•

the User ID has a system administrator security division (000).

See the “Field Descriptions” section in this topic for more information on
Division access.
This may restrict users in a divisional structure or where document/transaction
division is based on document type. Users in this type of environment may be
required to access the EDI related information by switching from the Application
Document Status to the EDI Document Status.
To support the required security for the Databank subsystem, the security access levels allowed for
the databank are from 1 – 6. These levels of security identify the following areas as requiring
security:
•
•
•
•

Directory Record Viewing
Directory Record Update Access
Data Viewing
Data Editing

The following table illustrates the access combinations that are supported and the access levels
which are required for each combination.
Required
Access Code

5 - 22

Directory

Data

View

Update

View

Update

1

Y

Y

Y

Y

2

Y

N

Y

Y

3

Y

Y

Y

N

4

Y

Y

N

N

5

Y

N

Y

N

6

Y

N

N

N

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products EDIM202

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products

EDIM202

Purpose
The User ID Maintenance-2 (EDIM202) screen allows you to update security flags for Sterling
Gentran:Plus, Sterling Gentran:Control, Sterling Gentran:Realtime, Sterling Gentran:Realtime
Databank Maintenance, and Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint.

How to Access
Access the User ID Maintenance-2 screen from User ID Maintenance-1 (EDIM201) screen by
pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the User ID Maintenance screen.
EDIM202 __________

USER ID MAINTENANCE-2

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

User Id.....

Last Update Date..:

User..:

Options
Gentran:Plus
Gentran:Control
Gentran:Realtime
Realtime Databank Maintenance
Gentran:Viewpoint
Recipient

Enter PF1=Help

Access
_ (Y/N)
_ (Y/N)
_ (Y/N)
_ (Y/N)
_ (Y/N)
__________

Authority Level
_ (1/2/3)
_ (1/2/3)
_ (1/2/3)
_ (1/2/3/4/5/6)
_ (1/2/3/4)
(optional)

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev
PF10=Updt

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev

Returns to the User ID Maintenance – 1 screen (EDIM201).

PF10=Updt

Applies the updates to security record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 23

The Administration Subsystem

User ID Maintenance Screen – Add On Products EDIM202

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
User ID (protected)
An 8-position alphanumeric field used to define the user identification. The User ID is the
key that enables Sterling Gentran to recognize the user and identify which subsystems and
authority levels the user is permitted access. The User ID is sometimes called the Logon
ID.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the last date that security file maintenance was performed for the User ID.
User (protected)
Displays up to three letters or initials of the user who added, or last updated the security
information for the User ID currently displayed.
Access
A 1-position alphabetic field used to designate user access rights to the various Sterling
Gentran:Basic subsystems.Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Yes, grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystem.
No, do not grant the user access to this Sterling Gentran:Basic
subsystem.

See the previous topic, “User ID Maintenance Screen,” for a more detailed explanation of
Access usage.
Authority Level
A 1-position numeric field used to set inquiry and update rights to the various Sterling
Gentran:Basic subsystems that the specified user may access.
See the previous topic, “User ID Maintenance Screen,” for a more detailed explanation of
Access usage.
Recipient (optional)
A 10-position field used to limit the access of the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Exception
Inquiry subsystem to the specified recipient ID. If not specified, all recipient IDs will have
access.

5 - 24

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211

The Administration Subsystem

Message Maintenance Menu

EDIM211

Purpose
The Message Maintenance Menu (EDIM211) contains three menu options that you can use to
perform error message file maintenance.

How to Access
Access the Message Maintenance Menu in either of these two ways:
•

From the Administrative Main Menu, type 2 to select Message Maintenance
Menu and press Enter.

•

Type 4.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Message Maintenance Menu.
EDIM211 4.2_______

MESSAGE MAINTENANCE MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_

1. Message Directory
2. Message Maintenance
3. Error Rejection Maintenance

Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit
PF15=Logoff

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 25

The Administration Subsystem

Message Maintenance Menu EDIM211

Menu Options
Menu Option

Description

1

Message
Directory

Lists all currently defined error message records.

2

Message
Maintenance

Enables you to display and modify error message
definitions.

3

Error Rejection
Maintenance

Enables you to display and modify error rejection settings
on error message records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Selection
This field is used to make a menu selection. Type a valid value (1, 2, or 3) and press
Enter to perform the selected function.

5 - 26

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Message Directory EDIM212

The Administration Subsystem

Message Directory

EDIM212

Purpose
The Message Directory (EDIM212) displays a list of error messages. Messages display
sequentially, starting with the first message on file. This screen enables you to search for records
by providing scrolling ability and the ability to specify searching criteria. You can narrow the
scope of records displayed by specifying a record type, error type, and/or direction.

How to Access
Access the Message Directory in either of these two ways:
•

From the Message Maintenance Menu, type 1 to select Message Directory and
press Enter.

•

Type 4.2.1 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Message Directory screen.
Select
EDIM212 4.2.1_____

MESSAGE DIRECTORY

Starting Message Number....:
Language Code..............:
Record Type................:
Error Type.................:
Direction..................:

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

00000
EN_
_
_
_

A

Message
Rec
Sev
T E X T
Number
Ty
_
00000
G
I
*---- GENTRAN:BASIC VERSION 6.6 06/01/2011 _
00001
G
I
VERSION CHANGED WHILE READING TRANSACTION RECORDS.
_
00002
G
I
INDICATED INVALID KEY ENCOUNTERED WHILE REWRITING VE
_
00003
G
I
TRANSACTION RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION.
_
00004
G
I
SEGMENT RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION.
_
00005
G
I
ELEMENT ACTIVITY RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION _
00006
G
I
SEGMENT ELEMENT RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION.
_
00007
G
I
ELEMENT DICTIONARY RECORDS MISSING FOR THIS VERSION.
_
00008
G
I
LENGTHEN DICTIONARY TABLE - PROGRAM PROBLEM - CONTAC
TO SELECT, TYPE "S" BESIDE THE MESSAGE # AND PRESS THE PF5 KEY
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF5=Maint
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 27

The Administration Subsystem

Message Directory EDIM212

Screen Actions
Associated
with this screen
action ...

To perform
this action ...
View the Message
Maintenance

Select

Do this ...
To select a Message to view or
maintain, type S next to the
Message Number you want to view
on the Message Directory screen,
and then press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Maint

Pass control to the (EDIM213) Message Maintenance screen with key
information for item selected by Action Code.

Field Descriptions
Note: Fields that are display-only contain the statement
(protected) next to the field name in the documentation.
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Starting Message Number
A 5-position numeric field used to specify a message to locate from the list of records.
Language Code
A 2-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to
specify the language for the error message. Currently, EN (English) is the only value
available.
Record Type
A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to
specify the record type for the error message. Valid values are:
G
U

5 - 28

=
=

Sterling Gentran
User

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Message Directory EDIM212

The Administration Subsystem

Error Type
A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to
specify the Sterling Gentran:Basic process, subsystem, or add-on product that uses this
error message. Valid values are:
D
E
G
M
P
S
V

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Databank
Editor
General
Mapping
Sterling Gentran:Plus
Sterling Gentran:Structure
Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint

Direction
A 1-position alphabetic field used to limit the display of records. This field enables you to
specify the process direction for which the error message is valid. Valid values are:
B
I
O
space

=
=
=
=

message is used in both inbound and outbound processes
message is used in inbound processes only
message is used in outbound processes only
message is not used in either inbound or outbound process

A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select an error message. Type S next to the selected
Message Number, then press the PF5 key to display the Message Maintenance screen.
Message Number (protected)
Displays the error message number.
Rec Ty (protected)
Displays the Record Type. This is used to identify owner of the errors, Sterling Gentran or
User.
Sev (protected)
Displays the severity level assigned to the error message to help you identify critical errors
versus warnings. Valid values are:
I
W
E
S
F
T
Z

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Informational message
Warning only
Error
Severe error
Fatal error
Trace (program)
Initialize (file)

Text (protected)
Provides a description of the error. This is the text that is printed on error reports when
error is encountered.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 29

The Administration Subsystem

Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213

Message Maintenance Screen

EDIM213

Purpose
The Message Maintenance (EDIM213) screen provides the ability to display and update error
messages. If you access this screen from the Message Directory, the selected record displays. If
you access this screen from the Message Maintenance Menu, you can specify the message to
display by entering a message number, record type, and language code.

How to Access
Access the Message Maintenance screen using any one of the following methods:
•

From the Message Maintenance Menu, type 2 to select Message Maintenance and
press Enter.

•

Type 4.2.2 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

•

Type S to select the desired message number from the Message Directory screen
and press PF5.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Message Maintenance screen.
EDIM213 4.2.2_____

Message Number ..:
Record Type .....:
Language Code ...:
Return Code 1 ...:
Return Code 2 ...:
Print Flag ......:
Print User Area .:
Rejection - In ..:
Rejection - Out .:

MESSAGE MAINTENANCE

00001
G
EN_
00
00
Y
N
_
_

XXX

Error Type ......:
Direction .......:
Severity ........:

06/01/2011
12:00:00

G (E/D/G/M/P/S/V)
_ (I/O/B/Space)
I (I/W/E/S/F/T/Z)

(Y/N)
(Y/N)
(A/D/P/space)
(A/D/P/space)

Text Part 1 .....: VERSION_CHANGED_WHILE_READING_TRANSACTION_RECORDS.________
Text Part 2 .....: __________________________________________________________
User Area .......: __________________________________________________________
Note Codes ......:
ASCX12
CONTRL
Enter PF1=Help

5 - 30

Int

Grp

Trn

Seg

Elem

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF9=Add PF10=Updt PF11=Del

Last Update Date:
Last Update Time:
Last Update User:

00/00/00
00:00:00
SCI

PF6=Next Msg

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213

The Administration Subsystem

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Accesses the Message Directory (EDIM212).

PF6=Next Msg

Displays the next error message.

PF9=Add

Adds a user error message. After typing the appropriate information for a new
record, press PF9 to add the data to the system.
Note: Sterling Gentran error messages cannot be added.

PF10=Updt

Updates the error message. To update an error message, type the new
information over the existing message data and press PF10.

PF11=Del

Deletes the error message. To delete an error message, display the message
you want to delete, and press PF11. The system prompts you to confirm
(press PF11 again) or cancel (press PF12).

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Message Number (required)
The 5-position number to identify the error message.
Record Type (required)
A 1-position alphabetic field containing the record type to identify the owner of the error
message. Valid values are:
G
U

=
=

Sterling Gentran
User

Language Code (required)
A 3-position alphabetic field to identify the language that was used to enter ‘Text,’ based
on EDIFACT #3453 Language Code (ISO639-1988). Currently, EN (English) is the only
value available.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 31

The Administration Subsystem

Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213

Error Type
Displays the error type to identify the Sterling Gentran process, subsystem, or Add-on
product that uses this error message. This field cannot be modified for Sterling Gentran
messages. Valid values are:
D
E
G
M
P
S
V

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Databank
Editor
General
Mapping
Sterling Gentran:Plus
Sterling Gentran:Structure
Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint

Return Code 1
A 2-position numeric value to be passed to the operating system when this error occurs to
control processing. Used in conjunction with Direction = I or blank (inbound or not used).
Note: A Return Code value greater than 15 is treated as a fatal
error.
Direction
Displays the direction to identify the process direction for which the error message is
valid. This field cannot be modified for Sterling Gentran messages. Valid values are:
B
I
O
space

=
=
=
=

message is used in both inbound and outbound processes
message is used in inbound processes only
message is used in outbound processes only
message is not used in either inbound or outbound process

Return Code 2
A 2-position numeric value to be passed to the operating system when this error occurs
during the outbound process to control processing. Used in conjunction with Direction =
O (outbound).
Note: A Return Code value greater than 15 is treated as a fatal
error.
Severity
Used to help identify the level of severity, such as critical errors or warnings to aid in
return code setting. Valid values are:
I
W
E
S
F
T
Z

5 - 32

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Informational message
Warning only
Error
Severe error
Fatal error
Trace (program)
Initialize (file)

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213

The Administration Subsystem

Print Flag
A 1-position field that enables you to indicate whether the error message is printed on the
error report. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Yes, print this message on report if error occurs. This is the
default value.
Do not print this message except when using detail reporting.

Print User Area
A 1-position field that enables you to indicate whether the User Area is printed on the
error report along with the error message. Valid values are
Y

=

N

=

Yes, print user area after error message text. This is the default
value.
Do not print user area on error reports

Rejection – In
A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this
error is encountered inbound. Valid values are:
A
P
D
space

=
=
=
=

Always reject for all partners
Read the partner profile to determine rejection
read global partner record to determine rejection
Do not reject on the error message

Rejection – Out
A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this
error is encountered outbound. Valid values are:
A
P
D
space

=
=
=
=

Always reject for all partners
Read the partner profile to determine rejection
read global partner record to determine rejection
Do not reject on the error message

Text Part 1
Contains information for the error – first 58 characters
Text Part 2
Contains information for the error – second 58 characters
User Area
A 58-position field to allow the user to store additional information. This field could be
used to provide instructions to respond to the error message. This field is printed on the
error report if Print User Area = ‘Y.’
Note Codes – ASCX12 (protected)
A 3-byte numeric values used during acknowledgment generation for reporting
compliance errors. Interchange, Group, Transaction, Segment, and Element note codes are
displayed. These values are used in the 997 acknowledgment that can be optionally
generated in the inbound process for ANSI transactions.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 33

The Administration Subsystem

Message Maintenance Screen EDIM213

Note Codes – CONTRL (protected)
A 3-byte numeric values used during acknowledgment generation for reporting
compliance errors. Interchange, Group, Transaction, Segment, and Element note codes are
displayed. These values are used in the CONTRL acknowledgment that can be optionally
generated in the inbound process for EDIFACT messages.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Last Update Time (protected)
Displays the time that this record was last updated.
Last Update User (protected)
Displays the initials for the user that last updated this record.

5 - 34

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214

The Administration Subsystem

Error Rejection Maintenance Screen

EDIM214

Purpose
The Error Rejection Maintenance (EDIM214) screen displays only compliance messages that are
available for error rejection. Messages on this screen display sequentially, starting with the first
compliance message on file. You can limit the display to only display inbound or outbound
messages. Parameters, for both inbound and outbound, are available on this screen to enable you to
specify error rejection requirements.
Note: To view a complete list of messages, access the Message
Directory.

How to Access
Access the Error Rejection Maintenance screen in either of these two ways:
•

From the Message Maintenance Menu type 3 to select Error Rejection
Maintenance and press Enter.

•

Type 4.2.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Error Rejection Maintenance screen.
Update
EDIM214 4.2.3_____

A
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

ERROR REJECTION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Direction..................: _
(I/O/B)
Starting Message Number....: _____
Message Dir Rej Rej
T E X T
Number
In Out
00012
B
_
_
INPUT TRANSACTION FILE EMPTY - PROGRAM TERMINATED.
00020
O
_
P
FOUND INDICATED SEGMENT ID. EXPECTING TRANSMISSION H
00021
B
_
_
DATA ELEMENT SEPARATOR MISSING.
TRANSMISSION OR EL
00022
B
_
_
SEGMENT TERMINATOR MISSING. TRANSMISSION OR SEGMENT
00023
B
_
_
ICS SUBMIT DATE ERROR.
00024
B
_
_
ICS SUBMIT TIME ERROR.
00025
B
_
_
ICS INTERCHANGE CONTROL NUMBER NOT NUMERIC.
00026
B
_
_
ICS CONTROL STANDARDS IDENTIFIER NOT IN ACCEPTABLE C
00032
B
_
_
MONTH GREATER THAN 12 OR LESS THAN 1 IN DATE INPUT.
00033
B
P
P
DATE FIELD NOT NUMERIC.
00034
B
_
_
DAY GREATER THAN 31 OR LESS THAN 1 IN DATE INPUT.
00035
B
_
_
MONTH INDICATED DOES NOT HAVE 31 DAYS.

TO UPDATE, TYPE "U" BESIDE THE MESSAGE #
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

AND PRESS THE ENTER KEY

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 35

The Administration Subsystem

Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214

Screen Actions
Associated
with this screen
action ...

To perform
this action ...
Change error rejection flags for
error message

Update

Do this ...
Type U in the A field next to the
error message for which you
want to change, change the
error rejection flags, and then
press Enter.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Direction
A 1-position alphabetic field to restrict the error message displayed on screen. Valid
values are:
B
I
O

=
=
=

message is used in both inbound and outbound processes
message is used in inbound processes only
message is used in outbound processes only

Starting Message Number
A 5-position numeric field that specifies the starting point for viewing error messages.
Message Number (protected)
Displays the error message number.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to update rejection fields on the Error Message file.
After changes are entered, type U next to the error number, and press Enter to apply the
changes.

5 - 36

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Error Rejection Maintenance Screen EDIM214

The Administration Subsystem

Dir (protected)
Displays the direction to identify the process direction for which the error message is
valid. Valid values are:
B
I
O
space

=
=
=
=

message is used in both inbound and outbound processes
message is used in inbound processes only
message is used in outbound processes only
message is not used in either inbound or outbound process

Rej In
A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this
error is encountered inbound. Valid values are:
A
D
P
space

=
=
=
=

always reject for all partners
read global partner record to determine rejection
read specific partner record to determine rejection
do not reject on the error message

Rej Out
A 1-position field to control error rejection processing in the compliance Editor when this
error is encountered outbound. Valid values are:
A
D
P
space

=
=
=
=

always reject for all partners
read global partner record to determine rejection
read specific partner record to determine rejection
do not reject on the error message

Note: A value of spaces will be changed to either D or P when
an error rejection record is entered on the Error Rejection
screen. The D value results when error rejection is added
to the default Partner ID, while error rejection on a
Partner ID will produce a P value.
See the topic “Error Rejection Screen” in Chapter 2, “The
Partner Subsystem,” for more information.
Text (protected)
Displays information about the error – first 58 characters only.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 37

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Directory EDIM230

Configuration Directory

EDIM230

Purpose
The Configuration Directory (EDIM230) lists the records available in the Configuration file.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Directory screen in either of these two ways:
•

From the Administrative Main Menu, type 3 to select Configuration Directory
and press Enter.

•

Type 4.3 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Directory screen.
Select
EDIM230 4.3_______

CONFIGURATION DIRECTORY

A

Record Type

Description

_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_

T
0
1
2

Clear Key Processing Options
On-Line Processing Options
Additional On-Line Processing Options
Databank Processing Options

TO SELECT, TYPE AN "S" BESIDE CONFIG RECORD TYPE
Enter PF1=Help
PF3=Exit
PF7=Bwd PF8=Fwd

5 - 38

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

PF5=Id Maint

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Directory EDIM230

The Administration Subsystem

Screen Actions
Associated
with this screen
action ...

To perform
this action ...
View the Configuration
Maintenance screen for a config
record selected on the
Configuration Directory screen

Select

Do this ...
To select a Configuration
record to view or maintain,
type S next to the
Configuration record you want
to view on the Configuration
Directory screen, and then
press PF5.

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=ID Maint

Pass control to the Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen with key
information for the item selected by Action Code.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
A (Action Code)
A 1-position alphabetic field used to select a config record. Type S next to the selected
config record, then press the PF5 key to display the Configuration Maintenance screen.
Record Type (protected)
A 10-position alphabetic field that displays the record type for the configuration file.
Description (protected)
A 61-position alphabetic field that displays information about the configuration record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 39

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Part 1 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the first panel in a series of three panels for
the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update
configuration options to meet your requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A (Action Code) field to select the appropriate configuration record and pressing
PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen (panel 1
of 3).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

On-Line Options - Record Type 0

Panel 1 of 3

Program Image..................:
Security Password Min Length...:
Security Password Suppress.....:
Security Exit Program..........:
User Jump Code Table...........:
Jump Code Display Switch.......:
Save Last Key Used.............:
Disable Synchpoint.(VSE).......:
Year 2000 Value................:
Language Code..................:
Log Max Search.................:

EDI_______
04________
Y_________
__________
EDIJUMP___
1_________
0_________
0_________
50________
EN________
3000______

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

Time: 00:00:00

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Any 3 Digits/Characters
Valid Values - 01 To 08
Y=Yes
N=No

1=Numeric
0=Saved
0=No
DEFAULT = 50
Default = EN
1 - 4 digits

2=Alphabetic
1=Not Saved
1=Yes

User: SCI
PF5=More Opts

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

5 - 40

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

PF5=More Opts

Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 2.

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Displays the next record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update record the configuration Record that currently exists, type the new
information over the existing configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Program Image
A 3-byte alphanumeric field that contains the program image identification used to
implement the multiple program image feature of Sterling Gentran:Basic. This feature
enables you to specify alternate three characters that identify online programs to Sterling
Gentran. Use this feature if your installation requirement is for online programs to begin
with specific characters, or if you need to install two unique versions of the online system
(e.g., one test and one production) in the CICS region.
Security Password Min Length
A 2-byte numeric field that identifies the minimum length to which a password to the
Sterling Gentran:Basic system can be set. The default value is 04.
Security Password Suppress
A 1-byte alphanumeric flag that indicates whether to hide the user password on the
Security Maintenance (EDIM201) screen for users with security authorization of Level 1.
Valid values are:
Y
=
Suppress the display of the password on the screen
N
=
Do not suppress the display of the password on the screen
Security Exit Program
An 8-byte alphanumeric field that identifies a user-written exit program that bypasses the
Sterling Gentran:Basic signon screen. This exit should provide the signon ID from an
external security system.
For more information about how to use Security Exit programs, see “Using the User
Security Facility” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques,” in this guide.
Note: A sample program (EDIXSEC) is present in the
UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product.
User Jump Code Table
An 8-byte alphanumeric field that identifies a user-defined jump codes table.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 41

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Jump Code Display Switch
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to display either the numeric
or alphabetic values for the jump codes in the upper left corner of most Sterling Gentran
screens. Valid values are the following:
space =
1
=
2
=

Display numeric jump codes
Display numeric jump codes
Display alphabetic jump codes

Save Last Key Used
A 1-byte alphanumeric flag that enables you to indicate if ‘key’ information is to be saved
when navigating through the online system. Valid values are:
0

=

1

=

Saves key information. When jumping out and back to a screen
you can return to the previously displayed record. This is the
default value.
Does not save key information. Screens do not return to the
previously displayed record.

Disable Synchpoint (VSE only)
A 1-byte flag that enables you to activate the Synchpoint Rollback feature of CICS. Valid
values are:
1
0

=
=

Synchpoint Rollback is active
Synchpoint Rollback is not active

Year 2000 Value
A 2-byte numeric field used to specify the cut-off year to be used when converting 2-digit
year (YY) values into 4-digit values (YYYY). Any 2-digit year that is less than or equal to
this value is assigned YY=20. Otherwise, the conversion date is set to YY=19.
Example
With a Year 2000 value of 50, the input date of 07/01/99 is converted to 07/01/1999
because 99 is greater than 50. An input date of 07/01/05 is converted to 07/01/2005
because 5 is less than 50.
Language Code
A 2-byte alphabetic field that contains the language code to indicate the language used in
user text fields.This field contains values based on the EDIFACT element #3453
Language Code from ISO639-1988. Currently, the value EN (English) is the only
language supported.
Log Max Search
A 1 – 4 position numeric field that limits the number of records that will be read to satisfy
the search criteria for online displays.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 42

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Part 2 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the second panel in a series of three panels
for the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update
configuration options to meet your requirements.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 from Configuration Maintenance screen – 1.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen
(panel 2 of 3).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

On-Line Options - RECORD TYPE 0

PANEL 2 OF 3

Interchange Version............:
Group Version..................:
Transaction Version............:
Trading Profile Mode...........:
Multiple Envelope Enabled......:
Concurrency Enabled............:
CICS Applid for Concurrency....:
Message Center Enabled.........:
Message Center Cutoff Limit....:

N_________
N_________
N_________
P_________
N_________
N_________
__________
N_________
001000____

N=No
N=No
N=No
P=PART/QUAL
N=No
N=No

Time: 00:00:00

User: SCI

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev
PF10=Updt

N=No
6 digits

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Y=Yes
Y=Yes
Y=Yes
R=RELATION
Y=Yes
Y=Yes

M=MIX

Y=Yes

PF5=More Opts

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev

Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 1.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 43

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

PF5=More OptionsDisplays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 3.
PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Interchange Version (Outbound Only)
A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate whether to use version to read
partner records. Version is part of the partner key for interchange records. Valid values are:
N

=

Y

=

Use spaces in place of version for reading partner interchange
records.
Use version for reading interchange records.

Group Version
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether to use the Version as part of the partner
key for group records. Valid Values are:
N

=

Y

=

Do not use the Version as part of key for reading partner group
records.
Use the Version as part of key for reading partner group records.

Note: A ‘Y’ activates the following three global parameters:
GROUP VERSION
GROUP VERSION ERROR REJECTION
GROUP VERSION SPLIT
See Appendix A in the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS®
Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for additional details on global
parameters.
Transaction Version
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether to use the Version as part of the partner
key for transaction records. Valid Values are:

5 - 44

N

=

Y

=

Do not use the Version as part of key for reading partner
transaction records.
Use the Version as part of key for reading partner transaction
records.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Note: A ‘Y’ activates the following three global parameters:
TRANSACTION VERSION
TRANSACTION VERSION ERROR REJECTION
TRANSACTION VERSION SPLIT
See Appendix A of the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS®
Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for additional details on global
parameters.
Trading Profile Mode
A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to choose how trading partner key information
is stored on partner profile and the databanks. Valid values are:
P
R
M

=
=
=

Use Partner/Qualifier mode
Use Relationship mode
Use Partner/Qualifier mode for the partner and use Relationship
mode for databanking

Multiple Envelope Enabled
A 1-byte field that activates the Multiple Envelope feature. This feature allows a single
partner profile to have multiple EDI standards (X12, EDIFACT, TRADACOMS) defined
under it. It eliminates the need to create multiple partner profiles for a single trading
partner in the event that the partner uses more than one EDI standard. Valid values are:
N
Y

=
=

Do not use the Multiple Envelope feature.
Use the Multiple Envelope feature.

See the topic “Multiple Envelopes” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques”
for more information.
Concurrency Enabled
A 1-byte alphabetic field that activates the Concurrency feature. This feature allows
multiple jobs to update the partner control and databank files at the same time and improve
processing throughput. Valid values are:
N
Y

=
=

Do not use the Concurrency feature.
Use the Concurrency feature.

CICS Applid For Concurrency
If the Concurrency feature is enabled, this 8-byte alphabetic field will contain the Applid
of the CICS region that will own and update the partner control files and the databank
files.
Message Center Enabled
A 1-byte alphabetic field that activates the Message Center feature. This feature is used to
monitor the results of batch jobs from an online environment. Valid values are:
N
Y

=
=

Do not use the Message Center feature.
Use the Message Center feature.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 45

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

See the topic “Message Center” in Chapter 8, “Implementing Sterling Gentran:Basic” of
the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Installation Guide for more
information.
Message Center Cutoff Limit
If the Message Center feature is enabled, this 6-byte numeric field will contain the large
report cutoff limit. This cutoff limit is used to ensure that large reports do not overwhelm
the capacity of the Message Center files. The default value is 001000.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 46

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Part 3 / On-Line Options – Record Type 0
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the third panel in a series of three panels for
the on-line options, type 0 configuration record. On this screen, you can set and update
configuration options to meet your requirements.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for more information.

How to Access
Access this screen from the Configuration Maintenance screen – 2 by pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 0 screen
(panel 3 of 3).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

ON-LINE OPTIONS - RECORD TYPE 0

PANEL 3 OF 3

Partner Help Enabled...........:
Standards Help Enabled.........:
Databank Help Enabled..........:
Security Help Enabled..........:
Mapping Help Enabled...........:
Error Message Help Enabled.....:
Global Parameter Help Enabled..:
Config Help Enabled............:
Gentran:Plus Help Enabled......:
Gentran:Control Help Enabled...:
Gentran:Realtime Help Enabled..:
Gentran:Viewpoint Help Enabled.:

1_________
0_________
0_________
1_________
0_________
1_________
1_________
1_________
0_________
0_________
0_________
0_________

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

Time: 00:00:00

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev
PF10=Updt

0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not
0=Not

XXX

Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active
Active

06/01/2011
12:00:00

1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active
1=Active

User: SCI
PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev

Displays the previous Configuration Maintenance screen – 2.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 47

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Partner Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Partner subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active
Standards Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for Standards subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active
Databank Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for Databank subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active
Security Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Security subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active
Mapping Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Mapping subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active
Error Message Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Error Message subsystem. Valid values are:
0
=
Not Active
1
=
Active

5 - 48

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Global Parameter subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Config Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Configuration subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Gentran:Plus Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Sterling Gentran:Plus subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Gentran:Control Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Sterling Gentran:Control subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Gentran:Realtime Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Gentran:Viewpoint Help Enabled
A 1-byte alphanumeric field that configures Sterling Gentran to provide online field-level
Help for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint subsystem. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Not Active
Active

Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 49

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Part 1 / Additional Online Options – Record Type 1
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the first of two panels for the online report
processing options, type 1. These configuration records enable you to set and update additional
online options to meet your requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to Additional Online Options and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 1 screen (panel 1
of 2).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Additional Online Options - Record Type 1 Panel 1 of 2
User ID for Background Tasks...:
Batch Submit Exit..............:
Change Audit: Partner.........:
Change Audit: Standards.......:
Change Audit: Application.....:
Change Audit: Transaction.....:
Change Audit: Code Tables.....:
Change Audit: Security........:
Change Audit: Error Message...:
Change Audit: Configuration...:
Change Audit: Global Parameter:
Change Audit: Separator.......:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

__________
__________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________
Y_________

Time: 00:00:00

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled

N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled
N=Disabled

User: SCI
F5=More Opts

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

5 - 50

PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF5=More Opts

Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen–2.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
User ID for Background Tasks
An 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background
tasks in Sterling Gentran:Basic. The background task, EDIP (used for submitting batch
reports), is not affiliated with a terminal and, therefore, does not have a signon ID. This
field allows you to specify a security ID to use with this transactions. Valid values are any
valid User ID in your system.
For more information about how to use a User ID for Background Tasks, see “Configuring
JCL Submission and User Security” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and
Techniques,” in this guide.
Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and
any special resources that may be needed for the online
batch initiator process.
Batch Submit Exit
An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The
online batch initiator (EDIBOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch
destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling
Gentran:Basic system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler
system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader.
For more information about how to use a Batch Submit Exit, see “Configuring JCL
Submission and User Security” in Chapter 7, “System Features: Tips and Techniques,” in
this guide.
Note: A sample program (EDIBXIT) is present in the
UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product.
Change Audit: Partner
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Partner
subsystem.
Change Audit: Standards
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Standards
subsystem.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 51

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Change Audit: Application
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Application
subsystem.
Change Audit: Transaction
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Transaction
subsystem.
Change Audit: Code Tables
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Code Tables
subsystem.
Change Audit: Security
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Security
subsystem.
Change Audit: Error Message
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Error Message
subsystem.
Change Audit: Configuration
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Configuration
subsystem.
Change Audit: Global Parameter
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Global
Parameter subsystem.
Change Audit: Separator
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Separator
subsystem.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 52

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Part 2 / Additional Online Options – Record Type 1
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen is the second of two panels for the additional
online options, type 1.

How to Access
Access this screen by pressing PF5 from Configuration Maintenance screen - 1.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 1 screen (panel 2
of 2).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Additional Online Options - Record Type 1 Panel 2 of 2
Change Audit:
Change Audit:
Change Audit:

Plus:Remote.....:
Plus:Profile....:
Plus:Network....:

Change Audit:
Change Audit:

RTE/CTL :OCF....:
Realtime:Request:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

For future use
For future use
For future use

Y_________
Y_________

Time: 00:00:00

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev
PF10=Updt

Y=Enabled
Y=Enabled

N=Disabled
N=Disabled

User: SCI
PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev

Displays the Configuration Maintenance screen – 1.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data and press PF10.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 53

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Change Audit: Plus:Remote
For future use.
Change Audit: Plus:Profile
For future use.
Change Audit: Plus:Network
For future use.
Change Audit: RTE/CTL:OCF
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime Online Control file.
Note: If Sterling Gentran:Realtime is not installed, input to this
field is prohibited and CA Not Installed will display.
Change Audit: Realtime:Request
Indicates whether the Change Audit functionality has been enabled for the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime Request file.
Note: If Sterling Gentran:Realtime is not installed, input to this
field is prohibited and CA Not Installed will display.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 54

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Databank Options – Record Type 2
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the databank options, type 2 configuration
record enables you to set and update databank options to meet your requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to Data Processing Options and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 2 screen (panel 1
of 1).
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

Databank Options - Record Type 2

0360______
EDID______
F_________
F_________
F_________
F_________
__________
__________

F=Full
F=Full
F=Full
F=Full

Enable Ack Overdue.............:

__________

Y=Yes

Enter PF1=Help

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Panel 1 of 1

Databank Manager Scan Interval.:
Databank Manager Transaction ID:
Outbound Application Usage.....:
Outbound EDI Usage.............:
Inbound EDI Usage..............:
Inbound Application Usage......:
Databank Error User Exit PGM...:
Databank Error User Exit Data..:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00

XXX

Time: 00:00:00

D=Directory
D=Directory
D=Directory
D=Directory

N=None
N=None
N=None
N=None

N=No

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data and press PF10.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 55

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Databank Manager Scan Interval
A 4-byte numeric field that identifies the frequency with which the Databank Manager
activates and scans for functions to complete. The default value is 0360.
Databank Manager Transaction ID
A 4-byte alphanumeric field that identifies the Transaction ID used to start the Databank
Manager programs. Keep this name consistent with any changes made to the Sterling
Gentran:Basic system image. The default value is EDID.
Outbound Application Usage
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the outbound Application databank is to be
used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are:
F
D
N

=
=
=

Full (directory and message store)
Directory only
None

Outbound EDI Usage
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the outbound EDI databank is to be used in
Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are:
F
=
Full (directory and message store)
D
=
Directory only
N
=
None
Inbound EDI Usage
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the inbound EDI databank is to be used in
Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are:
F
D
N

=
=
=

Full (directory and message store)
Directory only
None

Inbound Application Usage
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates how the inbound Application databank is to be
used in Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are:
F
D
N

=
=
=

Full (directory and message store)
Directory only
None

Databank Error User Exit Pgm
An 8-byte alphanumeric field that contains the name of a user-written CICS program to be
called when a serious databank error occurs.

5 - 56

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Databank Error User Exit Data
A 20-byte alphanumeric field that contains a text string that is passed to the user exit
program.
Enable Ack Overdue
A 1-byte alphabetic field that indicates whether the Acknowledgment Overdue file will be
created when EDID510 (Acknowledgment Reconciliation) or EDID515 (Realtime
Acknowledgment Reconciliation) process in Monitor mode. The default is N. Valid values
are:
Y
N

=
=

Create acknowledgment overdue file
Do not create acknowledgment overdue file

Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 57

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Sterling Gentran:Plus Options – Record Type 3
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Plus, type 3
configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Plus options to meet your
requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 3 screen.
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

GENTRAN:Plus Options

Record Type 3

CONNECT Product Installed......:
CONNECT Version Level..........:
CONNECT Release Level..........:
CONNECT Maintenance Level......:
Friendly Mailbox Name..........:
CONNECT System Image...........:
Communication Directory Order..:
User ID Security Flag..........:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Panel 1 of 1

CE________
00________
00________
00________
MAILBOX4__
CM________
L_________
U_________

Time: 00:00:00

CE=Connect:Enterprise

R=Remote ID
L=List Name
N=None G=GENTRAN ID U=User ID

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

5 - 58

PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231
PF10=Updt

The Administration Subsystem

To update the configuration record, type the changed information over the
existing configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
CONNECT Product Installed
A 2-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate which CONNECT communication
product has been installed. Valid values are:
CE

=

IBM® Sterling Connect:Enterprise® is installed

CONNECT Version Level
A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the version level of the CONNECT
communication product that has been installed.
CONNECT Release Level
A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the release level of the CONNECT
communication product that has been installed.
CONNECT Maintenance Level
A 2-byte numeric field that enables you to indicate the maintenance level of the
CONNECT communication product that has been installed.
Friendly Mailbox Name
An 8-byte alphanumeric field that enables you to indicate the symbolic name to be used
when interfacing with the CONNECT communication product.
CONNECT System Image (optional)
A 2-byte alphanumeric field that enables you to indicate the system image to be used when
interfacing with the CONNECT communication product. The default value is CM.
Communication Directory Order (optional)
A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate the default sequence to be used for
the initial display of the Communication Directory (EDIM404). Valid values are:
R
L

=
=

Displays screen in remote ID sequence
Displays screen in list name sequence

User ID Security Flag (optional)
A 1-byte alphabetic field that enables you to indicate the type of security to be used when
interfacing with the CONNECT communication product. Valid values are:
N
G

=
=

No security. This is the default value.
The Sterling Gentran User ID and password that were entered on
the Logon (EDIM000) screen are used.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 59

The Administration Subsystem
U

=

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231
The first time a Sterling Gentran:Plus screen is invoked, the
Communications Security (EDIM40V) screen will display to
request a user specified User ID and password.

Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 60

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint Options – Record Type 4
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint, type 4
configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint options to meet
your requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 4 screen.
EDIM231

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

GENTRAN:Viewpoint Options - Record Type 4
Exception Mgmt Installed.............:
Exception Mgmt Version No............:
Exception Mgmt Partner Def...........:
Tracking Mgmt Installed..............:
Tracking Mgmt Version No.............:
Tracking Mgmt Partner Def............:
Tracking Mgmt Find Lmt...............:
Tracking Mgmt Search Lmt.............:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter

PF1=Help

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Panel 1 of 1

Y_________
6.6_______
N_________
N_________
__________
N_________
000100____
010000____

Time: 00:00:00

Y=Installed N=Not Installed
Y=Yes
N=No
Y=Installed N=Not Installed
Y=Yes

N=No

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data and press PF10.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 61

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Exception Mgmt Installed
A 1-byte flag indicating if Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is active. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Sterling Gentran:Viewpoint is active.
Feature is not active.

Exception Mgmt Version No.
A 5 digit number that indicates the Exception Management version number in the format
n.nnn (e.g., 6.6).
Exception Mgmt Partner Def
A 1-byte flag indicating the default value for partner values. This option can be used to
control the initial amount of capture information for Exception Management, by partner,
without updating the field in the partner profiles. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

The default partner value is YES. Blank partner values indicate
that Exception Management IS enabled for the partner.
The default partner value is NO. Blank partner values indicate
that Exception Management IS NOT enabled for the partner.

Tracking Mgmt Installed
A 1-byte flag indicating whether or not the Viewpoint Tracking Management option has
been implemented with Sterling Gentran:Basic. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Tracking Management is active.
Tracking Management is not available.

Tracking Mgmt Version No.
A 5-digit number that indicates the Tracking Management version number in the format
n.nnn (e.g., 6.6).
Tracking Mgmt Partner Def
A 1-byte flag indicating the default value for partner values. This option can be used to
control the initial amount of capture information for Tracking Management, by partner,
without updating the field in the partner profiles. Valid values are:

5 - 62

Y

=

N

=

The default partner value is YES. Blank partner values indicate
that Tracking Management IS enabled for the partner.
The default partner value is NO. Blank partner values indicate
that Tracking Management IS NOT enabled for the partner.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Tracking Mgmt Find Lmt
A 1 – 6 position number to limit the number of items, that satisfy the search criteria, to be
displayed by the Query Request Search function. This field is only required by the
Tracking Management feature.
Tracking Mgmt Search Lmt
A 1 – 6 position number to specify the maximum number of items the search function
evaluates, for items matching the search criteria. This field is only required by the
Tracking Management feature.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 63

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Sterling Gentran:Structure Options – Record Type 7
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Structure, type 7
configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Structure options to meet your
requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to the appropriate Configuration record and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type 7 screen.
EDIM231

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

GENTRAN:Structure Options - Record Type 7

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Panel 1 of 1

Structure System Identifier....: __________
__________
____

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter

PF1=Help

Time: 00:00:00

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Next Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.

5 - 64

PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record on the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Structure System Identifier
A 24-position alphabetic field containing the product and release information. Also, this
field information will display on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon screen.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 65

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Sterling Gentran:Realtime Options – Record Type B
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Realtime, type B
configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Realtime options to meet your
requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field corresponding to the configuration record, Sterling Gentran:Realtime
Processing Options, and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type B screen.
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Gentran:Realtime Options - Record Type B Panel 1 of 1
Realtime System Identifier.....:

GENTRAN:RE
ALTIME_6.6

Syncpoint Rollback Switch......:
User ID for Background tasks...:
Batch Submit Exit..............:
Asynchronous Reporting.........:

0_________
__________
__________
0_________

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

Time: 00:00:00

0=Enable

1=Disable

0=Enable

1=Disable

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

5 - 66

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Realtime System Identifier
A 30-position alphabetic field identifying the version of Sterling Gentran:Realtime
installed on the system. Also, the information in this field displays on the Sterling
Gentran:Basic Logon screen.
Syncpoint Rollback Switch
A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Syncpoint Rollback command in the
Sterling Gentran:Realtime gateways. When a Realtime process encounters an error, the
gateway that started the process will issue a Syncpoint Rollback command that will back
out all recoverable resources. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Enable the Rollback operation. This is the default value.
Disable the Rollback operation.

User ID for Background tasks
An 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background
tasks in Sterling Gentran:Realtime. Some primary background tasks, such as EDII (online
scanner initiator) and EDIB (online batch initiator) are not affiliated with a terminal and,
therefore, do not have a signon ID. This field allows you to specify a security ID to use
with these types of tasks. Valid values include any valid User ID in your system.
Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and
any special resources that may be needed for the online
batch initiator process.
Batch Submit Exit
An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The
online batch initiator (EDIEOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch
destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling
Gentran:Realtime system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler
system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader.
Note: A sample program (EDISUBXT) is present in the
UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 67

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Asynchronous Reporting
A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Asynchronous Reporting subsystem in
Sterling Gentran:Realtime. When you enable this switch, the Asynchronous Reporting
subsystem uses background tasks (EDIQ transaction) to perform the actual writes to the
reporting subsystem files (EDIRRC and EDIRRD). All programs that create reports will
use the background task to perform the updates.
When you disable the switch, the actual writes are performed in the program which creates
the report. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Enable asynchronous reporting
Disable asynchronous reporting. This is the default value.

Note: Using the asynchronous process will improve the
performance of the translation and utility programs by
removing the waits for I/O that are performed when the
programs are writing the reports.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

5 - 68

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Sterling Gentran:Control Options – Record Type E
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the Sterling Gentran:Control, type E
configuration record enables you to set and update Sterling Gentran:Control options to meet your
requirements.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field beside the configuration record, Sterling Gentran:Control Processing
Option, and pressing PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type E screen.
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Gentran:Control Options - Record Type E Panel 1 of 1
Control System Identifier......:

Syncpoint Rollback Switch......:
User ID for Background tasks...:
Batch Submit Exit..............:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

GENTRAN:CO
NTROL_6.6_
__________
__________
__________
__________

0=Enable

Time: 00:00:00

1=Disable

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

Displays the Configuration Directory screen.

PF6=Next Cnfg

Displays the next sequential record in the Configuration file

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 69

The Administration Subsystem
PF10=Updt

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Control System Identifier
A 20-position alphabetic field identifying the version of Sterling Gentran:Control installed
on the system. The information in this field will display on the Sterling Gentran:Basic
Logon screen.
Syncpoint Rollback Switch
A 1-position switch that controls the usage of the Syncpoint Rollback command in the
Sterling Gentran:Control gateways. When a Control process encounters an error, the
gateway that started the process will issue a Syncpoint Rollback command that will back
out all recoverable resources. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

Enable the Rollback operation. This is the default value.
Disable the Rollback operation.

User ID for Background tasks
A 8-position alphabetic field used to enter a User ID for security control of background
tasks in Sterling Gentran:Control. Some primary background tasks in Control, such as
EDII (online scanner initiator) and EDIB (online batch initiator) are not affiliated with a
terminal and, therefore, do not have a signon ID. This field allows you to specify a
security ID to use with these types of tasks. Valid values include any valid User ID in your
system.
Note: The ID must have access to the Sterling Gentran files and
any special resources that may be needed for the online
batch initiator process.
Batch Submit Exit
An 8-position alphabetic field that is used to enter a user-written batch submit exit. The
online batch initiator (EDIEOBI) program will use this exit instead of writing to the Batch
destination transient data queue (EDII) when submitting batch jobs from the Sterling
Gentran:Control system. Use this exit when you need to submit jobs through a Scheduler
system rather than through a CICS controlled internal reader.
Note: A sample program (EDISUBXT) is present in the
UTILITY.SOURCE library delivered with the product.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.

5 - 70

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 71

The Administration Subsystem

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

Configuration Maintenance Screen

EDIM231

Clear Options – Record Type T
Purpose
The Configuration Maintenance (EDIM231) screen for the clear key options, type T configuration
record enables you to apply a message, as you deem appropriate, that is specific to the Clear=Exit
feature.

How to Access
Access the Configuration Maintenance screen from the Configuration Directory (EDIM230) by
typing S in the A field beside the configuration record, Clear Key Processing Options, and press
PF5.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates the Configuration Maintenance Record Type T screen.
EDIM231 __________

CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

GENTRAN:Clear Key Options Record Type T Panel 1 of 1
Clear Message..................:

Last Update Date: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

PAUSE_=_EX
IT_PC_KYBD

Time: 00:00:00

User: SCI

PF3=Exit PF4=Dir
PF10=Updt

PF6=Nxt Cnfg

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Dir

5 - 72

Displays the Configuration Directory.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Configuration Maintenance Screen EDIM231

The Administration Subsystem

PF6=Next Cnfg

Display next sequential record on the Configuration file.

PF10=Updt

To update the configuration record, type the new information over the existing
configuration data, and press PF10.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Clear Message
A 20-position alphabetic message to be displayed on the Sterling Gentran:Basic Logon
screen if Clear=Exit feature is enabled.
Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials of the user who last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 73

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A

Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen

EDIM220/EDIM22A

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 1 (EDIM220/EDIM22A) screens are used to display and update
general processing and databank options global parameter records. If you access these screens
from the Administrative Main Menu (EDIM210) or by using the jump code, the inbound global
parameter record will display.

How to Access
1.

2.

Access the Global Parameter Maint-1 screens in either of these two ways:
•

From the Administrative Main Menu, type 4 to select Global Parameter
Maintenance and press Enter.

•

Type 4.4 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Perform one of the following:
To display global parameters for inbound, type I in the Inbound/Outbound field and press
Enter.
OR
To display global parameters for outbound, Type O in the Inbound/Outbound field and
press Enter.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 1 screens for both inbound
and outbound data.

Inbound
EDIM220 4.4_______
Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-1
I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

General Processing Options:
ICS Tables.................:
Code Check.................:
Error Report...............:
Output Message.............:

N
Y
Y
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

=
=
=
=

ICS Tables On
N = ICS Tables Off
Code Check On
N = Code Check Off
Always Generate Error Report
Message
On
N = Message
Off

N
F
D
D

Y
F
D
D

=
=
=
=

Use Partner For Databank Level
Full
D = Directory Only
N = None
Directory
N = None
Directory
N = None

Databank Options:
Partner Databank...........:
EDI Databank Interchange...:
EDI Databank Group.........:
EDI Databank Transaction...:
Last Update Date..: 02/09/00
Enter PF1=Help

5 - 74

Time..: 15:12:41

PF3=Exit
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A

The Administration Subsystem

Outbound
EDIM22A 4.4_______
Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-1
O

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** OUTBOUND ***

General Processing Options:
ICS Tables.................: N
Code Check.................: Y
Error Report...............: Y

Y = ICS Tables On
N = ICS Tables Off
Y = Code Check On
N = Code Check Off
Y = Always Generate Error Report

Databank Options:
Partner Databank...........:
EDI Databank Interchange...:
EDI Databank Group.........:
EDI Databank Transaction...:
Last Update Date..: 05/11/00
Enter PF1=Help

N
F
D
D

Y
F
D
D

=
=
=
=

Use Partner For Databank Level
Full
D = Directory Only
N = None
Directory
N = None
Directory
N = None

Time..: 14:12:07

PF3=Exit
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF5=Next GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are:
I
O

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 75

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A

General Processing Options
ICS Tables
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the format of ICS/ICE envelopes
to be accepted by the Editors. The global parameter equivalents are ICS TABLES ON /
ICS TABLES OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Only accept the new format. This is the default value.
Accept both formats

Code Check
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Editors should
perform code verification. The global parameter equivalents are CODE CHECK ON /
CODE CHECK OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Perform code validation. This is the default value.
Do not validate codes

Error Report
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an error
report if no errors are detected. The global parameter equivalents is ERROR REPORT
ALWAYS. Valid values are:
Y
=
Always generate an error report
N
=
Only generate a report if an error is detected. This is the default
value.
Output Message (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to write error messages
to the output file. The global parameter equivalents are OUTPUT MESSAGE ON /
OUTPUT MESSAGE OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Write error messages to the output file. This is the default value.
Do not write error messages to the output file.

Databank Options
Partner Databank
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the partner profile
to determine databank level. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER DATABANK
LEVEL. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Use the partner profile to determine the databank level.
Do not use the partner profile to determine the databank level.
This is the default value.

Each of the following three databank levels (interchange, group, and transaction) are
independently controlled by the appropriate global parameter. If you activate any of the
following three global parameter settings, databanking can be performed for all partners at
the indicated level, regardless of the PARTNER DATABANK parameter or the settings for
any individual partner. However, you can perform databanking with any combination of
levels.
EDI Databank Interchange
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be
used for Interchange processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/
OUTBOUND EDI INTERCHANGE FULL, INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI

5 - 76

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 1 Screen EDIM220/EDIM22A

The Administration Subsystem

INTERCHANGE DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI INTERCHANGE
NONE. Valid values are:
F

=

D
N

=
=

For each Interchange, directory and message store entries are
generated.
For each Interchange, directory entries are generated.
Databank feature is not used at Interchange level. This is the
default value.

EDI Databank Group
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be
used for Group processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/
OUTBOUND EDI GROUP DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI GROUP
NONE. Valid values are:
D
N

=
=

For each Group, directory entries are generated.
Databank feature is not used at Group level.This is the default
value.

EDI Databank Transaction
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate the level of databanking to be
used for Transaction processing. The global parameter equivalents are INBOUND/
OUTBOUND EDI TRANSACTION DIRECTORY, and INBOUND/OUTBOUND EDI
TRANSACTION NONE. Valid values are:
D
N

=
=

For each transaction, directory entries are generated.
Databank feature is not used at the transaction level. This is the
default value.

Last Update Date (protected)
Displays the date that this record was last updated.
Time (protected)
Displays the time that this record was last updated.
User (protected)
Displays the initials for the user that last updated this record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 77

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen

EDIM221/EDIM22B

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 2 (EDIM221/EDIM22B) screens are used to display and update the
partner processing options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound data.

How to Access
Access the Global Parameter Maint-2 screens by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-1
screen.
Note: No jump codes are associated with these screens.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 2 screens for both inbound
and outbound data.

Inbound
EDIM221 __________
Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-2
I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

Partner Processing Options:
Verify Interchange.........:
Verify Group...............:
Verify Transaction.........:
Interchange Version........:

N
N
N
_

Group Version..............: _
Partner Sequence Error.....: N
BG Partner.................: Y

Last Update Date..: 07/14/03
Enter PF1=Help

5 - 78

Y
Y
Y
A
F
A
F
C
N
Y

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Verify Interchange Partner ID
Verify Group ID
Verify Transaction ID
Always Interchange
Interchange
Blank = None
Always Group
Group
Blank = None
Chronological, I = Incremental
None
Verify Comm ID and Password

Time..: 14:53:44

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B

The Administration Subsystem

Outbound
EDIM22B __________
Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-2
O

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** OUTBOUND ***

Partner Processing Options:
Verify Interchange.........:
Verify Group...............:
Verify Transaction.........:
Interchange Version........:

N
N
N
_

Group Version..............: _

Last Update Date..: 07/14/03
Enter PF1=Help

Y
Y
Y
A
F
A
F

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Verify Interchange Partner ID
Verify Group ID
Verify Transaction ID
Always Interchange
Interchange
Blank = None
Always Group
Group
Blank = None

Time..: 14:55:04

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-1 screen.

PF5=Next GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen for inbound or the Global
Parameter Maint-4 screen for outbound.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound (protected)
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are:
I
O

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 79

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B

Partner Processing Options
Verify Interchange
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Interchange
IDs against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER
INTERCHANGE and VERIFY PARTNER INTERCHANGE OFF. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Validate the Interchange Sender (inbound) and Receiver
(outbound) IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence.
A partner must exist in the partner profile (Control record).
Do not verify the partner at Interchange level. This is the default
value.

Verify Group
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Group ID
against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER
GROUP and VERIFY PARTNER GROUP OFF. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Validate the Group Sender (inbound) and Receiver (outbound)
IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence. A Group
information record for this partner must exist in the partner
profile for this Functional Group ID.
Do not verify the partner at Group level. This is the default value.

Verify Transaction
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Transaction
ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY PARTNER
TRANSACTION and VERIFY PARTNER TRANSACTION OFF. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Validate the Transaction Sender (inbound) and Receiver
(outbound) IDs by checking the partner profile for their existence.
A transaction record for this partner must exist in the partner
profile for this transaction set.
Do not verify the partner at transaction level. This is the default
value.

Interchange Version
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether processing is to override
the version sent on the control envelope and use the version defined in the partner profile
instead. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS
INTERCHANGE and PARTNER VERSION INTERCHANGE. Valid values are:
A

=

F

=

space =

5 - 80

Always use the version on the partner control record for
compliance checking.
The Version Use field on the Partner Control record is to be used
to determine the version to be used.
If Version Use = A – always use the partner version.
If Version Use = I – always use the input version.
If Version Use = D – use the partner version only if the
input version is not available on the standards table.
Always use the version on the Interchange envelope.This is the
default value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B

The Administration Subsystem

Group Version
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether processing is to override
the version sent on the Group envelope and use the version defined in the partner profile
instead. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER VERSION ALWAYS GROUP
and PARTNER VERSION GROUP. Valid values are:
A

=

F

=

space =

Always use the version on the partner Group record for
compliance checking.
The Version Use field on the Partner Group record is to be used to
determine the version to be used.
If Version Use = A – always use the partner version.
If Version Use = I – always use the input version.
If Version Use = D – use the partner version only if the
input version is not available on the standards table.
Always use the version on the Group envelope.This is the default
value.

Partner Sequence Error (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to verify incoming
control numbers against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are
PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – CHRONOLOGICAL, PARTNER SEQUENCE
ERROR-INCREMENTAL, and PARTNER SEQUENCE ERROR – OFF. Valid values
are:
C

=

I

=

N

=

The Inbound Editor checks the previous control number received
against the current control number at the Interchange, Group, and
transaction level. If the current control number is not greater than
the previous control number received, an error message is
generated. The current control number is stored on the partner
record.
The Inbound Editor checks the previous control number received
against the current control number at the Interchange, Group, and
transaction level. If the current control number is not exactly one
(1) greater than the previous control number received, an error
message is generated. The current control number is stored on the
partner record.
Do not perform control number verification. This is the default
value.

BG Partner (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate how the Inbound Editor is to
control what the communication ID and password contains on BG segments surrounding
acknowledgments. If the BG PASSWORD on the incoming document (BG02) does not
match the BG-PASSWORD field on the partner control record then an error is generated.
The global parameter equivalent is BG PARTNER YES. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Verify CommID and Password from BG against partner profile.
Do not verify CommID and Password. This is the default value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 81

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 2 Screen EDIM221/EDIM22B

Last Update Date
Displays the last date the record was updated.
Time
Displays the last time the record was updated.
User
Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record.

5 - 82

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen

EDIM222

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 3 (EDIM222) screen is used to display and update partner lookup
options on the global parameter records for inbound data only.

How to Access
Access the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-2
screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Example
The following example illustrates of the Global Parameter Maintenance 3 screen for inbound data
only.
EDIM222 __________
Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-3
I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

Partner Lookup Options (Inbound Only):
Partner Xref...............: 0
ISA Processing Sequence....: 0
BG Processing Sequence.....: 0
GS Sender Lookup...........: 0
GS Receiver Lookup.........: 0

Last Update Date..: 02/09/00
Enter PF1=Help

0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Default
1 = No Xref 2 = Xref First
Sender ID Only
Sender ID/Author 2 = Author/Sender ID
Sender ID Only
Sender ID/COMMID 2 = COMMID/Sender ID
Sender Qual Blank
Sender Qual Interchg
Receiver Qual Blank
Receiver Qual Interchg
Use Unresolved Intchg Qual For Receiver

Time..: 15:12:41

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen.

PF5=Next GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 83

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound (protected)
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. This field displays
the value I for inbound.
Partner Lookup Options
Partner X-Ref (Inbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate how the Partner X-Ref file is to be
processed by the Inbound Editor. The global parameter equivalents are PARTNER XREF
FIRST and NO PARTNER XREF. Valid values are:
0

=

1

=

2

=

Read partner profile first. Most partners have been set up using
their EDI IDs but some were set up using X-Ref file. This is the
default value.
Never use X-Ref file. All partners have been set up using their
EDI IDs
Read the X-Ref file first. Most or all partners are set up using
X-Ref.

ISA Processing Sequence (Inbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the order of partner lookup for ISA
envelopes. The global parameter equivalents are ISA SENDER ID/AUTHORIZATION
and ISA AUTHORIZATION/SENDER ID. Valid values are:
0
1

=
=

2

=

Use Sender ID only.This is the default value.
All or a majority of trading partners that use the ISA Interchange
are set up on the partner profile using Sender ID. If the
authorization information qualifier contains a 01 then the
authorization information is used as a second look-up should
Sender ID not be found on the partner profile.
All or a majority of trading partners that use the ISA Interchange
and have an Authorization Info. Qualifier of 01 is set up on the
partner profile using Authorization Information.

BG Processing Sequence (Inbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the order of partner lookup for BG
envelopes. The global parameter equivalents are:
BG SENDER ID/COMMID
BG COMMID/SENDER ID
Valid values are:
0
1

5 - 84

=
=

Use the Sender ID only. This is the default value.
All or a majority of trading partners that use the BG Interchange
are set up on the partner profile using Sender ID. If Sender ID is
not found then try COMMID.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 3 Screen EDIM222
2

=

The Administration Subsystem

All or a majority of trading partners that use the BG Interchange
are set up on the partner profile using COMMID. If COMMID is
not found then try the Sender ID.

GS Sender Lookup (Inbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag to control what group Qualifier is contained in the partner
profile. The global parameter equivalents are:
GS SENDER QUALIFIER SPACES
GS SENDER QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE
Valid values are:
0

=

1

=

Use the Partner ID/Qualifier of spaces when performing group
and transaction partner lookups for the Sender ID.
Use the Interchange Qualifier for the group Partner ID/Qualifier
when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the
Sender ID.

Note: If spaces are used, the interchange Qualifier is selected
from the Qualifier associated with the partner name on
the partner file, NOT the Qualifer contained on the EDI
envelope.
GS Receiver Lookup (Inbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag to control what the group Qualifier is to be for the GS Receiver
Partner lookup. The global parameter equivalents are:
GS RECEIVER QUALIFIER SPACES
GS RECEIVER QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE
Valid values are:
0

=

1

=

2

=

Use the Partner ID/Qualifier of spaces when performing group
and transaction partner lookups for the Receiver ID.
Use the interchange Qualifier for the group Partner ID Qualifier
when performing group and transaction partner lookups for the
Receiver ID.
Use the unresolved Interchange Qualifier for the Receiver ID
lookup. The global parameter equivalent is GS RECEIVER
QUALIFIER INTERCHANGE/UN.

Note: If spaces are used, the interchange Qualifier is selected
from the Qualifier associated with the partner name on
the partner file, NOT the Qualifer contained on the EDI
envelope.
Last Update Date
Displays the last date the record was updated.
Time
Displays the last time the record was updated.
User
Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 85

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D

Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen

EDIM223/EDIM22D

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 4 (EDIM223/EDIM22D) screens are is used to display and update
rejection and data separation options on the global parameter records for inbound and outbound
data.

How to Access
Access the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-3
screen for inbound or the Global Parameter Maint-2 screen for outbound.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 4 screen for both inbound
and outbound data.

Inbound
EDIM223 __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-4

I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

Rejection Processing Options:
Partner Error Rejection....: N

Y = Use Partner Error Rejection

Data Separation Options:
Directed Output Files......: Y. Y = Use Partner Data Separation
Split By Partner...........: Y Y = Use Sender ID For Data Separation
Transaction Test/Prod......: N Y = Use Test/Prod For Trans Data Separation
Receiver Processing Options:
Verify Receiver Interchange: N Y = Verify Interchange Receiver ID
Verify Receiver Group......: N Y = Verify Group Receiver ID

Last Update Date..: 05/09/04
Enter PF1=Help

5 - 86

Time..: 15:12:41

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D

The Administration Subsystem

Outbound
EDIM22D __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-4

O

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** OUTBOUND ***

Rejection Processing Options:
Partner Error Rejection....: N

Y = Use Partner Error Rejection

Data Separation Options:
Directed Output Files......: N

Last Update Date..: 07/14/03
Enter PF1=Help

Y = Use Partner Data Separation

Time..: 14:55:04

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-3 screen for inbound or the Global
Parameter Maint-2 screen for outbound.

PF5=Next GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound (protected)
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are:
I
O

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 87

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D

Rejection Processing Options
Partner Error Rejection
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Partner Error
Rejection feature is to be utilized. The global parameter equivalent is PARTNER ERROR
CONTROL. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Use partner error rejection
Error rejection is not active. This is the default value.

Data Separation Options
Directed Output Files
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Data Separation
feature is to be used. The global parameter equivalent is DIRECTED OUTPUT FILES.
Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Instructs the Editors to use the Data Separation feature of the
partner profile to determine which split file is to receive this
document.
Data Separation feature is not active. This is the default value.

Split by Partner (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether the Inbound Editor
should use the Receiver ID (default value) or Sender ID when reading the partner profile
to determine which split file is to receive the document. Used with Directed Output files.
The global parameter equivalent is SENDER ID FOR DATA SEPARATION. Valid values
are:
Y
N

=
=

Use the Sender ID for data separation.
Use the Receiver ID for data separation. This is the default value.

Transaction Test/Prod (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that the transaction partner data
separation records were set up by using the optional Test Production field. The global
parameter equivalent is TRANSACTION TEST/PRODUCTION SPLIT. Valid values are:

5 - 88

Y

=

N

=

The Editor uses the test/production status from the transaction
partner profile record as part of the key when looking up the
transaction level data separation record. If no record is found, the
Editor performs a second transaction lookup without the test/
production field.
Partner data separation records were set up without test/
production. This is the default value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 4 Screen EDIM223/EDIM22D

The Administration Subsystem

Receiver Processing Options
Verify Receiver Interchange
A one-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the
Interchange Receiver ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are
VERIFY RECEIVER INTERCHANGE and VERIFY RECEIVER INTERCHANGE
OFF. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Validate the Interchange Receiver IDs (inbound) by checking the
partner profile for their existence. A partner must exist in the
Partner Profile (control record).
Do not verify the Receiver IDs at the Interchange level. This is
the default value.

Verify Receiver Group
A one-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to check the Group
Receiver ID against the partner profile. The global parameter equivalents are VERIFY
RECEIVER GROUP and VERIFY RECEIVER GROUP OFF. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Validate the Group Receiver IDs (inbound) by checking the
partner profile for their existence.
Do not verify the Group Receiver IDs. This is the default value.

Last Update Date
Displays the last date the record was updated.
Time
Displays the last time the record was updated.
User
Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 89

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen

EDIM224/EDIM22E

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 5 (EDIM224/EDIM22E) screens are used to display and update
Acknowledgment and Wrapping options on the global parameter records for inbound and
outbound data.

How to Access
Access the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-4
screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance 5 screen for both inbound
and outbound data.

Inbound
EDIM224 __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-5

I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

Acknowledgment Options:
Acknowledge Interchange....:
Acknowledge Group..........:
Acknowledge Transaction....:
Acknowledge Errors.........:
Partner Acknowledgment.....:
Use CNTL for Acks..........:
Generate A2 Record.........:
Generate TCR...............:
Last Update Date..: 02/09/00
Enter PF1=Help

5 - 90

N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N

Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Always Acknowledge Interchange
Always Acknowledge Group
Always Acknowledge Transaction
Always Acknowledge Errors
Use Partner To Generate Acknowledgment
Use CNTL for Acknowledgments
Generate A2 Acceptance
Generate TCR for Acknowledgment

Time..: 15:12:41

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

User..: XXX
PF5=Next GBL

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E

The Administration Subsystem

Outbound
EDIM22E __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-5

O

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** OUTBOUND ***

Wrapping:
Wrapping Level.............: 0

Last Update Date..: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

0 = Int

1 = Grp

Time..: 00:00:00

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

2 = Trn

3 = Seg

4 = All

User..: SCI
PF5=Next GBL

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-4 screen.

PF5=Next GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-6 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound (protected)
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are:
I
O

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 91

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E

Acknowledgment Options
Acknowledge Interchange (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an
Interchange level acknowledgment when an ISA, ICS, or UNB Interchange is received
inbound. The global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE INTERCHANGE ON
and ACKNOWLEDGE INTERCHANGE OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Generate an Interchange level acknowledgment.
Do not generate an Interchange level acknowledgment. This is
the default value.

Acknowledge Group (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a Group level
acknowledgment when a GS or UNG Group envelope is received inbound. The global
parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE GROUP ON and ACKNOWLEDGE
GROUP OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Generate a Group level acknowledgment.
Do not generate a Group level acknowledgment. This is the
default value.

Acknowledge Transaction (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a transaction
level acknowledgment when an ST or UNH transaction envelope is received inbound. The
global parameter equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSACTION ON and
ACKNOWLEDGE TRANSACTION OFF. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Generate a transaction level acknowledgment.
Do not generate a transaction level acknowledgment. This is the
default value.

Acknowledge Errors (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate an
acknowledgment when an error is detected in any data segments. The global parameter
equivalents are ACKNOWLEDGE ERRORS ON and ACKNOWLEDGE ERRORS OFF.
Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Generate an acknowledgment if an error is detected.
Do not generate an acknowledgment on error detection. This is
the default value.

Note: If errors occur and this global parameter is set to Y,
acknowledgments will be generated even if the
ACKNOWLEDGE GROUP AND ACKNOWLEDGE
TRANSACTION parameters of set to OFF.
Partner Acknowledgment (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag to instruct the Inbound Editor to look at the partner profile for
information on acknowledgment generation. The global parameter equivalent is
PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. Valid values are:
Y
N

5 - 92

=
=

Use the partner profile to determine acknowledgment generation.
Do not use the partner profile for acknowledgment generation.
This is the default value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E

The Administration Subsystem

Note: If any of the four global acknowledgement previously
listed settings are activated, ALL partners will be
acknowledged at the indicated level, regardless of the
PARTNER ACKNOWLEDGEMENT parameter or the
settings for any individual partner.
Use CNTL for Acks (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate to the Inbound Editor to use
CNTL records when building acknowledgments. The acknowledgments need to go
through the envelope generation process before being processed outbound. The global
parameter equivalent is USE CNTL FOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS. Valid values are:
Y

=

Create acknowledgments with CNTL records.
See the topic “Outbound Envelope Generation” in Chapter 3 in
the IBM® Sterling Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6
Technical Reference Guide for information.

N

=

Generate envelopes for acknowledgments. This is the default
value.

Generate A2 Record (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that an A2 segment is to be
generated for each accepted transaction. The global parameter equivalent is GENERATE
A2 ACCEPTANCE. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

An A2 segment is generated for accepted transactions and an A1
is generated for rejected transactions if Acknowledge Errors is
active.
A1/A2 acknowledgments are not generated. This is the default
value.

Generate TCR (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to generate a TCR (user
defined transmission) record for acknowledgments being created by the Inbound Editor.
The global parameter equivalent is GENERATE TCR FOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT.
Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Generate a TCR record with the acknowledgment if a $TCR
record for the user is found on the partner profile.
Do not generate a TCR record. This is the default value.

Wrapping Options
Wrapping Level (Outbound Only)
A 1-position numeric flag that enables you to indicate the wrapping level for outbound
documents. The global parameter equivalents are COMPRESS TRANSMISSION,
COMPRESS GROUP, COMPRESS TRANSACTION, COMPRESS SEGMENT, and
COMPRESS ALL. Valid values are:
0

=

1

=

Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position
one. Each consecutive segment within that Interchange begins
immediately following the terminator of the previous segment.
This is the default value.
Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position
one. Each Group envelope begins on a new record in position

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 93

The Administration Subsystem

2

=

3

=

4

=

Global Parameter Maint 5 Screen EDIM224/EDIM22E
one. Each consecutive segment within that Group begins
immediately following the terminator of the previous segment.
Each Interchange envelope begins on a new record in position
one. Each Group envelope begins on a new record in position
one. Each transaction envelope begins on a new record in
position one. Each consecutive segment within that transaction
begins immediately following the terminator of the previous
segment.
Do not perform wrapping. Each segment begins on a new record
in position one.
The first Interchange envelope begins on the first record in
position one. Each consecutive segment begins immediately
following the terminator of the previous segment.

Last Update Date
Displays the last date the record was updated.
Time
Displays the last time the record was updated.
User
Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record.

5 - 94

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen

EDIM225/EDIM22F

Purpose
The Global Parameter Maint 6 (EDIM225/EDIM22F) screens are used to display and update
EDIFACT/TRADACOMS and add-on product options on the global parameter records for
inbound and outbound data.

How to Access
Access the Global Parameter Maint-6 screen by pressing PF5 from the Global Parameter Maint-5
screen.
Note: No jump code is associated with this screen.

Screen Examples
The following examples illustrate the Global Parameter Maintenance-6 screen for both inbound
and outbound data.

Inbound
EDIM225 __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-6

I

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** INBOUND ***

EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options:
Use STX Qualifier............: N
Error Rejection..............: N

Y = ON
N = OFF
T = Tradacoms
Y = Non-Tradacoms
N = Not Active

Add On Product Options:
Examiner Tracking............: N

Last Update Date..: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

Y = ON

Time..: 00:00:00

N = OFF

User..: XXX

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 95

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F

Outbound
EDIM22F __________

Inbound/Outbound:

GLOBAL PARAMETER MAINT-6

O

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

*** OUTBOUND ***

EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options:
Use STX Qualifier............: N

Y = ON

N = OFF

Delete Optional Blanks.......: N
Delete All Blanks............: N

Y = Optional Blanks Removed
Y = All Blanks Removed

Add On Product Options:

Viewpoint Track Output Files.: N
Plus Will Assign Batch #.....: N
Last Update Date..: 00/00/00
Enter PF1=Help

Y = ON
Y = ON

Time..: 00:00:00

N = OFF
N = OFF
User..: XXX

PF3=Exit PF4=Prev GBL
PF10=Updt

Function Key Descriptions
Note: Standard function keys, such as PF1=Help, PF3=Exit,
PF7=Bwd, PF8=Fwd, PF12=Cancel, and
PF15=Logoff, as well as the Enter key, are defined in
Chapter 1.
PF4=Prev GBL

Displays the Global Parameter Maint-5 screen.

PF10=Updt

Updates the changed global parameter records.

Field Descriptions
Jump Code
A 10-position alphabetic or numeric field containing the jump code for this screen. A
screen’s jump code is displayed in the Jump Code field for that screen.
To jump to another screen, press Home and type the jump code of the screen to which you
want to jump. Then, press Enter.
See Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” for further information on using jump codes.
Inbound/Outbound (protected)
This field identifies which global parameter record is being displayed. Valid values are:
I
O

5 - 96

=
=

Inbound
Outbound

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F

The Administration Subsystem

EDIFACT/TRADACOMS Options
Use STX Qualifier
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the first two
positions of the sender control number (SNRF) as a Qualifier. The global parameter
equivalent is USE STX QUALIFIER. Valid values are:
Y

=

N

=

Use the first two positions of the sender control number as the
Qualifier for the partner lookup.
Do not active this feature. This is the default value.

Error Rejection (Inbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to use the Partner Error
Rejection feature for TRADACOMS documents. If an error occurs, the error that
generated the message, as well as the entire Interchange is rejected. The global parameter
equivalent is PARTNER ERROR CONTROL – TRADACOMS. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

T

=

Use the partner error rejection for non-TRADACOMS.
Do not activate error rejection for TRADACOMS. This is the
default value.
Use partner error rejection for TRADACOMS.

Delete Optional Blanks (Outbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to remove optional
elements that contain spaces. The global parameter equivalent is DELETE OPTIONAL
BLANK ELEMENTS. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Remove blank optional elements
Do not activate the feature. This is the default value.

Delete All Blanks (Outbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to remove all elements
that contain spaces. The global parameter equivalent is DELETE ALL BLANK
ELEMENTS. Valid values are:
Y
=
space =

Remove all blank elements
Do not activate this feature. This is the default value.

Add On Product Options
Examiner Tracking (Inbound Only)
Not used.
Viewpoint Track Output Files (Outbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate whether to write Viewpoint User
Tracking records to the output file. The global parameter equivalent is TRACK OUTPUT
FILES. Valid values are:
Y
N

=

Write Tracking records to output file for Sterling
Gentran:Viewpoint
=
Feature is not active. This is the default value.

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 97

The Administration Subsystem

Global Parameter Maint 6 Screen EDIM225/EDIM22F

Plus Will Assign Batch # (Outbound Only)
A 1-position alphabetic flag that enables you to indicate that the outbound Editor is not to
assign the communications batch number for the $$ADD card. A batch number is
assigned during the STOUTL – Add process. The global parameter equivalent is PLUS
ASSIGNS BATCH NUMBER. Valid values are:
Y
N

=
=

Assign a batch number by STOUTL-Add
Outbound Editor assigns a batch number. This is the default
value.

Last Update Date
Displays the last date the record was updated.
Time
Displays the last time the record was updated.
User
Displays the initials of the user who last updated the record.

5 - 98

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

Partner Migration Menu EDIY100

The Administration Subsystem

Partner Migration Menu

EDIY100

Purpose
The Partner Migration Menu (EDIY100) contains seven menu options that you can use to identify,
and then migrate partner profiles from Partner/Qualifier mode to Relationship mode.
See Chapter 7, “Migrating to Relationship Processing Mode,” in the IBM® Sterling
Gentran:Basic® for z/OS® Release 6.6 Technical Reference Guide for more information.

How to Access
Access the Partner Migration Menu in either of the following ways:
•

From the Administrative Main Menu, type 5 in the Selection field to select
Relationship Conversion and press Enter.

•

Type 4.5 in the Jump Code field of any screen and press Enter.

Menu Example
The following example illustrates the Partner Migration Menu.
EDIY100 4.5_______

PARTNER MIGRATION MENU

XXX

06/01/2011
12:00:00

Type the number of your selection below and press ENTER, or
press the PF3 key to Exit.
_ 1.

Enter PF1=Help

User Selection

2.

User Maintenance

3.

Partner Selection

4.

Relationship Maintenance

5.

Data Translation Table Directory

6.

Data Table Migration Selection

7.

Data Table Migration Maintenance
PF3=Exit

IBM Sterling Gentran:Basic for z/OS Release 6.6 User Guide

5 - 99

The Administration Subsystem

Partner Migration Menu EDIY100

Menu Options
The following table describes the options on the Partner Migration Menu.
Menu Option

Description

1.

User Selection

Lists Partner IDs for the user portion of user/partner
relationships.

2.

User Maintenance

Enables you to maintain the Partners IDs previously
identified as users.

3.

Partner Selection

Lists Partner IDs for the partner portion of user/partner
relationships.

4.

Relationship
Maintenance

Enables you to maintain previously identified user/partner
relationships.

5.

Data Translation
Table Directory

Enables you to review partner-specific data translation
tables.

6.

Data Table
Migration
Selection

Enables you to update partner information for partnerspecific d